Disclaimer

All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.

Internal use only

 Thank you
you for
for buying Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi-
cles further.
Before you rst drive o , read this Owner's Man-
ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operat- introduce changes in the following areas:
ing lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions R design
and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Dis- R equipment
regarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle
R technical features
or injury to people.
The standard equipment and product description The following documents are integral parts of the
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol- vehicle:
lowing factors: R Digital Owner's Manual
R model R printed Owner's Manual
R order R service booklet
R national version R equipment-dependent supplements
R availability R supplementary documents

Your vehicle may therefore di er, in individual Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times.
cases, from that shown in the descriptions and Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or
illustrations. passed on in the event of sale or rental.
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a
le -hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the layout of car parts and control elements
di ers accordingly. 2135843121Z102

2135843121Z102
2 Contents

Quali ed specialist workshop ........................ 37 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 94

Symbols .......................................................... 5 Vehicle registration ....................................... 37 Roller sunblinds ............................................. 98
Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 37 Anti-the protection ...................................... 99
At a glance ...................................................... 6 Information on the REACH regulation ............. 38
Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Notes for persons with electronic medical
aids .............................................................. 38 Seats and stowing
stowing ....................................... 103
Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) ................................. 10 Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 103
Indicator and warning lamps .......................... 12 Implied warranty ........................................... 39
QR code for rescue card ............................... 39 Seats .......................................................... 104
Overhead control panel ................................. 14 Steering wheel ............................................ 113
Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 16 Data storage ................................................. 39
Copyright ...................................................... 42 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 115
Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 18 Memory function ......................................... 116
Stowage areas ............................................ 118
Digital
Digit al Owner's Manual ................................. 20 Occupant safety
safety ............................................ 43 Sockets ....................................................... 129
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 20 Restraint system ........................................... 43 Wireless charging of the mobile phone
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 21 Seat belts ..................................................... 45 and connection with the exterior aerial ........ 130
Airbags ......................................................... 50 Fitting and removing the oor mats ............. 132
PRE-SAFE® system ........................................ 56
General
Gener al notes
notes ............................................... 23 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... 58
Protection of the environment ....................... 23 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 77 Light and sight ............................................ 134
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .................... 23 Exterior lighting ........................................... 134
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ 24 Interior lighting ............................................ 142
Owner's Manual ............................................ 25 Opening and closing ...................................... 78 Windscreen wipers and windscreen
Operating safety ............................................ 25 Key ............................................................... 78 washer system ............................................ 144
Declarations of conformity and notes on Doors ............................................................ 81 Mirrors ........................................................ 146
driving in di erent countries .......................... 28 Boot .............................................................. 86 Area permeable to radio waves on the
Diagnostics connection ................................. 35 Side windows ................................................ 91 windscreen ................................................. 149
 Contents 3

Infrared-re ective windscreen function ........ 149

Instrument
Instr ument display
display and on-board
on-board com- MBUX multimedia systemsystem ............................ 311
puter
puter ........................................................... 281 Overview and operation ............................... 311
Climate control
Climate control ........................................... 150 Notes on the instrument display and on- System settings .......................................... 321
Overview of climate control systems ............ 150 board computer .......................................... 281 Plug-in hybrid settings ................................. 326
Operating the climate control system .......... 151 Overview of instrument display .................... 282 Navigation ................................................... 327
Overview of buttons on the steering wheel ... 283 Telephone ................................................... 335
Operating the on-board computer ................ 283 Mercedes me app ....................................... 338
Driving and parking
Driving parking ..................................... 164 Function of the power meter (plug-in Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... 347
Driving ........................................................ 164 hybrid) ........................................................ 285 Radio, media & TV ....................................... 351
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 183 Function of the electric motor power Sound settings ............................................ 357
Automatic transmission ............................... 186 availability display (plug-in hybrid) ................ 285
Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 190 Displaying the power meter (plug-in
Refuelling .................................................... 190 hybrid) ........................................................ 286 Maintenance
Maintenance and care
care ................................. 359
Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in Overview of displays on the instrument ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 359
hybrid) ........................................................ 196 display ........................................................ 286 Engine compartment ................................... 360
Parking ....................................................... 208 Head-up display .......................................... 287 Cleaning and care ....................................... 367
Driving and driving safety systems ............... 216
Trailer hitch ................................................. 272
Bicycle rack function ................................... 278 LINGUATR
LINGUA TRONIC
ONIC ........................................... 290 Breakdo
Br eakdown
wn assistance
assistance ................................. 374
Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 280 Notes on operating safety ........................... 290 Emergency .................................................. 374
Operation .................................................... 290 Flat tyre ...................................................... 376
Using LINGUATRONIC e ectively ................. 292 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 381
Essential voice commands .......................... 293 Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 387
Electrical fuses ............................................ 392
4 Contents

Wheels and tyrestyres ......................................... 395 Indexx .......................................................... 516

Inde
Notes on noise or unusual handling char-
acteristics ................................................... 395
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tyres ........................................................... 395
Notes on snow chains ................................. 395
Tyre pressure .............................................. 396
Wheel change ............................................. 400
Emergency spare wheel ............................... 410

Tec
echnical
hnical data
data ............................................. 412
Notes on technical data .............................. 412
On-board electronics ................................... 412
Regulatory radio identi cation and notes ..... 414
Vehicle identi cation plate, VIN and
engine number overview .............................. 415
Operating uids ........................................... 417
Vehicle data ................................................ 427
Trailer hitch ................................................. 429

Displayy messages
Displa messages and war warning/indicat
ning/indicator or
lamps .......................................................... 433
lamps
Display messages ........................................ 433
Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 499
 Symbols 5

In this Owner's Manual, you will nd the following # Observe notes on material damage.
symbols:
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or
& DAN
ANGER
GER Danger due to not observing the further information that could be helpful to
warning notices you.
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- # Instruction
ards that may endanger your health or life, or (/ page) Further information on a topic
the health or life of others.
# Observe the warning notices.
Display Display eld in the Instrument Dis-
play/media display
4 Highest menu level, which is to be
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental selected in the multimedia system
damage due to failure to observe environ-
mental notes 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system
Environmental notes include information on
* Indicates a cause
environmentally responsible behaviour or envi-
ronmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure

to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks
which may lead to your vehicle being dam-
aged.
6 At a glance – Cockpit
 At a glance – Cockpit 7

1 Steering wheel gearshi paddles → 188 G è ECO start/stop function → 176

2 Combination switch → 136 H c Active Parking Assist → 266
3 Instrument display → 282 I É Sets the vehicle level → 251
4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 186 J DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 184
5 Media display → 311 K PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 54
6 Start/stop button → 168 L Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 283
7 Calls up MBUX multimedia system applications → 314 M Adjusts the steering wheel manually → 113
8 Climate control systems → 151 N Adjusts the steering wheel electrically → 114
9 Glove compartment → 121 ý Switches the steering wheel heater → 115
A £ Hazard warning light system → 136 on/o
B Stowage compartment → 121 O Control panel:
→ On-board computer → 283
C Touchpad 314
→ Cruise control or variable limiter → 226
D 8 Controller for volume and switching 311
sound on/o I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 230
E Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system → 311 P Diagnostics connection → 35
on/o
Q Opens the bonnet → 360
F D Rear-window roller sunblind → 99
8 At a glance – Cockpit

R ! Electric parking brake → 213 S Light switch → 134

10 At a glance – Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid)

Le -hand-drive vehicles
 At a glance – Cockpit (Plug-in-Hybrid) 11

1 Instrument display: 3 ! Sets pre-entry climate control for depar- → 157

→ ture time
õ Operational readiness 281
4 & Switches immediate pre-entry climate → 157
Power availability display → 285
control on/o
Power meter → 285 5 DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 183
Trip computer → 281 6 ° Haptic accelerator pedal → 182
ECO Assist → 177
7 q Reduces recuperation → 179
2 Media display:
8 ± Increases recuperation → 179
Plug-in hybrid settings → 326
9 6 Depressurises the fuel tank → 190
Energy ow display → 326
12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps

Instrument display
 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 13

1 #! Turn signal lights → 136 C # Electrical fault → 505

2 ï Trailer hitch → 503 D Ù Electric power steering → 503
3 6 Restraint system → 501 E ! ABS → 511
4 å ESP® OFF → 511 F h Tyre pressure monitoring system → 514
÷ ESP® → 511 G % Diesel engine: preglow
5 R Rear fog light → 135 H 8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location → 505
indicator
6 K High beam → 136
I Fuel level → 282
L Low beam → 134
J ! Electric parking brake (red) → 508
T Standing lights → 134
K J Brakes (red) → 508
7 ÿ Coolant temperature → 505
L ü Seat belt → 501
8 Coolant temperature display → 282
M ; Engine diagnostics → 505
9 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 508
N ä Suspension → 510
A J Brakes (yellow) → 508
B L Distance warning → 510
14 At a glance – Overhead control panel
 At a glance – Overhead control panel 15

1 Sun visors 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o → 142

2 p Switches the le -hand reading lamp → 142 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 142
on/o on/o
3 S Switches the automatic interior lighting → 142 9 Spectacles compartment
control on/o A 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun- → 94
4 G SOS button → 338 roof
5 c Switches the front interior lighting on/o → 142 3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind → 94
6 ; me button → 338 B Inside rearview mirror → 147
16 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment
 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 17

1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 107 C Opens the door → 82

2 w Switches the seat heating on/o → 112 D V Operates the memory function → 117
3 s Switches the seat ventilation on/o → 113 E Adjusts the head restraints → 108
4 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 82 F Con gures the seat settings → 109
5 p Opens/closes the boot lid → 86 G Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position → 106
6 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 146 H Adjusts the seat cushion length → 106
7 W Opens/closes the right side window → 91 I Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 107
8 W Opens/closes the rear right side window → 91 J Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 106
9 T Child safety lock for the rear side win- → 77 K Adjusts the seat height → 106
dows L Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 106
A W Opens/closes the rear le side window → 91
B W Opens/closes the le side window → 91
18 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 19

1 B-pillar with: 8 Fire extinguisher → 375

QR code for accessing the rescue card → 39 9 Fuel ller ap with:
2 Safety vests → 374 information label on fuel type → 190
3 ; me button → 338 information label on tyre pressure → 397
G SOS button → 338 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 39
4 To check and top up operating uids → 417 A TIREFIT kit → 378
Starting assistance → 385 B Tow-starting or towing away → 388
5 Tow-starting or towing away → 388 C First-aid kit (so sided) → 375
6 Flat tyre → 376 D Warning triangle → 374
7 £ Hazard warning light system → 136
20 Digital Owner's Manual

Calling up the
the Digital
Digital Owner's Manual R Tips: nd information that prepares you for 4 Contents section
certain everyday situations with your vehicle. 5 Directions of movement of contents section
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Owner's Manual
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle 6 Menu
functions.
Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual,
R Messages: receive additional information such as warning notes, can be expanded and col-
about the messages in the Instrument Display. lapsed.
R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally Additional methods
methods of calling up the
the Digital
Digital Own-
saved bookmarks. er's Manual:
R Language: select the language for the Digital Direct
Dir ect access: open the required content in the
Owner's Manual. Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding
an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func-

tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi-
media system.
# Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Owner's Manual:
R Search: search for keywords in order to nd
quick answers to questions about the opera-
tion of the vehicle. 1 Back
R Quick start: here is where you nd the rst 2 Adds bookmarks Instrument
Instr ument Display:
Display: call up brief information as
steps towards setting up your vehicle. 3 Picture display messages in the instrument cluster
 Digital Owner's Manual 21

LINGUATR
LINGUA TRONIC:
ONIC: call up via the voice control sys- R Search: search for keywords in order to nd
tem quick answers to questions about the opera-
For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is tion of the vehicle.
deactivated while driving. R Quick start: here is where you nd the rst
steps towards setting up your vehicle.
Calling up the
the Digital
Digital Owner's Manual
R Tips: nd information that prepares you for
certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
Multimedia system:
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle
4 © 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual 5 Õ functions.
R Messages: receive additional information 1 Back
about the messages in the Instrument Display. 2 Adds bookmarks
R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally 3 Picture
saved bookmarks. 4 Contents section
R Language: select the language for the Digital 5 Directions of movement of contents section
Owner's Manual. 6 Menu
Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual,
such as warning notes, can be expanded and col-
lapsed.
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func-
tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi- Additional methods
methods of calling up the
the Digital
Digital Own-
media system. er's Manual:
# Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Owner's Manual:
22 Digital Owner's Manual

Direct
Dir ect access: open the required content in the
Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding
an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

Instr
Ins trument
ument Display:
Display: call up brief information as
display messages in the instrument cluster
LINGUA
LIN GUATR
TRONIC:
ONIC: call up via the voice control sys-
tem
For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is
deactivated while driving.
 General notes 23

Protection
Protection of the
the envir
environment
onment # Always have maintenance work carried Plug-in hybr
hybrid
id
out at a quali ed specialist workshop.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental + ENVIRONMENT
ENVIR ONMENTAL AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and Per
ersonal
sonal driving
driving sty
style:
le: pollution caused by irresponsible disposal
personal driving style # Do not depress the accelerator pedal
of the high-voltage battery
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is when starting the engine. A high-voltage battery contains materials
directly related to the way you operate the # Do not warm up the vehicle while sta- which are harmful to the environment.
vehicle. tionary. # Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable at a quali ed specialist workshop.
responsible manner to help protect the envi- distance from the vehicle in front.
ronment. Please observe the following recom- # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
mendations on operating conditions and per- braking. Tak
ake-bac
e-backk of end-of-life
end-of-life vehicles
vehicles
sonal driving style. # Change gear in good time and use each EU countries
countries only:
Operating
Oper ating conditions: gear only up to Ô of its maximum Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor- engine speed. vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
rect. # Switch o the vehicle in stationary traf-
accordance with the European Union (EU) End-of-
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop Life Vehicles Directive.
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no lon- function. A network of vehicle take-back points and dis-
ger need them). # Drive in a fuel-e cient manner. Observe
mantlers has been established for you to return
# Adhere to the service intervals. the ECO display for an economical driv- your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ing style. points free of charge. This makes an important
ute to environmental protection. contribution to closing the recycling circle and
conserving resources.
24 General notes

For further information about the recycling and * NOTE Impairment of the operating e - You could jeopardise the operating safety of your
disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back ciency of the restraint systems from vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well
conditions, please visit the national installing accessory parts or from repairs as accessories relevant to safety which have not
Mercedes-Benz website for your country. or welding been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant
systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction.
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of
Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz GenuinePar
GenuineParts
ts control units and sensors for the restraint sys- equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and acces-
tems, may be installed in the following areas sory parts that have been speci cally approved
+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental of your vehicle: for your vehicle model.
damage caused by not using recycled R Doors
reconditioned components Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver-
R Door pillars sion parts and accessory parts that have been
Mercedes‑Benz AG o ers recycled recondi- R Door sills
speci cally approved for your vehicle model for
tioned components and parts with the same their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
quality as new parts. The same entitlement R Seats ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
from the implied warranty is valid as for new R Cockpit unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
parts. R Instrument cluster therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of
# Recycled reconditioned components and such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if
R Centre console
parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. they have been o cially approved or independ-
R Lateral roof frame ently approved by a testing centre.
# Do not install accessory parts such as Certain parts are only o cially approved for
audio systems in these areas. installation or modi cation if they comply with
legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine-
# Do not carry out repairs or welding. Parts meet the approval requirements. The use of
# Have accessory parts retro tted at a non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's
quali ed specialist workshop. general operating permit.
 General notes 25

This is the case in the following situations: R The models and the standard and special Operating
Oper ating safety
safety
R The vehicle type is di erent from that for equipment, which will only be available at a
which the vehicle's general operating permit later date. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
was granted. Note that your vehicle may not be tted with all tions or system failure
R Other road users could be endangered. features described. This is also the case for sys- In order to avoid malfunctions or system fail-
R The exhaust gas or noise level gets worse. tems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment ures:
on your vehicle may di er from that in the # Always have the speci ed service/main-
Always specify the vehicle identi cation number descriptions and illustrations.
(VIN) (/ page 415) when ordering Mercedes- tenance work as well as any necessary
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle repairs carried out at a quali ed special-
Benz GenuineParts. contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at ist workshop.
the time of delivery.
Owner's Manual Should you have any questions concerning equip- & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's ment and operation, please consult a Mercedes- to improper modi cations to electronic
Manual in the vehicle describe the following mod- Benz Service Centre. components
els and the standard and special equipment for The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supple- Modi cations to electronic components, their
your vehicle: mentary documents and Service Booklet are so ware or wiring can impair their functional-
R The models and the standard and special important documents and should be kept in the ity and/or the functionality of other networked
equipment available at the time of this Own- vehicle. components or safety-relevant systems.
er's Manual going to press. This can endanger the vehicle's operating
R The models and the standard and special safety.
equipment only available in certain countries. # You must not tamper with wiring, elec-
tronic components, or their so ware.
26 General notes

# Always have work on electrical and elec- * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv- ignite if they come into contact with hot parts
tronic devices carried out at a quali ed ing too fast and due to impacts to the of the exhaust system.
specialist workshop. vehicle underbody or suspension compo- # Have the vehicle checked and repaired
nents immediately at a quali ed specialist
If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen- workshop.
eral operating permit is rendered invalid. In the following situations, in particular, there
is a risk of damage to the vehicle: or
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a # If driving safety is impaired while con-
"Technical data".
high kerb or an unpaved road tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
& WARNING Risk of re due to ammable R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obsta- the vehicle immediately, while paying
materials on hot parts of the exhaust sys- cle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole attention to road and tra c conditions,
tem and contact a quali ed specialist work-
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or
shop.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or suspension components
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with In situations such as these, damage to the Plug-in hybr
hybrid
id
hot parts of the exhaust system. body, underbody, suspension components, Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and an
# When driving on unpaved roads or o - wheels or tyres may not be visible. Compo- electric motor. The energy supply for operating
road, regularly check the vehicle under- nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly the vehicle electrically is provided by the high-
side. fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon- voltage on-board electrical system.
# Remove trapped plants or other amma- ger absorb the resulting force as intended.
ble material, in particular. If the underbody panelling is damaged, am-
# If there is damage, consult a quali ed mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs
specialist workshop immediately. can collect between the underbody and the
underbody panelling. These materials may
 General notes 27

& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death and re due to # Never touch damaged components of It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped
modi ed and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- with a sound generator, which serves as an acous-
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- tem. tic vehicle alerting system (AVAS).
tem # A er an accident, do not touch any com- Vehicles with
with a 48 V on-board
on-board electrical
electrical system
system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical ponents of the high-voltage on-board
system is under high voltage. If you modify electrical system. & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury by touching
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage # A er an accident, have the vehicle trans- damaged high-voltage components
on-board electrical system or touch damaged ported away. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys-
component parts, you may be electrocuted. In # Have the components of the high-voltage tem contain individual high-voltage compo-
addition, modi ed and/or damaged compo- on-board electrical system checked at a nents. These high-voltage components are
nents may cause a re. quali ed specialist workshop and under high voltage.
In the event of an accident or impact to the replaced if necessary. If you modify component parts of these high-
vehicle underbody, components of the high- voltage components or touch damaged com-
voltage electrical system may be damaged The components of the high-voltage on-board ponent parts, you may be electrocuted.
although the damage is not visible. electrical system are marked with yellow warning High voltage components may be damaged in
# Never make any modi cations to the stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board an accident, although the damage may not be
high-voltage on-board electrical system. electrical system are orange. visible.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its Vehicles with hybrid systems generate signi - # Never perform modi cations to compo-
high-voltage on-board electrical system cantly less noise when stationary and when being nent parts of high-voltage components.
components have been modi ed or dam- driven than vehicles with combustion engines.
# Never touch damaged component parts
aged. When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may of high-voltage components.
not be heard by other road users due to the signif-
# Never touch component parts of high-
icantly reduced noise generated.
voltage components a er an accident.
28 General notes

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system vehicle installed

installed radio
radio components
components
contain high voltage components. These compo-
nents are marked with a high voltage label: Only for
Only for EU and EFTA
EFTA countries
countries and countries
countries that
that
recognise the
the EU manufactur
manufacturer's
er's declaration
declaration of
confor
conformity:
mity:
You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Unit
nited
ed Kingdom only:

The following information applies to all wireless

components of the vehicle and of the information
systems and communication devices integrated in The following information applies to all wireless
the vehicle: components of the vehicle and of the information
All work on high voltage components must be car- The manufacturers of the wireless components systems and communication devices integrated in
ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle:
the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The manufacturers of the wireless components
The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all
Declarations
Declar ations of confor
conformity
mity and notes
notes on driving
driving are available at the following web address: wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
in di erent
erent countr
countries
ies
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ ply with the Radio Regulations 2017 directive. The
Electromagne
Electr omagnetictic compatibility
compatibility baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/ full texts of the declarations of conformity are
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle index.html available at the following web address:
components has been checked and certi ed https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/
according to the currently valid version of Regula- baix/cars/certi cates-of-conformity/en_GB/
tion UN R10. index.html
 General notes 29

Delaware Drive, Tongwell For Niger

Nigeria
ia only:
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
England
For Brazil
Brazil only:

Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful Connection and use of the radio communications
interference and must not cause interference in equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the
properly approved systems. Nigerian Communications Commission
For Jamaica only:
Importer
Import er All wireless vehicle components have received
Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited type approval from the SMA.
Delaware Drive, Tongwell For Moldova
Moldova only:
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA Import
Importer
er
England S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova
Import
Importer
er of Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz replacement
replacement parts
par ts mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2
Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics
30 General notes

For Russia
Russia only: For Turke
Turkeyy only: radios. You can obtain further information from a
Import
Importer
er Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler Import
Importer
er
A.Ş. Genel Merkez PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”
Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1 Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2
34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul 01004 Kyiv
Ukraine
Ukr aine only: Ukraine
Wir
ireless
eless applications in the
the vehicle
vehicle
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com-
munication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of
The manufacturers of the wireless components the following automotive radio applications.
installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all
wireless components installed in the vehicle com- The manufacturers of the wireless components
ply with the technical regulations for two-way installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the
radios. You can obtain further information from a wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
Mercedes-Benz service centre. ply with the technical regulations for two-way

Wir
ireless
eless applications in the
the vehicle
vehicle

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Tr
Transmission
ansmission output/magnetic
output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
 General notes 31

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Transmission output/magnetic
Transmission output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic eld
strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119
kHz
Near- eld communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
Pressure Monitoring
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Opener
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Opener
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz
EIRP peak
32 General notes

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Tr
Transmission
ansmission output/magnetic
output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Carsharing Module NFC: NFC:
13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
Bluetooth®:
Bluetooth ooth®:
Bluetooth
Bluet
2402–2480 MHz ≤ +4 dBm (class 2)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Bluetooth®:
Bluetooth Bluetooth®:
Bluetooth
2400–2483.5 MHz -0.8 dBm
WLAN
WL AN 2.4 GHZ: WLAN
WL AN 2.4 GHZ:
2400–2483.5 MHz 14.5 dBm
WLAN
WL AN 5 GHz: WLAN
WL AN 5 GHz:
5150–5250 MHz 20.5 dBm
5725–5875 MHz 13.3 dBm
Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) E-GSM (900 MHz) +33 dBm
GSM (1800 MHz) +30 dBm
UMTS (Band I, III, VIII) +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB)
LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28) +23 dBm (±2 dB)
 General notes 33

Tec
echnology
hnology Frequency
Frequency range
range Transmission output/magnetic
Transmission output/magnetic eld str
trength
ength
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
3)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
B19, B21, B28, Class 3)
LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only

Information
Infor mation about the
the speci c absorp
absorption
tion rate
rate The values were determined and tested in accord- regarding the indication of the speci c absorption
For France only: ance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.

Infor
Information
mation about the
the speci c absorp
absorption
tion rate
rate

Vehicle component
component (designation in SAR value
value in W/kg Applicable limit value
value
accordance
accor dance with
with EU DoC)
Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg
Hermes 2.1 < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
34 General notes

Vehicle component
component (designation in SAR value
value in W/kg Applicable limit value
value
accordance
accor dance with
with EU DoC)
Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
RAMSES 1.0 and 1.1 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg

Jack 747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, Jack

Copy and translation of the original declaration of The Czech Republic Type, Number:
conformity: ID No.: 64-387-5933 A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18
EC declaration
declaration of confor
conformity
mity VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933 B) A 240 580 00 18
1. herewith declares under our sole responsibility C) A 639 580 02 18
The undersigned, representing that the product: D) A 639 580 03 18
Manufacturer: 2. a) E) A 910 580 00 00
BRANO a.s. Name: F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00
 General notes 35

Year of manufacture: 2020 5. DIN EN 55014-1: 2012

Complies with all relevant provisions 05.10.2020 DIN EN 55014-2: 2016
Directive No. 2006/42/EC Date Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH
b) Engineer Petr Petr Address: O enbacher Landstrasse 8, 63456
Description and purpose of use: [Signature] Hanau
Car jack is intended solely for li ing of the con- Director of division ZZ Authorised representative: IMS dept.
crete car, in accordance with the instruction label Date: December 2019
on the car jack. Signature: IMS-AE, IMS-AE-L
TIREFIT kit
3.
Copy and translation of the original declaration of
References of harmonized and other standards or conformity: Diagnostics
Diagnos tics connection
speci cations
EC declaration
declaration of confor
conformity
mity The diagnostics connection is a technical inter-
ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL
In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the
8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL
context of repair and maintenance work or for
8451.15, MBN 10435, We hereby declare that the product reading out vehicle data by a specialist workshop.
Technical documentation of the product is stored Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Diagnostic devices should therefore only be con-
at the premise of the manufacturer. The person Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 - nected by a quali ed specialist workshop.
responsible for assembling the technical docu- IBK-LK2
mentation of the product: Head of the Technical & WARNING Risk of accident due to con-
Department Brano a.s. MB part no.: A 000 583 8200
necting devices to the diagnostics con-
4. complies with the following relevant regulations: nection
Hradec nad Moravicí 2014/30/EU If you connect devices to the diagnostics con-
Place Applied harmonised standards, in particular: nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle
36 General notes

systems and operating safety may be * NOTE Battery discharging from using devi-
impaired. ces connected to the diagnostics connec-
# For safety reasons, we recommend that tion
you only use and connect products Using devices at the diagnostics connection
approved by your Mercedes-Benz service drains the battery.
centre.
# Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the bat-

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis-
tance.
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. Please also note the information about the 12 V
This jeopardises the operating and road safety battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving
of the vehicle. and Parking" chapter (/ page 172).
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's Connecting and using another device with the
footwell. diagnostics connection can have the following
# Always t the oor mats securely and as e ects:
prescribed in order to ensure that there R malfunctions in the vehicle system
is always su cient room for the pedals. R permanent damage to vehicle components
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another. Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions
for this matter.
 General notes 37

Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos- R Vehicles with

with 48 V on-board
on-board electrical
electrical system:
system: It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring work on the high-voltage component of the 48 Mercedes-Benz service centre.
information being reset, for example. This may V on-board electrical system Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about
lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require- R Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id: work on the hybrid system any change in address or vehicle ownership. You
ments of the next emissions inspection during the can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre,
main inspection. Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz for example.
service centre.

Quali ed specialis
specialistt work
workshop
shop Correct
Corr ect use of the
the vehicle
vehicle
A quali ed specialist workshop has the necessary Vehicle regis
registr
tration
ation
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others
special skills, tools and quali cations to correctly Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave
carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. carry out technical inspections on certain vehi- warning stickers in position.
This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is
improved as a result of the inspection. Observe the following information in particular
Always have the following work carried out on when driving your vehicle:
your vehicle at a quali ed specialist workshop: Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle
R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehi-
R Safety-relevant works checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration
data. cle-speci c supplements and further supple-
R Service and maintenance work mentary documents
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been
R Repair work R technical data for the vehicle
registered in your name in the following cases:
R Modi cations as well as installations and con- R if your vehicle was not purchased at an author- R tra c rules and regulations
versions ised specialist dealer. R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
R Work on electronic components R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a vehicles
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
38 General notes

Information
Infor mation on the
the REACH
REACH regulation
regulation the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a
medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. distance of at least an arm's length between the
EU and EFTA
EFTA countries
countries only: medical aid and the following components:
In addition, there are components installed in the
the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of R the power supply equipment
1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup- the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par
ply information about substances of very high This includes charging stations in the form of a
with permanent magnets. These elds can be wallbox or a public charging point, for exam-
concern (SVHCs). found, for example, in the area around the multi- ple.
Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowl- media and sound system or also in the area of the
R vehicle components carrying live voltage
edge to prevent these SVHCs from being used seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.
and to enable customers to safely handle these For this reason, the following can occur in isolated This includes the charging cable and the
substances. There are SVHCs known to cases, depending on the aids used: charging control box, for example.
Mercedes‑Benz AG, according to supplier informa-
tion and internal product information, found in R Medical aids malfunctioning Only have repairs and maintenance work in the
individual components of this vehicle in quantities R Adverse health e ects area of the following components carried out by a
of over 0.1 percent by weight. quali ed specialist workshop:
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac- R vehicle components carrying live voltage
Further information can be obtained at the follow- turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the
ing addresses: R transmission aerials
device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there
R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/ is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil- R multimedia system and sound system
R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/ ity of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a
Benz AG recommends using only few electrical
quali ed specialist workshop.
vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance
Notes for
for persons
persons with
with electronic
electronic medical aids from the components.
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully Plug-in hybr
hybrid
id
developing vehicle systems, completely rule out
 General notes 39

Implied
Implied warr
warranty
anty Further information can be obtained at https:// Per
ersonal
sonal data
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Every vehicle is identi ed by a unique vehicle
* NOTE
NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from identi cation number. Depending on the country,
violation of these operating instructions. this vehicle identi cation number can be used by,
Data stor
Data storage
age for example, governmental authorities to deter-
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation Dataa processing
Dat processing in the
the vehicle
vehicle mine the identity of the owner. There are other
of these operating instructions. possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle
This damage is not covered either by the Electronic control
Electronic control units to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the Electronic control units are tted in your vehicle. plate number.
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Control units process data which, for example,
they receive from vehicle sensors, generate them- Therefore, data generated or processed by control
# Follow the instructions in these operat-
selves or exchange between themselves. Some units may be attributable to a person or, under
ing instructions on proper operation of control units are required for the safe operation of certain conditions, become attributable to a per-
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi- your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such son. Depending on which vehicle data are availa-
cle damage. as driver assistance systems, while others enable ble, it may be possible to make inferences about,
convenience or infotainment functions. for example, your driving behaviour, your location,
your route or your use patterns.
The following provides you with general informa-
QR code for
for rescue
rescue card Legal req
Legal requir
uirements
ements reg
regar
arding
ding the
the disclosure
disclosure of
tion regarding data processing in the vehicle.
QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on Additional information regarding exactly which data
the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of data in your vehicle are collected, saved and If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in
an accident, rescue services can use the QR code transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, individual cases, legally obliged to provide govern-
to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for can be found in the information directly related to mental entities, upon request and to the extent
your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the the functional characteristics in question in their required, data stored by the manufacturer. For
most important information about your vehicle in respective operating instructions. This information example, this may be the case during the investi-
a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric is also available online and, depending on the gation of a criminal o ence.
lines. vehicle equipment, digitally.
40 General notes

Governmental entities are themselves, in individ- ing state, component loads, maintenance require- down services. The same is true in the case of
ual cases and within the applicable legal frame- ments and technical events or faults. warranty claims and quality assurance measures.
work, authorised to read out data from the vehi- Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- In general, the readout is performed via the legally
cle. In the case of an accident, information that ing data are stored: prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in
can help with an investigation can, therefore, be the vehicle. The operational data that are read out
R operating status of system components, such
taken from the airbag control unit, for example. document technical states of the vehicle or of
as ll levels, tyre pressure or battery status
Operational data
Operational data in the
the vehicle
vehicle individual components and assist in the diagnosis
R malfunctions or faults in important system
This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obliga-
components, such as lights or brakes tions and quality improvement. To that end, these
which have been processed by control units.
R system reactions in special driving situations, data, in particular information about component
This includes the following data, for example: such as airbag deployment or the intervention loads, technical events, malfunctions and other
R vehicle status information such as the speed, of stability control systems faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle
longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, R information on events leading to vehicle dam- identi cation number to the manufacturer. Fur-
number of wheel revolutions or the fastened age thermore, the manufacturer is subject to product
seat belts display liability. For this reason the manufacturer also
R ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain In certain cases, it may be required to store data uses operational data from the vehicle, for exam-
sensor or distance sensor that would have otherwise been used only tempo- ple, for recalls. These data can also be used to
rarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has examine the customer's warranty and guarantee
Generally, the use of these data is temporary; detected a malfunction, for example. claims.
they will not be stored beyond the period of oper- If you use services, such as repair services and Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
ation and will only be processed within the vehicle maintenance work, stored operational data as service outlet or at your request as part of repair
itself. Control units o en contain data memories well as the vehicle identi cation number can be or maintenance work.
for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits read out and used. They can be read out by
the temporary or permanent documentation of service network employees, such as workshops
technical information about the vehicle's operat- and manufacturers or third parties, such as break-
 General notes 41

Convenience and infot

Convenience infotainment
ainment functions These data for convenience and infotainment This integration allows the use of selected smart-
You can store convenience settings and individual functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or phone apps, such as navigation or music player
settings in the vehicle and change or reset them they may be located on a device which you have apps. There is no further interaction between the
at any time. connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered data is not directly accessible. The type of addi-
includes the following settings, for example: these data yourself, you can delete them at any tional data processing is determined by the pro-
time. vider of the app being used. Which settings you
R seat and steering wheel positions
This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third can make, if any, depends on the speci c app and
R suspension and climate control settings the operating system of your smartphone.
parties only at your request. This applies, in par-
R individual settings, such as interior lighting ticular, when you use online services in accord-
ance with the settings that you have selected. Online services
ser vices
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
import data into vehicle infotainment functions Smartphone
Smar tphone integr
integration
ation (e.g. Android
Android Aut
Autoo or Wirireless
eless netw
networ
orkk connection
yourself. Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle has a wireless network connection,
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can it enables data to be exchanged between your
includes the following data, for example: connect your smartphone or another mobile end vehicle and additional systems. The wireless net-
R multimedia data, such as music, lms or pho- device to the vehicle. You can then control them work connection is made possible by the vehicle's
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia by means of the control elements integrated in own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end
system the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart- device that you have brought into the vehicle, for
phone can be output via the multimedia system. example, a smartphone. Online functions can be
R address book data for use in connection with
Certain information is simultaneously transferred used via the wireless network connection. This
an integrated hands-free system or an integra- to your smartphone. Depending on the type and includes online services and applications/apps
ted navigation system integration, this includes position data, day/night provided to you by the manufacturer or by other
R entered navigation destinations mode and other general vehicle statuses. For providers.
R data about the use of Internet services more information please consult the Owner's
Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.
42 General notes

Manufacturer's
Manufactur er's services
ser vices use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no Copyr
Cop yright
ight
Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the in uence on the content exchanged.
individual functions are described by the manu- Information on licences for free and open-source
For this reason, when services are provided by so ware used in your vehicle can be found on the
facturer in a suitable place, for example, in the third parties, please ask the service provider in
Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's web- data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and
question for information about the type, extent with updates on the following website:
site, where the relevant data protection informa- and purpose of the collection and use of personal
tion is also given. Personal data may be used for data. https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
the provision of online services. Data are
exchanged via a secure connection, such as the
manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any per- Dataa protection
Dat protection rights
rights
sonal data which are collected, processed and Depending on your country or the equipment and
used, other than for the provision of services, is range of functions of your vehicle as well as the
done so exclusively on the basis of legal permis- services you use and the services on o er, you
sion. This is the case, for example, for a legally are entitled to di erent data protection rights.
prescribed emergency call system, a contractual Further information on data protection and your
agreement or when consent has been given. data protection rights can either be found on the
You can have services and functions, some of manufacturer's website or you will receive this
which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva- information as part of the various services and
ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and service o ers. There you will also nd the contact
services, such as an emergency call system. information for the manufacturer and its data pro-
tection o cers.
Third party
Third par ty services
ser vices
If you use online services from other providers At a workshop, for example, with the support of a
(third parties), these services are the responsibil- specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have
ity of the provider in question and subject to that data read out which is stored only locally in the
provider's data protection conditions and terms of vehicle.
 Occupant safety 43

Res
estr
traint
aint system
system In order for the restraint system to provide the Reduced res
restr
traint
aint system
system protection
protection
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu-
Protection
Protection provided
provided by
by the
the res
restr
traint
aint system
system pant must observe the following information: & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
The restraint system includes the following com- R Fasten seat belts correctly. modi cations to the restraint system
ponents: R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected
R Seat belt system back against the seat backrest. as intended if alterations are made to the
R Airbags R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi- restraint system.
R Child restraint system ble. # Never alter the parts of the restraint sys-

R Child seat securing systems R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an tem.
additional restraint system suitable for # Never tamper with the wiring or any elec-
The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle Mercedes-Benz vehicles. tronic component parts or their so -
occupants from coming into contact with parts of ware.
the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In However, no system available today can com-
the event of an accident, the restraint system can pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom-
also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu- accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and modate a person with disabilities, contact a quali-
pants are subjected. airbag generally do not protect against objects ed specialist workshop.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro- penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also
not possible to completely rule out the risk of Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the aids which have been approved for your vehicle by
detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Mercedes-Benz.
and/or airbags supplement the protection o ered
by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners
and/or airbags are not deployed in every acci- Res
estr
traint
aint system
system functionality
dent. When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per-
formed, during which the 6 restraint system
44 Occupant safety

warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id: R Rear impact
few seconds a er the vehicle is started. The com- R Side impact
ponents of the restraint system are then func- & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to
tional. restraint system malfunctions R Rollover
Components in the restraint system may be The activation thresholds for the components of
Malfunctioning res
restr
traint
aint system
system activated unintentionally or not deploy as plan- the restraint system are determined based on the
ned in an accident. In the event of an acci- evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari-
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys- dent, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys- ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tem if: tem may not be deactivated as intended. tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does components of the restraint system must take
You may su er an electric shock if you touch place in good time at the start of the collision.
not light up when the vehicle is switched on the damaged components of the high-voltage
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights on-board electrical system. Factors which can only be seen and measured
up continuously or repeatedly during a journey # Have the restraint system checked and
a er a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do
All vehicles,
vehicles, excep
exceptt PLUG-IN
PLUG-IN HYBRID: repaired immediately at a quali ed spe- they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
cialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- # A er an accident, switch o the vehicle
The vehicle may be deformed signi cantly without
tions in the restraint system an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only
immediately. parts which are relatively easily deformed are
Components in the restraint system may be a ected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is
activated unintentionally or not deploy as not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed
Function of the
the res
restr
traint
aint system
system in an accident
intended in an accident. even though the vehicle su ers only minor defor-
# Have the restraint system checked and How the restraint system works is determined by mation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitu-
repaired immediately at a quali ed spe- the severity of the impact detected and the type dinal members are hit, this may result in su -
cialist workshop. of accident anticipated: ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration.
R Frontal impact
 Occupant safety 45

Depending on the detected deployment situation, & WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
the components of the restraint system can be components immediately or open the window in order to
activated or deployed independently of each prevent breathing di culties.
other: The airbag parts are hot a er an airbag has
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear
been deployed.
# Do not touch the airbag parts. Seat belts
impact, side impact, rollover
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal # Have a deployed airbag replaced at a Protection provided
Protection provided by
by the
the seat belt
impact quali ed specialist workshop as soon as Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
R Knee airbag: frontal impact
possible. starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
R Side airbag: side impact Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
impact a er an accident. Take this into account, particu- incorrectly fastened seat belt
R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact larly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an air-
bag deployed. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed perform its intended protective function.
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air-
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is amount of powder may also be released: can also cause injuries, for example, in the
occupied, make sure, both before and during the event of an accident or when braking or
R The bang will not generally a ect your hearing.
journey, that the status of the front passenger air- changing direction suddenly.
bag is correct (/ page 54). R In general, the powder released is not hazard- # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
ous to health but may cause short-term have their seat belts fastened correctly
breathing di culties to persons su ering from and are sitting properly.
asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
46 Occupant safety

Always observe the instructions about the correct R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- Limitations of the
Limitations the protection
protection provided
provided by
by the
the seat
driver's seat position and adjusting the seat ted, abrasive or fragile objects. belt
(/ page 103). R Only one person should use each seat belt at
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide any one time. Never allow babies and children & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the intended level of protection, each vehicle to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle incorrect seat position
occupant must observe the following information: occupant. The seat belt will not o er the intended level
R The seat belt must not be twisted and must t R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the of protection if you have not moved the seat
tightly and snugly across the body. seat belt is also being used by one of the vehi- backrest to an almost vertical position.
R The seat belt must be routed across the cle's occupants. Always observe the instruc- In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
centre of the shoulder and as low down across tions for loading the vehicle when securing and injure yourself.
the hips as possible. objects, luggage or loads (/ page 118). # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, ning your journey.
not touch your neck nor be routed under your are ever placed between a person and the # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
arm or behind your back. seat.
in an almost vertical position and that
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to the shoulder section of your seat belt is
coat. observe the instructions and safety notes on routed across the centre of your shoul-
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 59). der.
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul-
der section of the belt. Never route the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular
care with this.
 Occupant safety 47

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Make sure that the seat belts are undam-
additional restraint systems are not used damaged or modi ed seat belts aged, not worn and clean.
for persons with a smaller stature Seat belts cannot provide protection in the fol- # Always have the seat belts checked
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the lowing situations: immediately a er an accident at a quali-
seat belt correctly without a suitable addi- R the seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
ed specialist workshop.
tional restraint system. ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
# Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat
R the seat belt buckle is damaged or belts which have been approved for your vehicle
in a suitable restraint system. extremely dirty by Mercedes-Benz.
R modi cations have been made to the seat
& WARNING Danger of injury or death due belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
to blocked seat belt anchorage belt retractor deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
The restraint e ect of the seat belt is impaired Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
if objects between the front seat and the door an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. been deployed are no longer operational and
are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage are unable to perform their intended protec-
on the front seat. Modi ed or damaged seat belts could tear or tive function.
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
# Before starting a journey, make sure that # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
there are no objects between the front Modi ed seat belt tensioners could acciden- seat belt tensioners immediately
seat and the door. tally trigger or fail to function as intended. replaced at a quali ed specialist work-
# Never modify the seat belt system, for shop.
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,
seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
and seat belt retractor. vehicle towed to a quali ed specialist workshop
a er an accident.
48 Occupant safety

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the % A seat belt can only provide the best level of
seat belt protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the
notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 45).
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the seat * NOTE Deployment of components of the
mechanism. restraint system when the front passenger
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is
is fully retracted. buckled
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied
and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is
Fast
astening
ening and adjusting
adjusting seat belts engaged in the seat belt buckle, components
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa-
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can- rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat
not be pulled out any further. belt tensioner.
# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat
belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corre- % Observe the notes on stowage areas
sponding seat. (/ page 118).
Information on tting a child restraint system
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat belt height:
height: press and hold and on children travelling in the vehicle can
the belt guide release and slide seat belt out- be found in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-
let 3 into the desired position. tion (/ page 62).
# To engag
engagee the
the seat belt outlet:
outlet: let go of the
belt guide release and ensure that seat belt
outlet 3 locks into position.
 Occupant safety 49

Seat belt adjustment

adjustment function Seat belt war
warning
ning function for
for the
the driv
driver
er and front
front When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat
passenger
passenger belt status display informs you for a certain
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: a er a front seat belt
with PRE-SAFE amount of time which rear seat belt is not fas-
has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjust- The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru- tened.
ment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. pants must wear their seat belts correctly. You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt
status display using the back button on the le -
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt In addition, a warning tone may sound. hand side of the steering wheel (/ page 283).
adjustment function using the multimedia system As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten
(/ page 49). If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the
their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt
status display appears again.
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating seat belt adjustment
adjustment via Function of the
the rear
rear seat belt status
status display In addition, a warning tone may sound. In this
the multimedia system
system
The rear seat belt status display is only available case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be
Multimedia system: for certain countries. hidden using the back button on the le -hand side
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle of the steering wheel.
# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Releasing seat belts

# Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
50 Occupant safety

Airbags Potential protection provided by each airbag: When tting a child restraint system to the front
R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor-
Over
Overvie
view
w of airbags mation (/ page 73). Also, always observe the
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head
notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child
and ribcage restraint systems on the front passenger seat.
R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat
occupants Information
Infor mation on automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag
shutoo
shut
R Window airbag: head
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles indicator lamp is o . If the front passenger seat is
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. occupied, make sure, both before and during the
You could otherwise fail to recognise journey, that the status of the front passenger air-
dangers. bag is correct (/ page 54).
1 Knee airbag
2 Driver's airbag & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co- * NOTE
NOTE Deployment of components of the
3 driver airbag is enabled restraint system when the front passenger
Front passenger airbag
seat is unoccupied
4 Window airbag If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
5 Side airbag the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- In an accident, the components of the
driver airbag during an accident. restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on
The installation location of an airbag is identi ed the front passenger side if:
by the AIRBAG symbol. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
R There are heavy objects on the front
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the passenger seat.
protection for the respective vehicle occupant. CHILD can occur.
 Occupant safety 51

R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
belt buckle of the front passenger seat and following: wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. deployed.
R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to ensure R Always lean against the seat backrest when
# Stow objects in a suitable place. the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards
that the lap belt never lies across the
# Only one person should use each seat abdomen. or against the door or side window. You may
belt at any one time. otherwise be in the deployment area of the
R Adopt the correct seat position and keep
airbags.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the as far away as possible from the airbags.
R The occupants must always keep their feet on
window airbag on the front passenger side may R Observe the following information.
the oor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit,
deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the
whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
# Always make sure that there are no
objects between the airbag and vehicle deployment area of the airbag.
occupant. R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe
Protectiv
Protectivee capacity of the
the airbags the additional notes (/ page 59).
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
may supplement the protection o ered by a cor- of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe
rectly fastened seat belt. the following information in particular: Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air-
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occu-
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to correctly; the driver's seat and front pant must always make sure of the following in
an incorrect seat position passenger seat should be moved as far back particular:
as possible. R There are no people, animals or objects
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
When doing so, always observe the informa- between the vehicle occupants and an airbag.
the airbag cannot perform its intended protec-
tive function. tion on the correct driver's seat position R There are no objects between the seat, door
(/ page 103). and door pillar (B-pillar).
52 Occupant safety

R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, Limitations

Limit ations of the
the prot
protection
ection provided
provided by
by airbags & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. tioning sensors in the door
R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile & WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca-
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup tions to the cover of an airbag The function of the airbags can be impaired
holders, within the deployment area of an air- due to modi cations or incorrect work per-
If you modify the cover of an airbag or a x formed on the doors or door trim, or if the
bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
side window or on the side trim. doors are damaged.
no longer function correctly.
# Never modify the doors or parts of the
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
straps or retaining straps must be routed or doors.
do not a x objects to it.
attached to the vehicle within the deployment # Always have work on the doors or door

area of an airbag. Always comply with the The installation location of an airbag is identi ed trim carried out at a quali ed specialist
accessory manufacturer's installation instruc- by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 50). workshop.
tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable
places for installation. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile the use of unsuitable seat covers airbag
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags A deployed airbag no longer o ers any protec-
such objects in a suitable place. cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended. tion.
In addition, the operation of the automatic # Have the vehicle towed to a quali ed
front passenger airbag shuto could be specialist workshop in order to have the
restricted. deployed airbag replaced.
# You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond- Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
 Occupant safety 53

Status of the
the front
front passenger
passenger front
front airbag restraint systems on the front passenger seat A person in the front passenger seat could
(/ page 73). then, for example, come into contact with the
Function of the
the automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag
shutoo
shut A person on the front passenger seat must vehicle interior, especially if the person is sit-
The automatic front passenger airbag shuto is observe the following information: ting too close to the cockpit.
able to detect whether the front passenger seat is R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 45). If the front passenger seat is occupied, always
occupied by a person or a child restraint system. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their ensure that:
The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled back against the seat backrest. R the classi cation of the person in the front
accordingly. passenger seat is correct and the front
R Sit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi-
ble. passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
accordance with the person in the front
objects under the co-driver seat The front passenger airbag may otherwise be dis- passenger seat.
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can abled by mistake, for example, in the following sit- R the front passenger seat has been moved
interfere with the function of the automatic uations: as far back as possible.
co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system. R The front passenger transfers their weight by R the person is seated correctly.
# Do not store any objects under the co- supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
driver seat. R The front passenger sits in such a way that
# Both before and during the journey,
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, their weight is raised from the seat surface. ensure that the status of the front
make sure that no objects are trapped passenger airbag is correct.
under the co-driver seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a
disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classi-
When tting a child restraint system to the front cation of the person or child restraint system on
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the front passenger seat takes place a er the
passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor- the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
mation (/ page 74). Also, always observe the front passenger airbag shuto self-test. The
is lit. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child
status of the front passenger airbag.
54 Occupant safety

Always observe the notes on the function of the the cockpit on the front passenger side bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 73). may be lit continuously or be o .
(/ page 54). If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Self-tes
Self-testt of automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag shut-
Function of the
the PASSEN
PASSENGER
GER AIR BAG
BAG indicator
indicator o and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light
lamps
lamps When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per- up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may
formed during which the two PASSENGER AIR not be used. Also in this case, do not t a child
BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simulta- restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have
neously. the automatic front passenger airbag shuto
checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed
The status of the front passenger airbag is dis- specialist workshop.
played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps a er the self-test: Status display
R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
deploy during an accident. both before and during the journey, that the sta-
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the
The indicator lamp goes out a er 60 seconds. current situation.
R ON and OFF are are not
not lit: the front passenger A er tting a rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys-
airbag may deploy during an accident. tem to
to the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat:
seat: PASSENGER AIR
R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa- BAG OFF must be lit continuously.
bled. It will then not be deployed in the event
of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag o , only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of lamp shows the status of the front passenger air-
 Occupant safety 55

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when indicator lamp may be o . In this case, do not t # Always move the front passenger seat as
using a rearward-facing child restraint sys- the rearward-facing child restraint system to the far back as possible and fully retract the
tem while the front passenger airbag is front passenger seat. seat cushion length adjustment. While
enabled Instead, t the rearward-facing child restraint sys- doing so, always make sure that the
tem to a suitable rear seat. shoulder belt strap is correctly routed
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to
restraint system on the front passenger seat A er tting a forw
forwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys-
tem toto the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat:
seat: depending on the the shoulder belt guide on the child
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can child restraint system and the stature of the child,
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously must be routed forwards and downwards
deploy in the event of an accident. from the seat belt outlet. If necessary,
or be o . Always observe the following informa-
The child could be struck by the airbag. tion. adjust the seat belt outlet and the front
# Always ensure that the front passenger passenger seat accordingly.
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Always comply with the child restraint
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. incorrect positioning of the forward-facing system manufacturer's installation
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child child restraint system instructions.
restraint system on a seat with an ENA- If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in restraint system on the front passenger seat When tting a child restraint system to the front
the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor-
CHILD. the event of an accident, the child could: mation (/ page 73).
R come into contact with the vehicle interior If a person
person is sitting on the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat:
seat:
When tting a child restraint system to the front PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously
passenger seat, observe the vehicle-speci c infor- if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, for example or be o , depending on the person's stature.
mation (/ page 73).
R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
Depending on the child restraint system and the
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o .
56 Occupant safety

A person on the front passenger seat must always smaller stature should not use the front Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
observe the following information: passenger seat. ted subjects:
R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an R Child restraint system on the front passenger
adult or a person with a stature corresponding & WARNING Risk of injury or death when seat (/ page 73)
to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys-
OFF indicator lamp must be o . This indicates lamp is lit
tem (/ page 62)
that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit a er the self-test, the front
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person passenger airbag is disabled. PRE-SAFE® syst
PRE-SAFE system
em
with a build corresponding to that of an adult If the front passenger seat is occupied, always PRE-SAFE® (anticipat
Function of PRE-SAFE (anticipator
oryy occupant
must not use the front passenger seat. ensure that: protection)
protection)
Instead, they should use a rear seat. R The classi cation of the person in the front
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv-
R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a passenger seat is correct and the front
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas-
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF accordance with the person in the front
indicator lamp is either lit continuously or passenger seat. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas-
remains o , depending on the classi cation. R The person is seated properly with a cor- ures independently of each other:
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator rectly fastened seat belt. R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
lamp is o : move the front passenger seat R The front passenger seat has been moved and front passenger seat.
as far back as possible, or the person of as far back as possible. R Closing the side windows.
smaller stature should use a rear seat. R Vehicles with
with sliding sunroof:
sunroof: closing the slid-
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator ing sunroof.
lamp is lit continuously: the person of
 Occupant safety 57

R Vehicles with
with memory
memor y function: moving the # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, System limits
System
front passenger seat to a more favourable seat move the seat backrest back slightly. The system will not initiate any action in the fol-
position. The locking mechanism releases. lowing situations:
R Vehicles with
with multicontour
multicontour seat:
seat: increasing the R when reversing
air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the PRE-SAFE® PL
Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS
US (anticipator
(anticipatoryy occu-
seat backrest. or
pant prot
protection
ection plus)
R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multime-
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, par- is a risk of a rear impact
dia system is switched on, generating a brief
ticularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-
noise signal to stimulate the innate protective The system will not initiate any braking application
emptive measures to protect the vehicle occu-
mechanism of a person's hearing. in the following situations:
pants. These measures cannot necessarily pre-
vent an imminent impact. R whilst driving
* NOTE
NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following or
measures independently of each other: R when entering or exiting a parking space while
The automatic adjustment of the seat position
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat using Active Parking Assist
may result in damage to the seat and/or the
object. and front passenger seat.
# Stow objects in a suitable place. R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a PRE-SAFE® Im
Function of PRE-SAFE Impulse
pulse Side
higher ashing frequency.
If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is
SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the
Rever
ersing
sing the
the PRE-SAFE®
PRE-SAFE system
system measures
measures stationary. This brake application is cancelled front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards
automatically when the vehicle pulls away. the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive in ating an air cushion in the outer seat side bol-
You will need to perform certain settings yourself. measures that were taken are reversed. ster of the seat backrest on the side on which the
58 Occupant safety

impact is anticipated. This increases the distance To improve protection for children younger than R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
between the door and the vehicle occupant. 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, belt guide
If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the fol- Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child
is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative lowing information: booster seat with a backrest.
See Owner's Manual(/ page 434) display mes- R Always secure the child in a child restraint sys-
tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to
sage appears. the age, weight and size of the child.
R The child restraint system must be appropriate
to the age, weight and size of the child. Observe laws
Observe laws and legal
legal req
requir
uirements
ements
Safelyy transpor
Safel transporting
ting childr
children
en in the
the vehicle
vehicle Always observe the legal requirements when
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for tting a
Always
Always observe
observe when childr
children
en are
are trav
travelling
elling in the
the child restraint system (/ page 62). using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
vehicle Make sure that the child restraint system is
Accident statistics show that children secured on approved in accordance with the valid test speci -
% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the
the rear seats are generally safer than children cations and guidelines. Further information can
speci c situation. In this way you can recog- secured on the front seats. For this reason,
nise potential risks and avoid dangers if chil- be obtained at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you t a Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
dren are travelling in the vehicle child restraint system to a rear seat.
(/ page 59). Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
The gener
generic
ic ter
termm child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system Only use approved
Only approved child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
Be diligent
diligent
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a The generic term child restraint system is used in Only child restraint systems that meet the follow-
child in the child restraint system may have seri- this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, ing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the
ous consequences. Always be diligent in securing for example: vehicle:
a child carefully before every journey. R a baby car seat R UN-R44
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting R a rearward-facing child seat R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R a forward-facing child seat
 Occupant safety 59

Information on child restraint system approval Adv

dvant
antag
agee of a rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint sys-
sys- # Make sure that the entire base of the
categories and details on the approval label on tem child restraint system always rests on
the child restraint system (/ page 63). It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child the sitting surface of the seat.
in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem. In this case, the child sits in the opposite
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions)
Detecting
Detecting risk
risks,
s, avoiding
avoiding danger
danger under or behind the child restraint sys-
direction to the direction of travel and faces back-
wards. tem.
Securing systems
Securing systems for
for child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems in
the vehicle
vehicle Babies and small children have comparatively
# Use child restraint systems only with the
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and original cover designed for them.
Only use the following securing systems for child
restraint systems: weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer- # Always replace damaged covers with
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a genuine covers.
R the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings
rearward-facing child restraint system.
R the vehicle's seat belt system
Alwayss secure
Alway secure a child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system correctly
correctly & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
R the Top Tether anchorages unsecured child restraint systems in the
Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint sys- & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to vehicle
tem is preferred. incorrect installation of the child restraint If the child restraint system is incorrectly tted
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehi- system or not secured, it can come loose.
cle can reduce the risk of tting the child restraint The child can then not be protected or The child restraint system could be ung
system incorrectly. restrained as intended. around and hit vehicle occupants.
When securing a child with the integrated seat # Be sure to comply with the manufactur- # Always install child restraint systems cor-
belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, er's installation instructions for the child rectly, even when not in use.
always comply with the permissible gross weight restraint system and its correct use.
for the child and child restraint system
(/ page 66).
60 Occupant safety

# Always comply with the child restraint R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- Only use child
Only child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems which
which are
are in
system manufacturer's installation rior and on the child restraint system. proper
pr oper wor
working
king condition
instructions. R Also secure Top Tether if present.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
R Always observe the child restraint system Do not
not modify the
the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system by the use of damaged child restraint sys-
manufacturer's installation and operating tems
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modi ca-
instructions as well as the vehicle-speci c Child restraint systems or their retaining sys-
information: tions to the child restraint system
tems that have been subjected to stress in an
- Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint The child restraint system can no longer func- accident may not be able to perform their
system to the rear seat (/ page 66). tion properly. This poses an increased risk of intended protective function.
injury. It may be the case that the child cannot be
- Securing the child restraint system with
# Never modify a child restraint system. properly restrained.
the seat belt on the rear seat
(/ page 71). # Only a x accessories which have been # Always immediately replace child
- Securing the child restraint system with specially approved for this child restraint restraint systems that have been dam-
the seat belt on the front passenger seat system by the child restraint system's aged or involved in an accident.
(/ page 74). Observe the speci c manufacturer. # Have the securing systems for the child
instructions for the rearward-facing and restraint systems checked at a quali ed
forward-facing child restraint systems Mercedes‑Benz recommends Mercedes-Benz specialist workshop before installing a
(/ page 73). care products for cleaning child restraint systems child restraint system again.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front passenger
airbag is correct for the current situation
(/ page 54).
 Occupant safety 61

Avoid direct
direct sunlight Observee when stopping
Observ stopping or parking
parking # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
children.
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
seat is exposed to direct sunlight to leaving children unattended in the vehi-
cle & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
If the child restraint system is exposed to to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. If children are le unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular: If people, particularly children, are exposed to
Children could su er burns from these parts, extreme temperatures over an extended
particularly on metallic parts of the child R open doors, thereby endangering other
period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
restraint system. persons or road users. or danger to life.
# Always make sure that the child restraint R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c. # Never leave persons, children in particu-
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. R operate vehicle equipment and become lar, unattended in the vehicle.
# Protect the child restraint system with a trapped, for example.
blanket, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the Over
Overvie
view
w of recommended
recommended child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
# If the child restraint system has been
vehicle in motion by, for example:
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to % Further information on the correct child
R releasing the parking brake.
cool before securing a child into it. restraint system can be obtained at a quali-
# Never leave children unattended in the
R changing the transmission position. ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec-
vehicle. R starting the vehicle. ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
62 Occupant safety

Securing
Secur ing with
with ISOFIX Securing
Secur ing with
with the
the vehicle
vehicle seat belt Weight categor
categoryy II/III (15 to
to 36 kg
kg and fr
from
om
approximatel
approximatelyy 3 to
to 12 year
years)
s)
Weight categor
categoryy 0+ (up to
to 13 kg
kg and up to Weight categor
categoryy 0 (up to
to 10 kg
kg and appro
approximat
ximately
ely
approx.
approx. 15 months)
months) 6 months)
months) and weight
weight categor
categoryy 0+ (up to
to 13 kg Type1 KIDFIX XP
BAB
ABYY SAFE
SAFE plus and approximat
approximatel
elyy 15 months)
months)
Type1 Approval E1 04 301 304
Type1 BAB
ABYY SAFE
SAFE plus II
Size category E Order number2 A 000 970 49 02
Approval E1 04 301 146
Approval E1 04 301 146 Type1 AMG KIDFIX XP
Order number2 A 000 970 38 02
Order number2 B6 6 86 8224 Approval E1 04 301 304
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Order number2 A 000 970 33 02
Weight categor
categoryy I (9 to
to 18 kg
kg and fr
from
om approx-
approx-
Weight categor
categoryy I (9 to
to 18 kg
kg and fr
from
om approx-
approx- imatel
imatelyy 9 months
months toto 4 year
years)
s)
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
imatelyy 9 months
imatel months toto 4 year
years)
s)
Type1 DUO plus
Type1 DUO plus Overvie
Over view
w of suitable
suitable seats in the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for tting
Approval E1 04 301 133 a child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
Size category B1
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 Le /right
/right rear seat
Approval E1 04 301 133
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Preferred securing system:
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02
® ISOFIX child seat securing system
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. (/ page 65)
or
 Occupant safety 63

° i-Size child seat securing system Approval

Approval categor
categories
ies for
for child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems Approval
Approval categor
categories
ies in accordance
accordance with
with UN-R44
(/ page 66)
Only use approved
Only approved cchild
hild res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 69). Only child restraint systems that meet the follow-
ing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the
Alternative securing system: vehicle:
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 70) R UN-R44
R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)
Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 69).
Front passenger
passenger seat Identi cation on the
the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
Information about the approval category, weight
Securing system: category and approval number, for example, is on
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 70) the approval label on the child restraint system.
Be sure to observe: There may be further information such as the ISO-
R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
FIX size categories, depending on the approval
category of the child restraint system.
ensure, both before and during the journey,
that the status of the front passenger airbag is
correct for the current situation (/ page 54). Example of an approval label
R Notes on automatic front passenger airbag R Univ
niver
ersal:
sal: child restraint systems in the "Uni-
shuto (/ page 53). versal" category are approved for installation
in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance
Centre rear
Centre rear seat with overviews of the suitability of seats for
Securing system: securing child restraint systems, on seats
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 70) labelled U, UF or IUF.
64 Occupant safety

The identi cation IUF refers to ISOFIX child Approval

Approval categor
categories
ies in accordance
accordance with
with UN-R129 The identi cation i‑U refers to i‑Size child
restraint systems in the "Universal" category. restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
These child restraint systems must also be These child restraint systems must also be
secured using Top Tether or support points. secured using Top Tether or support points.
R Semi-Univ
Semi-U niver
ersal:
sal: child restraint systems in the Observe the
Observe the suitability
suitability of vehicle
vehicle seats
"Semi-Universal" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the Depending on the approval category, there are
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint
model list. systems. Their use can be restricted for certain
vehicle seats:
R Vehicle-speci c: child restraint systems in the
R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child
"vehicle-speci c" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the restraint systems (/ page 65)
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle R Suitability of seats for securing i‑Size child
model list. restraint systems (/ page 66).
R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
child restraint systems (/ page 70)

Example of an approval label

R i‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size"
category are approved for installation in vehi-
cles with i‑Size mounting brackets. They can
be used, in accordance with overviews of the
suitability of seats for securing child restraint
systems, on seats labelled i‑U.
 Occupant safety 65

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child

child res
restr
traint
aint system
system Weight group
group 0 (up to
to 10 kg
kg and up ttoo approx.
approx. 6 Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat
on the
the le and right
right rear
rear seats months)
months)
Equipment
Eq uipment
Overvie
Over vieww of suitability
suitability of the
the seats for
for attac
attaching
hing Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat
ISOFIX child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems Equipment
Eq uipment C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for spe- IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table
cially designed child restraint systems. E – ISO/R1 IL
in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the
® The symbol indicates seats suitable for IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manu-
attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the facturer's vehicle model list.
in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 63). vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manu-
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3),
Attach only child restraint systems that are facturer's vehicle model list.
move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the
approved in accordance with UN R44 as seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child
per the following ISOFIX tables. Weight group
group 0+ (up to
to 13 kg
kg and up ttoo approx.
approx.
restraint system.
15 months)
months)
Carryy cot
Carr Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat Weight group
group 1 (9–18 kg
kg and approx.
approx. 9 months
months to
Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat Equipment
Eq uipment 4 year
years)
s)
Equipment
Eq uipment Size class – Le /right
/right rear seat
E – ISO/R1 IL
F – ISO/L1 X Equipment
Eq uipment
D – ISO/R2 IL
G – ISO/L2 X D – ISO/R2 IL
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
group and/or size class.
B – ISO/F2 IUF
66 Occupant safety

Size class – Le /right

/right rear seat Overvie
Over vieww of suitability
suitability of the
the seats for
for attac
attaching
hing Fitting the
the ISOFIX or i‑Size child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system
i‑Size child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems on the
the le and right
right rear
rear seats
Equipment
Eq uipment
i‑Size is a standardised securing system for spe-
cially designed child restraint systems. & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear
B1 – ISO/F2X IUF
bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
° The symbol indicates seats suitable for are not engaged
A – ISO/F3 IUF
attaching an i‑Size child restraint system in
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table accordance with UN R129 (/ page 63). The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the Child restraint systems that are permitted
is in motion.
vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manu- in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISO-
facturer's vehicle model list. FIX tables (/ page 65) or UN R129 as per R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
the following i‑Size tables may be attached. pressed into the seat belt with increased
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
"Universal" category in this weight group.
i‑Size child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems (ISO/R2, ISO/F2X) tect as intended and could cause addi-
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), tional injury.
Front passenger
passenger seat Le /right
/right rear seat
move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the R Objects or loads in the boot or load com-
seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child X i‑U partment cannot be restrained by the seat
restraint system.
X Not suitable for an i-Size child i-U Suitable for forward-facing
backrest.
restraint system in the "Univer- and rearward-facing i-Size child # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
sal" category. restraint systems in the "Univer- rear seat and the seat backrest are
sal" category. engaged before every trip.

If the le and right seat backrests are not

engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the display on the instrument cluster.
 Occupant safety 67

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and Always comply with the information about the O Always comply with the manufacturer's
locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator mass of the child restraint system: installation and operating instructions for the
will be visible. R in the manufacturer's installation and operat- child restraint system used.
ing instructions for the child restraint system O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the used the front seat. If necessary, move the front
permissible gross mass of the child and seat slightly forwards.
R on a label on the child restraint system, if
child restraint system together is excee-
ded. present ® When tting an ISOFIX child restraint sys-
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass tem, also observe the following:
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX
or i‑Size child restraint systems and the child of the child and child restraint system is still com- O When using a baby baby car seat in weight
weight group
group
may not be restrained correctly in the event of plied with. 0/0+ and a rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint
an accident, for example. When tting a child restraint system, observe the system
syst em in weight
weight group
group 1 on a rear
rear seat:
seat:
# If the child and the child restraint system following: adjust the front seat so that the seat does
not touch the child restraint system.
together weigh more than 33 kg, only O Always observe the correct use of the seats
use an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint and consider their suitability for attaching a O When using a forw forwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint
system with which the child is secured child restraint system. system
syst em in weight
weight group
group 1: remove the head
with the vehicle seat belt. restraint from the respective seat, if possible.
ISOFIX child seat securing system In addition, the backrest of the child restraint
# Also secure the child restraint system (/ page 65) system must lie as at as possible against
with the Top Tether belt, if available. or the backrest of the vehicle seat.
i‑Size child seat securing system A er the child restraint system has been
(/ page 66) removed, replace the head restraint immedi-
ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
68 Occupant safety

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot respective seat, if possible. In addition, the
be fully extended when it is installed in the backrest of the child restraint system must
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the lie as at as possible against the backrest of
maximum size setting for child restraint sys- the vehicle seat.
tems in weight group 2 or 3. A er the child restraint system has been
Contact with the roof when the head removed, replace the head restraint immedi-
restraint is fully extended and locked in place ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
will not result in any restrictions on use.
O The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
head restraints as appropriate. 1 ISOFIX mounting bracket
° When tting an i‑Size child restraint system, 2 i‑Size mounting bracket
also observe the following: Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX
O When using a rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint child restraint system or the i‑Size child restraint
system:
system: adjust the front seat so that it does system is engaged correctly in both mounting
not touch the child restraint system. brackets in the vehicle.
O When using a forwforwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child res
restr
traint
aint
system:
system: remove the head restraint from the
 Occupant safety 69

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the # Always lock rear seat backrests a er t-
centre seat during installation of the child ting Top Tether belts.
restraint system # Observe the lock veri cation indicator.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped. If the le and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
# Remove and stow away covers 1 or 2. on the display on the instrument cluster.
# Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys- If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and
tem to both mounting brackets in the vehicle. locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator
will be visible.
# A er removing the child seat, reattach covers ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped
1 or 2. with a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top
Fast
astening
ening a Top
Top Tether
Tether Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an
additional connection between the child
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the restraint system attached with ISOFIX or # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards
rear seat backrests are not locked a er i‑Size and the vehicle. (/ page 109).
Top Tether belts are tted # Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards # Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system
when you are driving. with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the
As a result, child restraint systems will no lon- child restraint system manufacturer's installa-
ger be able to perform their intended protec- tion instructions.
tive function. This may also cause additional
injuries.
70 Occupant safety

Securing the
Securing the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat U
belt Centre rear seat1

Notes on the
the suitability
suitability of seats for
for attac
attaching
hing belt- Weight categor
categoryy III: 22 to
to 36 kg
secured child
secured child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems Le /right rear seat U, L
Rear seats U
Centre rear seat1
Weight categor
categoryy 0: up to
to 10 kg
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are
Le /right rear seat U, L not suitable for this seat.

# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint Centre rear seat1 U, L U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal"
category in this weight category.
1 between the two head restraint bars. Weight categor
categoryy 0+: up to
to 13 kg
kg
# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems
4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without Le /right rear seat U, L
according to the table in "Recommended child restraint
twisting. Centre rear seat1 U, L systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the
# Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com- child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
ply with the child restraint system manufactur- Weight categor
categoryy I: 9 to
to 18 kg
er's installation instructions. Le /right rear seat U, L Notes on child
child res
restr
traint
aint systems
systems on the
the front
front
# Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage passenger
passeng er seat
3. Centre rear seat1 U, L R If it is absolutely necessary for you to t a
child restraint system to the front passenger
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down- Weight categor
categoryy II: 15 to
to 25 kg
kg seat, be sure to observe the information on
wards (/ page 109). Make sure that you do child restraint systems on the front passenger
not interfere with the correct routing of Top Le /right rear seat U, L
seat (/ page 74).
Tether belt 4.
 Occupant safety 71

R Observe the speci c instructions for the rear- UF, L

ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint Front passenger airbag enabled1 L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems
according to the table in "Recommended child restraint
systems. If the front passenger seat is occu- Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the
pied, ensure, both before and during the jour-
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
ney, that the status of the front passenger air- Weight categor
categoryy III: 22 to
to 36 kg
bag is correct for the current situation UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of
(/ page 54). Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
the "Universal" category in this weight category.
Front passenger
passenger seat Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Securing the
Securing the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat
Weight categor
categoryy 0: up to
to 10 kg 1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front
belt on the
the rear
rear seat
edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest posi- & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L tion. bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
Weight categor
categoryy 0+: up to
to 13 kg
kg 2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front
passenger airbag shuto . The PASSENGER AIR BAG The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X OFF indicator lamp must be lit. rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
is in motion.
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L X Not suitable for children in this weight category. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
Weight categor
categoryy I: 9 to
to 18 kg pressed into the seat belt with increased
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal"
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
category in this weight category.
Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L tect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight categor
categoryy II: 15 to
to 25 kg
kg
72 Occupant safety

R Objects or loads in the boot or load com- Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats Contact with the roof when the head
partment cannot be restrained by the seat for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys- restraint is fully extended and locked in place
backrest. tems" (/ page 70). will not result in any restrictions on use.
O When using a weight
weight categor
categoryy 0/0+ baby
baby O The child restraint system must not be put
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the car seat and a weight
weight categor
categoryy I rearw
rearwar
ard-
d- under strain between the roof and the seat
rear seat and the seat backrest are facing child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system on a rear
rear seat: cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
engaged before every trip. adjust the front seat so that the seat does direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
not touch the child restraint system. cushion inclination accordingly.
If the le and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown O When using a weight
weight categor
categoryy I forw
forwar
ard-
d- O The child restraint system must not be put
on the display on the instrument cluster. facing child
child res
restr
traint
aint syst
system:
em: remove the under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the
head restraint from the respective seat, if head restraints as appropriate.
If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and possible.
locked in place, the red lock veri cation indicator O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
will be visible. A er the child restraint system has been the front seat. If necessary, move the front
removed, replace the head restraint immedi- seat slightly forwards.
When tting a belt-secured
belt-secured child
child res
restr
traint
aint system,
system, ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
observ
observee the
the follo
following:
wing: # Install the child restraint system.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child The entire base of the child restraint system
O Always comply with the manufacturer's
restraint system must, as far as possible, be must always rest on the seat surface of the
installation and operating instructions for the resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
child restraint system used. rear seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
O For a child restraint system in the "Universal"
be fully extended when it is installed in the is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the
the system has been approved for the vehicle the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the
maximum size setting for child restraint sys- child restraint system.
seat. tems in weight category II or III. The shoulder belt strap must be routed
forward from the seat belt outlet.
 Occupant safety 73

Notes on vehicles
vehicles without
without automatic
automatic front
front Make sure you observe the following information: lamp is o , the front passenger airbag can
passenger
passenger airbag shut
shutoo R Never t a rearward-facing child restraint sys- deploy in the event of an accident.
tem to the front passenger seat The child could be struck by the airbag.
R Always t a rearward-facing child restraint sys- # Always ensure that the front passenger
tem to a suitable rear seat airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
- Seats suitable for attaching belted child BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
restraint systems (/ page 70). # NEVER use a rearward-facing child
- Secure the child restraint system with the restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 71). BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in
R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the
child restraint systems on the front passenger CHILD.
seat (/ page 73)
Observe the speci c instructions for the rear-
Notes on rearw
rearwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing and forw
forwar
ard-f
d-facing
acing child
child ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys-
res
estr
traint
aint systems
systems on the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat tems (/ page 74).
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when
using a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
Sticker visible when the front passenger door is tem while the front passenger airbag is
open enabled
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
shuto have a special sticker a xed to the side of restraint system on the front passenger seat
the cockpit on the front passenger side. and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
74 Occupant safety

R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator O When using a forward-facing child restraint
lamp is o , the front passenger airbag is ena- system in weight category I: remove the head
bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy restraint from the respective seat, if possible.
during an accident. A er the child restraint system has been
Securing the
Securing the child
child res
restr
traint
aint system
system with
with the
the seat removed, replace the head restraint immedi-
belt on the
the front
front passenger
passenger seat ately and adjust all head restraints correctly.
When tting a belt-secured child restraint system O The backrest of the forward-facing child
on the front passenger seat, always observe the restraint system must, as far as possible, be
following: resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot
Always observe the status of the front passenger front passenger seat (/ page 73). be fully extended when it is installed in the
airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the
lamp: O Observe the child restraint system manufac- maximum size setting for child restraint sys-
turer's installation and operating instructions. tems in weight category II or III.
R If it is absolutely necessary to t a child
restraint system to the front passenger seat, O For a child restraint system in the "Universal" Contact with the roof when the head
always observe the information on automatic or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that restraint is fully extended and locked in place
front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 53). the system has been approved for the vehicle will not result in any restrictions on use.
seat.
R When using a rearward-facing child restraint O The child restraint system must not be put
system on the front passenger seat, the front Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats under strain between the roof and the seat
passenger airbag must always be disabled. for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys- cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR tems" (/ page 70). direction.
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 54).
 Occupant safety 75

O The child restraint system must not be put # Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- Child safety
safety locks
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the ment.
head restraints as appropriate. Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating the
the child
child safety
safety lock
lock for
for
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the the rear
rear doors
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest
behind the child restraint system. position and the rear edge of the seat cushion & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
is in the lowest position. to leaving children unattended in the vehi-
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Set the seat backrest to the most vertical cle
objects between the seat surface and the position possible. If children are le unattended in the vehicle,
child restraint system # Install the child restraint system. they could, in particular:
Objects between the seat surface and the The entire base of the child restraint system R open doors, thereby endangering other
child restraint system could a ect the function must always rest on the sitting surface of the persons or road users.
of the automatic front passenger airbag shut- front passenger seat.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
o . # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
R operate vehicle equipment and become
# Do not place any objects between the is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
seat surface and the child restraint sys- the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the trapped, for example.
tem. child restraint system. In addition, the children could also set the
# Always make sure that the child restraint The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- vehicle in motion by, for example:
system is correctly tted. wards and downwards from the seat belt out- R releasing the parking brake.
let.
R changing the transmission position.
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as # If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
possible and move the seat into the highest the front passenger seat accordingly. R starting the vehicle.
position if possible. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
76 Occupant safety

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the R operate vehicle equipment and become
key with you and lock the vehicle. trapped, for example.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of # Always activate the installed child safety
children. locks if children are travelling in the vehi-
cle.
& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure # Never leave children unattended in the
to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle vehicle.
If people, particularly children, are exposed to # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
extreme temperatures over an extended key with you and lock the vehicle.
period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
or danger to life. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the
# Never leave persons, children in particu- important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi-
lar, unattended in the vehicle. tional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due the rear side windows. # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2
to children le unattended in the vehicle The child safety lock on the rear doors secures (deactivate).
each door separately. The doors can no longer be
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they opened from the inside.
# Make sure that the child safety locks are work-
could, in particular: ing properly.
R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
 Occupant safety 77

Activ
ctivating
ating and deactivating
deactivating the
the child
child safety
safety lock R indicator lamp 1 is o : via the switch on # Never leave animals unattended in the
for the
the rear
rear side windows the corresponding rear door or driver's vehicle.
door # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car-
Notes on pets
pets in the
the vehicle
vehicle rier.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due

to animals le unsecured or unattended in
the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended
or unsecured, they could press buttons or
switches, for instance.
An animal may:
R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R switch systems on or o and endanger
other road users
# To activat
activate/deactiv
e/deactivat
ate:
e: press button 2.
The rear side window can be opened or closed Unsecured animals may be thrown about the
in the following cases: vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden
R indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on
steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure
vehicle occupants.
the driver's door
78 Opening and closing

Key # When leaving the vehicle, always take the 3 Unlocks

Overvie
Over view
w of key
key functions key with you and lock the vehicle. 4 Opens/closes the boot lid
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of % If indicator lamp 2 does not light up a er
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due children. pressing the Ü or ß button, the battery
to leaving children unattended in the vehi- is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the
cle * NOTE Damage to the key caused by mag- battery as soon as possible.
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, netic elds Replace the key battery (/ page 80).
they could, in particular: Keep the key away from strong magnetic
# The key locks and unlocks the following compo-
R open doors, thereby endangering other elds. nents:
persons or road users. R Doors
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R Fuel ller ap
R operate vehicle equipment and become
R Socket ap (plug-in hybrid)
trapped, for example.
R Boot lid
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion by, for example: If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
R releasing the parking brake.
40 seconds a er unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
the protection is primed again.
R changing the transmission position.
Do not keep the key together with electronic devi-
R starting the vehicle. ces or metal objects. This can a ect the key's
# Never leave children unattended in the Vehicle key functionality.
vehicle. 1 Locks
2 Indicator lamp
 Opening and closing 79

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the acoustic
acoustic locking
locking ver
erii - R Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id: unlocking the driver's door and Deactivating
Deactivating the
the function of the
the key
cation signal fuel ller ap/socket ap
Vehicles with
with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the
Multimedia system: # To switch
switch betw
between
een settings:
settings: press the Ü function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle and ß buttons simultaneously for approx- also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by
imately six seconds until the indicator lamp KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that
# Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.
ashes twice. particular key. Activate the function of the key so
% Please observe:
observe: that all its functions will again be available.
The selected setting for the acoustic locking Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel ller ap has been selected: You can also deactivate the function of the key to
veri cation signal must comply with the rele- reduce the energy consumption of the key if you
vant national road and tra c regulations. In R To unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle centrally:
centrally: press the
Ü button twice. do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended
some countries, including Germany, using the period of time.
acoustic locking veri cation signal is forbid- R Vehicles with
with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the # To deactivat
deactivate: e: press the ß button on the
den by tra c laws (in accordance with §16 inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel key twice in quick succession.
national road tra c regulations). The driver of ller ap are unlocked. The key indicator lamp ashes twice brie y
the vehicle must comply with these regula- and lights up once.
tions. In countries where the use of this func- Options if the unlocking function for the driver's # To activat
activate:e: press any button on the key.
tion is forbidden, this function is not activated door and fuel ller ap/socket ap has been
% When the vehicle is started with the key in the
in the vehicle and must not be activated. selected (plug-in-hybrid):
stowage compartment of the centre console,
R To unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle centrally:
centrally: press the the function of the key is automatically activa-
Changing the
the unlocking
unlocking settings
settings Ü button twice. ted (/ page 168).
R Vehicles with
with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the
Possible unlocking functions of the key: inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
R Central unlocking er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel
R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap ller ap/socket ap are unlocked.
80 Opening and closing

Remo
emoving/inser
ving/inserting
ting the
the emergency
emergency key % You can use the intermediate position of + ENVIRONMENT
ENVIR ONMENTAL
AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key damage due to improper disposal of bat-
Remo
emoving
ving the
the emergency
emergency key ring. teries

Replacing the
the key
key battery
battery

& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to swal- Batteries contain pollutants. It is
lowing batteries illegal to dispose of them with the household
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- rubbish.
ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe #
internal burns to occur within two hours.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
Dispose of batteries in an
# Press release button 1. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
environmentally responsible manner.
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. dren. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed
# Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in # If the cap and/or the battery compart- specialist workshop or to a collection
the intermediate position. ment does not close securely, do not use point for used batteries.
# Press release button 1 again and fully the key any longer and keep it out of the
reach of children. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
remove emergency key 2. R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
Inser ting the
Inserting the emergency
emergency key attention immediately. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
# Press release button 1. battery replaced at a quali ed specialist work-
# Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate shop.
position or fully until it engages. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 80).
 Opening and closing 81

Problems
Pr oblems with
with the
the key,
key, troubleshoo
troubleshooting
ting R shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic
You can no longer
longer lock
lock or unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle barriers
Possible causes:
# Make sure that there is su cient distance
R The key battery is weak or discharged.
between the key and the potential source of
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp interference.
(/ page 78). You have
have lost
lost a key
# Replace the key battery, if necessary # Have the key deactivated at a quali ed spe-
(/ page 80). cialist workshop.
# Press release knob 2 down fully and slide # Use the replacement key. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock
cover 1 in the direction of the arrow. # Use the emergency key to lock or unlock replaced as well.
# Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow (/ page 85).
and remove. # Have the key checked at a quali ed specialist Doors
# Remove battery compartment 3 and take workshop.
out the discharged battery. Notes on the
the additional door lock
There is interf
There interfer
erence
ence from
from a power
powerful
ful radio
radio signal
# Insert the new battery into battery compart- source
sour ce The additional door lock is only available for vehi-
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in cles for the United Kingdom.
Possible causes if the function of the key is
the battery compartment and on the battery
impaired:
when doing this.
R high voltage power lines
# Push in battery compartment 3.
R mobile phones
# Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
engages. R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
82 Opening and closing

& WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside You can prevent the additional door lock from # Pull door handle 2.
the vehicle when the additional door lock being activated by deactivating interior protection Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is
is activated before locking the vehicle (/ page 102). unlocked.
If the additional door lock is activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the Unloc
nlocking/opening
king/opening the
the doors
doors from
from the
the inside Centrallyy locking
Centrall locking and unlocking
unlocking the
the vehicle
vehicle from
from
inside. # Unit
nited
ed Kingdom only:
only: observe the notes on the inside
# Never leave persons, in particular chil- the additional door lock (/ page 81).
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not
activate the additional door lock.

The additional door lock is automatically activated

in the following situations:
R The vehicle is locked using the key.
R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.

If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me

connect, the additional door lock is not activated
(/ page 342).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
% A er locking you can issue a signal with the # To unlock:
unlock: press button 1.
horn. # To lock:
lock: press button 2.
 Opening and closing 83

This does not lock or unlock the fuel ller ap. # Deactivate the function of the key in
Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id: the socket ap is also locked and these situations.
unlocked. The socket ap can be opened even if a or
key is detected in the car. # Make sure that the key is at a minimum
The vehicle is not unlocked: distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
R if you have locked the vehicle using the key
R if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS- Observe the notes:
GO R on washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 367)
Locking/unloc
Locking/unlocking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with KEYLESS-GO R on using a high pressure cleaner
(/ page 368)
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The key is outside the vehicle.
R The distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m. # To unlock
unlock the
the vehicle:
vehicle: touch the inner surface
R The driver's door and the door on which the of the door handle.
door handle is used are closed. # To lock
lock the
the vehicle:
vehicle: touch sensor surface 1
or 2.
* NOTE
NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
unintentionally opening the boot lid # Convenience
Conv enience closing: touch recessed sensor
surface 2 until the closing process has been
R when using an automatic car wash completed.
R when using a high pressure cleaner
84 Opening and closing

% Further information on convenience closing There is interf

There interfer
erence
ence from
from a power
powerful
ful radio
radio signal
(/ page 93). source
sour ce
If you open the boot lid from outside, the boot lid Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is
is automatically unlocked. impaired:
R high voltage power lines
Problems
Pr oblems with
with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshoo
troubleshooting
ting R mobile phones
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
You can no longer
longer lock
lock or unlock
unlock the
the vehicle
vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO R shielding due to metal objects or induction
Possible causes: loops for electrical gate systems or automatic
barriers
R The function of the key has been deactivated.
R The key battery is weak or discharged. # Make sure that there is su cient distance
between the key and the potential source of
# Activate the function of the key (/ page 79). interference.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 78). # To activat
activate:
e: press and hold button 2 for
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the automatic
automatic locking
locking fea-
fea-
approximately ve seconds until an acoustic
# Replace the key battery, if necessary ture
signal sounds.
(/ page 80).
The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehi- # To deactivat
deactivate:
e: press and hold button 1 for
# Use the replacement key. cle is switched on and the wheels are turning approximately ve seconds until an acoustic
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock faster than walking pace. signal sounds.
(/ page 85).
# Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
 Opening and closing 85

In the following situations, there is a danger of Locking/unloc

Locking/unlocking
king the
the driv
driver's
er's door with
with the
the # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go
being locked out when the function is activated: emergency key
emergency into opening 1 in the cover.
R while the vehicle is being tow-started or % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using # Pull and hold the door handle.
pushed the emergency key, rst press the button for # Pull the cover on the emergency key as
R if the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna- locking from the inside while the driver's door straight as possible away from the vehicle until
mometer is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's it releases.
door using the emergency key. # Release the door handle.
Power closing function

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when

the doors close automatically
Body parts or objects can become trapped,
causing injuries.
# Ensure that no body parts or objects are
in the closing area.
# Automatic closing of the doors can be
cancelled by pulling the outer or inner
door handle.

If you push the door into the lock to the rst

detent position, the power closing function will
automatically pull the door into the lock.
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 80).
86 Opening and closing

# To unlock:
unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clock- * NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obstacles Vehicles with
with boot
boot lid convenience
convenience closing
wise to position 1. above the vehicle
# To lock:
lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to
position 1. The boot lid swings upwards when it is
opened.
# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin- # Therefore, make sure that there is su -
der until it engages and is seated rmly.
cient clearance above the boot lid.

Boot # Pull the boot lid handle.

Opening the
the boot
boot lid # Vehicles with
with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
ACCESS: make a
kicking movement with your foot below the
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning bumper (/ page 89).
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot
lid is open when the vehicle is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion. # Pull remote operating switch 1 until the boot
# Always switch o the vehicle before lid opens.
opening the boot lid. or
# Never drive with the boot lid open.
# Press and hold the p button on the key.
# If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate
position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as
it begins to open.
 Opening and closing 87

# With the boot lid opening limiter activated, # Before the journey, secure objects, lug- # To close the
the boot
boot lid: pull the boot lid down-
manually pull the stopped boot lid upwards. gage or loads against slipping or tipping wards using the handle recess and push it
over. closed.
If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the
automatic opening process, blockage detection Vehicles with
with boot
boot lid convenience
convenience closing
will stop the boot lid. The automatic blockage Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
detection function is only an aid and is not a sub- Notes on closing the
the boot
boot lid: your vehicle is & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
stitute for your attentiveness. equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key ing automatic closing of the boot lid
belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle,
the boot lid will not be locked and will pop open Parts of the body could become trapped.
Closing the
the boot
boot lid again. There may be people in the closing area.
# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
Note that the boot lid will not be locked if the fol-
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured of the closing area during the closing
lowing situation occurs:
items in the vehicle process.
R You have locked the vehicle and close the
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or boot lid while a key belonging to the vehicle is # Use one of the following options to stop
not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip inside the vehicle. the closing process:
over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi- R Press the p button on the key.
cle occupants. and
R Press or pull the remote operating
R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the switch on the driver's door.
event of sudden braking or a sudden change detected outside the vehicle.
R Press the closing or locking button
in direction. Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not on the boot lid.
# Always stow objects in such a way that a substitute for your attentiveness. R Pull the boot lid handle.
they cannot be thrown around. # Before locking, ensure that at least one key
belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
88 Opening and closing

Vehicles with
with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
ACCESS: it is also # Push remote operating switch 1 until the Vehicles with
with KEYLESS-GO
possible to stop the closing process by making a boot lid is fully closed. # Press locking button 2 on the boot lid.
kicking movement below the rear bumper. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the
# To close thethe boot
boot lid: pull the boot lid handle. boot lid will close and the vehicle will be
Release it as soon as it begins to close. locked.
# If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate # With the boot lid completely open, press and
position, push it downwards. hold the p button on the key. The key must
The boot lid will continue to close. be in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Vehicles with
with HANDS-FREE ACCESS
ACCESS
# With the boot lid completely open, make a
kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/ page 89).
Boot lid automatic
Boot automatic rever
reversing
sing function
The boot lid is equipped with automatic blockage
detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle
obstructs the boot lid during the automatic clos-
ing process, it will automatically open again. The
# Press closing button 1 on the boot lid. automatic reversing function is only an aid and is
not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
 Opening and closing 89

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped HANDS-FREE ACCESS

ACCESS function % A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is
despite reversing function opening or closing.
The reversing function will not react: & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers exhaust system
R towards the end of the closing procedure The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
In these situations in particular, the reversing could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
function cannot prevent someone being trap- system.
ped.
# Always ensure that you only make a kick-
# Ensure that no body parts are in the
ing movement within the detection range
closing area. of the sensors.
# If someone is trapped, use one of the fol-
lowing options: * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
R Press the p button on the key.
unintentionally opening the boot lid
R Press the remote operating switch on
the driver's door. R when using an automatic car wash
R Press the closing or locking button
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close R when using a high pressure cleaner
or interrupt boot lid movement by performing a
on the boot lid. # Deactivate the function of the key in
kicking movement under the rear bumper.
R Pull the boot lid handle. these situations.
The kicking movement triggers the opening or
closing process alternately. or
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 86) # Make sure that the key is at a minimum
and closing (/ page 87) the boot lid. distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
90 Opening and closing

When making the kicking movement, make sure The boot lid could be opened or closed uninten-
that you are standing rmly on the ground. You tionally, in the following situations:
could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sen-
Observe the following notes: sor detection range, e.g. when polishing the
R The key is behind the vehicle. vehicle or picking up objects.
R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi-
while performing the kicking movement. cle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charg-
ing cable or luggage
R Do not come into contact with the bumper
R Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings
while making the kicking movement.
are pulled over the bumper.
R Do not carry out the kicking movement too 1 Detection range of the sensors
R A protective mat with a length reaching over
slowly.
If several consecutive kicking movements are not the boot sill down into the detection range of
R The kicking movement must be towards the
successful, wait ten seconds. the sensors is used.
vehicle and back again.
System limits
System R The protective mat is not secured correctly.

The system may be impaired or may not function R Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers
in the following cases: or rear bicycle racks.
R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 79) or
snow. do not carry the key about your person in such
R The kicking movement is made using a pros- situations.
thetic leg.
 Opening and closing 91

Switching
Switching separat
separatee boot
boot locking
locking on or o Side windows # If someone is trapped, release the but-
If you centrally unlock the vehicle while separate Opening and closing the
the side windows ton immediately or press the button in
locking is activated, the boot will remain locked. order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
opening a side window & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
When you open a side window, parts of the children operate the side windows
body could be drawn in or become trapped Children could become trapped if they operate
between the side window and window frame. the side windows, particularly when unatten-
# When opening, make sure that nobody is ded.
touching the side window. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear

# If someone is trapped, release the but- side windows.

ton immediately or pull it in order to # When leaving the vehicle, always take the
close the side window again. key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when vehicle.
closing a side window
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
When closing a side window, body parts could R The power supply or the vehicle has been
be trapped in the closing area in the process. switched on.
# To switch
switch on: slide the switch to position 1.
# When closing, make sure that no body
# To switch
switch o : slide the switch to position 2. parts are in the closing area.
% If an accident has been detected, the boot will
unlock even if separate locking is switched
on.
92 Opening and closing

When the vehicle is switched o , you can con- # During the closing process, make sure
tinue to operate the side windows. that no body parts are in the closing
This function is available for around four minutes area.
or until a front door is opened. # If someone becomes trapped, press the
Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function of the
the side windows W button to open the side window
If an obstacle impedes a side window during the again.
closing process, the side window will open again
automatically. The automatic reversing function is
only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten- Aut
utomatic
omatic function of the
the side windows
tiveness. In the following cases, the side windows will be
# During the closing process, make sure that no closed automatically when the vehicle is switched
body parts are in the closing area. o :
R if it starts to rain
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-
despite there being reversing protection screen.
1 Closing on the side window
R in extreme temperatures
2 To open The reversing function does not react:
R a er a certain time (depending on the on-
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
board electrical system voltage)
# To star
startt automatic
automatic operation:
operation: press the W R during resetting. R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
button beyond the point of resistance or pull
The reversing function cannot prevent some- The side windows will be closed as far as the ven-
and release it.
one from becoming trapped in these situa- tilation position.
# To interr
interrup
uptt automatic
automatic operation:
operation: press or pull tions.
the W button again.
 Opening and closing 93

Vehicles with
with a sliding sunroof:
sunroof: the side windows Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Convenience closing (closing the
Convenience the vehicle
vehicle from
from out-
will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi- side)
open. cle.
If the side windows are obstructed during auto- & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not
# Press and hold the Ü button on the key. paying attention during convenience clos-
matic closing, the side window concerned will
open again slightly. A er another automatic clos- The following functions are performed: ing
ing process, the automatic function for the sun- R The vehicle is unlocked. When the convenience closing feature is oper-
roof and side windows may be deactivated. The R The side windows are opened. ating, parts of the body could become trapped
automatic function will be active again the next R The sliding sunroof is opened. in the closing area of the side window and the
time the vehicle is started. sliding sunroof.
R The panoramic sliding roof is opened.
# When the convenience closing feature is
R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
Convenience
Conv enience opening (ventilating
(ventilating the
the vehicle
vehicle operating, monitor the entire closing
beforee star
befor starting
ting a journe
journey)
y) switched on. process and make sure that no body
% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when open- sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is
ing a side window opened rst. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
When opening a side window, parts of the # To interr
interrup
uptt convenience
convenience opening: release the cle.
body could be drawn in or become trapped Ü button.
between the side window and window frame. # To continue convenience
convenience opening: press and # Press and hold the ß button on the key.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is hold the Ü button again. The following functions are performed:
touching the side window. R The vehicle is locked.
# Release the button immediately if some-
R The side windows are closed.
body becomes trapped.
R The sliding sunroof is closed.
94 Opening and closing

RThe panoramic sliding roof is closed. A side window

window cannot
cannot be closed and you
you cannot The side windows
windows cannot
cannot be opened or closed
# To interr
interrup
uptt convenience
convenience closing: release the see the
the cause. using the
the convenience
convenience opening featur
feature.
e.
ß button. # Check to see whether any objects are in the Possible causes:
# To continue convenience
convenience closing: press and window guide. R The key battery is weak or discharged.
hold the ß button again. # Adjust the side windows.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp
% Convenience closing also functions with KEY- (/ page 78).
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the side windows
windows
LESS-GO (/ page 83).
If a side window is obstructed during closing and # Replace the key battery, if necessary
reopens again immediately: (/ page 80).
Resol
esolving
ving problems
problems with
with the
the side windows # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre-

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or sponding button again until the side window Sliding sunroof
sunroof
has closed and hold the button for at least one
fatally injured if reversing protection is not Opening and closing the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof
more second (re-adjustment).
activated
The side window will be closed without the % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
If you close a side window again immediately automatic reversing function. panorama sliding sunroof.
a er it has been blocked, the side window will
close with increased or maximum force. The If the side window is obstructed again and & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
reversing function is then not active and body reopens again immediately: the sliding sunroof is being opened and
parts may become trapped. # Immediately a er this, pull and hold the corre- closed
# Make sure that no parts of the body are sponding button again until the side window Body parts may become trapped in the range
in the closing area. has closed and hold the button for at least one of movement.
# To stop the closing process, release the more second (follow-up adjustment).
button or press the button again to The side window will be closed without the
reopen the side window. automatic reversing function.
 Opening and closing 95

# During opening and closing, make sure & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when * NOTE Damage caused by protruding
that no body parts are in the range of the roller sunblind is being opened and objects
movement. closed
# Release the button immediately if some- Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof
body becomes trapped. Body parts may become trapped between the may damage the seals.
roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # Do not allow anything to protrude from
or # When opening or closing, make sure that the sliding sunroof.
# Brie y press the button in any direction no body parts are in the roller sunblind's
during automatic operation. range of movement.
The opening or closing process will be # Release the button immediately if some-
* NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when
stopped. a roof luggage rack is tted
body becomes trapped.
or When a roof luggage rack is tted, raising or
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid- opening the sliding sunroof may be restricted.
# Brie y press the button in any direction
ing sunroof is operated by children during automatic operation. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can

Children operating the sliding sunroof could The opening or closing process will be be raised or opened when a roof luggage
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if stopped. rack is tted.
unattended. # If in doubt, do not raise or open the slid-

# Never leave children unattended in the * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice ing sunroof.
vehicle.
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
malfunction.
key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
96 Opening and closing

# Check whether the sliding sunroof can be & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is despite the reversing function being active
tted.
# To star
startt automatic
automatic operation:
operation: press the 3 In particular, the reversing function does not
react:
button beyond the point of resistance or pull
and release it. R to so , light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
# To interr
interrup
uptt automatic
automatic operation:
operation: brie y press R towards the end of the closing procedure.
the 3 button in any direction. R during resetting.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.
# During the closing process, make sure
Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function of the
the sliding sun- that no body parts are in the closing
roof area.
If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during # Release the button immediately if some-
the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open body becomes trapped.
again automatically. The automatic reversing func- or
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
1 To raise attentiveness. # Brie y press the button in any direction
2 To open during automatic operation.
# During the closing process, make sure that no
The closing process will be stopped.
3 To close/lower body parts are in the closing area.
Use the 3 button to operate the panorama Aut
utomatic
omatic rever
reversing
sing function of the
the roller
roller sunblind
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during
the closing process, the roller sunblind will open
The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated again automatically. The automatic reversing func-
only when the roller sunblind is open. tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
 Opening and closing 97

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically Aut
utomatic
omatic lower
lowering
ing function
that no body parts are in the range of move- when the vehicle has been switched o in the fol- Vehicles with
with a panorama
panorama sliding sunroof:
sunroof: if the
ment. lowing situations: sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will auto-
R if it starts to rain matically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
despite reversing function Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-
screen. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by
In particular, the reversing function does not R in extreme temperatures
react to so , light and thin objects, e.g. n- automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
gers. R a er a certain time (depending on the on- At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof
# When closing the roller sunblind, make
board electrical system voltage) will automatically be lowered slightly at the
sure that no body parts are in the range R if there is a malfunction in the power supply rear.
of movement. The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the
# Release the button immediately if some- sliding sunroof's range of movement
continue ventilating the vehicle interior.
body becomes trapped. while the vehicle is in motion.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an auto-
or matic closing procedure, the roof will be opened
# If somebody becomes trapped, brie y

# Brie y press the button in any direction again slightly. The automatic function for the slid- push the sliding sunroof button forwards
during the automatic closing process. ing sunroof and the side windows will then be or backwards.
The closing process will be stopped. deactivated.
% By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you
Rain-closing featur
featuree when driving
driving can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain
Aut
utomatic
omatic functions of the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof Vehicles with
with a panorama
panorama sliding sunroof:
sunroof: if it closing function when driving" and "Automatic
starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will auto- lowering".
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the matically be lowered while the vehicle is in
panorama sliding sunroof. motion.
98 Opening and closing

Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof # Immediately a er automatic reversing, pull Vehicles with
with a panorama
panorama sliding sunroof:
sunroof: the
the slid-
and hold the 3 button down again to the ing sunroof
sunroof or the
the roller
roller sunblind is not
not operating
operating
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is smoothly
smoot hly..
fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-
closed again The sliding sunroof will be closed with blind.
increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi-
ately a er it has been blocked or reset, it will Rese
esetting
tting the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof and the
the roller
roller sun-
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and blind
close with increased force. opens again slightly:
# Make sure that no parts of the body are # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
# Repeat the previous step.
in the closing area. until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
# Release the button immediately if some-
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with # Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
increased force.
body becomes trapped. Vehicles without
without a panorama
panorama sliding sunroof:
sunroof: the
the until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
or sliding sunroof
sunroof is not
not operating
operating smoothly
smoothly.. # Use automatic operation to fully open and
# Brie y press the button in any direction # Reset the sliding sunroof. then close the sliding sunroof.
during the automatic closing process.
The closing process will be stopped. Rese
esetting
tting the
the sliding sunroof
sunroof
Roller sunblinds
# Push the 3 button up to the point of resist-
The sliding sunroof
sunroof cannot
cannot be closed and you
you can- Extending the
Extending the rear
rear side window
window roller
roller sunblinds
ance repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is
nott see the
no the cause. fully open.
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the * NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it
# Press the 3 button for another second.
panorama sliding sunroof. snapping back
# Close the sliding sunroof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may
and reopens again slightly: be damaged.
 Opening and closing 99

# Always move the roller sun blind by Extending

Ext ending or retr
retracting
acting the
the rear
rear-windo
-window
w roller
roller sun-
hand. blind
# Do not drive with the roller sun blind & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
hooked in and rear side windows opened extending or retracting the roller sunblind
at the same time.
Body parts may become trapped in the roller
sunblind's range of movement.
# Ensure there are no body parts in the
range of movement.
# If someone becomes trapped, brie y
press the button again.
The opening or closing process will
brie y be stopped. The roller sunblind
will then return to its starting position.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects

# To ext
extend
end or retr
retract
act:: press button 1.

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal-

function. Anti-the
Anti-the prot
protection
ection
# Do not store objects on the rear shelf. Function of the
the immobiliser
# Ensure that the roller sunblind can move The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being
# Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook freely. started without the correct key.
it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window.
100 Opening and closing

The immobiliser is automatically activated when R a er pressing the start/stop button with the
the vehicle is switched o , and deactivated when key in the stowage compartment
the vehicle is switched on. (/ page 168)
% When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call sys-
ATA (Anti-
(Anti-The
The Alar
Alarmm system)
system) tem is active and the alarm stays on for more
Function of the
the ATA
ATA syst
system
em than 30 seconds, a message is automatically
sent to the Customer Assistance Centre
If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible (/ page 347).
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
R when a door is opened Deactivating the
Deactivating the ATA
# Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
R when the boot lid is opened
key.
R when the bonnet is opened
or
R when interior protection is triggered # Press the start/stop button with the key in the
(/ page 101) stowage compartment (/ page 168)
R when tow-away protection is triggered Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is
(/ page 100) Deactivating the
Deactivating the alarm
alarm using KEYLESS-GO
primed.
# Grasp the outside door handle with the key
The ATA system is primed automatically a er The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the outside the vehicle.
approximately ten seconds in the following situa- following situations:
tions: R a er unlocking the vehicle with the key
R a er locking the vehicle with the key
Function of tow-awa
tow -awayy protection
protection
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alter-
ation to your vehicle's angle of inclination is
detected while tow-away protection is primed.
 Opening and closing 101

Tow-away protection is automatically primed a er Priming/deactiv

Pr iming/deactivating
ating tow-awa
tow -awayy protection
protection Interior protection is only primed when the follow-
approximately 60 seconds: ing components are closed:
Multimedia system:
R a er locking the vehicle with the key R doors
4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO R boot lid
# Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.
Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol- Tow-away protection is primed again in the follow- Interior protection is automatically deactivated:
lowing components are closed: ing cases: R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the
R doors R The vehicle is unlocked again. key
R boot lid R A door is opened. R a er pressing the start/stop button with the

R The vehicle is locked again.

key in the stowage compartment
Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated: (/ page 168)
R a er pressing the Ü or p button on the % If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehi- R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
key cle submenu in the Settings main menu to R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
R a er pressing the start/stop button with the prime or deactivate tow-away protection.
key in the stowage compartment The following situations can lead to a false alarm:
(/ page 168) Function of inter
interior
ior prot
protection
ection R when there are moving objects such as mas-
R a er unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO cots in the vehicle interior
When interior protection is primed, a visual and
R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS R when a side window is open
audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected
in the vehicle interior. R when a sliding sunroof is open
Information on collision detection on a parked
vehicle (/ page 214). Interior protection is primed automatically a er R when a panoramic sliding sunroof is open
approximately ten seconds:
R a er locking the vehicle with the key
R a er locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
102 Opening and closing

Priming/deactiv
Pr iming/deactivating
ating inter
interior
ior protection
protection
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access

# Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor.

Interior protection is primed again in the following

cases:
R The vehicle is unlocked again.
R A door is opened.
R The vehicle is locked again.

% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehi-

cle menu under Settings to prime or deacti-
vate interior protection.
 Seats and stowing 103

Notes on the
the correct
correct driv
driver's
er's seat position R Your legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- R The back of your head is supported at eye
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is level by the centre of the head restraint
in motion R You can hold the steering wheel with your
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- arms slightly bent
lowing situations in particular: R You can move your legs freely
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head R You can see all the displays on the instrument
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror cluster clearly
while the vehicle is in motion R You have a good overview of the tra c condi-
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- tions
cle is in motion R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, and passes across the centre of your shoulder
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, and across your hips in the pelvic area
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten Ensure the following when adjusting the steering
your seat belt. wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following points
into consideration:
R You are sitting in an upright position
R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
104 Seats and stowing

Seats # Make sure when adjusting a seat that no & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front seat manually
manually and electrically
electrically one has any body parts in the sweep of ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
(without
(without Seat Comfor
Comfortt Pack
Packag
age)
e) the seat. in motion

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the lowing situations in particular:
seats are adjusted by children dren in the vehicle".
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
Children could become trapped if they adjust & WARNING Risk of accident due to the restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
the seats, particularly when unattended. driver's seat not being engaged while the vehicle is in motion
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly
key with you and lock the vehicle. while driving. cle is in motion
# Never leave children unattended in the
This could cause you to lose control of the # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
vehicle. vehicle. adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
# Always make sure that the driver's seat steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is your seat belt.
switched o . is engaged before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
ing seat adjustment seat height is adjusted carelessly
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
seat guide rail. thereby injured.
 Seats and stowing 105

Children in particular could accidentally press Do not interchange the head restraints of the & WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be strain on the grab handle
become trapped. able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly. If you apply your full body weight to the grab
# While moving the seats, make sure that
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may
hands or other body parts do not get be damaged or become loose from its anchor-
under the lever assembly of the seat that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head. age.
adjustment system. # Use the grab handles only to stabilise
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the seating position or to assist in get-
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head incorrect seat position ting in and out of the seat.
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly The seat belt will not o er the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
If head restraints have not been installed or backrest to an almost vertical position. objects under the co-driver seat
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when and injure yourself. interfere with the function of the automatic
braking. # Adjust the seat properly before begin- co-driver airbag shuto or damage the system.
ning your journey. # Do not store any objects under the co-
# Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is driver seat.
in an almost vertical position and that # When the co-driver seat is occupied,
# Before driving o , make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the the shoulder section of your seat belt is make sure that no objects are trapped
head restraint supports the back of the routed across the centre of your shoul- under the co-driver seat.
head at about eye level. der.
106 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving Adjus

djusting
ting the
the front
front seat manually
manually and electrically
electrically
the seats back (with Seat Comfor
(with Comfortt Pack
Packag
age)
e)

The seats may be damaged by objects when

moving the seats back.
# When moving the seats back, make sure
that there are no objects in the footwell,
under or behind the seats.

1 Seat backrest inclination

2 Seat height
3 Seat fore-and-a position 1 Seat backrest inclination
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat for
ore-and-a
e-and-a position: li 2 Seat height
lever 3 and slide the seat into the desired 3 Seat cushion inclination
position. 4 Seat fore-and-a position
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. 5 Seat cushion length
 Seats and stowing 107

# To adjust
adjust the
the seat for
ore-and-a
e-and-a position: li Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front seat electrically
electrically # Save the settings with the memory function
lever 4 and slide the seat into the desired (/ page 117).
position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. Adjus
djusting
ting the
the 4-way
4-way lumbar support
# To adjust
adjust the
the seat cushion length:
length: li lever 5
and slide the front section of the seat cushion
forwards or backwards.

1 Head restraint height

2 Seat backrest inclination
3 Seat height
4 Seat cushion length 1 Higher
5 Seat cushion inclination 2 So er
6 Seat fore-and-a position 3 Lower
4 Firmer
108 Seats and stowing

# Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of & WARNING Risk of injury due to head
the backrest. restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
Head res
restr
traints
aints If head restraints have not been installed or
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front seat head res
restr
traints
aints manually have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is braking.
in motion # Always drive with the head restraints t-

You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- ted.

lowing situations in particular: # Before driving o , make sure for every

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head vehicle occupant that the centre of the
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror head restraint supports the back of the
while the vehicle is in motion head at about eye level.
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
# To raise:
raise: pull the head restraint up.
cle is in motion front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be # To lower:
lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, able to adjust the height and angle of the head tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, restraints correctly. down.
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so # To move
move forw
forwar
ards:
ds: pull the head restraint for-
your seat belt. that it is as close as possible to the back of your wards.
head. # To move
move backw
backwarards:
ds: press release knob 2
and push the head restraint backwards.
 Seats and stowing 109

Adjus
djusting
ting the
the head res
restr
traints
aints of the
the rear
rear seats Fitting/r
itting/remo
emoving
ving the
the rear
rear seat head res
restr
traints
aints # Push release knob 1 in the direction of the
mechanically
mechanically arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Remo
emoving
ving
The head restraints can be removed only in vehi- Installing
Installing
cles with folding rear seat backrests. # Insert the head restraint such that the notches
on the bar are on the le when viewed in the
direction of travel.
# Push the head restraint down until it engages.
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.

Con guring
guring the seat settings
settings
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the backr
backres
estt contour
contour in the
the lumbar
region of the
the seat backr
backres estt (lumbar)
# To raise:
raise: pull the head restraint up. # Select Lumbar.

# To lower:
lower: press release knob 1 in the direc- # Select the settings Z for the desired seat.

tion of the arrow and push the head restraint # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for- # Adjust the air cushions.
down. wards slightly (/ page 121).
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the backr
backres
estt side bolsters
bolsters
# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will # Select Side bolsters.
go.
110 Seats and stowing

# Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat. # Select On or Off.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap-
Setting
Setting the
the seat heating balance ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- % This setting is available only for individual user
# Select Seat heating balance. ately: pro les. For the guest pro le, automatic seat
# a) Tap the warning message on the
adjustment cannot be switched on or o .
# Adjust the heat distribution for the desired
seat. media display. Adjus
djusting
ting the
the driv
driver's
er's seat position to
to body size
or The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat
# b) Press a memory function position but-
position on the basis of the driver's body size and
Setting
Setting automatic
automatic seat adjustment
adjustment set this directly.
ton or a seat adjustment switch on the
# To setset the
the unit of measurement
measurement:: select cm or
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- driver's door.
The adjustment process will be stopped. ft/in.
ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er
# Set the size using the scale.
calling up a driver pro le
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Select Start positioning.
Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust- R Adapting the driver's seat position to body
ment of the driver's seat to the position saved The driver's seat position will be adjusted to
size: automatic seat adjustment has been the body size that has been set.
under the user pro le. You or other vehicle switched on.
occupants could be injured in the process. % If the driver's seat position calculated by the
# Make sure that when the position of the
Multimedia system: vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can
driver's seat is being adjusted via the 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle be changed manually at any time via the but-
multimedia system, no people or body 5 Automatic seat adjustment tons.
parts are in the seat's range of move- The exterior mirrors are not set via this func-
ment. Switching automatic
Switching automatic seat adjustment
adjustment on/o tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via
When the active user pro le is changed while the the switches.
vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, outside mir-
rors and seat contour will automatically be adap-
ted to the driver.
 Seats and stowing 111

% You can also con gure these settings via the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points Selecting the
the massage
massage progr
programme
amme for
for the
the front
front
Mercedes me portal for your user pro le. By become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. seats
synchronising the pro les in the vehicle and R Activating Massage Activating massage with
the Mercedes me connect pro les, you can Multimedia system:
upward-moving massage waves. 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage
carry over these settings for your vehicle. Fur-
ther information about synchronising user R Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. # Select a massage programme (/ page 111).
pro les . R Wave Massage Regenerating massage via # Start the program for the desired seat ;.
massage waves across the back and in the
Setting
Setting the
the easy entry
entr y and exit
exit feature
feature seat cushion. # To set
set the
the massage
massage intensity
intensity:: switch
switch High
# Switch the function on or o .
R Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage with intensity on or o .
% If you use an individual user pro le and have upward-moving massage waves. Can promote
set your body size, this information is carried slower, deeper respiration. This can improve Rese
esetting
tting seat settings
settings
over for the easy entry and exit feature. This the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.
causes the driver's seat to automatically move Multimedia system:
R Active Workout backrest and Active Workout 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort
into the correct position . cushion These programmes require your
cooperation. Alternating between tensing and # Select Î for the desired seat.

Over
Overvie
view
w of massage
massage progr
programmes
ammes releasing helps to improve blood ow to your # Con rm the prompt.
muscles. Press against a pressure point as
R Hot Relaxing back Combination of heat and soon as you feel it.
massage. It starts by massaging the back. In
addition, warm pressure points become
noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.
R Hot Relaxing shoulder Combination of heat
and massage. It starts by massaging the
112 Seats and stowing

Switching
Switching the
the seat heating on/o ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions
or child seats. This could cause damage to the
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly seat surface.
switching on the seat heating # Make sure that no objects or documents
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can are on the seats when the seat heater is
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad- switched on.
ding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limited Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to R The power supply is switched on.
react to high temperatures may be a ected or
they may even su er burn-like injuries.
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating

may be temporarily deactivated a er it has been # Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired
switched on repeatedly. heating level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator
objects or documents when the seat lamps are o , the seat heating is switched o .
heater is switched on % The seat heating will automatically switch
When the seat heater is switched on, over- down from the three heating levels a er 8, 10
heating may occur due to objects or docu- and 20 minutes until the seat heating is
switched o .
 Seats and stowing 113

Setting
Setting the
the panel heating Steer
eering
ing wheel
Multimedia system: Adjus
djusting
ting the
the steer
steering
ing wheel manually
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
5 Panel heating & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
When the seat heater is switched on, the armrests in motion
and the centre console can be heated.
# Switch the function for the desired seats on or You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
o . lowing situations in particular:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
Switching
Switching the
the seat ventilation
ventilation on/o while the vehicle is in motion
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
R The power supply is switched on. cle is in motion
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
blower setting has been reached. steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
Depending on the blower setting, up to three your seat belt.
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator
lamps are o , the seat ventilation is switched & WARNING Risk of entrapment for children
o .
when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust
the steering wheel.
114 Seats and stowing

# Never leave children unattended in the Locking

Locking
vehicle. # Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the # Check and make sure that the steering col-
key with you and lock the vehicle. umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Adjus
djusting
ting the
the steer
steering
ing wheel electrically
electrically
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
power supply is disconnected.

1 To adjust the distance to the steering wheel

2 To adjust the height
# Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 117).
# To unlock:
unlock: push release lever 1 down as far
as it will go.
# Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the
steering wheel.
 Seats and stowing 115

Switching
Switching the
the steer
steering
ing wheel heater
heater on/o When you switch the vehicle o , the steering
wheel heater will switch o . If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: steering wheel:
R The power supply or the vehicle has been # Move the adjustment lever of the steer-
switched on. Easy entry
entr y and exit
exit feature
feature ing wheel.
Using the
the easy entry
entr y and exit
exit feature
feature The adjustment process will be stopped.

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
away during the adjustment process of driver's seat:
the easy entry and exit feature # Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process will be stopped.
You could lose control of the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
# Always wait until the adjustment process
vehicle.
is complete before driving o .
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing adjustment of the easy entry and exit Vehicles with
with memory
memor y function: you can stop the
feature adjustment process by pressing one of the mem-
You and other vehicle occupants – particularly ory function position switches.
children – could become trapped.
# Ensure that no one has a body part in
# Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1 or
the sweep of the steering wheel or driv-
2.
er's seat.
If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering
wheel heater is switched on.
116 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move Setting
Setting the
the easy entry
entr y and exit
exit feature
feature
children activate the easy entry and exit back to the last drive position in the following
cases: Multimedia system:
feature‑ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on
Children could become trapped if they acti- when the driver's door is closed
5 Automatic seat adjustment
vate the easy entry‑ and exit feature, particu- 5 Easy Entry/Exit
larly when unattended. R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is
# Activate or deactivate the function.
# Never leave children unattended in the
switched on.
vehicle. The last drive position will be saved when:
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the R You switch o the vehicle. Memoryy function
Memor
key with you and lock the vehicle. R Vehicles with
with memory
memor y function: you call up the Function of the
the memory
memor y function
seat settings via the memory function.
If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the & WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem-
R Vehicles with
with memory
memor y function: you save the
steering wheel will move upwards and the driver's ory function is used while driving
seat will move back in the following situations: seat settings via the memory function.
If you use the memory function on the driver's
R You switch o the vehicle when the driver's Vehicles with
with memory
memor y function: press one of the side while driving, you could lose control of
door is open. memory function position switches to stop the the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is adjustment process. being made.
switched o . # Only use the memory function on the

% The steering wheel will then move upwards driver's side when the vehicle is station-
only if it is not already as high as it will go. ary.
The driver's seat will then move backwards
only if it is not already at the rear of the seat
adjustment range.
 Seats and stowing 117

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when # When leaving the vehicle, always take the Operating
Oper ating the
the memory
memor y function
adjusting the seat with the memory func- key with you and lock the vehicle. Stor
oring
ing
tion
You can use the memory function when the vehi-
When the memory function adjusts the seat, cle is switched o .
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
children – could become trapped. stored and called up using the memory function.
# During the adjustment process of the
You can save settings for the following systems:
memory function, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the R Seat, backrest and head restraint
seat. R Steering wheel
# If someone becomes trapped, press a R Outside mirrors
preset position button or seat adjust- R Head-up display
ment switch immediately.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the mem-

ory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when # Set the desired position for all systems.
unattended. # Brie y press the V memory button and
# Never leave children unattended in the then press preset position button 4, T
vehicle. or U within three seconds.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
stored.
118 Seats and stowing

# To call up: press or brie y hold preset position over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi- # Always stow objects in such a way that
button 4, T or U. cle occupants. they cannot be thrown around in such
A er releasing the button, all systems are situations.
moved into the stored position. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change # Always make sure that objects do not
in direction. protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
Stowag
agee areas
areas # Always stow objects in such a way that nets or stowage nets.
Notes on loading the
the vehicle
vehicle they cannot be thrown around. # Close the lockable stowage spaces
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug- before starting a journey.
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning gage or loads against slipping or tipping # Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust over. pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust objects in the boot.
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
lid is open when the vehicle is running, espe- being stowed incorrectly Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag
cially if the vehicle is in motion. shutoo : objects trapped under the front
shut
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed passenger seat may interfere with the function of
# Always switch o the vehicle before incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
opening the boot lid. and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup damage the system. Please observe the notes on
# Never drive with the boot lid open. holders, open stowage spaces and mobile the function of the automatic front passenger air-
phone brackets cannot always retain all bag shuto (/ page 53).
objects they contain.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or in direction.
not secured su ciently, they could slip, tip
 Seats and stowing 119

& WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury # Only fold the rear armrest back when the * NOTE Damage to the stowage compart-
when using the cup holder while the vehi- cup holder is closed. ment under the ashtray due to intense
cle is in motion heat
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to The stowage compartment under the ashtray
while the vehicle is in motion. body weight is not heat resistant and could be damaged if
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in When folded out, the rear armrest can be you rest a lit cigarette on it.
motion, the container may be ung around damaged by body weight. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occu- # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear engaged.
pants may come into contact with the liquid seat armrest.
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury from the
could be distracted from tra c conditions and hot cigarette lighter
you may lose control of the vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the handle in the boot
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle
oor You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
is stationary. If the handle in the boot is le protruding, the heating element or the socket of the cigarette
handle may be damaged. lighter.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of
the right size. # Before closing the boot lid, detach the In addition, ammable materials may ignite if:
handle and press it down closed again. R you drop the hot cigarette lighter
# Always close the container, particularly if
the liquid is hot. R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup knob.
holder could become damaged.
120 Seats and stowing

# Always make sure that the cigarette The driving characteristics of your vehicle are R When transporting roof loads and when the
lighter is out of reach of children. dependent on the distribution of the load within vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select
the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind drive programs ; and A. These are
# Never leave children unattended in the when loading the vehicle: designed to focus on stability (/ page 183).
vehicle.
R never exceed the permissible gross mass or
% For more information on stowage compart-
the permissible axle loads for the vehicle ments and stowage areas, please refer to the
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe (including occupants).
and tailpipe trims Digital Owner's Manual.
Information can be found on the vehicle identi-
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can cation plate (/ page 415).
become very hot. If you come into contact R the load must not protrude above the upper
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
edge of the seat backrests.
yourself.
R always place the load behind unoccupied
# Always be particularly careful around the
seats if possible.
tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super-
vise children especially closely in this R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and
area. distribute the load evenly.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before Notes on driving with a roof load
touching them. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place
heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with
the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 118).
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling
away, braking and steering as well as rapid
cornering.
 Seats and stowing 121

Stowag
agee spaces in the
the vehicle
vehicle inter
interior
ior Through-loading featur
Through-loading featuree in the
the rear
rear bench
bench seat R Objects or loads in the boot cannot be
(EASY-PAC
(EASY-PACKK Quickf
Quickfold)
old) restrained by the seat backrest.
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the front
front stowag
stowagee compar
compartments
tments
Folding the
the rear
rear seat backr
backres
estt forw
forwar
ards
ds # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
rear seat and the seat backrest are
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
engaged before every trip.
adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself If the le and right seat backrests are not
or a vehicle occupant. engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that on the multifunction display on the instrument
no one has any body parts in the sweep cluster. If the centre seat backrest is not engaged
of the seat. and locked in place, the red lock veri cation indi-
cator will be visible.
1 Stowage spaces in the doors & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil-
USB ports and stowage space, e.g. for an backrest are not engaged
dren.
MP3 player Rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre If you no longer require the folded-down seat
can fold forwards. backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back
console with a USB port R As a result, the vehicle occupant is into place.
4 Glove compartment pressed against the seat belt. The seat
belt cannot perform its intended protective Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
function and could cause additional inju- R The area into which the seat backrest is folded
ries. is clear.
122 Seats and stowing

R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully # If necessary, fully insert the head restraints in
inserted. the rear seat backrest.
R To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: the # Pull release lever 1.
centre seat backrest has been unlocked. The corresponding seat backrest will fold for-
R The armrest on the second row of seats is fol- wards.
ded back and the cup holders are empty. Folding the
the centre
centre seat backr
backres
estt forw
forwar
ards
ds
Folding the
the le and right
right seat backr
backres
ests
ts forw
forwar
ards
ds
You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests
forwards separately.

# Vehicles without
without a memory
memor y function: move the
driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if
necessary.
# Vehicles with
with a memory
memor y function: if at least
one section of the rear seat backrest is folded
forwards, the corresponding front seat will
move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a
collision. # Pull release catch 3 for seat backrest 2 for-
wards.
 Seats and stowing 123

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for- # Vehicles without

without a memory
memor y function: move the # Fold the corresponding seat backrest 1 back
wards. driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if until it engages.
necessary. Le and right
right seat backr
backresests:
ts: if the seat back-
Folding back
back the
the rear
rear seat backr
backrest
est rest is not engaged and locked in place, this
# Vehicles with
with a memory
memor y function: if at least
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when one section of the seat backrest is folded will be shown on the multifunction display on
back, the corresponding front seat will auto- the instrument cluster.
adjusting the seats
matically return to the most recent original Centree seat backr
Centr backrest:
est: if the seat backrest is
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself position. not engaged and locked in place, the red lock
or a vehicle occupant. veri cation indicator 2 will be visible.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep Locking
Locking the
the release
release catch
catch of the
the centre
centre rear
rear seat
of the seat. backrest
backr est
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the R The le and centre seat backrests are
seat belt when folding back the seat back- engaged and joined together.
rest
You can lock the centre seat backrest release
The seat belt could become trapped and thus catch if you want to secure the boot against unau-
be damaged when the seat backrest is folded thorised access. The centre seat backrest can
back. then be folded forwards only together with the le
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap- seat backrest.
ped when folding back the seat backrest.
124 Seats and stowing

Att
ttac
aching
hing the
the luggag
luggagee net

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects

being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
# Fold the centre and le seat backrests for- 1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading situations.
wards. feature in the rear bench seat) # Always make sure that objects do not
# To lock
lock or unlock:
unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
downwards. nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces

Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the tie-down
tie-down eyes
eyes before starting a journey.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 118).
 Seats and stowing 125

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, # Vehicles without a through-loading feature in & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky the rear bench seat: hook the rings into the pressing the EASY-PACK boot box in
objects in the boot. luggage net's hooks 1.
Your hands may become trapped when you
# Hook the rings into the hooks on the boot
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. are pressing the boot box into the retracted
oor.
The luggage net is available for all vehicles except position. Children, in particular, may injure
hybrid vehicles. themselves when doing so.
EASY-PAC
EASY-PACK
K boot
boot box # Ensure that your hands are not in the

Adjus
djusting
ting the
the height of the
the EASY-PAC
EASY-PACK
K boot
boot box range of movement of the EASY-PACK
to any
any position boot box.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and key with you and lock the vehicle.
injured when raising the oor # Never leave children unattended in the
Your hands may become trapped on the frame vehicle.
of the EASY-PACK boot box and objects may
be thrown upwards. * NOTE Damage to the extended EASY-
# Ensure that your hands are not in the PACK boot box
# Vehicles with through-loading feature in the range of movement of the oor.
The EASY-PACK boot box may be damaged
rear bench seat: fold up the tie-down eyes. # If someone becomes trapped, carefully
when it is extended.
# Hook luggage net 1 into the front and rear push the centre of the oor downward. # Do not place any objects on or press
tie-down eyes. # Remove all objects from the oor before
down on the EASY-PACK boot box frame.
raising it. # Do not close the boot lid when the EASY-
PACK boot box is extended.
126 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK boot box % Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY-
by objects PACK boot box (/ page 372).

Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, fragile, Installing

Inst alling and remo
removing
ving the
the EASY-PAC
EASY-PACK
K boot
boot box
rounded or heavy and objects that roll can Installing
Inst alling
damage the EASY-PACK boot box and be
thrown out.
# Do not transport objects that are sharp-
edged, pointed, rounded or fragile and
objects that roll in the EASY-PACK boot
box.
# Always stow and secure such objects
outside of the box in the boot.
# Always observe the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK boot box.
# Do not use the EASY-PACK boot box # To remov
remove:
e: pull handle 2 on the box.
when the rear seats are folded forwards. # To increase
increase the
the load capacity: push the centre
of oor 1 downwards to the desired position
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK and box size.
boot box is 10 kg. To prevent the box from being
overloaded, the box oor will lower onto the boot # To reduce
reduce the
the load capacity: press button 3.
oor when the load reaches approximately 5 kg. # To stow: push the box in completely using han-
dle 2 until it locks in place.
 Seats and stowing 127

Remo
emoving
ving Att
ttac
aching
hing a roof
roof luggag
luggagee rack
rack

& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceed-

ing the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual
driving characteristics as well as the steering
and braking characteristics alter.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv-
ing characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.

You will nd information on the maximum roof

load in the "Technical data" section.
# Turn rotating catches 6 outward.
# Insert retainers 2 of box 1 into outer holes * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not
# Turn rotating catches 6 outward. observing the maximum permitted head-
3. # Lower box 1 and pull it out of the ancho- room clearance
# Raise box 1 and press hooks 5 into the rages on rear shelf 4.
anchorages of rear shelf 4. If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi-
# Pull box 1 back out of openings 3. mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof
# Turn rotating catches 6 inward. and other parts of the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
128 Seats and stowing

# Observe the signposted headroom clear- opened when the roof luggage rack is t-
ance. ted.
# If the vehicle height is greater than the # Position the load on the roof luggage
permitted headroom clearance, do not rack in such a way that the vehicle will
enter. not sustain damage even when it is in
# Observe the changed vehicle height with motion.
add-on roof equipment.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding
* NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage
roof luggage racks racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam-
racks that have not been tested and approved aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to
for Mercedes-Benz. open it when using a roof luggage rack not
# Use only roof luggage racks tested and
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# When a roof luggage rack is tted, open
approved for Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Damage to the covers
# Depending on the vehicle equipment,
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this
has been tested and approved for The covers may be damaged and scratched
ensure that the sliding sunroof can be Mercedes-Benz.
fully raised when the roof luggage rack is when being opened.
tted. The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised # Do not use metallic or hard objects.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

ensure that the boot lid can be fully
# Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
 Seats and stowing 129

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening Using the

the 230 V socket
socket in the
the rear
rear passenger
passenger
points beneath covers 1. compar
com partment
tment
# Comply with the installation instructions of the
roof luggage rack manufacturer. & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam-
age from a connecting cable or socket
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
You could receive an electric shock when pull-
ing the connecting cable or the 230 V power
Sockets
Socke ts socket out of the trim, or if it is damaged or
Using the
the 12 V socket wet.
# Use only connecting cables that are dry
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment
in the front centre console
and free of damage.
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
# When the vehicle is switched o , make
180 W (15 A). # Brie y press the trim element of the cover on sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle the front. # Immediately have the 230 V power
has a 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in The cover opens in the direction of the arrow.
socket checked or replaced at a quali ed
the front centre console. In addition, depending # Li up cap 1 of the socket and insert the specialist workshop if it is damaged or
on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has a 12 V plug of the device. has been pulled out of the trim.
socket in the stowage compartment in the rear
If you have connected a device to the 12 V # Never plug the connecting cable into a
centre console.
socket, leave the cover of the stowage compart- 230 V power socket that is damaged or
ment open. has been pulled out of the trim.
130 Seats and stowing

& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death due to using the USB port
por t in the
the rear
rear passenger
passenger compar
compartment
tment
socket incorrectly You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile
In particular, you could receive an electric phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging
shock: cable.
R if you touch the inside of the socket When the vehicle is switched on, the devices can
be charged with 5 V (up to 3 A).
R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket
# Do not touch the inside of the socket. Wir
ireless
eless char
charging
ging of the
the mobile phone and con-
nection with
with the
the ext
exter
erior
ior aerial
aerial
# Only connect suitable devices to the
socket. Notes on wirelessl
wirelesslyy char
charging
ging the
the mobile phone

Make sure that no liquids get into the 230 V & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
socket. being stowed incorrectly
When the 230 V socket is not in use, keep the If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
# Open socket ap 3. incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
socket ap closed.
# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: 1. holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
R Only connect devices with a suitable plug When the on-board electrical system voltage is phone receptacles cannot always retain all
which conforms to the standards speci c to su cient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. objects within.
the country you are in.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of event of sudden braking or a sudden change
150 W. in direction.
R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
 Seats and stowing 131

# Always stow objects so that they cannot * NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- R The charging function and wireless connection
be thrown around in such situations. ing them in the mobile phone stowage of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior
compartment aerial are only available if the vehicle is
# Always make sure that objects do not switched on.
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage If objects are placed in the mobile phone
nets or stowage nets. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be
stowage compartment, these may be dam- charged in every position of the mobile phone
# Close the lockable stowage spaces aged by electromagnetic elds. stowage compartment.
before starting a journey. # Do not place credit cards, storage
R Large mobile phones which do not rest at in
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, media, ski passes or other objects sensi- the mobile phone stowage compartment may
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky tive to electromagnetic elds in the not be able to be charged or connected with
objects in the boot/load compartment. mobile phone stowage compartment. the vehicle's exterior aerial.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. R The mobile phone may heat up during the
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow- charging process. This depends on the appli-
age compartment caused by liquids cations (apps) currently running.
& WARNING Risk of re from placing objects
in the mobile phone stowage compart- If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage The mobile phone can be cooled in the mobile
ment compartment, the compartment may be dam- phone stowage compartment when the air
aged. conditioning system is switched on. The cool-
Placing other objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment could constitute a re # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile ing output in the mobile phone stowage com-
hazard. phone stowage compartment. partment is highest when the controller in the
glove box is closed.
# Apart from a mobile phone, do not place
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the R To ensure more e cient charging and connec-
any other objects in the mobile phone mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
stowage compartment, especially those tion with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove
exterior aerial via the charging module. the protective cover from the mobile phone.
made of metal.
132 Seats and stowing

Protective covers which are designed for wire- # Place the mobile phone as close to the centre # Further information on the declaration of con-
less charging are excluded. of mat 1 as possible with the display facing formity for vehicle components which receive
R When charging, the mat should be used if pos- upwards. and/or transmit radio waves.
sible. When the charging symbol is shown in the
multimedia system, the mobile phone is being
charged. Fitting and remo
removing
ving the
the oor mats
Charging
Char ging a mobile phone wirelessly
wirelessly
Malfunctions during the charging process are & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: shown in the central display. in the driver's footwell
R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). using clean, lukewarm water. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can be
Radio equipment
equipment approval
approval numbers
numbers for
for Brazil
Brazil This jeopardises the operating and road safety
found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-
This device operates on a secondary basis, that is of the vehicle.
mobile.com.
to say it has no protection against harmful inter- # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
ference, not even from the same type of stations,
and must not cause interference with systems so that they cannot get into the driver's
operating on a primary basis. footwell.
# Always t the oor mats securely and as
This product is permitted in accordance with the
procedure de ned in Directive 242/2000 by the prescribed in order to ensure that there
Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and is always su cient room for the pedals.
meets the applicable technical requirements. # Do not use loose oor mats and do not

Further information is available on the ANATEL place oor mats on top of one another.
website. www.anatel.gov.br
 Seats and stowing 133

# To t: press studs 1 onto holders 2.

# To remov
remove:
e: pull the oor mat o holders 2.
134 Light and sight

Exterior
Exter ior lighting Infor
Information
mation about lighting systems
systems and your
your Light switch
responsibility
Notes on adjusting
adjusting the
the lights when driving
driving abroad
abroad Operating
Oper ating the
the light switch
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
Vehicles with
with static
static LED headlamps:
headlamps: It is not nec- only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
essary to convert the headlamps. The legal for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with
requirements are also met in countries in which the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal
tra c drives on the other side of the road. requirements and tra c situation.
Vehicles with
with Intellig
Intelligent
ent Light System:
System: before
crossing the border into countries in which tra c
drives on the other side of the road, it is neces-
sary to set the headlamps to symmetrical low
beam (/ page 142).
Once the headlamps have been converted:
R Oncoming tra c will not be dazzled.
R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as
far or as high.
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog
light" functions will not be available.
1 W Le -hand parking lights
The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical low 2 X Right-hand parking lights
beam when you return from abroad. 3 T Standing lights and licence plate light-
ing
4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
 Light and sight 135

5 L Low beam/high beam If the battery is insu ciently charged, the stand- The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
6 R Switches the rear fog light on/o ing lights or parking lights will be switched o are responsible for vehicle lighting.
automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
When low beam is activated, the T indicator Switching
Switching the
the rear
rear fog
fog lights on or o
The exterior lighting (except standing and parking
lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated lights) will switch o automatically when the driv- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
and replaced by the L low-beam indicator er's door is opened. R The light switch is in the L or à posi-
lamp. tion.
R Observe the notes on surround lighting
# Always park your vehicle safely using su cient
(/ page 142). # Press the R button.
lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Aut
utomatic
omatic driving
driving lights function Please observe the country-speci c laws on the
When the vehicle is switched on, the standing use of rear fog lamps.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the lights, low beam and daytime running lights are
standing lights switched on automatically depending on the light
conditions.
Operating the standing lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery. & WARNING Risk of accident when the
# Where possible, switch on the right X dipped beam is switched o in poor visi-
or le W parking light. bility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer
dipped beam may not be switched on auto-
than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not per-
matically if there is fog, snow or other causes
mitted in some countries. In this case, the stand-
of poor visibility such as spray.
ing lights are also switched on in the parking
lights position. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
136 Light and sight

Operating
Oper ating the
the combination switch
switch for
for the
the lights Switching on high beam
Switching # To indicate
indicate permanently:
permanently: push the combina-
# Turn the light switch to the L or à tion switch beyond the point of resistance in
position. the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
# Push the combination switch beyond the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow 1. Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the hazard
hazard war
warning
ning lights
When the high beam is activated, the indicator
lamp for low beam L will be deactivated
and replaced by the indicator lamp for high
beam K.
Switching o high beam
Switching
# Move the combination switch back to its start-
ing position.
Headlamp ashing
Headlamp
# Pull the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 3.
1 High beam Tur
urnn signal light
2 Turn signal light, right # To indicate
indicate br
brie
ie y: push the combination
3 Headlamp ashing switch brie y to the point of resistance in the
4 Turn signal light, le direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal light will ash # Press button 1.
# Use the combination switch to activate the three times.
desired function.
 Light and sight 137

The hazard warning lights will switch on automati- R Bad weather light (/ page 138) evaluated and the active headlamps function will
cally if: R City lighting (/ page 138) adjust the light in advance.
R the airbag has been deployed.
The system is active only when it is dark. Corner
Cor nering
ing light function
R the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of
more than 70 km/h to a standstill. Activ
ctivee headlamps
headlamps function
When you pull away again, the hazard warning
light system will switch o automatically at
approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o
the hazard warning light system using button 1.

Adap
daptiv
tivee functions, MULTIBEAM
MULTIBEAM LED
Intelligent
Intelligent Light System
System function
The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the The cornering light improves the illumination of
driving and weather situation and provide exten- the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning
ded functions for improved illumination of the R The headlamps follow the steering move- direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends,
road. ments. for example. It can be activated only when the low
The system comprises the following functions: R Relevant areas are better illuminated during a beam is switched on.
R Active headlamps (/ page 137) journey. The function is active in the following cases:
R Cornering light (/ page 137) The functions are active when the low beam is R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig-
R Motorway mode (/ page 138) switched on. nal light is switched on or the steering wheel
is turned
R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 138) Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course
of the lane in which you are driving will also be
138 Light and sight

R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h R the multifunction camera The function is automatically deactivated under
and when the steering wheel is turned R the navigation system the following conditions:
R When speeds greater than 100 km/h are
Roundabout and junction function: the cornering The function is not active in the following cases:
light will be activated on both sides based on an reached.
evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It
R at speeds below 80 km/h R When the rear fog light is switched o .
will remain active until a er the vehicle has le Enhanced fog
fog light function
the roundabout or the junction. Function of the
the bad weat
weather
her light
The enhanced fog light function reduces self-daz- The bad weather light reduces re ections in rainy
Motorwayy mode function
Motorwa zling and improves the illumination of the edge of conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the
Motorway mode increases the range and bright- the carriageway. headlamps. The driver and other road users are
ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility. dazzled less as a result.
The city lighting function
City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides
in urban areas using a broad distribution of light.
The function is active in the following cases:
R At low speeds
R In illuminated parts of urban areas

Switching
Switching the
the Intellig
Intelligent
ent Light System
System on/o
The function is automatically activated under the Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
The function will be active if a motorway journey following conditions: R The vehicle is switched on.
is detected by means of: R At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear
R the vehicle's speed fog light is switched on.
 Light and sight 139

Multimedia system: activated despite the presence of other road

4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights users.
5 Intelligent Light System # Always observe the road and tra c con-
# Switch the function on or o . ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist function account road, weather or tra c conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- cases:
tive Highbeam Assist R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians are obscured
R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches
e.g. by a barrier the prevailing light, visibility and tra c conditions. between the following types of light:
R Low beam
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognise other road users R High beam
with their own lighting, or may recognise them
too late. At speeds greater than 30 km/h:
R If no other road users are detected, the high
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
high beam will not be deactivated or will be beam will switch on automatically.
140 Light and sight

The high beam will switch o automatically in the Adap

daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into
following cases: account road, weather or tra c conditions.
Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus function
R At speeds below 25 km/h Detection may be restricted in the following
R If other road users are detected & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap- cases:
R If street lighting is su cient tive Highbeam Assist Plus R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
% The system's optical sensor is located behind are obscured
to:
the windscreen near the overhead control
panel. R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You
R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
Switching
Switching Adap
Adaptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist on/o to the prevailing light, visibility and tra c condi-
R road users whose lighting is obstructed,
Switching on
Switching e.g. by a barrier tions.
# Turn the light switch to the à position.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
# Switch on the high beam using the combina- Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road
tion switch. users with their own lighting, or may recognise
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, them too late.
the _ indicator lamp will light up on the In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
central display section of the instrument dis- high beam will not be deactivated or will be
play. activated despite the presence of other road
Switching o
Switching users.
# Always observe the road and tra c con-
# Switch o the high beam using the combina-
tion switch. ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
 Light and sight 141

ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright- R If highly re ective signs are detected, ULTRA
ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted RANGE Highbeam will be switched o auto-
maximum. matically.
Partial high beam does not include other road % The system's optical sensor is located behind
users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle the windscreen near the overhead control
them but enables full high beam illumination for panel.
the driver apart from the excluded vehicles.
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is su - Switching
Switching Adap
Adaptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus on/o
cient street lighting: Switching on
Switching
R The partial high beam and the high beam will # Turn the light switch to the à position.
be switched o automatically. # Switch on the high beam using the combina-
At speeds greater than 30 km/h: tion switch.
R If no other road users are detected, the high When the high beam is switched on automati-
beam will switch on automatically. cally in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will
light up on the central display section of the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically R If other road users are detected, the partial
instrument display.
switches between the following types of light: high beam will switch on automatically.
R Low beam Switching o
Switching
At speeds above 40 km/h:
# Switch o the high beam using the combina-
R Partial high beam R If no other road users are detected on a
tion switch.
R High beam straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be
R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam switched on automatically.
R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will switch on automatically.
142 Light and sight

Setting
Setting the
the low
low beam (vehicles
(vehicles with
with MULTIBEAM
MULTIBEAM Switching
Switching the
the surround
surround lighting on/o Inter
Interior
ior lighting
LED headlamps
headlamps only)
only)
Multimedia system: Adjus
djusting
ting the
the inter
interior
ior lighting
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Surround lighting
Front over
overhead
head control
control panel
5 Dipped-beams
When Surround lighting is active, the exterior
# Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or lighting lights up for 40 seconds a er the vehicle
Automatic. is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur-
round lighting is deactivated and the automatic
driving lights are activated.
Setting
Setting the
the ext
exter
erior
ior lighting switc
switch-o
h-o dela
delayy time
# Activate or deactivate the function.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The light switch is in the à position.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 1 p Front le reading lamp
5 Ext. light. del. sw. off
2 S Automatic interior lighting control
# Set the switch-o delay time. 3 c Front interior lighting
When the vehicle engine is switched o , the 4 u Rear interior lighting
exterior lighting will be activated for the set 5 p Front right reading lamp
time.
# To switch
switch on/o : press button 1 – 5
accordingly.
 Light and sight 143

Control
Contr ol panel in the
the grab
grab handle Adjus
djusting
ting the
the brightness
brightness Activ
ctivating
ating welcome
welcome lighting
# Select Brightness. # Select Colour.

# Adjust the brightness. # Select Welcome.

When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi-
Activ
ctivating
ating the
the brightness
brightness for
for zones ent lighting sequence will run.
# Select Brightness.

# Select Brightness zones.

Activ
ctivating
ating dependency on air conditioning set-
set-
tings
# Switch the function on or o .
# Select Colour.
or
# Select Climate.
# Set the brightness for the desired zones.
If changes are made to the temperature set-
1 p Rear reading lamp Activ
ctivating
ating multi-coloured
multi-coloured lighting ting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient
# Select Colour.
lighting will change brie y.
# To switch
switch on/o : press button 1.
# Select Multi-colour.
Switching
Switching the
the inter
interior
ior lighting switc
switch-o
h-o delay
# Select a colour combination.
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the ambient lighting time on/o
Multimedia system: Activ
ctivating
ating multi-coloured
multi-coloured animation Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting # Select Colour. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights
# Select Multi-colour animat.. 5 Int. light. del. sw. off
Setting
Setting the
the colour
The chosen colour combination will change at # Switch the switch-o delay time on or o .
# Select Colour.
prede ned intervals. When this function is active, the interior light-
# Set the desired colour.
ing lights up for a short time a er the vehicle
is locked.
144 Light and sight

Windscr
indscreen
een wipers
wipers and windscreen
windscreen washer
washer sys-
sys- 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
tem 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast and vehicle before changing the wiper
Switching
Switc hing the
the windscreen
windscreen wipers
wipers on/o blades.
# Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position 1 - 5. Moving the
Moving the wiper arms
arms into
into the
the replacement
replacement posi-
# Single wipe/washing:
wipe/washing: push the button on the tion
combination switch in the direction of arrow # Switch the vehicle on and then o again
1. immediately.
R í Single wipe
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the
R î Wiping with washer uid î button on the combination switch for
% Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a approximately three seconds (/ page 144).
car wash (/ page 367). The wiper arms will move into the replacement
position.
Replacing the
the windscreen
windscreen wiper blades Remo
emoving
ving the
the wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the screen.
windscreen wipers are switched on while
wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
1 g Windscreen wipers o
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal trapped by the wiper arm.
3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent
 Light and sight 145

Fitting the
the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
# Switch on the vehicle.

# Press the î button on the combination

switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
# Switch o the vehicle.

% Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-

larly and replace them in the event of visible
damage or ongoing smearing.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the

other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
far as it will go. in the direction of arrow 1.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position. until it engages in the locking position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
the direction of arrow 4. rectly.
146 Light and sight

Maintenance
Maintenance display % The duration until the colour changes varies & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis-
depending on the usage conditions. judgement of distance when using the
outside mirror
Mirrors
Mirrors The outside mirrors re ect objects on a
Operating
Oper ating the
the outside mirrors
mirrors smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
closer than they appear.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust- # Therefore, always look over your shoul-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is der in order to ensure that you are aware
in motion of the actual distance between you and
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- the road users driving behind you.
lowing situations in particular:
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
# Remove protective lm 1 from the mainte- cle is in motion
nance displays on the tips of the newly tted # Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
wiper blades. adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
When the colour of the maintenance displays
your seat belt.
changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper
blades.
 Light and sight 147

Folding the
the outside mirror
mirrorss in/out Adjus
djusting
ting the
the outside mirrors
mirrors The electrolyte is hazardous to health and cau-
# Press button 3 or 4 to select the outside ses irritation. It must not come into contact
mirror to be adjusted. with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or
# Press button 2 to adjust the position of the clothing or be swallowed.
mirror glass. # If you come into contact with electrolyte,
observe the following:
Engaging the
Engaging the outside mirrors
mirrors R Immediately rinse the electrolyte
# Vehicles without electrically folding outside from your skin with water and seek
mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into medical attention.
the correct position. R If electrolyte comes into contact with
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir- your eyes, immediately rinse them
rors: press and hold button 1. thoroughly with clean water and seek
You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly medical attention.
click into place. The outside mirror will now be R If the electrolyte is swallowed, imme-
set to the correct position. diately rinse your mouth out thor-
oughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek
# Brie y press button 1. Aut
utomatic
omatic anti-dazzle mirror
mirrorss function medical attention immediately.
R Immediately change out of clothing
Rese
esetting
tting the
the outside mirrors
mirrors & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poison- which has been contaminated with
% If the battery has been disconnected or com- ing due to the anti-dazzle mirror electro- electrolyte.
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must lyte R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- medical attention immediately.
folding function work properly. matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.
# Brie y press button 1.
148 Light and sight

The inside rear-view mirror and the outside mirror The front-passenger outside mirror will move back Stor
oring
ing the
the parking
parking position of the
the front-
front-
on the driver's side will automatically go into anti- to its original position when: passenger
passeng er outside mirror
mirror using rever
reverse
se gear
gear
dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sen- R you shi the transmission to another transmis-
sor on the inside rear-view mirror. Stor
oring
ing
sion position.
System limits
System R you are travelling at a speed greater than
The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if: 15 km/h.
R the vehicle is switched o . R you press the button for the outside mirror on
the driver's side.
R Reverse gear is engaged.
R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passeng
ont-passenger
er outside mirror
mirror parking
parking position
function
The parking position makes parking easier.
The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel
downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on
the front passenger's side when:
R the parking position is stored (/ page 148).
R the front-passenger mirror is selected.
# Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2.
R reverse gear is engaged.
# Engage reverse gear.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
 Light and sight 149

Calling up Area permeable

Area permeable to
to radio
radio waves
waves on the
the wind- The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio
# Select the front-passenger outside mirror screen
scr een waves.
using button 2.
# Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
to the stored parking position.

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the automatic
automatic mirror
mirror fold-
fold-
ing function
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle

# Switch Automatic fold-in on or o . Radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll systems, can

be mounted only on areas of the windscreen that
are permeable to radio waves 1.
The area permeable to radio waves 1 is best
visible from outside the vehicle when the wind-
screen is illuminated with an additional light
source.

Infrar
Infr ared-r
ed-ree ective windscr
windscreen
een function
The infrared-re ective windscreen is coated and
reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior.
150 Climate control

Over
Overvie
view
w of climate
climate control
control systems
systems 6 Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning
Notes on climate
climate control
control control panel (without stationary heater):
t calls up the air conditioning menu
An interior air lter in combination with the pre l- Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning
ter in the engine compartment must always be control panel (with stationary heater, plug-in
used so that the air conditioning system, pollution hybrid) or THERMOTRONIC air conditioning
level monitoring and the air ltration work cor- control panel (with/without stationary heater,
rectly. Use lters recommended and approved by plug-in hybrid): ! calls up the air condi-
Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work tioning menu, switches residual heat on/o
carried out at a quali ed specialist workshop. (/ page 153)
7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the air conditioning control
control panel 8 Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that control panel without stationary heater: 0
the corresponding function is activated. switches synchronisation on/o
(/ page 152)
THERMATIC air conditioning control panel with/with- Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air condition-
out stationary heater (example) ing control panel without stationary heater:
1 w Sets the temperature, le ¿ switches the A/C function on/o
2 _ Sets the air distribution (/ page 151)
3 H Sets the air ow or switches o climate Vehicles with a stationary heater: &
control switches the stationary heater on/o
4 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 158)
(/ page 152)
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen
 Climate control 151

Plug-in hybrid: & activates/deactivates Rear operating

operating unit in vehicles
vehicles with If climate control is switched o , the windows
"Immediate pre-entry climate control" THERMOTR
THERMO TRONIC
ONIC air conditioning control
control panel may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control
(/ page 157) o only brie y.
9 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o
(/ page 153) Switching
Switching the
the A/C function on/o using the
the air
A Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning conditioning control
control panel
control panel: ¿ switches the A/C func- The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es
tion on/o (/ page 151) the vehicle's interior air.
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air condition- # Press the ¿ button.
ing control panel: _ adjusts the air distri-
bution, right Switch o the A/C function only brie y; other-
B w Sets the temperature, right wise, the windows may mist up more quickly.
1 Sets the temperature Condensation may drip from the underside of the
2 Display vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not
3 Sets the air ow indicative of a fault.

Calling up the
the air conditioning menu
Operating the
Operating the climate
climate control
control system
system
Switching
Switching climate
climate control
control on/o Calling up the
the air conditioning menu using the
the
multimedia system
system
# To switch
switch on: set the air ow to level 1 or
# Select one of the temperature displays at the
higher using the H button.
lower edge of the media display.
# To switch
switch o : set the air ow to level 0 using
the H button.
152 Climate control

Calling up the
the air-conditioning
air-conditioning menu using the
the Climatee sty
Climat style
le # To set
set the
the air distr
distribution:
ibution: select ¯, P
button
button on the
the climate
climate control
control panel or O.
Climatee sty
Climat style
le function
# Press the ! button on the climate control # Set the air ow.
The following climate styles are available in auto-
panel. % Several air distribution options can be selec-
matic mode:
R FOCUS: high air ow, slightly cooler setting
ted at the same time, for example to set the
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the A/C function via the
the climate control for the windscreen and the
R MEDIUM: medium air ow, standard setting footwells simultaneously.
multimedia system
system
R DIFFUSE: low air ow, slightly warmer and The ¯ climate control for the windscreen
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidi es draught-free setting can only be selected for the rst seat row.
the vehicle's interior air.
# Call up the air-conditioning menu Setting
Setting the
the climate
climate sty
style
le
# Call up the air conditioning menu Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the climate
climate control
control syn-
(/ page 151).
(/ page 151). chr
hronisation
onisation function via the
the air conditioning con-
# Select First row of seats. trol
tr ol panel
# Select First row of seats or Second row of
# Select A/C.
seats. Climate control can be set centrally using the syn-
# Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu. chronisation function. The temperature and air
Setting
Setting climate
climate control
control to
to automatic
automatic mode distribution settings for the driver's side will be
# Select a climate style.
adopted automatically for the front passenger
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con- side.
trolled and maintained at a constant level by the Setting
Setting the
the air distr
distribution
ibution # Press the 0 button.
air supply.
# Press the à button.
# Call up the air conditioning menu The synchronisation function will be deactivated if
(/ page 151). the settings for one of the other climate control
# To switch
switch to
to manual mode: press the H or
_ button.
# Select a row of seats. zones are changed.
 Climate control 153

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the climate
climate control
control syn- Switching
Switching air-r
air-recir
ecirculation
culation mode on/o Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating ionisation
chr
hronisation
onisation function via the
the multimedia system
system # Press the g button. Ionisation improves the quality of the vehicle's
Climate control can be set centrally using the syn- The interior air will be recirculated. interior air. Ionisation of the interior air is odour-
chronisation function. The driver's settings for less.
temperature, air quantity and air distribution are Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to
# Call up the air conditioning menu
adopted automatically for all climate zones. fresh air mode a er a while.
(/ page 151).
# Call up the air conditioning menu % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
# Select Air quality.
(/ page 151). windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only brie y. # Select IONISATION.
# Select First row of seats.

# Select SYNC.
Switching
Switching the
the residual
residual heat on/o Fragr
agrance
ance system
system

Demisting
Demis ting the
the windows Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Setting
Setting the
the fragr
fragrance
ance system
system
R The vehicle is parked.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Window
indowss misted
misted up on the
the inside R Automatic climate control is activated.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
# Press the à button.
from the engine to continue heating or ventilating R The glove compartment is closed.
# If the windows continue to mist up: press the the front compartment of the vehicle for approx-
¬ button. imately 30 minutes. The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra-
# To switch
grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a-
Window
indowss misted
misted up on the
the outside switch on: press the ! button.
con located in the glove box.
# Switch on the windscreen wipers. Residual heat is switched o automatically. # Call up the air conditioning menu
# Press the à button. (/ page 151).
# Select Air quality.
154 Climate control

# Select AIR FRESHENER. + ENVIRONMENTAL

ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
# Keep pressing until the desired intensity is damage due to improper disposal of full
reached. acons
Inser ting or remo
Inserting removing
ving the
the acon of the
the fragr
fragrance
ance
system
system
& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per- Full acons must not be disposed of
fume with household waste.
#
If children open the acon, they could drink
the liquid perfume or it could come into con-
tact with their eyes.
Full acons must be taken to a
# Do not leave children unattended in the
harmful substance collection point.
vehicle.
# Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk. 1 Cap
# If liquid perfume comes into contact with 2 Flacon
your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with
clean water. # To insert:
insert: slide the acon into the holder as far
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
as it will go.
# To remov
remove: e: pull out the acon.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety noti-
ces on the perfume packaging.
 Climate control 155

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior Pre-entr

Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control using the
the key R Ionisation
perfume acon when it is empty and do not re ll
it. Function of pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control using the
the Setting
Setting pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control via key
key # Call up the air conditioning menu.
Re llable acon Before entering the vehicle, the driver's seat area # Select Pre-entry climate ctrl.
# Unscrew the cap of the empty acon. or the whole vehicle interior can be brie y pre-
warmed or pre-cooled. Tur
urning
ning on/o
# Fill the acon with a maximum of 15 ml.
When pre-cooling, the following functions are acti- # Select Z.
# Screw the cap back on to the acon.
vated as needed: # Select Pre-entry climate control via key.
Always re ll the empty re llable acon with the R Automatic climate control
same perfume. Observe the separate information Switching pre-entr
Switching pre-entryy climate
climate control
control via the
the key
R Blower
sheet with the acon. on/o
R Seat ventilation
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Infor
Information
mation on the
the windscreen
windscreen heater
heater When pre-heating, the following functions are acti- R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
vated as needed: ciently.
The windscreen heater is switched on automati- R Automatic climate control R The function has been activated via the multi-
cally if the ¬ button is activated.
R Blower media system.
A er the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater
will be switched on automatically as required. R Seat heater # To switch
switch on: unlock the vehicle.
R Steering wheel heater The climate control functions are activated for
R Panel heating
up to ve minutes for pre-heating and pre-
cooling.
R Mirror heater
R Rear window heater
R Fragrancing
156 Climate control

Pre-entry climate control via the key cannot be period of time, there is a risk of serious injury R Blower
activated more than twice when the vehicle is or danger to life. R Seat ventilation
switched o . # Never leave persons, children in particu-
# To switch
switch o : push the & button up or For heating, the following functions are activated
lar, unattended in the vehicle. as needed:
down.
R Automatic climate control
The following functions will remain active once the The vehicle interior can be air conditioned when
vehicle has been started: the vehicle is parked. R Blower
R Seat heating When the vehicle is connected to power supply R Seat heating
R Seat ventilation equipment, priority is given to charging the high- R Steering wheel heater
voltage battery to a speci ed minimum charge. R Panel heating
R Panel heating
The running time of pre-entry climate control may R Mirror heater
R Fragrancing
be reduced under the following conditions:
R Ionisation R Rear window heater
R The vehicle is not connected to power supply
equipment. R Fragrancing
Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control at departur
depar turee time R The high-voltage battery is not charged su - R Ionisation

Pre-entryy climate
Pre-entr climate control
control for
for departur
depar turee time func- ciently. Setting pre-entr
Setting pre-entryy climate
climate control
control for
for departure
depar ture
tion With active pre-entry climate control, the charge time
level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, # Call up the air conditioning menu.
& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure even if the charging cable connector is connec- # Select Pre-entry climate ctrl.
to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle ted.
If people, particularly children, are exposed to Setting
Setting a single departur
depar turee time
For cooling, the following functions are activated
extreme temperatures over an extended # Select ONCE.
as needed:
R Automatic climate control # Set a departure time.
 Climate control 157

Changing the
the active
active departur
depar turee time # To activat
activate:
e: set the departure time Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating immediate
immediate pre-entr
pre-entryy cli-
# Select the pen icon next to the displayed (/ page 156). mate control
mate control
departure time. Pre-entry climate control for departure time
switches on a maximum of 55 minutes before & WARNING Danger to life due to exposure
# Set a departure time.
the selected departure time. It will remain to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
Setting
Setting the
the week
week pr
proo le active for another ve minutes if the departure
If people, particularly children, are exposed to
# Select WEEK PROFILE.
is delayed.
extreme temperatures over an extended
# To deactivat
deactivate:
e: push the & button up or period of time, there is a risk of serious injury
# Set the desired departure times, e.g. every
day at 08:00. down. or danger to life.
The following functions will remain active once the # Never leave persons, children in particu-
Selecting the
the zone vehicle has been started: lar, unattended in the vehicle.
# Select Z. R Seat heating
# Select Driver's seat only. R Seat ventilation
Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con-
If the Driver's seat only setting is deactivated, tinue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is
R Panel heating interrupted.
pre-entry climate control takes place for the
entire vehicle. R Fragrancing
R Ionisation
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating pre-entr
pre-entryy climate
climate control
control
for departur
depar turee time
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The high-voltage battery is charged su -
ciently.
R The function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
158 Climate control

# Press button 1. Switching the

Switching the stationar
stationaryy heater/v
heater/ventilation
entilation on/o
The red or blue indicator lamp on button1 via the
the operating
operating unit
will light up or go out.
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury due to poison-
ous exhaust gases
Stationar
ationaryy heater/v
heater/ventilation
entilation
If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventila-
Stationar
ationaryy heater/st
heater/stationar
ationaryy ventilation
ventilation function tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
The following functions are performed: such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi-
R The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventila- cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if
ted to the set temperature. the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
# Always switch the stationary heater o in
R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled
down to temperatures below the outside tem- enclosed spaces without an air extrac-
perature. tion system, e.g. in garages.
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around
R If the outside temperature changes, ventilation
mode automatically switches to heating mode the vehicle free from snow when the
The colours of the indicator lamp have the follow- or heating mode automatically switches to vehicle or the auxiliary heating is run-
ing meanings: ventilation mode. ning.
R Blue: cooling is activated. # Open a door or a roof hatch on the wind-
The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet ward side of the vehicle to ensure an
R Red: heating is activated. are situated at the right-hand front wheel. adequate supply of fresh air.
R Yellow: the departure time has been preselec-
ted.
# Set the desired temperature using thew
button.
 Climate control 159

& WARNING Risk of re due to hot station- Req

equir
uirements:
ements: Setting the
Setting the stationar
stationaryy heater/v
heater/ventilation
entilation via the
the
R The fuel tank is lled to at least the reserve multimedia system
system
ary heater components and exhaust gases
level. # To call up the air conditioning menu
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or (/ page 151).
twigs may ignite. # Set the desired temperature using the w
# Select Auxiliary heating.
# When the stationary heater is switched
button.
# Press the & button. Selecting the
the departur
depar turee time
on, make sure that:
R hot vehicle parts do not come into The red or blue indicator lamp on the button # Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or
contact with ammable materials. will light up or go out. TIME C: XX.
R the exhaust gas can ow out of the The colours of the indicator lamp have the follow-
ing meanings: Setting
Setting the
the departur
depar turee time
stationary heater exhaust pipe unhin-
# Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or
dered. R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
R the exhaust gas does not come into
TIME C: XX.
R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
contact with ammable materials. # Select the pen beside the time.
R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.
# Set a time.

* NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta- The stationary heater/ventilation will switch o
automatically a er 50 minutes. Setting the
Setting the stationar
stationaryy heater/v
heater/ventilation
entilation via
tionary heater or stationary ventilation remot
emotee control
control
operation Operation
Oper ation using the
the app: the stationary heater/
ventilation can also be operated via the Mercedes Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Operating the stationary heater or stationary me connect app. You can nd further information R The fuel tank is lled to at least the reserve
ventilation drains the battery. in the separate Owner's Manual at https:// level.
# A er heating or ventilating the vehicle moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/baix/
twice, drive for a longer period of time. cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/
Startseite.html.
160 Climate control

Switching
Switching on immediately
immediately # Press the u and ^ buttons simultane- Switching o immediat
Switching immediately
ely
ously. # Press and hold the ^ button.
The Î symbol on the remote control display
will ash. Over
Ov ervie
view
w of the
the remot
remotee control
control displays
displays (station-
(station-
# Use the , and . buttons to set the ar y heater/v
ary heater/ventilation)
entilation)
desired departure time.
# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane-
ously.
The new departure time will be stored.

Up to three departure times can be stored.

# To activat
activatee the
the departur
depar turee time: select the
desired departure time and press and hold
the u button.
The Í symbol, the departure time and,
depending on the selected departure time, the 1 Stationary ventilation switched on
letter A, B or C will appear on the display. 2 Stationary heater switched on
# Press and hold the u button. # To deactivat
deactivatee the
the departur
depar turee time: select the 3 Selected departure time
Setting
Setting the
the departur
depar turee time desired departure time and press and hold 4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/
# Brie y press button u . the ^ button. ventilation (in minutes)
OFF will appear on the display. 5 Stationary heater/ventilation active
# Press the , or . button repeatedly
# To chec
checkk the
the status
status of the
the active
active stationar
stationaryy
until the time to be changed appears on the 6 Departure time activated
display. heater
heat er:: brie y press the u button. 7 Signal strength
 Climate control 161

Further possible displays: do not use the key and keep it away from Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
R Time: the activated departure time. children. battery replaced at a quali ed specialist work-
shop.
R Zer
Zeroo minutes:
minutes: the running time for the station- # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
ary heater is extended because the engine has attention immediately.
not yet reached operating temperature when it
is started. + ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
R OFF: the stationary heater/ventilation is damage due to improper disposal of bat-
switched o . teries
Replacing the
the remot
remotee control
control batter
batteryy (stationary
(stationary
heater)
heater)
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries if batteries Batteries contain toxic and corro-
are swallowed sive substances.
# Push a pointed object into recess 1.
#
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- # Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the direc-
ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe tion of the arrow and remove the empty bat-
internal burns within two hours. tery.
Take discharged batteries to a
There is a risk of fatal injury. quali ed specialist workshop or to a col- # Insert new battery 3 with the lettering facing
# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil- lection point for used batteries. upwards.
dren.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
# Slide battery cover 2 in the opposite direc-
# If the cover and/or lid of the battery
R One CR2450 lithium battery tion to the arrow onto the remote control until
compartment does not close securely, the battery cover engages.
162 Climate control

Rectifying problems
problems with
with the
the remot
remotee control
control for
for # Have the stationary heater checked at a quali-
the stationar
stationaryy heater/v
heater/ventilation
entilation ed specialist workshop.
FAIL ¨ appear
appearss on the
the remot
remotee control
control display
Possible cause: Air vents
vents
R The signal transmission between the transmit- Adjus
djusting
ting the
the front
front air vents
vents
ter and receiver is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to
# Change your position in relation to the vehicle, being too close to the air vents
moving closer if necessary.
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air
FAIL appears
appears on the
the remot
remotee control
control display vents. # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the le
Possible cause: # Make sure that all vehicle occupants or right as far as it will go.
R The starter battery is not su ciently charged. always maintain a su cient distance # To adjust
adjust the
the air direction:
direction: hold air vent 1 in
from the air vents. the centre and move it up or down or to the
# Charge the starter battery. # If necessary, direct the air ow to another le or right.
R The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel area of the vehicle interior.
level.
To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air
# Refuel at the nearest lling station.
vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the fol-
FAIL ¯ appear
appearss on the
the remot
remotee control
control display lowing:
Possible cause: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in
R There is a malfunction in the stationary heater. the vehicle interior clear.
R Keep the air inlet free of deposits
(/ page 367).
 Climate control 163

Adjus
djusting
ting the
the rear
rear air vents
vents # Close the air vent when you heat the
vehicle.
# At high outside temperatures, open the
air vent and switch on the A/C function.

The automatic climate control must be switched

on to cool the glove box.

# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the le

or right as far as it will go.
# To set
set the
the air ow dir
direction:
ection: hold air vent 1 in
the centre and move it up or down or to the
le or right. 1 Air vent controller
2 Air vent
Opening or closing the
the air vent
vent in the
the glove
glove box
# To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
* NOTE
NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive right or le .
objects in the glove box
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the
glove box may be damaged by the air vent
located inside the glove compartment.
164 Driving and parking

Driving
Driving Notes on plug-in hybr
hybrids
ids # Leave the danger zone immediately.
Notes on Mercedes-
Mercedes-AMG
AMG vehicles
vehicles Notes on plug-in hybr
hybrid
id operation
operation Secure the danger zone at a su cient
distance.
Observe the notes on the following topics in the & WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poi- # Call the re brigade.
Supplement, otherwise you may fail to recognise soning from damaged high-voltage battery
dangers. The hybrid system combines a combustion engine
% The availability of certain functions depends If the housing of the high-voltage battery has
been damaged, electrolyte and gases may with an electric motor.
on the equipment and model of the vehicle. Characteristics when the vehicle is at a standstill:
leak out.
R Emotion Start
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or R The combustion engine is generally switched
R AMG performance exhaust system clothing. o .
R AMG ceramic high-performance composite # Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes R Idle speed only occurs in certain instances.
brake system o with water and seek medical atten-
Characteristics when starting the vehicle:
R RACE START tion straight away.
R If the high-voltage battery is su ciently
R DRIFT MODE
& DAN charged, the vehicle can be started with the
R AMG RIDE CONTROL + ANGER
GER Risk of explosion from excessive electric drive without the combustion engine
internal pressure of the high-voltage bat- (noiseless start).
R AMG steering-wheel buttons
tery
R If the high-voltage battery for the electrical
Flammable gas may escape and ignite in the drive is not su ciently charged or the operat-
event of a vehicle re. ing temperature of the combustion engine has
# Stop the charging process immediately not been reached, the vehicle can start with
in case of unusual odours, smoke or the combustion engine.
burn marks.
 Driving and parking 165

% Depending on the system, it may happen that R The high-voltage battery is charging. forward or backing up at a speed of up to
even though the high-voltage battery is around 30 km/h.
charged, electric mode has restricted or no Notes on electric mode:
R This helps other road users, particularly
availability. Once the combustion engine has R Vehicles with hybrid systems generate signi -
pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle
been operated for long enough, electric mode cantly less noise when stationary and when better.
is again available without restriction. being driven than vehicles with combustion
engines. R When driving at speeds above 20 km/h The
Characteristics with moderate power output vehicle acoustic warning system gradually
requests: R When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may
switches o .
R The combustion engine is switched o as not be heard by other road users due to the
signi cantly reduced noise generated. R The sound generator is o when the vehicle is
o en as possible during the journey. stationary.
R The vehicle can, depending on the drive pro- It is for this reason that the vehicle is equip-
gram selected and the battery charge level, be ped with a sound generator, which serves as Manual disconnection of the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee on-
accelerated electrically up to speeds of about an acoustic vehicle warning system (AVAS). boardd electrical
boar electrical system
system
140 km/h. R If not all of the vehicle conditions for electric
mode are met, then the combustion engine is & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death and re due to
Characteristics with high power output requests: switched on. modi ed and/or damaged components of
R The electric motor supports the combustion the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
engine (boost e ect), e.g. when pulling away % Vehicles with
with diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt
lter
ers:
s: During tem
or accelerating. the regeneration of the diesel particulate l-
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical
ter, the drive programmes are not available or
R The high-voltage battery is discharging. system is under high voltage. If you modify
are restricted and the battery charge level
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage
Characteristics when releasing the accelerator may change.
on-board electrical system or touch damaged
pedal during the journey: Notes on the acoustic vehicle warning system: component parts, you may be electrocuted. In
R The electric motor is operated as a alternator R The sound generator generates speed-depend- addition, modi ed and/or damaged compo-
when in overrun mode and during braking. ent vehicle noise emissions when driving nents may cause a re.
166 Driving and parking

In the event of an accident or impact to the Req

equir
uirements:
ements: Operating
Oper ating the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee disconnect device
device
vehicle underbody, components of the high- Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electri-
voltage electrical system may be damaged cal system manually in the following situations:
although the damage is not visible. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
# Never make any modi cations to the up in the Instrument Display, e.g. a er an
high-voltage on-board electrical system. accident.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. a er an
high-voltage on-board electrical system accident, and the restraint system compo-
components have been modi ed or dam- nents have not been triggered.
aged.
# Never touch damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
# A er an accident, do not touch any com-
ponents of the high-voltage on-board
electrical system.
# A er an accident, have the vehicle trans- # Switch o the vehicle.
ported away. # Shi the transmission to position j.
# Have the components of the high-voltage # Apply the electric parking brake.
on-board electrical system checked at a # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
quali ed specialist workshop and
replaced if necessary. # Open the bonnet.
 Driving and parking 167

# Press release tab 1 in the direction of the R operate vehicle equipment and become
arrow and pull it out. trapped, for example.
# Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the
In addition, the children could also set the
direction of the arrow until it engages.
vehicle in motion by, for example:
The high-voltage on-board electrical system is
switched o . R releasing the parking brake.
R changing the transmission position.
All work on the hybrid drive system (including
a er disconnecting the high-voltage on-board R starting the vehicle.
electrical system manually) may only be carried # Never leave children unattended in the
out by a quali ed specialist workshop. vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Switching
Switching on the
the power
power supply
supply or the
the vehicle
vehicle key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
children.
to leaving children unattended in the vehi- # To switch
switch on the
the power
power supply:
supply: press button
cle Req
equir
uirements:
ements: 1 once.
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised. You can, for example, activate the windscreen
they could, in particular: R the brake pedal is not depressed. wiper.
R open doors, thereby endangering other
The power supply is switched o again if the fol-
persons or road users. lowing conditions are met:
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
R you open the driver's door.
R you press button 1 twice more.
168 Driving and parking

# To switch
switch on the
the vehicle:
vehicle: press button 1 # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the instrument display: start the vehicle with the
twice. stationary heater running in an enclosed key in the marked space (emergency opera-
Indicator and warning lamps go on in the space without su cient ventilation. tion mode) (/ page 168).
instrument cluster. % You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To
The vehicle is switched o again if one of the fol- & WARNING Risk of re due to ammable do this, press button 1 for about three sec-
lowing conditions is met: material in the engine compartment or the onds or by pressing button 1 three times
R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes exhaust system within three seconds. Be sure to observe the
and the transmission is in position j or the safety notes under "Driving tips"
Flammable materials may ignite. (/ page 172).
electric parking brake is applied.
# Therefore, check regularly that there are
R you press button 1 once. Observe any information regarding display mes-
no ammable materials in the engine sages that can be displayed on the instrument
compartment or on the exhaust system. display.
Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with the
the key
key in the
the marked
marked
Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with the
the star
start/st
t/stop
op button
button R the key is in the vehicle and is recognised. space (emergency
(emergency operation
operation mode)
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by # Shi the transmission to position j or i. key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
exhaust gases # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 message appears in the instrument display, you
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust once. can start the vehicle in emergency operation
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling # If the vehicle does not start: switch o non- mode.
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health essential consumers and press button 1
and leads to poisoning. once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis-
play message Place the key in the marked
space See Owner's Manual appears in the
 Driving and parking 169

If the
the vehicle
vehicle does not
not start:
start: Charging the
Charging the start
starter
er batter
batteryy befor
beforee star
starting
ting the
the
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2 and journey
jour ney
leave it there. You can receive a message on your smartphone
when the state of charge of the starter battery is
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
low. You can then start the vehicle with the smart-
using the start/stop button. phone to charge the battery. The vehicle is auto-
% You can switch on the power supply or the matically switched o a er ten minutes.
vehicle with the start/stop button. Ensure the following before starting the engine:
Observe any information regarding display mes- R The legal stipulations in the area where your
sages that can be displayed on the instrument vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
# Make sure that the marked space 2 is display. smartphone.
empty. R It is safe to start and run the engine where
# Remove the key 1 from the key ring. Star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle via Remot
Remotee Online Services
Ser vices your vehicle is parked.
# Place the key 1 in the marked space 2. Cooling or heating the
the vehicle
vehicle inter
interior
ior before
before R The fuel tank is su ciently full.
The vehicle will start a er a short time. starting
star ting the
the journey
journey
Star
St arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle (Remot
(Remotee Online)
When you remove the key 1 from the marked Ensure the following before starting the engine:
space 2, the vehicle can be driven. For fur- R The legal stipulations in the area where your & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment
ther engine starts however, the key 1 must vehicle is parked allow engine starting via due to unintentional starting of the engine
be located in the marked space 2 during the smartphone.
entire journey. Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
R It is safe to start and run the engine where engine is started unintentionally during service
# Have the key 1 checked at a quali ed spe- your vehicle is parked. or maintenance work.
cialist workshop. R The fuel tank is su ciently full.
R The starter battery is su ciently charged.
170 Driving and parking

# Always secure the engine against unin- R By pressing the Ü or ß button on the R Shi to the next highest gear at the very latest
tentional starting before carrying out key when the needle reaches the last third before
maintenance or repair work. the red area in the rev counter.
% Further information can be found in the
smartphone app. R Do not shi down manually in order to brake.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
R Park position j is selected. Securing the
Securing the vehicle
vehicle agains
againstt star
starting
ting befor
beforee carry- full throttle.
R The anti-the alarm system is not activated. ing out maintenance
maintenance or repair
repair wor
work: k:
# Switch on the hazard warning light system. R do not depress the accelerator pedal past the
R The hazard warning light system is switched pressure point (kickdown).
o . or
R Only increase the engine speed gradually and
# Unlock the doors.
R The bonnet is closed. accelerate the vehicle to full speed a er
R The doors are closed and locked. or 1,500 km.
# Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone.
A er every engine start, the engine runs for Running-in notes
notes Please also observe the following running-in
ten minutes. To preserve the engine during the rst 1,500 km: notes:
R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive R Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds. the sensors adjust automatically while a cer-
starting attempts. You must start the engine with tain distance is being driven a er the vehicle
the key before trying to start the vehicle again R Do not drive at speeds greater than
has been delivered or a er repairs. Full sys-
with the smartphone. 140 km/h. tem e ectiveness is not reached until the end
You can switch o the vehicle at any time as fol- R Drive the vehicle in drive program A of this teach-in process.
lows: or ;. R Brakepads, brake disks and tyres that are
R Via the Smartphone App either new or have been replaced only achieve
 Driving and parking 171

optimum braking e ect and grip a er several If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid-
# Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for ding and accident! position.
the reduced braking e ect by applying greater # Select the sportiest available drive program
# Make sure that no persons or obstacles
force to the brake pedal. B or C(/ page 184).
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
# Deactivating ESP® (/ page 220).
Notes on optimised
optimised acceleration
acceleration Req
equir
uirements:
ements: # Depress and hold the brake pedal rmly with
R the vehicle is run in (/ page 170).
If all necessary requirements and activation con- your le foot.
ditions are ful lled, the best possible acceleration R the vehicle and tyres are in good condition. # With your right foot, fully depress the acceler-
can be achieved from a standstill. R you are on a high-grip roadway. ator pedal.
Do not use the optimised acceleration on public R the engine and transmission are at normal # A er no more than ve seconds, take your le
roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could operating temperature. foot quickly o the brake, but keep the accel-
lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased erator pedal depressed.
risk of skidding and/or accident. * NOTE
NOTE Increased wear due to optimised The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera-
Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa- acceleration tion.
tion on ESP® (/ page 219). When pulling away with optimised accelera- # Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce-
tion, all components of the drivetrain are sub- dure is complete.
Moving
Moving away
away with
with optimised
optimised acceleration
acceleration jected to a very high load.
Ending optimised
optimised acceleration
acceleration
This can lead to increased component wear.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
# Do not always pull away with optimised
accident from wheels spinning acceleration.
# Reactivate the ESP®.

When you use optimised acceleration, individ-

ual wheels could spin and you could lose con- # Engage the h drive position (/ page 188).
trol of the vehicle.
172 Driving and parking

% A er you pull away with optimised accelera- & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by
tion, components of the drivetrain can rect footwear exhaust gases
become very hot, which means that optimised
acceleration values may be reached again Incorrect footwear includes, for example: Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
only a er a few minutes. R shoes with platform soles gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
R shoes with high heels
and leads to poisoning.
Notes on driving
driving R slippers # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects There is a risk of an accident. stationary heater running in an enclosed
in the driver's footwell # Always wear suitable footwear so that
space without su cient ventilation.
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci-
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is dent due to shi ing down on slippery road
This jeopardises the operating and road safety surfaces
of the vehicle. switched o while driving
If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely If you switch o the vehicle while driving,
increase the engine braking e ect, the drive
so that they cannot get into the driver's safety functions are restricted or no longer
wheels may lose traction.
footwell. available.
# Do not shi down on slippery road surfa-
# Always t the oor mats securely and as This may a ect the power steering system and
ces to increase the engine braking
prescribed in order to ensure that there the brake force boosting, for example.
e ect.
is always su cient room for the pedals. You will need to use considerably more force
# Do not use loose oor mats and do not to steer and brake, for example.
place oor mats on top of one another. # Do not switch o the vehicle while driv-
ing.
 Driving and parking 173

& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury due to poison- # Do not depress the brake pedal and the * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
ous exhaust gases accelerator pedal at the same time while engine when pulling away
driving.
If the tailpipe is blocked or su cient ventila- # Do not warm up the engine while the
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi-
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively ately.
cle. This is the case if the vehicle gets stuck in high engine speeds # Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
snow, for example. The engine will be damaged if you drive with full throttle until the engine has reached
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the engine in the overrevving range. its operating temperature.
the vehicle free from snow when the # Do not drive with the engine in the over-
vehicle or the stationary heater is run- revving range. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
ning. due to non-combusted fuel
# Open a window on the side of the vehicle
* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by The engine is not running smoothly and is mis-
facing away from the wind to ensure an permanently depressing the brake pedal
adequate supply of fresh air. ring.
# Do not permanently depress the brake Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the pedal while driving. converter.
brake system overheating # To use braking e ect of the engine, shi # Only depress the accelerator pedal
to a lower gear in good time. slightly.
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when
# Have the cause recti ed immediately at
driving, the brake system may overheat.
a quali ed specialist workshop.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system can even fail.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
174 Driving and parking

* NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent # Observe the changed vehicle height with Therefore, observe the following notes:
short-distance trips add-on roof equipment. R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase
The 12 V battery may not be su ciently Notes on driving
driving with
with a roof
roof load, trailer
trailer or fully considerably or result in braking only on one
charged when the vehicle is used only for laden vehicle
vehicle side
short-distance trips. This reduces the life of When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or R maintain a much greater safe distance to the
the battery. trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu- vehicle in front
# Drive longer distances regularly to pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering
charge the battery. characteristics change. To remove salt build-up:
You should bear the following in mind: R brake occasionally while paying attention to
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and the tra c conditions
observing the maximum permitted head- towing capacity. Also observe the technical R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of
room clearance data in the printed Owner's Manual. the journey and when starting the next jour-
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place ney
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with Notes on aquaplaning
aquaplaning
and other parts of the vehicle may be dam- the notes on loading the vehicle Aquaplaning can take place once a certain
aged. (/ page 118). amount of water has accumulated on the road
# Observe the signposted headroom clear- R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling surface.
ance. away, braking and steering as well as rapid Observe the following notes during heavy precipi-
# If the vehicle height is greater than the cornering. tation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may
permitted headroom clearance, do not Notes on driving
Notes driving on salt-treat
salt-treated
ed roads
roads occur:
enter. The braking e ect is limited on salt-treated roads. R reduce speed
R avoid tyre ruts
 Driving and parking 175

R avoid sudden steering movements the tra c conditions until braking power has been R the vehicle that stopped in front of you starts
R brake carefully fully restored. up again.
R you manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking sharply or engage reverse gear.
wheels and tyres (/ page 395). ECO
ECO star
start/st
t/stop
op function
ECO star
ECO start/st
t/stop
op function % If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibi-
Notes on driving
driving thr
through
ough wat
water
er on the
the road
road sur- tor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will
face % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop
function is not available in all drive programs. not stop.
Water which has entered into the vehicle can If you activate the HOLD function or engage
damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Observe the status display in the instrument
display for this. the park position j, the engine can be
Water can also enter the air intake of the engine switched o in spite of an intelligent stop
and cause engine damage. The engine is switched o automatically in the fol- inhibitor.
lowing situations if all vehicle conditions for an
Observe the following if you must drive through The engine restarts automatically in the following
automatic engine stop are met:
water: cases:
R you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans-
R The water, when calm, may only reach the R you engage transmission position h or k.
mission position h or i.
lower edge of the vehicle body. R you depress the accelerator pedal.
R Vehicles with
with a 48 V on-board
on-board electrical
electrical sys-
sys-
R Drive at a maximum speed of 10 km/h; water
tem: you depress the brake pedal when travel- R an automatic vehicle engine start is required.
can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or
engine compartment. ling at a low speed. R you release the brake pedal.

R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehi- If the system has detected one of the following R Vehicles with
with a 48 V on-board
on-board electrical
electrical sys-
sys-
cles, can create waves which may exceed the situations, the engine will not stop: tem:
maximum permissible depth of the water. R you stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle - you release the brake pedal on a downhill
in front of you. gradient and the vehicle does not roll.
The braking e ect of the brakes is reduced a er
fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to
176 Driving and parking

- the vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before # Press button 1.
does not automatically enter glide mode at exiting If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/
20 km/h. If you do not switch o the vehicle, it is automati- stop function is activated.
ECO start/stop function symbols in the instru- cally switched o a er three minutes. % Depending on the model and the vehicle
ment display: equipment, the button may also be located at
Deactivating or activating
Deactivating activating the
the ECO
ECO star
start/st
t/stop
op
R the symbol è (green) appears when the
a di erent position in the centre console.
function
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was
switched o by the ECO start/stop function. ECO
ECO display
display function
R the symbol ç (yellow) appears when the The ECO display summarises your driving charac-
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi- teristics from the start of the journey to its com-
tions for an engine stop have been met. pletion and assists you in achieving the most eco-
R neither the symbol è nor ç appears nomical driving style.
when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli- You can in uence consumption by doing the fol-
gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop lowing:
sign. R driving with particular care.
R the symbol s appears: the ECO start/stop
R following the gearshi recommendations.
function is deactivated or there is a malfunc-
tion.
If the engine was switched o by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning
tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In
addition, the following display message appears in
the instrument display:
 Driving and parking 177

The ECO display will show you when you have

driven economically:
R The three segments will ll up completely at
the same time
R The edges around all three segments will light
up
The additional range achieved as a result of your
driving style in comparison with a driver with a
very sporty driving style will be shown in the
The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, centre of display 4. The range displayed does 1 Event ahead
the outer edge will light up and the segment will not indicate a xed reduction in consumption. 2 Distance display for the event ahead
ll up when the following driving style is adopted: 3 "Foot o the accelerator" prompt
R 1 Steady speed ECO Assist
ECO Assist function (vehicles
(vehicles with
with 48 V on-board
R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling electrical
electr ical system)
system)
R 3 Moderate acceleration For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist informa-
tion (/ page 180).
The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer
edge will be dark and the segment will empty ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec-
when the following driving style is adopted: ted route. This allows the system to optimally
adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save
R 1 Fluctuations in speed fuel and recuperate.
R 2 Heavy braking ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance
R 3 Sporty acceleration menu(/ page 283).
Displayable route events 1
178 Driving and parking

The segments of distance display 2 show the If the event involves a vehicle in front, all seg- times irrespective of whether the system inter-
distance to the event ahead as follows: ments will immediately turn green once there is a venes.
R A few segments light up: the event ahead is response to the Foot off the accelerator prompt. The system may be impaired or may not function
near. For active ECO Assist in drive program ;, in the following situations:
R Many segments light up: the event ahead is symbol 3 will appear on the instrument display R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illu-
further away. and on the head-up display beside transmission mination of the road, highly variable shade
position h. Symbol 3 will also appear when the conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
When the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will assistant display is not selected. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,
calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel
economy and recuperative energy based on the If the system does not intervene during the event direct sunlight or re ections.
distance, speed and gradient. The Foot off the ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of
be passive. the multifunction camera or the camera is
accelerator 3 message appears in the Instru-
ment Display. The rst segments in front of the ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; misted up, damaged or obscured.
vehicle will turn green. The remaining segments and A. R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to
will initially stay white. If you take your foot o the System limits
System dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because
accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining seg- ECO Assist can function even more precisely if they are obscured.
ments on the display will successively turn green the route is adhered to when route guidance is R If the information on the navigation system's
until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain active. The basic function is also available without digital map is incorrect or out of date.
will be set for maximum fuel economy. Recupera- active route guidance. Not all information and
tion will charge the battery. Recuperation will be R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-
tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality works or in adjacent lanes.
adapted to the selected drive program. depends on the map data.
The event will be shown for a short time a er it ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible
has been passed. If there is no response to the for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
Foot off the accelerator prompt, the segments front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good
will remain white. time. The driver must be ready to brake at all
 Driving and parking 179

Reg
egener
enerativ
ativee brak
brakee system
system (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) manner, the more e ciently energy can be
recuperated.
Function of the
the reg
regener
enerativ
ativee brak
brakee system
system
Depending on the selected recuperation level, the System limits
System
electric motor is operated as an alternator when The braking e ect of the electric motor during
in overrun mode and during braking in order to recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or
charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As may not be available at all in the following situa-
soon as you release the accelerator pedal when tions:
the vehicle is in motion, recuperation in overrun
R when the high-voltage battery charge level
mode is initiated.
increases
The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the
R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a nor- % When the vehicle is started again or transmis-
vehicle is braked when coasting and the more
electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage bat- mal operating temperature sion position h is engaged again, the stand-
tery. R when driving at speeds close to zero ard setting is automatically set:
The regenerative brake system has the following R in transmission position i The following recuperation levels are available:
characteristics: R hà Intelligent, anticipatory recuperation
R during and a er ESP® intervenes
R supports braking with electronically controlled with ECO Assist (standard setting)
brake force boosting In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by (/ page 177, 180)
the brake control system. Also brake with the R hq No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely
R converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into
service brake if necessary.
electric energy R h Normal recuperation
Manually setting
Manually setting recuper
recuperativ
ativee deceleration
deceleration R h± Increased recuperation: strong deceler-
% If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is
also used. This means that the maximum % In the Î drive program, you can use the ation in overrun mode, e.g. for driving on
recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The steering wheel gearshi paddles to manually downhill gradients
more you drive and brake in an anticipatory adjust the intensity of recuperation in overrun
mode.
180 Driving and parking

R h±± Maximum recuperation: maximum Eco Assist

Assist function (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
deceleration in overrun mode % The following function is country-dependent
# To increase
increase recuper
recuperation:
ation: brie y pull gearshi and available only in conjunction with an inte-
paddle 1. grated hard drive navigation system.
# To reduce
reduce recuper
recuperation:
ation: brie y pull gearshi ECO Assist is active only in drive programs A,
paddle 2. Î, Ï and ;, and only in transmission
# Standar
andardd setting:
setting: pull and hold gearshi pad- positions h or hÃ. Permanent manual gear-
dle 1 or 2 or engage transmission position shi ing p must be switched o (/ page 188).
h again. ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec-
ted route. This allows the system to optimally 1 Event ahead, e.g. roundabout
adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save 2 Distance display for the event ahead
fuel and recuperate.
3 "Foot o the accelerator" prompt
ECO Assist is displayed on the Assistance
menu(/ page 283).

The Instrument Display shows currently set recu-

peration level 1, for example, hÃ.

Displayable previous events 1

 Driving and parking 181

The following events 1 can be detected and dis- If you take your foot o the accelerator pedal in System limits
System
played for the route section ahead: good time, the remaining segments on the display ECO Assist can function even more precisely if
R Vehicle in front will successively turn green until the event shown the route is adhered to when route guidance is
is reached. The drivetrain will be set for minimal active. The basic function is also available without
R Speed limit
energy consumption. The vehicle will recuperate active route guidance. Not all information and
R Downhill and uphill gradients autonomously and thus charge the battery. tra c situations can be foreseen. The quality
R Junctions and roundabouts % You can also manually increase or reduce the depends on the map data.
R Bends recuperation in drive program Î. However, ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible
ECO Assist is available only in the hà for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
The segments of distance display 2 show the setting (/ page 179). front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good
distance to the event ahead as follows: time. The driver must be ready to brake at all
If there is no response to the "Foot o the accel-
R A few segments light up: the event ahead is erator" prompt 3, the segments will remain times irrespective of whether the system inter-
near. white. venes.
R Many segments light up: the event ahead is The event will be shown for a short time a er it The system may be impaired or may not function
further away. has been passed. in the following situations:
R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insu cient illu-
If ECO Assist is active, the "Foot o the accelera- If the event involves a vehicle in front, the symbol
will be shown in green as soon as there is a mination of the road, highly variable shade
tor" symbol 3 will appear on the instrument dis-
response to "Foot o the accelerator" prompt 3. conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
play and on the head-up display beside the trans-
mission position display. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,
If the system does not intervene during the event
direct sunlight or re ections.
When the vehicle nears an event, ECO Assist will ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will
calculate the optimal speed for minimal energy be passive. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of
consumption based on the distance, speed and the multifunction camera or the camera is
gradient. The "Foot o the accelerator" symbol 3 misted up, damaged or obscured.
will appear on the instrument display.
182 Driving and parking

R If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to The hybrid system then adapts the operating Function of the
the haptic
haptic accelerat
accelerator
or pedal (plug-in
dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or because strategy to the further course of the route: hybr
ybrid)
id)
they are obscured. R Use of electrical energy and the combustion The haptic accelerator pedal has an additional
R If the information on the navigation system's engine are adapted. point of resistance followed by increased pedal
digital map is incorrect, insu cient or out of R State of charge of the high-voltage battery is resistance to help you drive fully electrically.
date. controlled accordingly. Characteristics of the additional point of resist-
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road- R Electrical energy is reserved especially for ance:
works or in adjacent lanes. electric mode, e.g. urban route sections and R Available only in drive program Î
low emission zones.
R Is used when the electric motor power availa-
Function of the
the rout
route-based
e-based operating-mode
operating-mode str
strat-
at- R The vehicle automatically selects the operat- bility display (POWER) is full
egy (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) ing mode.
R Indicates the maximum available electric per-
% The following function is country-dependent When the route-based operating-mode strategy is formance
and available only in conjunction with an inte- activated, the energy ow display shows the sta- The subsequent increased pedal resistance
grated navigation system. tus of the function as – active or passive indicates that the journey is being continued
The route-based operating-mode strategy is active (/ page 327). with the combustion engine.
only in drive programs A and ;. When The route-based operating-mode strategy is
route guidance is active, data on the planned switched to passive under the following condi-
route is analysed. This function can be activated tions:
and deactivated in the multimedia system R You are driving in a drive program other than
(/ page 326). A or ;.
If the function is active, data on the further course R Route guidance is active.
of the route is evaluated. This includes, e.g. road
type, speed limitations and altitude data. R High-voltage battery's state of charge is too
low.
 Driving and parking 183

DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC SELECT switch R Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteering Î Electric (plug-in hybrid)
and understeering characteristics for a more R electric mode – driving without the combus-
Function of the
the DYN
DYNAMIC
AMIC SELECT switch active driving style tion engine is possible up to approx.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry 160 km/h
road surface and a clear stretch of road R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise C Sport R Adaptation of Active Distance Assist
dangers. R Continues to o er stability but with a sporty DISTRONIC for electric mode
setup R Limiting the maximum set speed for cruise
% Depending on the engine and equipment, the R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving control, limiter and Active Distance Assist
vehicle has di erent drive programs. style DISTRONIC to the maximum electrically driva-
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change ble speed
R Driving with the combustion engine and rein-
between the following drive programs. forced boost e ect (plug-in hybrid) R activation of the combustion engine via the
The drive program selected appears in the multi- pressure point of the haptic accelerator pedal
R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
function display of the on-board computer. road surface and a clear stretch of road Ï Battery Level (plug-in hybrid)
= Individual R Prioritised maintenance of the state of charge
A Comfort
R Individual settings of the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subse-
R Comfortable and economical driving
quent journeys in the inner city/low emission
B Sport+ R Balance between traction and stability zones
R Particularly sporty driving R The selection of the matching drive type by R The selection of the matching drive type by
R Driving with the combustion engine and rein- the hybrid system depends on the driving con- the hybrid system depends on the driving con-
forced boost e ect (plug-in hybrid) ditions and the distance (plug-in hybrid) ditions and the distance
R Recommended for all road conditions
184 Driving and parking

; Eco Depending on the drive program, the following Selecting the

the driv
drivee progr
program
am
R Particularly economical driving systems change their characteristics:
R Balance between traction and stability R drive

R Recommended for all road conditions - engine and transmission management

R Full development of all intelligent hybrid func- - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
tions and adaptation of the coasting charac- R ESP®
teristics of the vehicle to tra c (plug-in hybrid) R Vehicles with
with AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROLOL or
R The selection of the matching drive type by DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL:
OL: suspension
the hybrid system depends on the driving con- R electric power steering
ditions and the distance (plug-in hybrid)
% The ESP® settings in the drive programs ;
and A are designed for stability. Therefore,
choose one of these driving programs, espe-
cially when transporting roof loads, in trailer
operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded
or fully occupied. # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
% Plug-in hybr
hybrids
ids with
with diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt
lter
ers:
s: or backwards.
during the regeneration of the diesel particu- The drive program selected appears in the
late lter, the drive programs are not available instrument display.
or are restricted and state of charge of the
high-voltage battery may change.
 Driving and parking 185

Con guring
guring DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC SELECT (multimedia sys-
sys- % The prompt appears only if the previously Displaying
Displaying vehicle
vehicle data
tem) active settings deviate from the standard set-
Multimedia system:
tings.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle Function o : the next time the vehicle is started
the A drive program is set automatically. The # Select Vehicle.
5 DYNAMIC SELECT
ECO start/stop function is activated automati- The vehicle data is displayed.
Setting
Setting driv
drivee progr
program
am I cally.
# Select Individual configuration. Function o : if the Î drive program was the Displaying
Displaying engine data
# Select and set a category.
last one active, and all requirements for the drive
Multimedia system:
program are ful lled, this will be automatically
4 © 5 Info
Switching the
Switching the rest
restor
oration
ation display
display on or o selected the next time the vehicle is started. If
# Switch Ask when starting on or o . another program was active, then the A drive # Select Engine.
program is set automatically. The engine data is displayed.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a % This function must be activated for each user % The actual (maximum) values that can be ach-
prompt appears asking whether the last active pro le separately. Only when this function is ieved for engine output and engine torque
drive program should be restored. activated will the drive program and Eco may deviate from the certi ed values within
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a start/stop setting for the previous journey be the country-speci c guidelines for permissible
prompt appears asking whether the last active saved for the respective user pro le. tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-
drive program should be restored. If the ECO % This function must be activated for each user speci c guidelines).
start/stop function was deactivated, an additional pro le separately. The drive program for the In uencing variables that can in uence this
prompt appears asking if the function should respective user pro le of the last driver is only are, for example:
remain deactivated. stored if this function is activated. R Sea level
R Fuel quality
186 Driving and parking

R Outside temperature Aut

utomatic
omatic transmission
transmission & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
R Operating temperature of the engine DIRECT SELECT lever
lever to leaving children unattended in the vehi-
% The values displayed serve only as orienta- cle
tion. The values for engine output and engine Function of the
the DIRECT SELECT lever
lever
If children are le unattended in the vehicle,
torque shown on the media display may devi- & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- they could, in particular:
ate from the actual values.
rect gearshi ing R open doors, thereby endangering other

If the engine speed is higher than the idle persons or road users.
Calling up the
the fuel consumption
consumption indicator
indicator speed and you engage the transmission posi- R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
Multimedia system: tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate R operate vehicle equipment and become
4 © 5 Info sharply. trapped, for example.
# If you engage the transmission position
# Select Consumption. In addition, the children could also set the
The current and average fuel consumption is h or k when the vehicle is at a stand- vehicle in motion by, for example:
displayed. still, always depress the brake pedal
rmly and do not accelerate at the same R releasing the parking brake.
time. R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
children.
 Driving and parking 187

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the trans- Engaging rever
Engaging reverse
se gear
gear R % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in
mission position. The current transmission posi- # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT the vehicle, the automatic transmission
tion is displayed in the instrument display. SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of remains in neutral i.
resistance.
Engaging park
Engaging park position P
Engaging neutral
Engaging neutral N # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT (/ page 208).
SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle
resistance. comes to a standstill.
% To shi into neutral i with the vehicle # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but-
switched on, push the selector lever up or ton j.
down for several seconds to the rst point of When the transmission position display shows
resistance. j, the park position is engaged. If no trans-
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow mission position display j appears, secure
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
tow it away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a
Proceed
Pr oceed as follow
followss if you
you want
want the
the automatic
automatic short time until j is engaged. Therefore,
transmission to
transmission to remain
remain in neutral
neutral i eveven
en if the
the always pay attention to the transmission posi-
vehicle is switched
switched o or the the driv
driver's
er's door is tion display.
j Park position opened: Park position j is engaged automatically if one
k Reverse gear # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral of the following conditions is met:
i Neutral i when the car is stationary. R You switch the stationary vehicle o in trans-
h Drive position # Release the brake pedal. mission position h or k.
# Switch o the vehicle.
188 Driving and parking

R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is Manual gear
earshi
shi ing R permanent setting
at a standstill or when driving at a very low
% For plug-in hybrids, observe the information The gears shi automatically when manual shi ing
speed and the transmission position is h or
regarding the regenerative brake system is deactivated.
k.
(/ page 179). Tem
empor
porar
aryy setting:
setting:
% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, # To activat
open the driver's door while at a standstill and activate:
e: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-
engage transmission position h or k again. dle 1 or 2.
Manual shi ing is activated for a short time.
Engaging driv
Engaging drivee position D The transmission position display shows p
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT and the current gear.
SELECT lever down past the rst point of
resistance. % How long the manual shi ing stays activated
is dependant on various factors.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis-
sion position h, it shi s the gears automatically. Manual shi ing can be automatically deactiva-
This depends, among other things, on the follow- ted in the following cases:
ing factors: When the automatic transmission is shi ed to R changing the drive program
R The selected drive program position h, you can manually shi it with the R restarting the vehicle
steering wheel gearshi paddle. If permitted, the R when the transmission position h is
R The position of the accelerator pedal
automatic transmission shi s to a higher or lower
R The driving speed gear depending on the steering wheel gearshi engaged again
paddle being pulled. R driving style

You have two options to manually shi the auto- # To shi up: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-

matic transmission: dle 2.

R temporary setting
 Driving and parking 189

# To shi do
down:
wn: pull steering wheel gearshi # If the gearshi recommendation 1 appears Glide mode is characterised by the following:
paddle 1. next to the transmission position display, shi R The combustion engine is disconnected from
# To deactivat
deactivate:
e: pull steering wheel gearshi to the recommended gear. the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
paddle 2 and hold it in place. R The transmission position display h is shown
The transmission position display shows h. Using kickdo
kickdown
wn in green.
# Maximum acceleration:
acceleration: depress the accelera- R Vehicles with
with 48 V on-board
on-board electrical
electrical system:
system:
Per
ermanent
manent setting:
setting:
tor pedal beyond the pressure point. the combustion engine can be switched o .
# Change to drive program =(/ page 184).
All of the vehicle functions remain active.
# Select drive setting p (/ page 185). To protect against engine overrev, the automatic
transmission shi s up to the next gear when maxi- Glide mode is activated if the following conditions
mum engine speed has been reached. are met:
Gearshi
Gear shi recommendation R Drive program ; is selected.
The gearshi recommendation assists you in Glide mode function R The speed is within a suitable range.
adopting an economical driving style. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. R There is no trailer hitched up to the trailer
You could otherwise fail to recognise hitch, and no bicycle rack Fitted.
dangers. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode
helps you to reduce fuel consumption. % Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the
drive program =.
190 Driving and parking

Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the con- maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
ditions is no longer met. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
Glide mode can also be prevented by the following and for staying in lane. Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
parameters: % In wintry road conditions, the maximum e ect health.
of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
R Incline
winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
R Downhill gradient
necessary. # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
R Temperature
# Keep children away from fuel.
R Height
Refuelling # Keep doors and windows closed during
R Speed the refuelling process.
Refuelling the
the vehicle
vehicle
R Operating status of the engine
R Tra c situation & WARNING Risk of re or explosion from If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
fuel
# Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with
Function of the
the 4MATIC
4MATIC Fuels are highly ammable. soap and water.
# Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves sparks must be avoided. immediately rinse them thoroughly with
the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven # Before refuelling, switch o the vehicle clean water. Seek medical attention
wheel spins due to insu cient traction. and, if tted, the stationary heater and immediately.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can keep switched o during lling. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override tion immediately. Do not induce vomit-
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account ing.
of road, weather and tra c conditions. 4MATIC is
only an aid. You are responsible especially for
 Driving and parking 191

# Change immediately out of clothing that # Never refuel using petrol. R Petrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol-
has come into contact with fuel. # Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by vol-
& WARNING Risk of re and explosion due * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel ume, e.g. M15, M30
to electrostatic charge R Petrol with additives containing metal
Vehicles with a petrol engine:
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. If you have accidentally refuelled with the
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
# Before you open the fuel ller cap or wrong fuel:
result in damage to the fuel system, the
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the engine and the emission control system. # Do not switch on the vehicle.
metallic vehicle body.
# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# To avoid creating another electrostatic
spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms
charge, do not get into the vehicle again to European EN 228, or an equivalent
during the refuelling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
speci cation.
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
& WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture Fuel of this speci cation may contain up to Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use result in damage to the fuel system, the
Vehicles with a diesel engine: with E10 fuel. engine and the emission control system.
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash Never refuel with one of the following fuels: # Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel. R Diesel that conforms to European standard
R Regular petrol with an octane number EN 590, or an equivalent speci cation.
While the vehicle is running, component parts In countries without sulphur-free diesel
in the exhaust system may overheat without lower than 91 RON
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
warning.
192 Driving and parking

fuel with a sulphur content less than * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
50 ppm. with a petrol engine could result in damage to the fuel system
# Vehicles without
without diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt
lter:
er: and the engine. The repair costs are high.
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sul- wrong fuel: # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
phur content less than 500 ppm.
R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: fuel can enter the engine. completely.
R Petrol Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
R Marine diesel could result in damage to the fuel system * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
and the engine. The repair costs are high. by over lled fuel tanks
R Heating oil
R Pure bio-diesel or vegetable oil # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. # Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained zle switches o .
R Para n or kerosene
completely.
If you have accidentally refuelled with the * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
wrong fuel: * NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Do not switch on the vehicle. with a diesel engine # Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. zle switches o .
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise, R The vehicle is unlocked.
fuel can enter the fuel system.
R Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id: the fuel tank was depressurised
by pulling the button before the vehicle was
refuelled. This function is country-dependent.
 Driving and parking 193

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the # Pull button 1.
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic Indicator lamp 2 ashes and the Please
charge could build up again. wait Depressurising tank message appears in
Observe the notes on operating uids and fuel. the Instrument Display.
The recommended octane number for your vehi- When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator
cle can be found on the information label in the lamp 2 lights up continuously.
fuel ller ap. The Tank is depressurised Ready for refuel-
Depressur
Depr essurising
ising the
the fuel tank
tank (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) ling message appears in the Instrument Dis-
play.
% In the following situations there is a malfunc-
tion:
R indicator lamp 2 ashes initially and then
goes out
R the yellow ; engine diagnosis warning
lamp lights up 1 Fuel ller ap
The fuel tank can only be bled if the conditions 2 Bracket for fuel ller cap
mentioned above are ful lled. Otherwise, drive the 3 Tyre pressure table
vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat the procedure.
4 QR code for rescue card
% Opening the fuel ller ap may, in exceptional 5 Fuel type
cases, take up to 15 minutes.
# Press on the back area of fuel ller ap 1.
# Turn the fuel ller cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
194 Driving and parking

# Insert the fuel ller cap from above into AdBlue® (v

(vehicles
ehicles with
with a diesel engine only)
only) Observe the notes on operating uids
bracket 2. (/ page 417).
Notes on re lling AdBlue®
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx AdBlue® is available here:
tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel. exhaust gas a ertreatment of diesel engines. In R AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a
# Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle order for the exhaust gas a ertreatment to func- quali ed specialist workshop, e.g. a
switches o . tion properly, only use AdBlue® in accordance Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
% Vehicles with
with a diesel engine: the tank ller with ISO 22241. R AdBlue® is available at many lling stations
neck is designed for refuelling at diesel lling AdBlue® is characterised by the following: from AdBlue® lling pumps.
pumps. R non-toxic R Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at quali ed
% Vehicles with
with a diesel engine: when the fuel R colourless and odourless specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz
tank is completely empty, top up with at least Service Centres, and at many lling stations in
R non- ammable
5 litres of diesel. AdBlue® re ll canisters or AdBlue® re ll bot-
% Vehicles with
with a diesel engine: use a ller neck If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of tles.
with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel ammonia vapour may be released. Only ll the % Ensure the connection between the re ll con-
engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas. tainer and vehicle ller neck does not drip.
Otherwise, the ller neck cannot slide into the
Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin,
tank. AdBlue®
Topping up AdBlue
eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue® away from chil-
# Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn
dren.
clockwise until it engages audibly. * NOTE
NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue®
Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, being in the fuel
# Close fuel ller ap 1.
immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly.
Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at # AdBlue® must not be used to ll the fuel
once. tank.
 Driving and parking 195

# Only use AdBlue® to ll the AdBlue® remaining distance displayed has been driven. Opening the AdBlue® ller cap
the AdBlue
tank. Top up AdBlue® immediately.
# Do not over ll the AdBlue® tank. R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in XXX kmThe low
AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance
* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte- from the speed displayed. A er the remaining
rior due to AdBlue® leakage distance displayed has been covered, it will no
# A er topping up, carefully close the longer be possible to start the vehicle. Top up
AdBlue® re ll container. with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed.
# Avoid carrying AdBlue® re ll containers R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait
permanently in the vehicle. 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.The AdBlue®
tank is empty. You can no longer start the
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: vehicle. Top up with at least the amount of
R The vehicle is unlocked. AdBlue® displayed. Switch on the vehicle and
wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the
The following messages appear in order in the vehicle.
Instrument Display when the AdBlue® tank
requires topping up: You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the # Press on the back area of fuel ller ap 1.
R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s ManualThe Service menu in the Instrument Display. # Turn AdBlue® ller cap 2 anti-clockwise and
AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve % The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly remove it.
range. Top up AdBlue® immediately. on the driving style and operating conditions.
The actual range can therefore deviate from AdBlue®
Topping up AdBlue
R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX miles
the calculated range. Mercedes-Benz recommends topping up AdBlue®
See Owner's ManualThe low AdBlue® level at a lling pump. If no AdBlue® lling pump is
will lead to limited performance a er the
196 Driving and parking

available, you can also top up AdBlue® using a AdBlue® re ll canister 4 can be removed Charging the
Charging the high-volt
high-voltag
agee batter
batteryy (plug-in
canister. when it has been only partially emptied. hybr
ybrid)
id)
# Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and Notes on the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee battery
battery
AdBlue® re ll canister 4 in reverse order.
# Replace AdBlue® ller cap 2 and turn it * NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to
clockwise until it audibly engages. leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods
of time
# Close fuel ller ap 1.
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-
# Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds. discharge.
% If the vehicle could not be started as the Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if
AdBlue® tank was empty, it can take up to the vehicle is idle for several months. This can
60 seconds for the re ll to be detected. damage the high-voltage battery.
# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® re ll canis- # Start the vehicle. # To avoid damage, please observe the fol-
ter 4.
% Avoid storing AdBlue® re ll containers perma- lowing recommendations when handling
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening the high-voltage battery.
nently in the vehicle.
of AdBlue® re ll canister 4 until hand-tight.
# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the ller neck * NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-volt-
of the vehicle until hand-tight. age battery
# Li up and tip AdBlue® re ll canister 4. As a result of its basic characteristics, the
The lling process stops when the AdBlue® storage capacity of and the amount of energy
tank is completely full. available from the high-voltage battery decrea-
ses over the course of its life. Due to this, both
 Driving and parking 197

the maximum electrical range that can be ach- R Check the high-voltage battery's charge level R At a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
ieved by the vehicle and its maximum electri- every six weeks (/ page 326).
Depending on the country-speci c vehicle equip-
cal output can be impaired. R Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge ment and your vehicle's charging cable, single
The following factors could accelerate the age- level is below 20%. phase AC charging is also possible.
ing of the high-voltage battery: R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the Observe the di erent grid requirements of your
R a high level of charge, especially if the vehicle is le idle for a lengthy period. Other- current location when charging. Only use charging
vehicle is idle for a lengthy period of time wise, the condition of the vehicle's high-volt- cables which conform to the grid requirements.
age battery cannot be monitored. Consult a quali ed electrician or your local grid
R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods
at high ambient temperatures You can contribute to reducing the vehicle's operator if you have any questions.
energy consumption in the following ways: It is recommended that you charge the high-volt-
# To avoid accelerated ageing, please age battery at a wallbox or charging station due to
observe the following recommendations R An anticipatory driving style (/ page 176)
the improved charging performance and better
when handling the high-voltage battery. R Reduced use of electrical consumers
charging e ciency o ered.
R Having the vehicle regularly maintained
Recommendations when handling the high-voltage Stowing the
the char
charging
ging cable
battery: Charging options
Charging options for
for the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee battery
battery Always stow the vehicle charging cable in the
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, (mode 2 and 3) charging cable bag provided and secure it in the
park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery The high-voltage battery will be charged by recu- boot or load compartment of your vehicle.
charge level between 30% and 50%. Do not peration while you are driving. The electric motor Otherwise, the charging cable is not su ciently
keep the high-voltage battery continuously serves as an alternator when in overrun mode and secured.
connected to power supply equipment. during braking.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of You have the following options to charge while
time avoid, if possible, high ambient tempera- stationary:
tures. R At a mains socket (mode 2)
198 Driving and parking

System limits
System Notes on char
charging
ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee batter
batteryy at the
the # Never use a damaged charging cable.
The power output of the high-voltage battery may mains socke
sockett (mode 2) # Do not use:
be impaired by the following:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury from incor- R Extension cables
R High or low outside temperatures
rectly installed component parts R Extension reels
R Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle
being switched on, e.g. operating the air con- Connecting the charging cable to a mains R Multiple sockets
ditioning system socket using incorrectly installed component
parts could cause a re or an electric shock,
# Never use socket adapters to connect
R Extended periods without charging
for example. the charging cable to the mains socket.
The only exception being if the adapter
The charging time of the high-voltage battery may # Only connect the charging cable to a
has been tested and approved by the
be increased by the following: mains socket that: manufacturer for charging the high-volt-
R High or low outside temperatures R Has been properly installed and age battery of an electric vehicle.
R Extended periods without charging R Has been inspected by a quali ed electri- # Observe the safety notes in the operat-
R The maximum available charging current of cian ing instructions for the socket adapter.
the power supply equipment # For safety reasons, only use the charging Only the following charging cables may be used:
R The charging current set (mode 2) in the multi- cable supplied with the vehicle or an
R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
media system (/ page 326) original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these R A charging cable that has been approved for
original charging cables for their suitabil- the vehicle.
ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi-
cle. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes- The charging process can vary depending on the
Benz Service Centre and obtain advice power supply equipment.
there.
 Driving and parking 199

Shorter charging times can be achieved in the fol- Notes on char

charging
ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag
agee batter
batteryy at a # Observe the safety notes in the operat-
lowing ways: wallbo
allboxx or char
charging
ging station
station (mode 3) ing instructions for the wallbox.
R Charging at a wallbox.
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injury from incor- If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed
R Charging at a charging station.
rectly installed component parts cable, use the optionally available charging cable
When doing so, always observe the local informa- Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The
tion. using incorrectly installed component parts charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/
Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging could cause a re or an electric shock, for luggage compartment.
loose from a mains socket. example. Only use charging cables that have been tested
Do not li the controls by the following compo- # Only connect the charging cable to a and approved by the manufacturer for charging
nent parts: wallbox that: the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
R The charging cable connector. R Has been properly installed and
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam-
R The mains plug. R Has been inspected by a quali ed electri- aged components
cian
When charging, protect the charging cable control Connecting the charging cable to a charging
element from excessive heat such as direct sun- # For safety reasons, only use charging station using a damaged component part
light. Otherwise, the charging process may be cables that have been tested and could cause a re or an electric shock, for
cancelled. approved by the manufacturer for charg- example.
ing the high-voltage battery in an electric # For charging stations with a preinstalled
vehicle. charging cable:
# Never use damaged charging cables. R Perform a visual check of the charg-
# Do not extend the charging cable. ing station for obvious faults, such as
massive damage to the housing or
# Do not use adapters. charging cable.
200 Driving and parking

# For charging stations without a preinstal- charging or from auxiliary consumers that are cle. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-
led charging cable: switched on. Further information on recharge e - Benz Service Centre and obtain advice
R For safety reasons, only use charging ciency can be obtained at a quali ed specialist there.
cables that have been tested and workshop. # Check the setting of the maximum
approved by the manufacturer for charge current using the charging capa-
charging the high-voltage battery in Setting
Setting the
the maximum permissible
permissible char
charging
ging cur- city shown in the Instrument Display.
an electric vehicle. rent for
for char
charging
ging at a mains socket
R Never use damaged charging cables. Before charging at a mains socket, have the maxi-
R Do not extend the charging cable. * NOTE Overloading the mains socket due mum permissible charging current for the relevant
to excessive charging current mains socket or the building inspected by a quali-
R Do not use adapters.
ed electrician. The charging cable supplied is set
Make sure to observe the safety informa- If the charging current is too high, the fuse
# to a country-speci c maximum charging current
tion on the charging station. could be tripped or the external mains supply
value. When charging abroad, the maximum value
could overheat.
may exceed the permitted value for that country.
Most charging stations must be activated before # Make sure that the external mains supply
When abroad, observe the country-speci c laws
the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card. has been designed to handle the set when charging. If you have questions concerning
Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging current. setting the charging current or if there is a mal-
charging station. # If necessary, reduce the set charging function, please contact a quali ed specialist
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging current or use a di erent mains socket. workshop.
process, shown by the charging station, may be # For safety reasons, only use the charging # Set the maximum permissible charging cur-
higher than the amount of energy actually absor- cable supplied with the vehicle or an rent in the multimedia system menu
bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. (/ page 326).
of di erent levels of charging losses and is descri- Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these
bed as recharge e ciency. Charging losses occur, original charging cables for their suitabil-
for example, due to heat that builds up when ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi-
 Driving and parking 201

If the exact value of the maximum permissible 3 Temperature monitor indicator Tem
emper
peratur
aturee control
control indicator
indicator 3
charging current cannot be set, select the next 4 Safety system indicator Display Meaning
smaller adjustable value.
% If the vehicle requires more time than usual to Supplyy volt
Suppl voltag
agee indicator
indicator 1 Lights up red The green LED ashes
charge the high-voltage battery, check the Display Meaning simultaneously: over-
maximum charging current settings in the temperature – the
multimedia system menu. Lights up white The supply voltage is charging performance
connected. is reduced.
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the char
charging
ging cable control
control panel Charging
Char ging process
process indicator
indicator 2 The green LED does
not ash: overtemper-
The charging cable control panel shows the cur- Display Meaning ature – the charging
rent status of the charging process. process is stopped.
Flashes green The high-voltage bat-
tery is charging. Flashes red Overtemperature at
the mains plug – the
charging process is
stopped.

1 Supply voltage indicator

2 Charging process indicator
202 Driving and parking

Safety
Safety system
system indicator
indicator 4 If temperature monitor 3 indicates a malfunc- Type 1 vehicle
vehicle socket
Display Meaning tion, it may help to protect the charging cable
from direct sunlight.
Flashes red Charging cable mal- To rese
resett the
the char
charging
ging cable operating
operating unit: if
function – cannot safety system 4 indicates a charging cable mal-
carry out the charging function or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the
process, reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, discon-
charging cable operat- nect the charging cable from the vehicle and from
ing unit. the mains socket and wait for approximately ve
Lights up red White LED is o : seconds. If the malfunction persists a er the
power supply malfunc- charging cable is reconnected, charging at the
tion – cannot carry mains socket is not possible. The charging cable
out the charging proc- must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be
ess, replace the mains checked at a quali ed specialist workshop,
socket. depending on the indicator.
White LED is on: vehi-
cle malfunction – can- Functions of the
the indicator
indicator lamps
lamps on the
the vehicle
vehicle
not carry out the socket 1 Status of the charging process
charging process, R Depending on the national version, one of the
reset the charging following vehicle sockets is located on the
cable operating unit. right-hand side of the rear bumper.
When all four displays light up, the charging cable R The socket ap is centrally locked and
operating unit performs a self-test. unlocked together with the vehicle.
 Driving and parking 203

Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the indicator
indicator lamp
lamp status
status Type 2 vehicle
vehicle socket Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the locking
locking status
status
Indicator
Indicator lamp Meaning Locking
Loc king sta-
sta- Display Meaning
tus 1
Flashes orange Connection is being
established % Lights up R The vehi-
white cle socket
Flashes green Charging process is
Lights up orange Interruption in charg- unlocked
ing R Connect
or remove
Lights up green High-voltage battery charging
fully charged cable
Flashes red Malfunction Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the char
charging
ging process
process status
status
Status of the
the Display Meaning
char
harging
ging
process
pr ocess 2
1 Locking status
2 Status of the charging process # Flashes Connection is
orange being estab-
lished
# Flashes green Active energy
ow
204 Driving and parking

Status of the
the Display Meaning Star
arting
ting the
the char
charging
ging process
process ing severe thunderstorms, for example, and
char
harging
ging may cause the fuse in the building to trip or
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of death when charging at a may interrupt the charging process. These
process
pr ocess 2
damaged socket functions protect the vehicle.
# Lights up Interruption in The charging process uses high voltage. A er the fuse in the building is switched on
orange charging again, the charging process resumes automat-
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
# Lights up Charging mains socket are damaged, you could receive ically.
green process com- an electric shock. Following an interruption in the power supply
pleted # Only use an undamaged charging cable. without the fuse in the building being tripped,
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
it may take up to ten minutes for charging to
# Flashes red A malfunction resume automatically.
has occurred ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
during charg- # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
ing. The indi- at a quali ed specialist workshop as * NOTE Damage due to overheating of
cator lamp soon as possible. charging cable and charging cable con-
goes out a er nector
# Never connect the charging cable to a
approximately damaged vehicle socket. During the charging process, the charging
90 seconds. cable and charging cable connector can heat
up within their permissible limit values.
% If the indicator lamps are o , lock or unlock * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to over-
the vehicle using the key. The indicator lamps voltage in the mains supply The permissible limit values are in uenced by
will then display the current status of the the following factors:
The vehicle is equipped with an electrical fuse R the power supply system and the charging
charging process. which protects it against overvoltage in the
cable are not damaged
mains supply. This electrical fuse may trip dur-
 Driving and parking 205

R the instructions for handling the charging R The vehicle is unlocked. % When the hybrid system is activated (the
cable and the control element on the R The charging cable is not taut. õ display in the Instrument Display),
charging cable have been observed socket ap 1 cannot be opened.
Type 1 vehicle
vehicle socket # Press catch 3 to the le and fold up socket
# If the charging cable or charging cable
connector becomes too hot, have the cover 5.
power supply system checked. # To charg
chargee at a mains socket
socket (mode 2): insert
the mains plug into the mains socket of the
* NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket external power source to the stop.
when the socket ap is open # Set the maximum charging current if required.

# Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-

# Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no cle socket 2 to the stop.
charging cable connected. This protects Make sure that the charging cable is not taut
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. when inserted.
# Make sure that the socket cover is Indicator lamp 4 ashes orange and, as soon
closed properly before closing the socket as the high-voltage battery is charged, green.
ap. This can otherwise result in damage # To charg
chargee at a wallbo
wallbox/c
x/char
harging
ging station
station
which may prevent the socket ap from (mode 3): insert the charging cable connector
being opened again. into vehicle socket 2 to the stop.
# Press the bottom le of socket ap 1 and Make sure that the charging cable is not taut
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: when inserted.
R The transmission is in position j.
swing the socket ap open outwards.
Indicator lamp 4 ashes orange and, as soon
R The hybrid system is not activated. The õ as the high-voltage battery is charged, green.
display in the Instrument Display is o .
206 Driving and parking

When the charging cable is connected to the vehi- # Press the bottom le of socket ap 1 and charging cable connector into vehicle socket
cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. swing the socket ap open outwards. 2 to the stop.
At the start of the charging process, the charging The % indicator lamp 4 lights up. # Insert the charging cable connector into the
side is shown in the Instrument Display with a % When the hybrid system is activated (the socket of the wallbox to the stop.
charging prediction. The charging prediction õ display in the Instrument Display), Make sure that the charging cable is not taut
either refers to the predicted charge level at the socket ap 1 cannot be opened. when inserted.
set departure time, or the time at which the high- The # indicator lamp 5 ashes orange
# Press catch 3 to the le and fold up socket
voltage battery will be fully charged. and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is
cover 6.
Type 2 vehicle
vehicle socket charged, green.
# To charg
chargee at a mains socket
socket (mode 2): insert
the mains plug into the mains socket of the When the charging cable is connected to the vehi-
external power source to the stop. cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
# Set the maximum charging current if required. At the start of the charging process, the charging
# Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-
side is shown in the Instrument Display with a
charging prediction. The charging prediction
cle socket 2 to the stop.
either refers to the predicted charge level at the
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut set departure time, or the time at which the high-
when inserted. voltage battery will be fully charged.
The # indicator lamp 5 ashes orange % Depending on the temperature, the fan and
and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is battery cooling system may audibly switch on
charged, green. during the charging process.
# Char
Charging
ging at a wallbo
wallbox/c
x/char
harging
ging station
station (mode
3) without
without pre-inst
pre-installed
alled cable: insert the
 Driving and parking 207

% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and # Press and hold button 1 on the charging Type 2 vehicle
vehicle socket
connected to the mains supply, the high-volt- cable connector and remove the charging
age battery will be recharged automatically as cable connector from the vehicle socket.
needed or when electrical consumers are
activated. % If the charging cable connector is blocked,
contact a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Char
Charging
ging at a mains socke
sockett (mode 2): discon-
Ending the
the char
charging
ging process
process nect the mains plug from the mains socket
Type 1 vehicle
vehicle socket and stow the charging cable safely in the vehi-
cle (/ page 196).
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap.

# Unlock the vehicle.

The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
208 Driving and parking

# Remove the charging cable connector from Function of the

the charg
chargee level
level display
display in the
the Instr
Instru-
u- a charging capacity of 10 kW or higher, the value
the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. ment Display in the charge level display is rounded o and
A er the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle shown without a decimal place.
socket will be locked again and the charging % The value in item 3 varies depending on the
process will resume. setting of the charging process. It displays the
% If you cannot remove the charging cable con- charging prediction, e.g. the time at which the
nector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the selected charge level will be reached or the
charging cable connector is still locked, con- charge level at the pre-selected departure
tact a quali ed specialist workshop. time.
# Char
Charging
ging at a mains socke
sockett (mode 2): discon-
nect the mains plug from the mains socket Par
arking
king
and stow the charging cable safely in the vehi-
cle (/ page 196). Par
arking
king the
the vehicle
vehicle
1 Current charge level
# Char
Charging
ging at a wallbo
wallbox/c
x/char
harging
ging station
station (mode 2 Time at which completely charged & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
3) without
without pre-inst
pre-installed
alled char
charging
ging cable: 3 Predicted charge level at pre-selected depar- caused by an insu ciently secured vehi-
remove the charging cable connector from the ture time cle rolling away
wallbox socket and stow the charging cable 4 Current charging capacity
safely in the vehicle (/ page 196). If the vehicle is not securely parked su -
# Close the socket cover and the socket ap. When the vehicle is connected to the mains sup- ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way
ply and is switched o , the Instrument Display even at a slight downhill gradient.
% A er the charging cable connector has been # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
shows the charge level display for approximately
disconnected, the le % indicator lamp 1 two minutes. front wheels so that the vehicle rolls
on the vehicle socket remains lit for some towards the kerb if it starts moving.
time before switching o . The value for current charging capacity 4 may
di er from the display on the charging station. At
 Driving and parking 209

# apply the parking brake. R operate vehicle equipment and become * NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering
# Switch the transmission to position j. trapped, for example.
Vehicles with
with AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROLOL or level
level
In addition, the children could also set the control:
contr ol: The vehicle can lower because of tem-
& WARNING Risk of re caused by hot vehicle in motion by, for example: perature di erences or longer non-operational
exhaust system parts R releasing the parking brake. times. This can cause damage to parts of the
body.
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or R changing the transmission position.
# When stopping the vehicle and when
twigs may ignite. R starting the vehicle.
# Park the vehicle so that no ammable
driving o , make sure that there are no
# Never leave children unattended in the obstacles such as curbs under or in the
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle. immediate vicinity of the body.
vehicle components.
# In particular, do not park on dry grass-
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the
land or harvested grain elds. key with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due children.
to leaving children unattended in the vehi-
cle * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it roll-
ing away
If children are le unattended in the vehicle,
they could, in particular: # Always secure the vehicle against rolling
R open doors, thereby endangering other away.
persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
210 Driving and parking

# Engage transmission position j in a station- Garag

Gar agee door opener
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied
Progr
Pr ogramming
amming buttons
buttons for
for the
the gar
garag
agee door opener
(/ page 187).
# Switch o the vehicle by pressing the 1 but- & DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries caused by
ton. exhaust gases
# Release the service brake slowly.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
# Get out of the vehicle and lock it. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
% When you park the vehicle, you can still oper- these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
ate the side windows and the sliding sunroof and leads to poisoning.
for approximately four minutes if the driver's # Never leave the vehicle or, if present, the
door is closed. stationary heater running in an enclosed
% When you park the vehicle, you can still oper- space without su cient ventilation.
ate the side windows and the panoramic slid-
ing sunroof for approximately four minutes if & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the the driver's door is closed. trapped when opening and closing a
brake pedal. garage door
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the When you operate or program a garage door
vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts with an integrated garage door opener, per-
moving. sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
# Apply the electric parking brake. movement.
 Driving and parking 211

# Always make sure that nobody is within # Point remote control 6 from a distance of
the range of the garage door's move- 1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.
ment. # Press and hold button 5 of remote control
6 until one of the following signals appears:
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continu-
R The vehicle has been parked outside the ously. Programming is complete.
garage or outside the range of movement of
R Indicator lamp 4 ashes green. Program-
the door.
ming was successful. Additionally, syn-
R The vehicle is switched on.
chronisation of the rolling code with the
R The vehicle has not been started. door system must be carried out.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash
% The garage door opener function is always
available when the vehicle is switched on. green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons.

% The remote control for the door drive is not

# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you included in the scope of delivery of the garage
wish to program. door opener.
Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow. Synchr
Synchronising
onising the
the rolling
rolling code
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
cator lamp ashes yellow. R The door system uses a rolling code.
# Release the previously pressed button.
R The vehicle must be within range of the garage
Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow. door or door drive.
212 Driving and parking

R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are # Hold remote control 6 at the same angles at # If indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow a er
located outside the range of movement of the various distances in front of the inside rear approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the
door. view mirror. You should test every position for previously pressed button again until the door
at least 25 seconds before trying another opens or closes.
# Press the programming button on the door position.
drive unit. Clearing the
Clearing the gar
garag
agee door opener memory
# On remote controls that transmit only for a
Initiate the next step within approximately # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
30 seconds. limited period, press button 5 on remote Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2
control 6 again before transmission ends.
# If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release
# Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener
or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. buttons 1 and 3.
When the door closes, programming is com- unit towards the remote control. The entire memory has been deleted.
pleted. % Support and additional information on pro-
% Please also read the operating instructions for gramming:
the door drive. R On the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000

Troubleshoo
oubleshooting
ting when progr
programming
amming the
the remote
remote 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277
control
contr ol R On the Internet at https://
# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote www.homelink.com
control 6 is supported. Opening or closing the
the gar
garag
agee door
# Replace the batteries in remote control 6.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
# Hold remote control 6 at various angles from
R The corresponding button is programmed to
a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside operate the door.
rearview mirror. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying another # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the
position. door opens or closes.
 Driving and parking 213

Electric
Electr ic parking
parking brake
brake # When leaving the vehicle, always take the R In addition, one of the
the follo
following
wing conditions
key with you and lock the vehicle. must be ful lled:
must
Function of the
the electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee (applying
(applying
automaticall
automatically)
y) # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of - The vehicle is switched o .
children. - The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and
to leaving children unattended in the vehi- The electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee is applied if the
the trans-
trans- the driver's door is opened.
cle mission is in position j and one of the the follo
following
wing - There is a system malfunction.
If children are le unattended in the vehicle, conditions is ful lled:
R The vehicle is switched o .
- The power supply is insu cient.
they could, in particular:
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat
- The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
R open doors, thereby endangering other period.
persons or road users. belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's
door is opened. When the electric parking brake is applied, the
R get out and be struck by oncoming tra c.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
R operate vehicle equipment and become ment cluster.
trapped, for example. electric parking brake (/ page 214).
% The electric parking brake is not automatically
In addition, the children could also set the In the
the follo
following
wing situations, the
the electric
electric parking
parking applied if the vehicle is switched o by the
vehicle in motion by, for example: brakee is also applied:
brak ECO start/stop function.
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
R releasing the parking brake. Function of the
the electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee (releasing
(releasing
tionary.
R changing the transmission position.
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle automatically)
automaticall y)
R starting the vehicle. stationary. The electric
electric parking
parking brak
brakee is released
released when the
the
# Never leave children unattended in the R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing follo
ollowing
wing conditions are
are ful lled:
the vehicle to a standstill. R The driver's door is closed.
vehicle.
R The vehicle has been started.
214 Driving and parking

R The transmission is in position h or k and Applying/releasing

Applying/r eleasing the
the electric
electric parking
parking brake
brake % The electric parking brake is only securely
you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi manually applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit
from transmission position j to h or k continuously.
when on level ground. Applying
Appl ying
Releasing
R If the transmission is in position k, the boot
lid must be closed.
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Pull handle 1.
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the Emergency braking
Emergency braking
following conditions must be ful lled: # Press and hold handle 1.
- You shi from transmission position j. As long as the vehicle is in motion, the
Release parking brake message is displayed
or and the red ! indicator lamp ashes.
- You have previously driven at speeds When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
greater than 3 km/h. still, the electric parking brake is applied. The
When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster ment cluster.
goes out.
# Push handle 1.
Information
Infor mation on collision detection
detection on a parked
parked
The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the
vehicle
instrument cluster.
If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro-
tection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will
 Driving and parking 215

receive a noti cation in the multimedia system R the electric parking brake is not applied R The connection to online services is interrup-
when you switch the vehicle on. ted.
You will receive information about the following Notes on parking
parking up the
the vehicle
vehicle R The ATA (anti-the alarm system) is not availa-
points: ble.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than
R The area of the vehicle that may have been R The interior protection and tow-away protec-
six weeks, it may su er damage through disuse.
damaged. tion functions are not available.
The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam-
R The force of the impact. R The function for detecting collisions on a
aged by heavy discharging.
parked vehicle is not available.
The following situation can lead to inadvertent % Further information can be obtained at a
activation: quali ed specialist workshop. If the following conditions are ful lled, standby
R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a mode can be activated or deactivated using the
two-storey garage. multimedia system:
Standb
andbyy mode (ext
(extension
ension of the
the start
starter
er batter
battery's
y's
R The vehicle is switched on.
% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to period
per iod out of use)
R The vehicle has not been started.
prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti- Standb
andbyy mode function
vate tow-away protection, collision detection Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational
% This function is not available for all models.
will also be deactivated. time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably
System limits
System minimised during extended periods of non-opera- start the vehicle.
Detection may be restricted in the following situa- tion.
tions: Charge the starter battery in the following situa-
Standby mode is characterised by the following: tions:
R the vehicle is damaged without impact, for R The starter battery is preserved.
R The vehicle's non-operational time must be
example, if an outside mirror is torn o or the R The maximum non-operational time appears in
paint is damaged by a key extended.
the media display.
R an impact occurs at low speed
216 Driving and parking

R The Battery charge insufficient for standby driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe
mode message appears in the media display. distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated Pay attention to the tra c conditions at all times
when the vehicle is switched on. and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating standb
standbyy mode (parking
(parking up limitations regarding the safe use of these sys-
the vehicle)
vehicle) tems.
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
R The engine is switched o .
override the laws of physics. They cannot always
Multimedia system: take into account road, weather or tra c condi-
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle tions.
# Activate or deactivate Standby mode.

# Select Yes.
Infor
Information
mation on vehicle
vehicle sensors
sensors and cameras
cameras
Some driving and driving safety systems use cam-
eras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to 1 Multifunction camera
Driving and driving
Driving driving safety
safety syst
systems
ems monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors
Driving
Dr iving systems
systems and your
your responsibility
responsibility vehicle. 3 Front radar
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems 4 Front camera
which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu- 5 Corner radars
vring the vehicle. The driving systems are only
6 Ultrasonic sensors
aids. They are not a substitute for your attention
to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your 7 Reversing camera
responsibility pertaining to road tra c law. The
 Driving and parking 217

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restric- Make sure that there are no overhanging loads R EBD (EElectronic Brakeforce Distribution)
ted detection performance of vehicle sen- protruding into the detection range. (/ page 221)
sors and cameras If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator R STEER CONTROL (/ page 221)
grille, or a er an impact, have the function of the R HOLD function (/ page 221)
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras sensors checked at a quali ed specialist work-
is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area R Hill Start Assist (/ page 222)
and safety systems cannot function correctly. of the cameras on the front and rear windows R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 223)
There is a risk of an accident. repaired at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Keep the area around vehicle sensors or
R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 223)
% The reversing camera can extend and retract R Cruise control (/ page 224)
cameras clear of any obstructions and automatically for the purpose of calibration,
clean. even though there is no camera image in the R Limiter (/ page 225)
# Have damage to the bumper, radiator display. R Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 243)
grille or stone chipping in the area of the R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 250)
front and rear windows repaired at a
quali ed specialist workshop. Overvie
Over view
w of driving
driving systems
systems and driving
driving safety
safety R AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 250)
systems
systems R Trailer Manoeuvring Assist (/ page 270)
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors R ABS (A
Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 218)
and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush Driving Assistance
Driving Assistance package
package
(/ page 370). The sensors and cameras must
R BAS (B
Brake Assist System) (/ page 218) The following functions are part of the Driving
not be covered and the detection ranges around R ESP® (EElectronic Stability Program) Assistance Package. Certain functions are only
them must be kept free. Do not attach additional (/ page 219) available in some countries. Some functions are
licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, also available without the Driving Assistance
R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 220) Package, albeit with restricted functionality.
foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in
the detection range of the sensors and cameras. R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 220) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 228)
218 Driving and parking

R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) Functions of ABS Function of BAS

BAS
(/ page 233)
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a
R Route-based speed adaptation (country- brake pressure in critical driving situations:
dependent) (/ page 233) malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)
R During braking, for instance, at maximum full-
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 238) stop braking or if there is insu cient tyre trac- If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) tion, the wheels are prevented from locking. in an emergency braking situation is
(/ page 235) increased.
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
# Depress the brake pedal with full force in
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country- If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a emergency braking situations. ABS pre-
dependent) (/ page 238) pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake vents the wheels from locking.
R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend- pedal can be an indication of hazardous road con-
ent) (/ page 235) ditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your
R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist care while driving. emergency braking situation with additional brake
with exit warning (/ page 245) force.
System limits
System
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 247) R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
activated:
Par
arking
king Pack
Package
age R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
R Reversing camera (/ page 253) malfunction has occurred and the yellow !
ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
R 360° Camera (/ page 256)
the instrument cluster a er the vehicle is star- R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 260) ted.
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 264) The brakes will function as usual once you release
the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
 Driving and parking 219

Function of ESP® If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to
by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by improve traction:
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is intervening in the following ways: R When using snow chains.
deactivated R One or more wheels are braked. R In deep snow.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out R The engine output is adapted according to the R On sand or gravel.
vehicle stabilisation. situation.
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning action, which enhances traction.
following situations. lamp lights up continuously:
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu-
R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
R The drive wheels could spin.
Observe the following information:
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 499)
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis- R Display messages (/ page 433)
ted by ESP® when braking.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can moni- ETS/4ET
ET S/4ETS S (Electronic
(Electronic Traction
Traction System)
System)
When the ÷ warning lamp ashes, one or sev- ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and
tor and improve driving stability and traction in eral wheels has reached its grip limit:
the following situations within physical limits: makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a
R Adapt your driving style to suit the current slippery carriageway.
R When pulling away on wet or slippery carriage-
road and weather conditions. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
ways.
R Do not deactivate ESP®. intervening in the following ways:
R When braking.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is R The drive wheels are braked individually if they
necessary when pulling away. spin.
220 Driving and parking

R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel Function of ESP® tr

trailer
ailer stabilisation
stabilisation ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may
or wheels with traction. not function if:
& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not
In uence of driv
drivee progr ams on ESP®
programs and weather conditions
The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif- detected properly by the vehicle.
ferent weather and road conditions as well as the In poor road and weather conditions, the
driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of Activ
ctivating/deactivating ESP® (Electr
ating/deactivating (Electronic
onic Stability
Stability
selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a Program)
Progr am)
mode will be activated. You can select the drive high centre of gravity may tip over before
programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch ESP® detects this. Multimedia system:
(/ page 184). # Always adapt your driving style to suit 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access

the current road and weather conditions. % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using
Function of ESP® Cr
Crosswind
osswind Assist quick access when at least one other function
When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise is available in quick access. ESP® can other-
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from wise be found in the Assistance menu.
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle side to side:
in the lane: R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds of 65 km/h. # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
speeds between approx. 75 km/h and R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar- You could otherwise fail to recognise
200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cor- geted, individual brake application on one dangers.
nering slightly. side.
R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual R In the event of severe swerving, the engine # Select ESP.
brake application on one side. output is also reduced and all wheels are # Select On or å Off.
braked.
 Driving and parking 221

% If ESP® is deactivated and drive program Function of STEER

STEER CONTR
CONTROL
OL HOLD function
Î was previously selected, drive program STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a HOLD function
A is automatically activated the next time noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand-
the engine is started. the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. still without requiring you to depress the brake
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn- This steering recommendation is given in the fol- pedal, e.g. while waiting in tra c.
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument lowing situations: The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil-
cluster. R both right wheels or both le wheels are on a ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with
Observe the information on warning lamps and wet or slippery road surface when you brake the driver.
display messages which may be shown in the R the vehicle starts to skid System limits
System
instrument cluster.
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
System limits
System assistance when driving and is not a su cient
Function of EBD STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
function in the following situations: away when stationary.
Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char-
R ESP® is deactivated. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
acterised by the following:
R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure R ESP® is malfunctioning.
on the rear wheels. R The steering is malfunctioning.
R Improved driving stability when braking, espe-
cially on bends. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted fur-
ther by the electric power steering.
222 Driving and parking

Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating the
the HOLD function R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
R The electric parking brake is released. ing brake.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being active when you R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva- In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
leave the vehicle ted. transmission position j and/or by the electric
R The transmission is in position h, k or i. parking brake:
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
function it could, in the following situations, Activ
ctivating
ating the
the HOLD function door is opened.
roll away: # Depress the brake pedal, and a er a short
R The vehicle is switched o .
R If there is a malfunction in the system or in time quickly depress further until the ë
the power supply. R There is a system malfunction.
display appears in the Instrument Display.
R If the HOLD function is deactivated by # Release the brake pedal. R The power supply is insu cient.
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Deactivating the
Deactivating the HOLD function
# Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Function of Hill Star
Startt Assist
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling or Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time
away before you leave it. when pulling away on a hill under the following
# Depress the brake pedal until the ë display
conditions:
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: disappears from the Instrument Display.
R The transmission is in position h or k.
R The vehicle is stationary. The HOLD function is deactivated in the following
situations: R The electric parking brake is released.
R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- This gives you enough time to move your foot
R The vehicle has been started or has been ted. from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and
automatically switched o by the ECO start/ R The transmission is shi ed to position j. depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
stop function.
 Driving and parking 223

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, ted by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accord-
to the vehicle rolling away the hazard warning lights will switch o automati- ingly.
cally at approximately 10 km/h. You can also
A er a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer switch o the hazard warning lights using the haz- If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra-
holds the vehicle. ard warning button. tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take
# Swi ly move your foot from the brake
a break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis-
play. You can acknowledge the message and take
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not ATTENTION ASSIST a break where necessary. If you do not take a
leave the vehicle when it is being held by
Function of ATTENTION
ATTENTION ASSIST break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect
Hill Start Assist.
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto- increasing lapses in concentration, you will be
nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk warned again a er a minimum of 15 minutes.
Function of Adap
Adaptiv
tivee Brak
Brakee Lights roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following tra c in an
the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
emergency braking situation with the following
actions: ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
R By ashing the brake lamps
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in
time. The system is not a substitute for a well-res-
R By activating the hazard warning lights ted and attentive driver. On long journeys, take
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above regular breaks in good time that allow for ade-
50 km/h, the brake lamps ash rapidly. This pro- quate recuperation.
vides tra c travelling behind you with an even You can choose between two settings:
more noticeable warning. R StStandar
andard:
d: normal system sensitivity. You can have the following status information for
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
R Sensitiv
Sensitive:
e: higher system sensitivity. The driver
70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica- menu of the on-board computer:
is warned earlier and the attention level detec-
tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once the R The length of the journey since the last break.
224 Driving and parking

R The attention level determined by ATTENTION Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION Setting ATTENTION
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
ASSIST: ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and Multimedia system:
- the fuller the circle, the higher the atten- warnings may be delayed or not occur: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
tion level determined R If you have been driving for less than approx- 5 Attention Assist

- as your attention wanes, the circle in the imately 30 minutes.

Setting
Setting options
options
centre of the display becomes smaller R If the road condition is poor (uneven road sur-
face or potholes). # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
R If there is a strong side wind. Suggesting
Sugges ting a rres
estt area
area
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
System suspended message appears. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high corner- # Select Suggest rest area.

If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the ing speeds or high rates of acceleration). # Activate or deactivate the function.
multimedia system o ers to search for a rest R If Active Steering Assist is activated and active If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or
area. You can select a rest area and start naviga- (/ page 235). increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest
tion to this rest area. This function can be activa- R If the time has been set incorrectly. area in the vicinity.
ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. # Select the suggested rest area.
R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre-
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û quently in active driving situations. You are guided to the selected rest area.
symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
Instrument Display. A er the vehicle is started, The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness
assessment is reset and restarted when continu- Cruise
Cr uise control
control and limiter
limiter
ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically activated. The
last selected sensitivity level remains stored. ing the journey in the following situations: Function of cruise
cruise control
control
R You switch o the vehicle. Cruise control regulates the speed to the value
System limits
System selected by the driver.
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
200 km/h speed range. driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
break). stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
 Driving and parking 225

foot from the accelerator pedal a er overtaking, System limits

System You can limit the speed as follows:
cruise control will resume speed regulation back Cruise control may be unable to maintain the R Var
ariable:
iable: for a short-term speed restriction,
to the stored speed. stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored e.g. in built-up areas
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
R Perermanent
manent:: for a longer-term speed restric-
maximum design speed or up to the set winter Change into a lower gear in good time on long and tion, e.g. in winter tyre mode
tyre limit. steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of
Observe the notes on driving systems and your this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise will make use of the engine's braking e ect. This maximum design speed or up to the set winter
dangers (/ page 216). relieves the load on the brake system and pre- tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the
vents the brakes from overheating and wearing vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been star-
Mercedes‑
Mer cedes‑AMG
AMG vehicles:
vehicles: cruise control is availa- too quickly. ted.
ble up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa- Observe the notes on driving systems and your
Displays in the
Displays the Instr
Instrument
ument Display tions: responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
R h (grey): cruise control is selected but not
R in tra c situations which require frequent dangers (/ page 216).
yet activated. changes of speed, e.g. in heavy tra c, on Mercedes‑
Mer cedes‑AMG
AMG vehicles:
vehicles: the limiter is available
R h (green): cruise control is active. winding roads up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the Displays in the
Displays the Instr
Instrument
ument Display
A stored speed appears along with the h dis-
play. drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle R È (grey): variable limiter is selected but not
could then skid. yet activated.
% The segments extending from the current
R when visibility is poor R È ( ashes grey): variable limiter is tempo-
stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the
set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedome- Function of the
the limiter
limiter rarily passive.
ter. The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To R È (green): variable limiter is activated.
reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter
applies the brakes automatically.
226 Driving and parking

A stored speed appears along with the È dis- # Take into account the tra c situation
play. The segments in the speedometer light up, before calling up the stored speed.
up to the currently stored speed.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter Cruise control
switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive R Cruise control is selected.
message appears in the Instrument Display and
the È display ashes. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.

The variable limiter is reactivated in the following R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
situations: R The transmission is in position h.
R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored
Variable limiter
speed.
R The variable limiter is selected.
R If the stored speed is called up.
R If you store a new speed.

Operating
Oper ating cruise
cruise control
control or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and
variable limiter
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored J Adopts the stored/detected speed
speed ± Deactivates cruise control/the variable lim-
If you call up the stored speed and this is iter
lower than your current speed, the vehicle h Selects cruise control
decelerates. È Selects the variable limiter
1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed
 Driving and parking 227

Operating cruise
Operating cruise control
control and the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter % When you switch o the vehicle, the last # Press and hold M or N on control panel
# Press the corresponding button with only one speed stored is deleted. 1.
nger or swipe on the control panel. When you activate cruise control or Active The stored speed is increased or decreased to
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed the next increment of ten and a erwards by
Switching betw
Switching between
een cruise
cruise control
control and the
the var
varia-
ia- stored for the variable limiter is deleted. increments of 10 km/h.
ble limiter
limiter Increasing/decr
Incr easing/decreasing
easing the
the stor
stored
ed speed or
# To select cruise
cruise control:
control: press h. # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
# To select thethe var
variable
iable limiter
limiter:: press È. from the bottom of control panel 1. # Press M on control panel 1.
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist % When the variable limiter is switched to pas-
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by sive mode, you cannot increase or decrease
wards from the top of control panel 1. its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h.
a di erent button (/ page 230). R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
Activ
ctivating
ating cruise
cruise control
control or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter Adop
dopting
ting a detect
detected
ed speed
or
# Press M or N on control panel 1. If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and
# Brie y press M or N on control panel
The current vehicle speed is stored and the Tra c Sign Assist has detected a speed restric-
1. tion sign with a maximum permissible speed and
vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or
does not exceed it (variable limiter). The stored speed is increased or decreased to this is displayed in the instrument cluster:
the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or # Press J.
or 60 km/h).
# Press J. The maximum permissible speed shown by the
or tra c sign is stored and the vehicle maintains
The last stored speed is called up and the
or does not exceed this speed.
vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or
does not exceed it (variable limiter). Deactivating cruise
Deactivating cruise control
control or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter
If the last stored speed has previously been # Press ±.
deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
228 Driving and parking

% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter- Setting

Setting the
the limit speed for
for winter
winter tyres
tyres Other features of Active Distance Assist
venes, cruise control is deactivated. The varia- Multimedia system: DISTRONIC:
ble limiter is not deactivated. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle R Adjusts the driving style depending on the
Information
Infor mation on the
the permanent
permanent limiter
limiter
5 Winter tyres limit selected drive program (fuel-saving, comforta-
If the vehicle should never exceed a speci c # Select a speed or deactivate the function. ble or dynamic)
speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the
can set this speed with the permanent limiter. turn signal indicator is switched on to change
Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC to the overtaking lane
You do this by limiting the speed between
160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia sys- Function of Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC R Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e:
tem (/ page 228). Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
set speed on free- owing roads. If vehicles in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it front are detected, the set distance is maintained,
appears in the Instrument Display. When you con- motorcycles)
if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The
rm the message, display messages no longer vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the - Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions
appear until you switch o the vehicle. The speed distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. into account on motorways or on multi-
will only be displayed again once the vehicle has The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are lane roads with separate carriageways
been restarted or if the set speed is changed. set and saved using the steering wheel. (country-dependent)
The permanent limiter does not switch to passive Available speed range: Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
agee and
mode even during kickdown and the driven speed
R Vehicles without
without Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Par
arking
king Pack
Packag
age:
e: if the vehicle has been braked to
remains below the set speed.
20 km/h - 200 km/h a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways
R Vehicles with
by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can auto-
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: matically follow the vehicle in front when driving
20 km/h - 210 km/h o again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation
is detected when driving o , a visual and acoustic
warning is given indicating that the driver must
 Driving and parking 229

now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not Per

ermanent
manent status
status display
display of Activ
Activee Distance
Distance mode. The ç suspended message
accelerated any further. Assist DISTR
Assist DISTRONIC
ONIC appears in the Instrument Display.
R k (white): Active Distance Assist
Observe the notes on driving systems and your Display on the
Display the speedometer
speedometer
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise DISTRONIC selected, speci ed distance set
The stored speed is highlighted on the speedome-
dangers (/ page 216). R k (white vehicle, green speedometer):
ter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed adjustment for the route event ahead is
Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC displays
displays in the
the
speci ed distance set and vehicle detected less than the stored speed, the segments in the
Instr
Ins trument
ument Display
R k (green): Active Distance Assist speedometer light up. The Instrument Display
DISTRONIC active, speci ed distance set and shows the deactivation of Active Distance Assist
vehicle detected DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed
R r: Route-based speed adaptation active due to manual or automatic adoption of the maxi-
(/ page 233). mum permissible speed.

The stored speed is shown along with the perma- System limits
System
nent status display and highlighted on the speed- The system may be impaired or may not function
ometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in the following situations, for example:
is passive, the speed is greyed out. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,
% On motorways or high-speed major roads, the in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light
Assistance graphic green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli- conditions.
1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is
event (/ page 233) % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
2 Vehicle in front the setting of the Active Distance Assist R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
3 Distance indicator DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with
4 Set speci ed distance steep uphill or downhill gradients.
230 Driving and parking

R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as # Always carefully observe the tra c con- & WARNING Risk of accident if detection
bicycles or motorcycles. ditions and be ready to brake at all function of Active Distance Assist
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or acceler- times. DISTRONIC is impaired
ating can cause one or several wheels to lose # Take into account the tra c situation Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
traction and the vehicle could then skid. before calling up the stored speed. react or has a limited reaction:
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in R when driving on a di erent lane or when
these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu - changing lanes
cient deceleration by Active Distance R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
& WARNING Risk of accident from accelera- Assist DISTRONIC
tion or braking by Active Distance Assist tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your R to complex tra c conditions
vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler-
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing tra c
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- ation. If this deceleration is not su cient,
erate or brake in the following cases, for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
example: with a visual and acoustic warning. may neither give warnings nor intervene in
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis- # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita- such situations.
tance Assist DISTRONIC. ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Always observe the tra c conditions
R If the stored speed is called up and is con- # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take carefully and react accordingly.
siderably faster or slower than the cur- evasive action.
rently driven speed. Operating Activ
Operating Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC and
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter
longer detects a vehicle in front or does Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
not react to relevant objects.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
R The electric parking brake is released.
 Driving and parking 231

R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. # To operat

operatee Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC
R The transmission is in position h. or the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter:: press the respective
button with only one nger or swipe on the
R All the doors are closed. control panel.
R Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed. Switching
Switching betw
between
een the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter and Active
Active
Distance Assist
Distance Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC
Variable limiter: # Press I.
R The variable limiter is selected.
Activ
ctivating
ating the
the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter or Activ
Activee Distance
Distance
Assistt DISTR
Assis DISTRONIC
ONIC
# To activat
activatee without
without a stor
stored
ed speed: press
M, N or J. Activ ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist
DISTR
DIS TRONIC:
ONIC: remove your foot from the accel-
erator pedal.
The current vehicle speed is stored and main-
tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or
J Adopts the stored/detected speed
limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.
± Deactivates the variable limiter/Active Dis-
or
tance Assist DISTRONIC
# To activat
activatee with
with a stor
stored
ed speed: press J.
1 Increases/decreases the speed
K Increases/decreases the speci ed distance Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC:
ONIC: remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
I Switches between the variable limiter and
The last stored speed is called up and the
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance
232 Driving and parking

Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (vari- # Press and hold M on the upper section or or
able limiter). N on the lower section of control panel # Depress the accelerator pedal brie y and
If the stored speed has been deleted, the cur- 1. rmly.
rent vehicle speed is stored. The stored speed is increased or reduced in The functions of Active Distance Assist
% When you switch o the vehicle, the stored increments of 10 km/h. DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
speed is deleted. When you activate Active or Reducing or increasing
increasing the
the speci ed dist
distance
ance
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. from
fr om the
the vehicle
vehicle in front
front
stored for the variable limiter is deleted. # Press M on the upper section of control # Press K.
Increasing or reducing
Increasing reducing the
the speed panel 1. The h display appears. The speci ed dis-
# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards tance is reduced by one level.
from the bottom of control panel 1. Adop
dopting
ting the
the limit speed shown
shown in the
the instr
instrument
ument
cluster
cluster If the lowest level is already selected, the
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
selection jumps to the highest level.
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
wards from the top of control panel 1. # Press J. Deactivating Activ
Deactivating Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC or
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. The limit speed displayed in the instrument the var
variable
iable limiter
limiter
cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The
or & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle
# Brie y press M on the upper section or
in front, but only up to the stored speed. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being
N on the lower section of control panel active when you leave the driver's seat
1. Pulling away
away with
with Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
DISTR
DIS TRONIC
ONIC If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
The stored speed is increased or reduced by is being braked by Active Distance Assist
10 km/h. # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
or and remove your foot from the brake pedal.
# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist
# Press J.
DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to
 Driving and parking 233

prevent it from rolling away before you on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommen- & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
leave the driver's seat. ded speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's
an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed
# Press ±. speed is 130 km/h.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter- Assist may be too high or incorrect in some
venes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is into passive mode by pressing the accelerator
pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the individual cases, such as:
deactivated. The variable limiter is not deacti- R at speed limits below 20 km/h
vated. set speed are adopted.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your R in wet conditions or in fog
Function of Activ
Activee Speed Limit Assist responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise R when towing a trailer
If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more dangers (/ page 216).
is detected and automatic adoption of speed lim- # Ensure that the driven speed complies
its is activated, the new speed limit is automati- System limits
System with tra c regulations.
cally adopted as the stored speed (/ page 244). The system limits of Tra c Sign Assist apply to # Adjust the driving speed to suit current
The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is the detection of tra c signs (/ page 243). tra c and weather conditions.
level with the tra c sign at the latest. In the case Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically
of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the adopted by the system as the stored speed. Tem- Function of rout
route-based
e-based speed adaptation
adaptation
speed is adapted according to the speed permit- porary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted within the urban area. The speed limit display or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly ted, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly
in the Instrument Display is always updated when detected by the system. The maximum permissi- to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive
the vehicle is level with the tra c sign. ble speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route
If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited detected by the system. event ahead in an economical, comfortable or
stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recom- Adjust the speed in these situations. dynamic manner. When the route event has been
mended speed is automatically adopted as the passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the
stored speed. The system uses the speed stored stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in
234 Driving and parking

front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restric- The driver is responsible for choosing the right The speed adaptation made by the system may
tions ahead are taken into account. speed and observing other road users. This not always be suitable, particularly in the following
You can activate and deactivate route-based applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and situations:
speed adaptation in the multimedia system tra c lights, as route-based speed adaptation R the road's course not clearly visible
(/ page 235). does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.
R road narrowing
The following route events are taken into account: When route guidance is active, the rst speed
R varying maximum permissible speeds in indi-
adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn
R Bends
signal indicator is switched on, the selected route vidual lanes, for example at toll stations
R T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations is con rmed and further speed adjustment is acti- R wet road surfaces, snow or ice
R Turns and exits vated. R when towing a trailer
R Tra c jams ahead (only with Live Tra c Infor- Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following
In these situations the driver must intervene
mation ) cases:
accordingly.
R If the turn signal indicator is switched o
% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis-
before the route event. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as
the stored speed. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or route-based speed adaptation
brake pedal during the process. Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc-
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi-
cator to change lanes is switched on and one of System limits
System tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol-
the following situations is detected: Route-based speed adaptation does not take right lowing situations:
R Turning o at junctions of way regulations into account. The driver is R If the driver does not follow the calculated

R Driving on slowing-down lanes

responsible for complying with road tra c regula- route
tions and driving at a suitable speed. R If map data is not up-to-date or available
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes R In the event of roadworks
 Driving and parking 235

R In bad weather or road conditions Function of Activ

Activee Tr
Traa c Jam Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated
Active Tra c Jam Assist helps you when in tra c and active (/ page 230).
R If the accelerator pedal is depressed jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriage- R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 238).
R In the event of electronically displayed ways by automatically pulling away within 60 sec-
speed limitations onds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It R Active Steering Assist is activated and active
orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane (/ page 237).
# Adapt the speed to the tra c situation.
markings. Active Tra c Jam Assist automatically R Active Tra c Jam Assist is activated
maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front (/ page 235).
Setting
Setting rout
route-based
e-based speed adaptation
adaptation
and vehicles cutting in. R You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Active Tra c Jam Assist requires you, as the
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel System limits
System
ted. at all times so that you are able to intervene at The system limitations of Active Distance Assist
R ECO Assist is active. any time to correct the course of the vehicle and DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to
keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving sys- Active Tra c Jam Assist.
Multimedia system: tems and your responsibility; you may otherwise Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Activ
Activee Tr
Traa c Jam Assist
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance fail to recognise dangers (/ page 216). Multimedia system:
5 Route-based speed adapt.
Active Tra c Jam Assist activates automatically as 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
# Activate or deactivate the function. soon as all of the requirements are met: The ¬ # Select ¬.
When the function is active, the vehicle speed status display appears in the instrument cluster
is adjusted depending on the route events when the function is active.
ahead. Requirements: Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist
% Further information on the route-based speed R You are in a tra c jam on a motorway or high- Function of Activ
Activee Steer
Steering
ing Assist
adaptation (/ page 233). speed major road. Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay
236 Driving and parking

in the centre of the lane by means of moderate and ashing. Once the system is passive, the time or has removed their hands from the steering
steering interventions. Depending on the speed Ø symbol is shown as grey in the Instru- wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does
driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ment Display. not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in
ahead and lane markings as a reference. % Depending on the selected vehicle settings, addition to the visual warning message.
% Depending on the country, in the lower speed Active Steering Assist may be unavailable. If the driver does not react to the warning for a
range Active Steering Assist can use the sur- considerable period, the system can initiate an
rounding tra c as a reference. If necessary, Steer
eering
ing and touc
touchh detection
detection emergency stop (/ page 238).
Active Steering Assist can then also provide The driver is required to keep their hands on the
steering wheel at all times and be able to inter- If the driver steers, no warning is issued, or the
assistance when driving outside the centre of warning is ended.
the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane. vene at any time to correct the course of the vehi-
cle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles change from active to passive mode or vice versa limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches at any time. and a warning tone sounds.
to passive mode. The system provides no support
in this case. Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
Status display
display of Activ
Activee Steer
Steering
ing Assist
Assist in tthe
he dangers (/ page 216).
Instr
Ins trument
ument Display
R Ø (grey): activated and passive System limits
System
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor-
R Ø (green): activated and active
que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steer-
R Ø (red): system limits detected ing intervention is not su cient to keep the vehi-
R Ø (white, red hands): "hands on the steer- cle in the lane or to drive through exits.
ing wheel" prompt
% During the transition from active to passive If the system detects that the driver has not
status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged steered the vehicle for a considerable period of
 Driving and parking 237

The system may be impaired or may not function The system does not provide assistance in the fol- & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer-
in the following instances: lowing conditions: ing Assist unexpectedly intervenes
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, R On tight bends and when turning.
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi- The detection of lane markings and objects
R When crossing junctions. may malfunction and cause unexpected steer-
tions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
R At roundabouts or toll stations. ing interventions.
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,
R When towing a trailer. # Steer according to tra c conditions.
direct sunlight or re ections.
R When the tyre pressure is too low.
R Insu cient road illumination. Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Activ
Activee Steer
Steering
ing Assist
R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. ing Assist unexpectedly stops functioning R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
by a sticker.
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
R No, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
are reached there is no guarantee that the ted.
ent for one lane, or the markings change system will remain active or will keep the vehi-
quickly, for example, in a construction area or cle in lane. Multimedia system:
junctions. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
# Always keep your hands on the steering
R The lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
wheel and observe the tra c carefully. # Select a Act. Steer. Asst.
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
# Always steer the vehicle paying attention
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
to tra c conditions.
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
R The road is narrow and winding.
R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
238 Driving and parking

Function of Activ
Activee Emergency
Emergency Stop
Stop Assist reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in Activ
ctivee Brak
Brakee Assist
stages to a standstill.
Function of Activ
Activee Brak
Brakee Assist
Depending on the country, at speeds below
60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on Active Brake Assist consists of the following func-
automatically. tions:
R Distance warning function
When the vehicle is stationary, the following
actions are carried out: R Autonomous braking function
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park- R Situation-dependent braking assistance
ing brake. R Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Eva-
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended. sive Steering Assist and cornering function
R The vehicle is unlocked. Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the
If the system detects that the driver has not
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedes-
time or has removed their hands from the steering Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. trians or to reduce the e ects of such a collision.
wheel, display 1 appears in the Instrument Dis- The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-
play. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, by performing one of the following actions: sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis-
or gives no con rmation to the system, a warning tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument
R Steering cluster.
tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes-
sage. R Braking or accelerating If you do not react to the warning, autonomous
If the driver still does not respond to the warning, R Deactivating Active Distance Assist braking can be initiated in critical situations.
the Beginning emergency stop message appears DISTRONIC In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist
in the Instrument Display. If the driver still does can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this
not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur
simultaneously with the braking application.
 Driving and parking 239

If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by The individual subfunctions are are available
available in var
vari-i-
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak- limited detection performance of Active ous speed rang
ranges:
es:
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance Brake Assist The distance warning function can issue a warn-
occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi- ing in the following situations:
mum full-stop braking if necessary. Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex tra c situations. R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several
Observe the notes on driving systems and your seconds the distance maintained to the vehi-
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: cle travelling in front is insu cient for the
dangers (/ page 216). R Give a warning or brake without reason driven speed, the L distance warning lamp
R Not give a warning or not brake lights up in the instrument cluster.
R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a su ciently safe critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedes-
distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed trian, you will hear an intermittent warning
and for braking in good time. tone and the L distance warning lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c
situation; do not rely on Active Brake Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi-
Assist alone. ded it is safe to do so and the tra c situation
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces- allows this.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent sary.
braking assistance has occurred, display 1
appears in the Instrument Display and then auto- Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
matically goes out a er a short time. Assist.
240 Driving and parking

Distance war
Distance warning
ning function (vehicles
(vehicles without
without Driv-
Driv- R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when Aut
utonomous
onomous braking
braking function (vehicles
(vehicles with
with Driv-
Driv-
ing Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age)
e) approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ing Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age)e)
The distance warning function can aid you in the ahead If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approx-
following situations with an intermittent warning R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when imately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function
tone and a warning lamp: approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing may intervene in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead Aut
utonomous
onomous braking
braking function (vehicles
(vehicles without
without when approaching vehicles ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when Driving Assistance
Driving Assistance Pack
Packag
age)
e) R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approx- when approaching stationary vehicles
walking in the direction of travel and cyclists imately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
ahead may intervene in the following situations: approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when R at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching crossing pedestrians when approaching vehicles ahead approaching stationary and moving pedes-
Distance war
Distance warning
ning function (vehicles
(vehicles with
with Driving
Driving R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when trians, crossing vehicles and stationary and
Assistance
Assist ance Pack
Packagage)
e) approaching cyclists ahead crossing cyclists
The distance warning function can aid you in the R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when Situation-dependent braking
braking assistance
assistance (vehicles
(vehicles
following situations with an intermittent warning approaching stationary vehicles or moving without
wit hout Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age)
e)
tone and a warning lamp: pedestrians The situation-dependent braking assistance can
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles when approaching vehicles ahead
 Driving and parking 241

R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when Cancelling a brak

brakee application of Activ
Activee Brake
Brake R Activation by an abrupt steering movement
approaching stationary vehicles and vehicles Assist during a swerving manoeuvre.
ahead You can cancel a brake application of Active R Assistance during swerving and straightening
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when Brake Assist at any time by: of the vehicle.
approaching moving pedestrians R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or R Reaction from a speed of approximately
Situation-dependent braking
braking assistance
assistance (vehicles
(vehicles with kickdown 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately
withh Driving
wit Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packagage)
e) R releasing the brake pedal 70 km/h.
The situation-dependent braking assistance can Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica- You can prevent the assistance at any time by
intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h tion when one of the following conditions is ful l- actively steering.
in the following situations: led: Cornering
Corner ing function (only
(only vehicles
vehicles with
with Driving
Driving
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h R you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle Assistance
Assist ance Pack
Packag
age)
e)
when approaching vehicles ahead If the system detects a risk of a collision with an
R there is no longer a risk of collision
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncom-
R an obstacle is no longer detected in front of
when approaching stationary vehicles ing lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at
your vehicle speeds below 15 km/h before you have le the
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching cyclists ahead Evasivee Steer
Evasiv Steering
ing Assist
Assist (onl
(onlyy vehicles
vehicles with
with Driving
Driving lane in which you are driving.
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when Assistance
Assist ance Pack
Packagage)
e)
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva-
approaching stationary and moving pedes- Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac-
sive Steering Assist
trians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and teristics:
crossing cyclists R The ability to detect stationary or moving Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog-
pedestrians. nise objects or complex tra c situations
clearly.
R Assistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
242 Driving and parking

Moreover, the steering support provided by The system may be impaired or may not function, R On bends with a tight radius.
Evasive Steering Assist is not su cient to particularly in the following situations:
% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto-
avoid a collision. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,
matically while a certain distance is being
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light driven a er the vehicle has been delivered.
situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering conditions. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only par-
Assist alone. R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or tially available during the teach-in process.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces- covered.
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Activ
Activee Brak
Brakee Assist
sary. R If the sensors are impaired due to interference
# End the support by actively steering in from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
re ections in multi-storey car parks. R The vehicle is switched on.
non-critical situations.
# Drive at an appropriate speed if there R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre Multimedia system:
are pedestrians close to the path of your has been detected and displayed. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
vehicle. R In complex tra c situations where objects 5 Active Brake Assist
cannot always be clearly identi ed.
# Select the desired setting.
System limits
System R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into
Full system performance is not yet available for a The setting is retained when the drive system
the sensor detection range. is next started.
few seconds a er switching on the vehicle or a er
R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
driving o . Deactivating Activ
Deactivating Activee Brak
Brakee Assist
R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be
If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative % It is recommended that you always leave
due to a malfunction, the Ä warning lamp distinguished from the background.
Active Brake Assist activated.
appears in the Instrument Display. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects.
R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
 Driving and parking 243

# Select Off. If the system detects that you are driving onto a Displayy in the
Displa the Instr
Instrument
ument Display
The distance warning function, the autono- section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it
mous braking function and Evasive Steering triggers a warning.
Assist are deactivated. The camera also detects tra c signs with a
When the vehicle is next started, the middle restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g.
setting is automatically selected. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric-
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter-
symbol appears in the status bar of the Instru- mine whether the restriction applies.
ment Display. War
arning
ning when the
the maximum permissible
permissible speed is
exceeded
exceeded
Tra c Sign Assist The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit
Function of Tr
Traa c Sign Assist this, you can specify in the multimedia system by 1 Maximum permissible speed
Tra c Sign Assist detects tra c signs with the how much the maximum permissible speed can 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a
multifunction camera (/ page 216). It assists be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can
you by displaying detected speed limits and over- restriction
specify whether the warning is to be just a visual 3 Additional sign with restriction
taking restrictions in the Instrument Display. warning or an acoustic one as well.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your % Vehicles with
with a standar
standardd Instr
Instrument
ument Display:
Display: a
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise + symbol next to a tra c sign in the Instru-
dangers (/ page 216). ment Display indicates that additional tra c
Since Tra c Sign Assist also uses the data stored signs have been detected. These can also be
in the navigation system, it can update the display displayed in the media display and optionally
in the following situations without detecting tra c in the head-up display.
signs.
244 Driving and parking

If Tra c Sign Assist cannot determine the maxi- System limits

System Setting
Setting Tr
Traa c Sign Assist
mum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing The system may be impaired or may not function
signs), the following display appears in the Instru- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
particularly in the following situations: R Onlyy vehicles
Onl vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e:
ment Display:
R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO
illumination of the road, highly variable shade Assist must be activated for the automatic
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. adoption of speed limits.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c,
direct sunlight or re ections. Multimedia system:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
country where Tra c Sign Assist is not supported. R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunc-
5 Traffic Sign Assist
Tra c Sign Assist is not available in all countries. tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted
up, damaged or covered. Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating automatic
automatic adoption
adoption of
% Also observe the information on display mes-
sages in Tra c Sign Assist (/ page 433). R If the tra c signs are hard to detect, e.g. due speed limits (only
(only vehicles
vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance
to dirt, snow or insu cient lighting, or Pack
ackag
age)
e)
Wararning
ning when approac
approaching
hing pedestr
pedestrian
ian crossings
crossings because they are covered. # Select Adopt limit.
(vehicles
(vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packagage)
e) R If the information in the navigation system's # Switch the function on or o .
The system can warn you if you approach a digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The ¯ The speed limits detected by Tra c Sign
R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road- Assist are automatically adopted by Active
Watch for pedestrians message appears in the
instrument cluster. works or in adjacent lanes. Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
The warning occurs only if appropriate tra c R If you turn sharply when passing tra c signs % If one of the following systems is activated,
signs or lane markings are detected and pedes- outside the camera's eld of vision. the detected speed can be manually adopted
trians are present in the danger zone. as the speed limit:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Cruise control
 Driving and parking 245

R Variable limiter the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind
vehicle. Spot Assist
Further information about Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC: (/ page 230). If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx-
imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles
Displaying detect
Displaying detected
ed tr
traa c signs in the
the media dis- enters the monitoring range directly next to your approaching and overtaking you at a greatly
play vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror di erent speed.
# Select Display in head unit. lights up red. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this
Permanent status display in the instrument clus- situation.
# Switch the function on or o .
ter: # Always pay careful attention to the tra c
Setting
Setting the
the type of war
warning
ning R ¸ (grey): system is activated but inopera-
situation and maintain a safe distance at
# Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off. the side of the vehicle.
tive
Setting the
Setting the war
warning
ning thr
threshold
eshold R ¸ (green): system is activated and opera- Observe the notes on driving systems and your
This value determines the speed at which a warn- tional responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
ing is issued when exceeded. dangers (/ page 216).
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and
# Select Warning threshold.
you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor- Exit war
warning
ning
# Set the desired speed. responding direction, a double warning tone The exit warning is an additional function of Blind
sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about
mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator remains approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle
Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist and Activ
Activee Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist with switched on, all other detected vehicles are indi-
exit war
warning
ning when stationary.
cated only by the ashing of the red warning
Function of Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist and Activ
Activee Blind lamp.
Spot Assist
Spot Assist with
with exit
exit war
warning
ning If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use given.
two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor
246 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi- Warnings may be interrupted when driving along-
warning tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The side long vehicles, for example lorries, for a pro-
responsibility for opening and closing the doors longed time.
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi- Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
objects nor to persons or road users cle occupants. gear is engaged.
approaching you at a greatly di ering speed.
System limits
System Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehi-
situations.
be limited in the following situations, in particular: cle and the electrical connection has been cor-
# Always pay particular attention to the rectly established.
tra c situation when opening the doors R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured The exit warning may be limited in the following
and make sure there is su cient clear-
situations:
ance. R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
R when the sensors are covered by adjacent
snow
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is vehicles in narrow parking spaces
R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occu- motorbikes R when people approach the vehicle
pant opens the door on the side with the warning, R in the event of stationary or slowly moving
R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in objects
the outside mirror starts to ash. R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their
This additional function is only available when lane Function of brak
brakee application (Activ
(Activee Blind Spot
Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning Assist)
Assis t)
Warnings may be issued in error when driving If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane
to three minutes a er switching the vehicle o . impact in the monitoring range, a course-correct-
borders. Always make sure that there is su cient ing brake application is carried out. This is
The exit warning is no longer available once the distance to the side for other tra c or obstacles.
warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three designed to help you avoid a collision.
times.
 Driving and parking 247

The course-correcting brake application is availa- If a course-correcting brake application occurs, R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
ble in the speed range between approximately the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror or Active Brake Assist.
30 km/h and 200 km/h. and a warning tone sounds. In addition, display R ESP® is deactivated.
1 indicating the danger of a side collision
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake appears in the Instrument Display. R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
application of Active Blind Spot Assist detected.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro-
A course-correcting brake application cannot priate brake application. This brake application R You are driving with a trailer and the electrical
always prevent a collision. may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly connection to the trailer hitch has been cor-
in the opposite direction or accelerate. rectly established.
# Always steer, brake or accelerate your-
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist System limits
System Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Assist or
warns you or makes a course-correcting Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Activ
ctivee Blind Spot
Spot Assist
brake application. Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dan- Multimedia system:
# Always maintain a safe distance at the gers (/ page 245). 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance

sides. Either a course-correcting brake application # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, or
may occur in the following situations:
# Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.
R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. Activ
ctivee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with Function of Activ
Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
high cornering speeds. Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
R You brake or accelerate signi cantly.
front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction
camera (/ page 216). It serves to protect you
against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will
248 Driving and parking

be warned by vibration pulses in the steering Conditions for

for a course-corr
course-correcting
ecting brak
brakee applica-
wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake tion (vehicles
(vehicles without
without Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age)
e)
application back into your lane. Depending on the setting, a course-correcting
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the brake application occurs in the following situa-
speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. tions (/ page 250).
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the % The availability of this setting is dependent on
risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving the country. If the function is activated in
style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot countries in which this setting is not
not available,
take into account road, weather or tra c condi- a lane-correcting brake application is initiated
tions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. in the following situations:
You are responsible for maintaining a safe dis- If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis- Lane markings were detected on both sides of
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for play 1 appears in the Instrument Display. the lane. The front wheel drives over a contin-
braking in good time and for staying in lane. The system does not apply the brake if you acti- uous lane marking.
The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis- vate the turn signal indicator. Standard setting
played in the on-board computer: Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: if the R Lane markings were detected on both sides of
R Ã (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is system detects an obstacle, such as another vehi- the lane. The front wheel drives over a contin-
active and operating. cle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake uous lane marking.
R Ã (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
regardless of the turn signal indicator. R A lane marking and the edge of a rm road
active but not operating. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel surface were detected. The front wheel drives
in the following circumstances: over a lane marking on the edge of the rm
R ·: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva-
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane road surface.
ted or there is a malfunction.
marking. R A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle were
R A front wheel drives over this lane marking. detected. The front wheel drives over the lane
marking.
 Driving and parking 249

Sensitive setting lane. The front wheel drives over the lane R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con-
R All situations described under the Standard marking. nection to the trailer has been correctly estab-
setting. lished.
Sensitive setting
R A continuous lane marking was detected and R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
R The situations described under the Standard detected and displayed.
driven over with the front wheel. setting.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any R A continuous lane marking was detected and If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist
time if you steer slightly in the opposite direc- driven over with the front wheel. warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly
tion. detected, it is possible that no lane-correcting
% A brake application may be interrupted at any brake application takes place (/ page 250).
Conditions for for a course-corr
course-correcting
ecting brak
brakee applica- time if you steer slightly in the opposite direc- The system may be impaired or may not function
tion (vehicles
(vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age)
e) tion. particularly in the following situations:
Depending on the setting, a course-correcting
brake application occurs in the following situa- System limits
System R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insu cient
tions (/ page 250). No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the illumination of the road, highly variable shade
following situations: conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
% The availability of this setting is dependent on
R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel- R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming tra c, the
the country. If the function is activated in
countries in which this setting is not
not available, erate. sun or re ections.
a lane-correcting brake application is initiated R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as R If the windscreen in the area of the multifunc-
in all situations described under Sensitive. ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted
Standard setting Assist. up, damaged or covered.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with R If there are no lane markings, or several
R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an
overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel high cornering speeds or high rates of acceler- unclear lane markings are present for one
to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent ation. lane, e.g. around roadworks.
R When ESP® is deactivated.
250 Driving and parking

R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov- Setting Activ

Setting Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist R The driving style
ered. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
The drive program can be adjusted using the
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
short and thus the lane markings cannot be 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
detected.
Setting the
Setting the sensitivity AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL
OL
R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch o , cross one another or merge. % The availability of this function is dependent AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL
OL function
on the country.
R If the carriageway is very narrow and winding.
# Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. * NO
NOTE
TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
R Vehicles with
with Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: if
the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating the
the haptic
haptic war
warning
ning # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
or covered in snow and an obstacle is detec- # Select Warning. You could otherwise fail to recognise
ted in your lane, no lane-correcting brake Activate or deactivate the function. dangers.
application takes place.
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Activ
Activee Lane Keeping
Keeping DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL
OL function with variable damping for improved driving com-
Assist fort. The all-round level control system ensures
Multimedia system: DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts
the best possible suspension and constant ground
4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access the characteristics of the suspension dampers to
clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving
the current operating and driving conditions.
5 Active Lane Keeping Assist at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to
The damping is tuned individually for each wheel improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con-
# Activate or deactivate the function.
and is a ected by the following factors: sumption. You also have the option of manually
R The road surface conditions adjusting the vehicle level.
R Vehicle load
R The drive program selected
 Driving and parking 251

AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following com- Drive program ;: Setting
Setting the
the vehicle
vehicle level
level
ponents and functions: R The suspension setting is comfortable.
R air suspension with variable spring rate & WARNING Risk of accident because vehi-
R The vehicle is set to low level -1.
cle level is too high
R automatic level control system R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you
R speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel con-
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
are travelling at higher speeds.
sumption The vehicle can dri outwards, for example,
Drive program C: when steering or cornering.
R manually selectable high-level setting for
greater ground clearance R The suspension setting is rmer. # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to

R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with R The vehicle is set to low level -1. the driving style and the road surface
constant damping force adjustment) R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you
conditions.
R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button are travelling at higher speeds.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi-
Suspension setting
setting and vehicle
vehicle level
level per driv
drivee pro-
pro- Drive program B: cle lowering
gram
gr am R The suspension setting is even rmer.
When lowering the vehicle, other people could
Drive program A: R The vehicle is set to low level -1. become trapped if their limbs are between the
R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the
R The vehicle is set to the normal level. are travelling at higher speeds. vehicle.
# Make sure no one is underneath the
R When driving at speeds of approximately Individual suspension settings can be called up in
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the
125 km/h or above, the vehicle is lowered. drive program = (/ page 185).
wheel arches when the vehicle is being
R When driving at speeds below approximately lowered.
80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again.
252 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due immediate vicinity of the body when the Raising the
the vehicle
vehicle
to the vehicle lowering vehicle is being lowered.
Vehicles with
with AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL OL or level
level
control
contr ol system:
system: when you unload luggage or * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
leave the vehicle, the vehicle rst rises slightly # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
and then returns to the set level shortly a er- You could otherwise fail to recognise
wards. dangers.
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel
arches or the underbody could thus become Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
trapped. R The vehicle has been started.
The vehicle can also be lowered a er being R The vehicle must not be moving faster than
locked. 60 km/h.
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that
nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel
arches or the underbody.

* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

# Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up.
Parts of the body could be damaged when the The vehicle is set to the high level.
vehicle is lowered.
# Make sure that there are no obstacles
Your selection is saved.
such as kerbs underneath or in the The vehicle is automatically lowered again in the
following situations:
R When driving faster than 80 km/h.
 Driving and parking 253

R When driving between 60 km/h and 80 km/h Rever

ersing
sing camera The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mir-
for approximately three minutes. ror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Function of the
the rever
reversing
sing camera
R A er changing a drive program using the If you have activated the function in the multime- Vehicles without
without Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTR
TRONIC
ONIC
DYNAMIC SELECT switch. dia system (/ page 260), the image from the The following camera views are available in the
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last reversing camera is displayed in the media display multimedia system:
active drive program. when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide
lines show the path the vehicle will take with the
Lowering
Lower ing the
the vehicle
vehicle current steering angle. This helps you to orient
# Press button 1. yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
adjusted to the height of the active drive pro- substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
gram. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park-
ing remains with you. Make sure that there are no
Operation with
Operation with a trailer
trailer or bicycle
bicycle rack
rack persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeu-
If the electrical connection to the transport equip- vring area while manoeuvring and parking.
ment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is estab- The guide lines in the media display show the dis-
lished correctly: tances to your vehicle. The distances displayed Normal view
R Up to approximately 30 km/h: the high level only apply to road level. 1 Driven surface depending on the current
can be selected regardless of the drive pro- steering angle (dynamic)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
gram. 2 Guide lines at a distance of approximately
select from the following views:
R From approx. 30 km/h: the vehicle is adjusted 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
R Normal view
to normal level, regardless of drive program. area
R Wide-angle view 3 Lane marking the course the tyres will take
R Trailer view with the current steering angle (dynamic)
254 Driving and parking

4 Bumper
5 Guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the rear area

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) Normal view

1 Locating aid 1 Yellow warning display: obstacles at a dis-
2 Guide line at a distance of approximately tance between approximately 0.7 m and
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 1.0 m
Wide-angle view 2 Orange warning display: obstacles at a dis-
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
tance between approximately 0.4 m and
Vehicles with
with Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTR
TRONIC
ONIC 0.7 m
The following camera views are available in the 3 Guide lines at a distance of approximately
multimedia system: 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
area
4 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will
take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
 Driving and parking 255

5 Driven surface depending on the current 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
steering angle (dynamic) 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
6 Guide line at a distance of approximately 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
0.3 m from the rear area
System malfunction
System
The colour of warning display 1/2 changes If the reversing camera is not operational, the
dynamically and is based on the distance to the System inoperative message appears in the
detected obstacle: media display.
R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less System limits
System
than 1.0 m
The reversing camera will not function or will only
R Yellow
ellow:: obstacles at a distance between Wide-angle view partially function in the following situations:
approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R The boot lid is open.
R Or
Orang
ange:
e: obstacles at a distance between
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
approximately 0.4 m or less
R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the
% Vehicles with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist:
Assist: when cameras are tted, are damaged, dirty or cov-
Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings ered. Observe the information on vehicle sen-
4 are displayed in green. sors and cameras (/ page 216).
% Do not use the reversing camera in these
types of situations. You could otherwise injure
Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) others or collide with objects when parking
1 Yellow guide line, locating aid the vehicle.
256 Driving and parking

% The contrast of the display may be impaired animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area 4 Wide-angle view, rear
by direct sunlight or by other light sources, while manoeuvring and parking. 5 Top view with image from the reversing cam-
e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, The system evaluates images from the following era
pay particular attention. cameras: 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for R Reversing camera trailer hitch)
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
R Front camera Function of the
the guide lines
use.
R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Guide lines are also displayed in the camera
images of the top views. These are based on the
360° Camera View
iewss of the
the 360° Camera current steering angle and show the distance to
Function of the
the 360° Camera objects and other vehicles.
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras which cover the immediate sur-
roundings of the vehicle. The system assists you
when you are parking or at exits with reduced visi-
bility, for example.
The views of the 360° Camera are always availa-
ble when driving forwards up to a speed of
approx. 16 km/h and when reversing.
The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a
distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly 1 Wide-angle view, front
or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for 2 Top view with image from the front camera
your attention to the surroundings. The responsi- 3 Top view with images from the side cameras
bility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains in the outside mirrors
with you. Make sure that there are no persons,
 Driving and parking 257

In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at Wide-angle view,

view, front
front
the level of the trailer hitch.
In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warn-
ing display is also shown (/ page 260).
The colour of warning display changes dynami-
cally and is based on the distance to the detected
obstacle:
R Blue: no obstacles detected at a distance less
than 1.0 m
1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately R Yellow
ellow:: obstacles at a distance between
0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear approximately 0.7 m and 1.0 m
R Or
1 Warning display of Parking Assist
area Orang
ange:
e: obstacles at a distance between
approximately 0.4 m and 0.7 m PARKTRONIC
2 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will
take with the current steering angle (dynamic) R Red: obstacles at a very short distance of
3 Driven surface depending on the current approximately 0.4 m or less
steering angle (dynamic)
% When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately
tional and no object is detected, the warning
0.3 m from the rear area display is shown here in blue.
% When Active Parking Assist is active, paths
2 are displayed in green.
The guide lines show the distances to your
vehicle. The distances apply to road level.
258 Driving and parking

Top view
view with
with image
image from
from the
the front
front camera

Top view
view trailer
trailer view
view — no trailer
trailer connected
connected 1 Locating aid
If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled 2 Guide line at a distance of approximately
1 Warning display of Parking Assist to the vehicle, the following display appears:
PARKTRONIC (/ page 260, 270) 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
2 Your vehicle from above
3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take Top view
view trailer
trailer view
view — trailer
trailer connected
connected
at the current steering angle When the electrical connection is established
between the vehicle and the trailer, the display
Top view
view with
with images
images from
from the
the side cameras
cameras in changes to the side camera view.
the outside mirrors
mirrors
The front and rear sides of the vehicle can be This view supports manoeuvring procedures with
seen in this view. a trailer.
 Driving and parking 259

R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted this case, pay particular attention.
up. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
R If cameras or vehicle components in which the example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
cameras are tted are damaged. In this event, use.
have the cameras, their positions and their See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
setting checked at a quali ed specialist work- (/ page 370).
shop.
Calling up the
the view
view of the
the 360° Camera
Camera using
% Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir- reverse
rever se gear
gear
System limits
System cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth-
ers or collide with objects when parking the Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys- R The Auto reversing camera function is activa-
tem inoperative message appears in the media vehicle.
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 260).
display. For technical reasons, the standard height of the
The 360° Camera will not function or will only vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a # Engage reverse gear.
partially function in the following situations: heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the # Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-
R You are driving forwards at a speed greater
guide lines and in the display of the generated tem (/ page 256).
images.
than approximately 16 km/h. # If, a er shi ing to reverse gear, the image of
R The doors are open.
The eld of vision and other functions of the cam- the reversing camera is not shown: switch o
era system may be restricted due to additional the vehicle, press and hold the c button,
R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate switch on the vehicle and engage reverse gear
R The boot lid is open. bracket, bicycle rack). again.
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy % The contrast of the display may be impaired
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light
260 Driving and parking

Switching rever
Switching reversing
sing camera
camera automatic
automatic mode ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and Displayss in the
Display the media display
on/o parking remains with you. Make sure that there
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeu-
substitute for your attention to the surroundings. vring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exit-
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park- ing parking spaces.
ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons, The passive side impact protection also warns you
animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring of obstacles to the side. During the parking proce-
range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be dure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the
ready to brake at all times. vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of
Multimedia system: a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance collision, a warning is issued. In order for an
5 Camera & parking object on the side to be detected, the sensors in
the front and rear bumper must rst detect the Vehicles with 360° Camera
# Switch Auto reversing camera on or o .
object while you are driving past it.
In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to
Par
arking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTR
TRONIC
ONIC be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a dis-
Function of Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTRTRONIC
ONIC tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park- vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles
ing assistance system which monitors the area on all sides can be shown.
surrounding your vehicle and shows you the dis-
tance between the vehicle and a detected obsta-
cle visually and audibly.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is Vehicles without 360° Camera
not a substitute for your attention to the surround-
 Driving and parking 261

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- Standard setting:

tional, the respective areas of the display are R Front and sides: < 0.4 m
shown in blue.
R Rear
ear:: < 1 m
1 Operational, front and rear
2 Operational, all around Warn early all-round:
R Fr
Front
ont:: < 1 m
3 Obstacles detected at the front le and on
the right-hand side R Sides: < 0.7 m
R Rear
ear:: < 1 m
The colour of the display changes depending on
the distance to the detected obstacle: A continuous warning tone sounds from a dis-
R Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected) tance of approximately 0.2 m, regardless of the Vehicles without 360° Camera
R Yellow
ellow:: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m selected setting. If an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected and
R Or
the Camera & parking menu is not open in the
Orang
ange:
e: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m
media display, pop-up window 1 appears:
R Red: < 0.4 m
R vehicles without
without Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist:
Assist: at
Vehicles with
with 360° Camera:
Camera: the boundary line speeds below 12 km/h
shi s dynamically depending on the position and R vehicles with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist:
Assist: at speeds
distance of the obstacles detected. below 18 km/h
Depending on the distance to the obstacle detec-
ted, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You
can set the timing of the warnings in the multime-
dia system (/ page 264).
Vehicles with 360° Camera
262 Driving and parking

R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi- Problems

Pr oblems with
with Par
Parking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTR
TRONIC
ONIC
cle from the side.
R Objects placed next to the vehicle.
Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol-
lowing situations, for example:
R You park the vehicle and switch it o .
R You open the doors.

A er an engine start, obstacles must be detected

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist again by driving past them before a warning can
PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately be issued.
1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m on the side 3 can Observe the information on vehicle sensors and 1 Vehicles with 360° Camera
also be displayed in the head-up display. cameras; the system otherwise cannot function 2 Vehicles without 360° Camera
properly (/ page 216).
System limits
System If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights
Vehicles with
with trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: Parking Assist up red for approximately three seconds then goes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone
take into account the following obstacles: out, and the é symbol appears in the instru-
when you establish an electrical connection ment cluster, the system may have been deactiva-
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. per- between your vehicle and a trailer. ted due to signal interference. Start the vehicle
sons, animals or objects. again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. working at a di erent location.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of lorries.
 Driving and parking 263

If the é symbol appears in the instrument # Vehicles without

without AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL:
OL: press sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars.
cluster and a warning tone sounds, it may be due the é button in the centre console. The vehicle or other objects could other-
to one of the following causes: % Vehicles withwith AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL:
OL: you can wise be damaged.
R The sensors
sensors are
are dirty
dir ty:: clean the sensors and activate or deactivate Parking Assist
observe the notes on care of vehicle parts PARKTRONIC in the multimedia system Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
(/ page 370). (/ page 263). R The camera menu is open.
R Par arking
king Assist
Assist PARK
PARKTRTRONIC
ONIC has been deacti- If the indicator lamp in the é button is not lit, R Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
vat
ated
ed due toto a malfunction: restart the vehi- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indi- R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.
cle. If the problem persists, consult a quali ed cator lamp is lit or the é symbol appears in
specialist workshop. the Instrument Display, Parking Assist # Tap = on the media display.
PARKTRONIC is not active. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Par
Parking
king Assist
PARK
ARKTRTRONIC
ONIC % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not
activated when the vehicle is started. lit or the é symbol appears in the instrument
* NOTE
NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Par
Parking
king Assist
close range PARK
ARKTRTRONIC
ONIC using the
the multimedia system
system % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect activated when the vehicle is started.
certain objects at close range. * NOTE
NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be
# When parking or manoeuvring the vehi- close range activated or deactivated in the quick access
cle, pay particular attention to any Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect menu.
objects which are above or below the certain objects at close range.
sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars. # When parking or manoeuvring the vehi-
The vehicle or other objects could other- cle, pay particular attention to any
wise be damaged. objects which are above or below the
264 Driving and parking

Setting
Setting the
the war
warning
ning tones
tones of Par
Parking
king Assist when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warn- R Parking in parking spaces that can only be
PARK
ARKTRTRONIC
ONIC ing tone. detected as such due to markings (for exam-
Multimedia system: # Select Audio fadeout during warning tones. ple at the roadside)
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked
# Switch the function on or o .
5 Camera & parking using Active Parking Assist
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the volume
volume of the
the war
warning
ning tones
tones Activ
ctivee Par
Parking
king Assist As soon as all requirements are met for searching
# Select Warning tone volume. for parking spaces, the Ç display appears in
Function of Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist the Instrument Display.
# Set a value. Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
assistance system, which uses ultrasound with When Active Parking Assist has detected parking
Adjus
djusting
ting the
the pitch
pitch of the
the war
warning
ning tones
tones the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° spaces, the È display appears in the Instru-
# Select Warning tone pitch. Camera. When you are driving forwards up to ment Display. The arrows show on which side of
# Set a value. approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically the road detected parking spaces are located.
measures parking spaces on both sides of the They are then shown in the media display.
Specifying the
the star
starting
ting point for
for the
the war
warning
ning tones
tones vehicle. Vehicles with
with rever
reversing
sing camera:
camera: the parking space
You can specify whether the Parking Assist can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked
Active Parking Assist o ers the following func-
PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence in reverse.
tions:
when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle. Vehicles with
with 360° Camera:
Camera: the parking space
# Select Warn early all-round.
Vehicles with reversing camera
can be selected as desired. Depending on the
R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
# Switch the function on or o . location of the parking space, the parking direc-
Vehicles with 360° Camera tion (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected
Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating audio fadeout
fadeout as desired.
You can specify whether the volume of a media R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
source in the multimedia system is to be reduced R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the
road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
 Driving and parking 265

When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn System limits

System # In these situations, do not use Active
signal indicators are activated based on the calcu- If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist.
lated path of your vehicle. Parking Assist is not available.
The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating, Objects located above or below the detection Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or
braking, steering and gear changes. range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub- overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are
stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The the borders of parking spaces, are not detected partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking during measurement of the parking space. These identi ed as such or be measured incorrectly.
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- are also then not taken into account when calcu- Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring lating the parking procedure. In some circumstan- ground.
range. ces, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
you into the parking space incorrectly. situations:
Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the fol-
lowing situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. located above or below the detection packed snow or in heavy rain.
R You begin steering. range of Active Parking Assist R When transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
R You engage transmission position j. If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise: R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more
R ESP® intervenes.
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
than approximately 15%.
R You open the driver's door. R When snow chains are tted.
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
R A er activating Active Parking Assist, you R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
objects.
press the c button again (/ page 266).
R Directly a er a tyre change or when spare
There is a danger of collision! tyres are tted.
R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
266 Driving and parking

R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. a er # Press button 1. The turn signal indicator is switched on automati-
bottoming out on a kerb. cally when the parking procedure begins. You are
responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator
Active Parking Assist may also display parking in accordance with the tra c conditions. If neces-
spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle
swinging out while parking or pulling out
Par
arking
king with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of
the oncoming lane.
Parking spaces detected by the system are shown This could cause you to collide with objects or
in the media display. When the vehicle is station- other road users.
ary, indicated vehicle path 2 into currently selec-
# Pay attention to objects and other road
ted parking space 3 also appears.
users.
# If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cle.
cancel the parking procedure with Active
# If necessary, select another parking space.
Parking Assist.
# Vehicles withwith 360° Camera:
Camera: if necessary,
change the parking direction. # If, for example, the Please engage reverse
# To star
startt the
the parking
parking procedur
procedure:
e: con rm selec- gear message appears in the media display:
ted parking space 3.
 Driving and parking 267

select the corresponding transmission posi- R The vehicle has been parked with Active Park-
tion. ing Assist.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi-
cle and surroundings during the entire parking
% During the parking procedure with Active procedure.
Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis- # Start the vehicle.
played in green in the camera image. # Press button 1.
On completion of the parking procedure, the The media display shows the view of Active
Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle Parking Assist.
message appears. Further manoeuvring may still # Select Exit space 2.
be necessary.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When
or
required by legal requirements or local condi- # If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular
tions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. to the direction of travel: select direction of
% You can stop the vehicle and change the travel 3.
transmission position during the parking pro-
# If, for example, the Please engage forward
cedure. The system then calculates a new gear message appears in the media display:
vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa- select the corresponding transmission posi-
ble, the transmission position can be changed tion.
again, or the process can be cancelled. The vehicle moves out of the parking space
and is brought to a standstill by Active Parking
Exiting a parking
parking space with
with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist Assist (at an angle to the direction of travel).
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: The Ø Parking Assist finished, take con-
R The vehicle is equipped with a 360° Camera. trol of vehicle message appears.
268 Driving and parking

# Take control of the vehicle and complete the depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing assistant
assistant
parking process. the parking or exiting procedure.
Function of Driv
Drivee Away
Away Assist
% The vehicle path shown on the media display Check the area around your vehicle again before Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
may di er from the actual vehicle path. The resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detec-
turn signal indicator is switched on automati- that persons, animals or objects are no longer in ted in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed
cally when the exiting procedure begins. the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system is brie y reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal limitations of Active Parking Assist. situation is detected, the É symbol appears in
indicator in accordance with the tra c condi- Aut
utomatic
omatic braking
braking function of Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king the media display.
tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator Assist Drive Away Assist can be deactivated or activated
accordingly. Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring in the Manoeuvring assistance menu
Pausing Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply (/ page 270).
You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. % You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away
of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you Assist at any time by deactivating Parking
following actions, for example: depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exit- Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 263).
# depressing the brake pedal
ing procedure is resumed.
Check the area around your vehicle again before & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
# opening the front passenger door, a rear door,
resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make ted detection performance of Drive Away
the boot or the bonnet sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon- Assist
# applying the electric parking brake or activat- ger in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the
ing the HOLD function Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden-
system limitations of Active Parking Assist. tify objects and tra c situations.
# To resume
resume the
the parking
parking or exiting
exiting procedur
procedure:
e: # Always pay careful attention to the tra c
gently depress the accelerator pedal.
situation; do not rely on Drive Away
% If the electric parking brake was applied Assist alone.
before Active Parking Assist was activated,
 Driving and parking 269

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or
essary, provided the tra c situation per- 1.0 m away. other objects, detection is not possible.
mits and that it is safe to take evasive R If the manoeuvring assistance function is acti- Depending on the country, Cross Tra c Alert can
action. vated in the multimedia system. be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring
assistance menu (/ page 270).
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi- System limits
System
The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited % Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot
tute for your attention to the surroundings. The Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking on inclines.
(/ page 245).
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani- When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring not available. System limits
System
range. % Also observe the system limits of Parking Cross Tra c Alert is not available on inclines.
A risk of collision may occur in the following situa- Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 260). Cross Tra c Alert is not available when driving
tions, for example: with a trailer.
Function of Cross
Cross Tr
Traa c Alert
R If the accelerator and brake pedals are inter-
% Cross Tra c Alert is only available for vehicles Manoeuvring brak
Manoeuvring brakee function
changed. The manoeuvring brake function can prevent colli-
with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot
R If an incorrect transmission position is Assist. sions with pedestrians when the vehicle is revers-
engaged. ing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera
Cross Tra c Alert can warn drivers of any cross- detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle
Drive Away Assist is active under the following ing tra c when reversing and manoeuvring out of can be braked to a standstill.
conditions: a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper
also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a The manoeuvring brake function can intervene
R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
critical situation is detected, the L symbol under the following conditions:
R If you shi the transmission position to k or
appears in the media display and the vehicle can R The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than
h when the vehicle is stationary. be braked automatically. 10 km/h.
270 Driving and parking

R The camera image is shown in the media dis- & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi- R if transport equipment, for example a trailer or
play (/ page 260). ted detection by the manoeuvring brake bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
function and the electrical connection has been cor-
You can activate and deactivate the manoeuvring rectly established
brake function in the Manoeuvring assistance The manoeuvring brake function cannot
menu (/ page 270). always clearly detect people. Other obstacles Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating manoeuvring
manoeuvring assistance
assistance
If the manoeuvring brake function is triggered, the are not detected by the function. Multimedia system:
following symbol appears in red in the selected 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
In these cases, the function may brake unnec-
view in the Camera & parking menu: 5 Camera & parking
essarily or not brake at all.
# Always pay careful attention to the tra c # Activate/deactivate Manoeuvring assistance.
situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring
brake function alone. Trailer Manoeuvring
Manoeuvring Assist
# Be ready to brake.
% If the manoeuvring brake function is not avail- Function of Trailer
Trailer Manoeuvring
Manoeuvring Assist
able, the same symbol appears in grey. System limits
System
The manoeuvring brake function is only an aid. It & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita-
Observe the system limits of the following func- ble trailers
is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- tions:
roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring Trailers with a steered axle or a h wheel
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 264)
and parking remains with you. Make sure that no cannot be used with Trailer Manoeuvring
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the R 360° Camera (/ page 256) Assist.
manoeuvring range. R Reversing camera (/ page 253) Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred
in the desired direction and you can cause a
The manoeuvring brake function is not available in
collision or the trailer can overturn.
the following situations:
R on inclines
 Driving and parking 271

# Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with vring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exit- Using Trailer
Trailer Manoeuvring
Manoeuvring Assist
trailers with xed drawbars and axles. ing parking spaces.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
You can either enter the articulation angle value R The vehicle has been started and is stationary.
* NOTE Damage due to overhanging loads directly via the multimedia system or use a
R A trailer has been detected.
in front or drawbar installations straightening manoeuvre. When carrying out a
straightening manoeuvre, the system calculates R The gradient is less than approximately 15%.
The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged the articulation angle automatically and straight- R The boot lid is closed.
during manoeuvring due to overhanging loads ens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's R The electric parking brake is not applied.
at the front of the trailer or drawbar installa- current direction.
tions. R The driver's seat belt is fastened.
Observe the notes on towing a trailer
# Pay attention to overhanging loads or (/ page 272).
drawbar installations while manoeuvring.
System limits
System
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you when Observe the system limits of the following func-
reversing with a trailer. Using the reversing cam- tions:
era, it monitors the articulation angle between the R Active Parking Assist (/ page 264)
vehicle and trailer and adjusts it to a speci ed
R 360° Camera (/ page 256)
value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your
speed. R Reversing camera (/ page 253)
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist is only an aid. It is not The system may be impaired or may not function
a substitute for your attention to the surround- in the following situations:
ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
R The gradient is greater than approximately
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeu- 15%.
272 Driving and parking

Using Trailer
Trailer Manoeuvring
Manoeuvring Assist or Trailer hitch
# To activate the straightening manoeuvre: Notes on trailer
trailer operation
operation
select º.
The system calculates the articulation angle in * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
such a way that the direction of the trailer at
the time of activation is maintained. There is a # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
short countersteering movement of the trailer You could otherwise fail to recognise
while the vehicle is reversed, which then dangers.
guides it back to the desired line. In this way,
the vehicle is aligned straight with the trailer Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:
and, at the same time, the direction of the R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
trailer is maintained. falls below the permissible tongue weight
# Accelerate and brake as required.
R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to
% The maximum articulation angle depends on the maximum tongue weight
the length of the trailer. This is calculated by
the system by driving the vehicle forwards, Do not exceed the following values:
including cornering. Before the length of the R Permissible towing capacity
# Engage reverse gear k. trailer has been calculated, the maximum R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi-
# Press button 1. articulation angle is approximately 23°. The cle
The camera image is shown in the media dis- longer the trailer is, the higher the maximum
R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
play. articulation angle (max. approximately 60°).
R Permissible gross weight of the trailer
# To adjust the articulation angle: select ¸. % Pay attention to your surroundings and be
ready to brake at all times. R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer
Swipe le or right on the media display or
touchpad to change the articulation angle.
 Driving and parking 273

Ensure the following before starting a journey: Extending

Extending and retr
retracting
acting the
the ball neck
neck fully
fully electri-
electri- * NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow- cally erty due to folded-out ball neck
ing vehicle is set for a maximum load
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball # When the trailer is not coupled or the
R The lighting of the connected trailer is opera-
neck not being engaged bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
tional neck or, in the case of a fully electric
R Vehicles without
without LED headlamps
headlamps or MULTI-
MULTI- If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
BEAM LED headlamps:
headlamps: the headlamps have come loose.
been set correctly # Make sure that the ball neck securely
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
engages and locks into place. rect use of the trailer hitch
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/
trailer combination must not exceed a maximum When a trailer hitch is used to recover a vehi-
speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the * NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer
hitch due to additional pressure cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc-
operating permit. This also applies in countries in ess.
which the permissible maximum speed for car/ The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechani- # Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a
trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. cally damaged by applying additional pressure trailer or attaching approved carrier sys-
% When you are reversing with a trailer, remem- when the ball neck is being extended or tems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
ber to use the Trailer Manoeuvering Assist retracted.
function (/ page 270). # Do not make the ball neck extend/ Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
retract faster by applying additional pres- R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
sure. R The swivel range is clear.
R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been
removed.
274 Driving and parking

Extending
Extending the
the ball neck
neck fully
fully electrically
electrically # Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. Retr
tracting
acting the
the ball neck
neck fully
fully electrically
electrically
When indicator lamp 1 is continuously lit, the # Pull button 2.
ball neck is securely locked in place. Indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, Trailer coupling extending… will appear on the
indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message instrument display.
Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
instrument display. # Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.
When indicator lamp 1 goes out, the ball
neck is securely locked in place.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place,
indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message
Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the
instrument display.
Observe the information about the displays on the
instrument cluster:
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 499)
# Pull button 2.
R Display messages (/ page 433)
Indicator lamp 1 will ash and the message
Trailer coupling extending… will appear on the
instrument display.
The ball neck will extend fully electrically.
 Driving and parking 275

Extending and retr

Extending retracting
acting the
the ball neck
neck fully
fully electri-
electri- R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the
callyy (multimedia system)
call system) removed. Check trailer hitch lock message will appear on
the multifunction display.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access
neck not being engaged Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
trailer
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may Extending
Extending the
the ball neck
neck fully
fully electrically
electrically
come loose. # Select Ü. & WARNING Risk of injury due to a change
# Always engage the ball neck as descri- The Trailer coupling extending… display mes- in vehicle level
bed. sage will appear on the multifunction display. Vehicles with
with level
level control:
control: the vehicle level
The ball neck will extend fully electrically. may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other
* NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer # Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.
people. If you couple or uncouple the trailer
hitch due to additional pressure during this time, you may become trapped. In
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the addition, other people could become trapped
The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechani- Check trailer hitch lock message will appear on if parts of their body are between the vehicle
cally damaged by applying additional pressure the multifunction display. body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.
when the ball neck is being extended or
retracted. Retr
tracting
acting the
the ball neck
neck fully
fully electrically
electrically Observe the following when coupling or
uncoupling:
# Do not make the ball neck extend/ # Select Ü.
# Do not open or close any doors or the
retract faster by applying additional pres- The Trailer coupling extending… display mes-
sure. sage will appear on the multifunction display. boot lid.
# Do not initiate the level control and do
The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT
# Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.
R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. switch.
R The swivel range is clear. # Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.
276 Driving and parking

Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R Cross Tra c Alert
R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a R Reversing camera
securely locked position.
R 360° camera
Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the R AIR BODY CONTROL
vehicle with the following adapters:
R Adapter plug Coupling up a trailer
trailer
R Adapter cable * NOTE
NOTE Damage to the starter battery due
The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi- to full discharge
cle only if the following conditions are met: Charging the trailer battery using the power # Open the socket cap.
R The trailer is connected correctly. supply of the trailer can damage the starter
battery. # Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on
R The trailer lighting system is in working order.
# Do not use the vehicle's power supply to
the socket.
The functions of the following systems will be charge the trailer battery. # Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as
a ected by a correctly connected trailer: it will go.
R ESP® trailer stabilisation # Remove the cover cap from the ball head and # Let the cap engage.
R Trailer Manoeuvering Assist store it in a safe place. # Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties
R Active Lane Keeping Assist
# Position the trailer on a level surface behind (only if you are using an adapter cable).
the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle. # Make sure that the cable is always slack for
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
ease of movement during cornering.
R Active Parking Assist
R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
R Drive Away Assist
 Driving and parking 277

Under the following conditions, a message may * NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state * NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from
appear on the instrument display even if the of overrun installing adapter cables or adapter plugs
trailer has been connected correctly:
R LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage The following parts could be damaged when
system. the vehicle. swiveling the ball neck fully electrically:
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged R Bumper
R The current has fallen below the trailer lighting
system's minimum current (50 mA). overrun brake. R Adapter cable
R Adapter plug
% Accessories can be connected to the perma- & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
nent power supply up to 180 W and to the disconnecting the trailer cable # Always remove the adapter cable or
power supply that is switched on via the igni- adapter plug before swiveling the ball
tion lock. Vehicles with
with level
level control
control system:
system: The vehicle neck fully electrically.
may lower when the trailer cable is disconnec-
Uncoupling a trailer
trailer ted. # Secure the trailer against rolling away.
& WARNING Risk of being crushed and This could result in you or other people # Disconnect the electrical connection between
becoming trapped when uncoupling a becoming trapped if your or their limbs are the vehicle and the trailer.
trailer between the vehicle body and the tyres or
underneath the vehicle. # Uncouple the trailer.
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged # Make sure that nobody is underneath the
# Place the cover cap on the ball head.
inertia-activated brake, your hand may vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the
become trapped between the vehicle and the wheel arches when you disconnect the
trailer drawbar. trailer cable.
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
overrun brake.
278 Driving and parking

Bicycle
Bicycle rac
rackk function R always mount the bicycle rack properly by neck or, in the case of a fully electric
attaching to the ball head and the ball trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicy- neck guide pin, if possible.
cle rack is used incorrectly R when transporting four bicycles, always
The bicycle rack may become detached from use bicycle racks which have additional
the vehicle in the following cases: support on the ball neck guide pin.
R the permissible load capacity of the trailer R use only bicycle racks approved by
hitch is exceeded. Mercedes-Benz.
R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R always observe the bicycle rack operating
R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck instructions.
beneath the ball head.
Observe the following for your own safety and * NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer
that of other road users: hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or
bicycle racks being used incorrectly
R always adhere to the permissible load
capacity of the trailer hitch. # use only bicycle racks approved by
R always observe the permissible rear axle Mercedes-Benz.
load of the towing vehicle. Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin)
R use the bicycle rack only to transport bicy- * NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
cles. erty due to folded-out ball neck Depending on the bicycle rack's design, di erent
# When the trailer is not coupled or the numbers of bicycles can be transported.
bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
 Driving and parking 279

The following bicycle rack designs are possible: Observe the following notes:
R When mounted by attaching to ball head 1, R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle
the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can as possible
transport up to three bicycles. R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack
R When mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin as evenly as possible across the vehicle's lon-
2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You gitudinal axis
can transport up to four bicycles. Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detach-
The maximum load capacity is calculated from the able parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats,
weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto
load. the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerody- Load distribution on the bicycle rack
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, namic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicy- 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity
trailer or fully laden vehicle (/ page 172). cle rack.
and ball head
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from 2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity
for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. moving around and check them at regular inter- and ball head
Further information on the tyre pressure can be vals to ensure that they are secure. 3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre
found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 397). Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving axis
characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In
Notes on loading addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on Observe the following information when loading
The larger the distance between the load's centre the trailer hitch will increase. the bicycle rack:
of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load
on the trailer hitch.
280 Driving and parking

Loading the
the bicycle
bicycle rack
rack anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle.
3 bicycles
bicycles 4 bicycles
bicycles The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from
side to side.
Total weight of Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg Observe the following information:
bicycle rack and R Permitted towing methods (/ page 387)
load
R The notes on towing the vehicle with both
Max. distance 420 mm 420 mm axles on the ground (/ page 388)
1
Max. distance 300 mm 400 mm
2

When transporting four bicycles or a total weight

between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle
racks with additional support on the trailer hitch
guide pin.

Vehicle towing
towing instr
instructions
uctions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for at towing or dinghy
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
systems can result in damage to the vehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys-
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar-
 Instrument display and on-board computer 281

Notes on the
the instr
instrument
ument display
display and on-board tations in the functions of systems relevant to * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
comput
com puter
er safety. This may impair operating safety.
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
# Park the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
& WARNING Risk of accident if the instru- You could otherwise fail to recognise
ble and notify a quali ed specialist work- dangers.
ment display fails shop.
If the instrument display has failed or is mal- You must observe the legal requirements for the
functioning, function restrictions in systems & WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- country in which you are currently driving when
relevant to safety cannot be detected. mation systems and communications operating the on-board computer.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be equipment The on-board computer shows only display mes-
impaired. If you operate information systems and com- sages and warnings from speci c systems on the
# Drive on carefully. munications equipment integrated in the vehi- instrument display. You must therefore ensure
# Have the vehicle checked immediately at cle when driving, you could be distracted from that your vehicle is always reliable.
a quali ed specialist workshop. the tra c situation. This could also cause you If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired,
to lose control of the vehicle. park the vehicle immediately and in accordance
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, # Only operate this equipment when the with the tra c conditions. Contact a quali ed
park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a tra c situation permits. specialist workshop.
quali ed specialist workshop. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id: vehicle in accordance with the tra c
conditions and operate the equipment
& WARNING Risk of accident if the instru-
with the vehicle stationary.
ment display fails
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
instrument display, you will not recognise limi-
282 Instrument display and on-board computer

Over
Overvie
view
w of instr
instrument
ument display

1 Speedometer 4 Time Plug-in hybrid: electric motor power availabil-

The segments on the speedometer indicate 5 Area for additional values (example: rev coun- ity display or power meter
the statuses of the following systems: cruise ter): rev counter/navigation/ECO display/ 6 Coolant temperature display
control/limiter/Active Distance Assist consumption/G-meter/date During normal operation, the coolant temper-
DISTRONIC The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect ature display is permitted to rise to 120°C.
2 Index points the engine when the red mark on the rev Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system:
3 Outside temperature counter (overrevving range) is reached. POWER and CHARGE displays (electrical drive
 Instrument display and on-board computer 283

support and recuperation power of the elec- 5 ò Main menu, MBUX multimedia system
tric motor) 6 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system
Plug-in hybrid: current state of charge of the To navigate: swipe
high-voltage battery
To con rm: press a
7 Selected drive program 7 G Back button, MBUX multimedia system
8 Selected transmission position
8 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-
9 Centre display area of the instrument display tem
(example: standard display for a trip): assis-
tance/telephone/navigation/trip/media/ £ LINGUATRONIC (/ page 290)
radio/styles and displays/service/possible 9 To adjust the brightness of the instrument
settings for head-up display lighting
A Fuel level and fuel ller ap location indicator
Operating
Oper ating the
the on-board
on-board comput
computerer
Overvie
Over view
w of buttons
buttons on the
the steer
steering
ing wheel Observe the legal requirements for the country in
Depending on the equipment, the layout and the which you are currently driving when operating
1 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or the on-board computer.
design of the control elements on the steering Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
wheel may di er. (/ page 226)
2 G Back button, on-board computer
3 Touch Control, on-board computer
To navigate: swipe
To con rm: press a
4 ò Main menu, on-board computer
284 Instrument display and on-board computer

R Navigation # To call up a menu, submenu or possible set- set-

R Trip tings on the
the menu, or con rm a selection or
setting:
se tting: press the le -hand Touch Control.
R Radio
# To scroll
scroll thr
through
ough displays
displays or lists
lists on the
the
R Media menu, or select display
display content,
content, a function,
R Service an entry
entr y or a display:
display: swipe upwards or down-
R Vehicles with
with an instr
instrument
ument display
display in the
the wards on the le -hand Touch Control.
widescreen
widescr een cockpit:
cockpit: Design # To exit
exit a submenu: press the le -hand back
% You can nd information about the possible button.
The on-board computer is operated using the le - settings and selections on the menus in the Selecting the
the head-up display
hand Touch Control and the le -hand back/home Digital Owner's Manual. # To switch
switch on the
the head-up display:
display: switch on
button. The menus can be called up from the menu bar the head-up display via the multimedia system
When the on-board computer is being operated, on the instrument display. or activate it on the menu bar by swiping
di erent acoustic signals will sound as operating # To call up the
the menu bar: press the le -hand upwards on the le -hand Touch Control.
feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or back button until the menu bar is displayed. The head-up display menu will be selected on
when you are scrolling through a list. the head-up display.
% Vehicles without
without Activ
Activee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist # To switch
% To operate the Touch Control in the most switch to
to the
the head-up display:
display: press the
DISTR
DIS TRONIC:
ONIC: press the ò button to call up
e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos- le -hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on
the menu bar of the on-board computer. the le -hand Touch Control.
sible.
# To scroll
scroll on the
the menu bar:
bar: swipe le or right
The following menus are available: # To set
set the
the thr
three
ee display
display rang
ranges
es of the
the head-up
on the le -hand Touch Control. display:: swipe upwards or downwards on the
display
R Assistance
le -hand Touch Control.
R Telephone
 Instrument display and on-board computer 285

Full-scr
ull-screen
een menus Function of the
the power
power meter
meter (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) R Area 2 - 3 shows the regained energy.
You can display the following menus full-screen on R When the power meter needle is at position
the instrument display: 1, the vehicle is switched o . The combus-
R Assistance tion engine and the electric motor are
R Trip
switched o .
R Navigation
R Power range 3 – 4 shows the combined
output of the hybrid system.
# On the corresponding menu, use the le -hand
Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
Function of the
the electric
electric motor
motor power
power availability
availability
# Press the le -hand Touch Control. display (plug-in hybr
display hybrid)
id)
The selected menu will be displayed full-
screen. 1 Combustion engine and electric motor
switched o
2 Position in the display range of the recovered
energy
3 Start of the display range of the recuperated
energy
4 End of the display range of the combined out-
put of the hybrid system
The power meter has the following functions:
R The power meter displays the output obtained 1 Start of the POWER display range
from the hybrid system. 2 End of the POWER display range
3 Maximum recuperated energy
286 Instrument display and on-board computer

4 Start of the display range of the recuperated Displaying the

Displaying the power
power meter
meter (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) ñ Operating mode, other operating mode dis-
energy plays
On-board computer:
5 Current state of charge of the high-voltage 4 Content
è Electric range
battery ° Haptic accelerator pedal
# Select Power meter.
R In electric mode, the area 1 - 2 shows (/ page 177, 182, 180)
what percentage of the electrical drive is cur- ò Sound generator inoperative (/ page 446)
rently being used. The combustion engine is Over
Overvie
view
w of displays
displays on the
the instr
instrument
ument display è ECO start/stop function (/ page 175)
switched on at a percentage of 100%. If the Displays on the instrument display:
combustion engine is running, boost mode ë HOLD function (/ page 221)
shows the electrical power assistance of the u Active Parking Assist activated _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 139)
drive. (/ page 266)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
R The area 34 shows the recuperation and é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 140)
charging behaviour using the combustion (/ page 263)
ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for
engine. h Cruise control (/ page 224) certain countries only)
R From point 3, the maximum recuperated È Limiter (/ page 225)
Vehicles with
with Tr
Traa c Sign Assist: detected instruc-
energy has been reached. ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC tions and tra c signs (/ page 243).
R The current state of charge of high-voltage (/ page 228)
For an overview of the indicator and warning
battery 5 is displayed. ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 242) lamps, see (/ page 499).
% Due to various system limits, the displayed à Active Steering Assist (/ page 235)
value in the area 3 4 may temporarily dif- ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 235)
fer slightly from the actual value. Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 247)
õ PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation activated
 Instrument display and on-board computer 287

Head-up display Displayy content

Displa content R Wet road surface
Function of the
the head-up display R Objects on the display cover
R Polarisation in sunglasses
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. may appear washed out. You can correct this
You could otherwise fail to recognise by switching the head-up display o and on
dangers. again.

The head-up display projects the following infor-

mation into the driver's eld of vision above the Setting
Setting the
the head-up display
display using the
the on-board
cockpit, for example: computer
comput er
R The vehicle speed 1 Navigation instructions On-board computer:
2 Current speed 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY
R Information from the navigation system
3 Detected instructions and tra c signs The following head-up display settings or displays
R Information from the driving systems and driv-
4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise can be selected or shown:
ing safety systems
control) R Position
R Some warning messages
System limits
System R Brightness
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, di erent
content can be shown in the three areas of the The visibility of the displays will be a ected by the R Messages
head-up display (/ page 287). following conditions: R Assistance status
R Seat position
R Telephone
R Image position setting
R Audio
R Light conditions
R LINGUATRONIC
288 Instrument display and on-board computer

# To select the
the Settings
Settings menu: swipe to the right Selecting what the
the head-up display
display shows 4 Right display area
on the le -hand Touch Control. Tra c Sign Assist
The Settings menu 5 will be selected. Assistant display
# To call up the
the Settings
Settings menu: press the le - 5 To adjust the position, brightness and lower
hand Touch Control. display area
# To adjust
adjust the
the position: swipe upwards or 6 Index points
downwards on the le -hand Touch Control. 7 Lower display area (example: le display area)
# To adjust
adjust the
the brightness:
brightness: swipe to the le or
right on the le -hand Touch Control. Display areas 2 to 4 that are not required can
be hidden.
Setting messages,
Setting messages, assistance
assistance status,
status, telephone,
telephone, % In audio mode, the station name or track will
audio and LINGUA
LINGUATR TRONIC
ONIC (Example) be shown temporarily when the audio source
# Press the le -hand Touch Control. 1 Switching the head-up display on/o is being actively operated. In addition, the lat-
The list of setting options will be displayed. 2 Le display area est calls will be displayed when the telephone
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the le -hand Navigation system list on the instrument display is actively oper-
Touch Control and select a setting by pressing Average consumption ated.
the le -hand Touch Control. G-meter # Swipe upwards on the le -hand Touch Con-

3 Central display area trol.

# Press the le -hand Touch Control.
Speedometer
Set speed in the driver assistance system,
e.g. cruise control
Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g.
distance warning
 Instrument display and on-board computer 289

Switching the
Switching the head-up display
display on/o via the
the mul-
timedia syst
system
em
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick access

# Select HUD.
The head-up-display is activated.
290 LINGUATRONIC

Notes on operating
operating safety
safety Conducting a dialogue
For your own safety, always observe the following For the dialogue with LINGUATRONIC, you can
points when operating mobile communications use complete sentences of colloquial language as
equipment and especially your voice control sys- voice commands, such as, for example, "Please
tem: show me the list of the last calls" or "How warm is
R Observe the legal requirements for the coun- it outside?". It is not necessary to rst change to
try in which you are driving. the relevant application such as "Telephone" or
"Vehicle function".
R If you use the voice control system in an emer-
# To activat
activatee or continue dialogue by
by using a
gency your voice can change and your tele-
phone call, e.g. an emergency call, can keyw
ke ywor
ord:
d: say "Hello Mercedes" to activate LIN-
thereby be unnecessarily delayed. GUATRONIC. Voice activation must be
switched on in the multimedia system
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control sys-
(/ page 292). For this, it is not necessary to
tem functions before starting the journey. press up the £ rocker switch on the multi-
function steering wheel.
Operation
Oper ation 1 Press £: starts the dialogue Voice activation can also be directly combined
with a voice command, e.g. "Hi Mercedes,
Overvie
Over view
w of operating
operating the
the multifunction steer
steering
ing 2 Press 8: switches sound on or o (ends
how fast can I drive?".
wheel the dialogue)
or
LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty Swipe up or down: increases or decreases the
# Press the £ rocker switch up on the multi-
seconds a er the vehicle is switched on. volume
3 Press ~: rejects or ends a call (ends dia- function steering wheel.
logue) You can say a voice command a er an acous-
tic signal.
 LINGUATRONIC 291

# To correct
correct an entry:
entry: say the "Correction" % The Voice barge-in option must be switched Infor
Information
mation on the
the language
language setting
setting
voice command. on in the multimedia system for this
You can change the language of LINGUATRONIC
# To select an entry
entr y from
from the
the selection list:
list: say (/ page 292).
via the system language settings. If the set system
the line number or the contents. language is not supported by LINGUATRONIC,
# To browse
browse thethe selection list:
list: say the "Next" or Over
Overvie
view
w of operable
operable functions in LINGUA
LINGUATR
TRONIC
ONIC English will be selected.
"Back" voice command. You can use the LINGUATRONIC voice control sys- LINGUATRONIC is available for you in the follow-
# To interr
interrup
uptt the
the dialogue: say the "Pause" tem to operate the following functions depending ing languages:
voice command. on the vehicle equipment: R English
The dialogue can be continued with the "Hello R Telephone R English
Mercedes" voice command or by pressing up
R Text message and e-mail R French
the £ rocker switch on the multifunction
steering wheel. R Navigation R Italian
# To jump
jump toto the
the preceding
preceding dialogue: say the R Address book R Dutch
"Back" voice command. R Radio R Polish
# To jump
jump back
back toto the
the top
top dialogue level:
level: say the R Media R Portuguese
"Home" voice command. R TV R Russian
# To cancel the
the dialogue: say the "Close" voice R Vehicle functions R Swedish
command or press the 8 or ~ button
on the multifunction steering wheel. Full functionality is only available for you with acti- R Spanish

# To interr
interrup
uptt a voice
voice output:
output: speak a new voice vation of online voice control (/ page 292). R Czech
command when the system is still answering. R Turkish
The voice output is shortened and the conclu-
sion is reached more quickly.
292 LINGUATRONIC

Setting
Setting LINGUA
LINGUATR
TRONIC
ONIC (multimedia system)
system) # Select Online recognition subscription. Using LINGUA
LINGUATR
TRONIC
ONIC e ectively
ectively
You will be connected with the Mercedes me
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Portal. LINGUATR
LINGUA TRONIC
ONIC audible help functions
R For online voice
voice control:
control: your vehicle is con-
# Activate online voice control in the Mercedes Using the corresponding voice commands you
nected with your Mercedes me user account . receive the following information and assistance
me Portal.
R There is an Internet connection . in the following cases:
R For online use of contacts:
contacts: online voice con- Activ
ctivating
ating contacts
contacts for
for online use R For optimum
optimum operation:
operation: call up the Digital
trol is activated. # Select Contact upload for online recognition.
Owner's Manual with "Open the operating
When the function is active, contacts will be instructions for LINGUATRONIC for me", for
Multimedia system: found more easily and accurately using voice
4 © 5 Settings
example. The full extent of the Digital Owner's
5 System input. The quality of the enunciation of con- Manual is available when the vehicle is station-
5 Voice assistant tact names by the system will also be ary.
improved. R Curr
Switching voice
Switching voice activation
activation of LINGUA
LINGUATR
TRONIC
ONIC on Current
ent application: on the multifunction
or o Switching on voice
Switching voice interr
interrup
uption
tion steering wheel, press the £ rocker switch
# Select Voice activation "Hi Mercedes". # Select Voice barge-in. up and say the "Help" voice command. You
Depending on the previous status, the func- If the function is active, a command can be will receive suggestions and information about
tion is activated or deactivated. interjected during voice output of the system. operation of LINGUATRONIC for the current
application.
When the function is active, the "Hi Mercedes"
R Continued dialogue: say the "Help" voice com-
voice command can activate the dialogue.
mand during a voice dialogue. For every step
Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating online voice
voice control
control of the dialogue you receive matching informa-
# Activate Online recognition. tion.
R Speci c function: call up the voice command
% Online voice control is activated at the fac-
for the desired function, e.g. with "Hello
tory.
 LINGUATRONIC 293

Mercedes, I need help with the radio" or a er R For radio

radio or TV
T V progr
programme
amme names: say the In addition, online voice control must be activated
pressing the £ rocker switch on the multi- "Read out station list" voice command and (/ page 292).
function steering wheel up, say the "Help for say the desired station name in the way the
the telephone" voice command, for example. voice output reads aloud to you.
Essential voice
voice commands
% To improve recognition, depending on the out-
Notes on the
the voice
voice commands
Notes on optimal
optimal use of LINGUA
LINGUATR
TRONIC
ONIC side temperature, either the blowers for venti-
lation or heating are reduced when LINGUA- Aside from the exact voice commands (see the
Notes on how to improve recognition:
TRONIC is started. "Voice command" column in the following tables)
R Activate online voice control (/ page 292). to call up speci c functions, in most cases LIN-
R Say the voice commands coherently and GUATRONIC also understands a great many para-
Notes on online voice
voice control
control
clearly, but do not exaggerate the words. phrases from daily usage. Examples of these are
R Avoid loud noises that cause interference Online voice control improves voice recognition listed in the "Colloquial examples" column. For
while making a voice command entry, e.g. the and makes additional results available as a result some languages however these examples are only
entertainment in the rear-passenger compart- of external information, e.g. information about available to a limited extent.
ment. POIs and about the weather. Therefore, % Content in angle brackets, e.g. <POI> or
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate <contact>, is a placeholder which has to be
R For telephone
telephone or address
address book entries:
entries: online voice control. completed by you with the desired term. The
- Only create sensible address book entries You will need a Mercedes me user account for voice command "Set <POI> as intermediate
in the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter this. If you do not yet have a user account you destination" could, for example, be completed
surname and rst name in the correct have to create one and connect it with your vehi- with: "Set "Buckingham Palace" as inter-
eld. cle . mediate destination".
- Do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The
spaces or special characters. Mercedes me services are shown and can be acti-
vated .
294 LINGUATRONIC

Over
Overvie
view
w of switch
switch voice
voice commands
Switch voice commands can be used to open cer-
tain applications.

Switchh voice
Switc voice commands

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Switch to navigation I would like to go to navigation Switches to navigation.
Switch to address book I would like to switch to the Switches to the address book.
address book
Switch to telephone I would like to switch to the phone Switches to the telephone.
Switch to messages Can you switch to messages Switches to the text message application.
please?
Switch to e-mail I would like to go to the e-mail Switches to the e-mail application.
application
Switch to radio I would like to switch to the radio Switches to radio.
Switch to TV I would like to switch to the TV Switches to TV.
Switch to media I would like to switch to the media Switches to media.
application
 LINGUATRONIC 295

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Switch to comfort I would like to go to the comfort Switches to the comfort settings.
application
Switch to vehicle info I would like to go to the vehicle Switches to vehicle information.
application
Switch to settings I would like to go to the settings Switches to the menu with the setting options.
menu

% It is not necessary to rst call up a menu in nd further information in the overview tables gate to your own contacts. You can also carry out
order to operate a function it contains with for voice commands. important navigation settings directly. The follow-
LINGUATRONIC. You can operate the function ing list o ers just a small selection of the possible
directly using voice input, e.g. call a contact navigation commands. You will receive additional
Over
Overvie
view
w of navig
navigation
ation voice
voice commands
or enter a destination for navigation. You can suggestions if you say "Help for navigation".
Using the navigation voice commands you can
enter POIs and conventional addresses or navi-
296 LINGUATRONIC

Navig
vigation
ation voice
voice commands

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Navigate to <address> I would like to navigate to "Cornwell Road, Cambridge". Starts route guidance to the
desired address.
Navigate to <contact> Drive/bring me to the contact address of John Smith Starts route guidance to a
contact from the address
book.
 LINGUATRONIC 297

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Navigate to <3 word address> The example is for the German language: Starts route guidance to a 3
Drive to Tapfer.Gebäude.Verliehen word address from
what3words.
The example mentioned navi-
gates you to the Brandenburg
Gate.
Observe the following infor-
mation:
R 3 word addresses are lan-
guage dependent.
R Searching for a destina-
tion using 3 word
addresses is not possible
in all countries and in all
languages. Additional
information on 3 word
addresses from
what3words can be found
in the Navigation section
under "Entering the desti-
nation as a 3 word
address".
298 LINGUATRONIC

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
The Brandenburg Gate, for
example, has the following 3
word addresses:
R German: tap-
fer
er.g
.gebäude.v
ebäude.ver
erliehen
liehen
R English: that.lands.win-
ning
R French: pos
postteaux.bobi-
neur.ombr
neur .ombrant
ant
Home I would like to go home/I want to drive to my home address Starts route guidance to the
home address.
Work I would like to navigate to work Starts route guidance to
work.
Enter POI Take me to a POI Enters a POI, e.g. Branden-
burg Gate.
Navigate to <POI> Navigate to "McDonald's" Starts route guidance to a
POI.
Navigate to the online POI <POI> Navigate to online POI "McDonald's Searches online for a POI and
starts route guidance.
 LINGUATRONIC 299

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Start route guidance Begin route guidance/Can you start route guidance? Starts route guidance to a
destination.
Cancel route guidance Can you quit route guidance? Cancels route guidance.
Restart route guidance I would like to resume route guidance Continues route guidance
a er a break.
Set <address> as intermediate destination Set "Lower Thames Street in London" as the intermediate Selects an intermediate desti-
destination. nation for the route.
Set <contact> as intermediate destination Set "John Smith" as intermediate destination Selects an intermediate desti-
nation from the contacts for
the route.
Set <POI> as intermediate destination I would like to set "Wetherspoon's in London" as an inter- Selects a POI as an inter-
mediate destination. mediate destination for the
route.
Enter address in <country> I would like to enter a new address in "France". Selects a destination in
another country.
Enter postcode I would like to drive to a certain postcode Enters a postcode.
Last destinations Show the previous destinations Selects a destination from the
previous destinations.
300 LINGUATRONIC

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Show alternative routes Search for alternative routes Shows one of the alternative
routes calculated.
Driving recommendations on Switch on driving recommendations Switches on voice output for
route guidance.
Driving recommendations off Mute the driving instructions Switches o voice output for
route guidance.
Show traffic map Switch on traffic jam info Displays tra c information on
the map.
Hide traffic map Switch off the traffic jam messages Hides the tra c information.
POI icons on Show me point of interest icons on the map please Displays the POI symbols on
the map.
Hide POI icons I would like to hide all POI symbols Hides the POI symbols.

Over
Overvie
view
w of telephone
telephone voice
voice commands book. The following list o ers just a small selec- receive additional suggestions if you say "Help
tion of the possible telephone commands. You will for phone".
You can use the telephone voice commands to
make phone calls or search through the address
 LINGUATRONIC 301

Telephone voice
voice commands

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Call <telephone number> I would like you to dial 0171xxxxxxx Makes a telephone call by entering the telephone number directly.
Call <contact> Call Jane Smith on her mobile Makes a telephone call directly by entering a name from the address book.
Call Mercedes-Benz emergency Could you call the Mercedes-Benz Triggers an emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
call centre emergency centre?
Call Mercedes me I’d like you to call the MB break- Places a call with Mercedes-Benz breakdown assistance.
down assistance please
Latest calls Show me the list of missed calls Shows the list of missed calls.
Latest calls Show me the last calls The list shows all outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Incoming calls Show me the calls received Shows the list of incoming calls.
Outgoing calls Show me the list of outgoing calls Shows the list of outgoing calls.
Search for <contact> Could you open the contact "John Opens the contact data of a contact in the address book.
Smith"?
Redial Redial/Call last phone number Makes a call to the last telephone number dialled.
Change phone Could you please switch to the sec- Switches to the favoured telephone.
ond phone?
302 LINGUATRONIC

Over
Overvie
view
w of radio
radio and TV
T V voice
voice commands ground and another application is visible in the mands. You will receive additional suggestions if
foreground. The following list o ers just a small you say "Help for radio" or "Help for TV".
Radio and TV voice commands can also be used selection of the possible radio or TV voice com-
when the radio or TV application runs in the back-

Radio and TV
T V voice
voice commands

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Station <station name> I would like to select station "Cool Selects the radio station mentioned.
FM"
Frequency <frequency> Go to station/radio frequency Enters a radio frequency, e.g. for the FM range.
"eighty seven point five megahertz".
Next TV channel Change to the next TV channel Calls up the next TV channel in a list.
Previous radio station Switch to the last radio station Switches to the previous radio station.
Storing TV channels Save the TV channel name Saves the current TV channel in the favourites list.
Save radio station Save the radio station, please Saves a station name for a radio station.
Show station list Please show me the list of all radio Shows the list of radio stations that can be received.
stations
Read out TV channel list Read the TV program list to me To listen to the names of all receivable TV channels.
 LINGUATRONIC 303

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Read out radio station list Please read out the radio pro- To have the list of available stations for the currently selected radio appli-
gramme cation read aloud.
Traffic information on Switch on the traffic info Switches on tra c announcements.
Traffic information off I'd like to switch off traffic info Switches o tra c announcements.
Radio info on I want you to turn on additional Switches on information about the current station.
radio station text
Radio info off I want you to turn off additional Switches o information about the current station.
radio station text

Over
Overvie
view
w of media player
player voice
voice commands background and another application is visible in commands. You will receive additional sugges-
the foreground. The following list o ers just a tions if you say "Help for media" or "Help for
Media player voice commands can also be used small selection of the possible media player voice player".
when the media player application runs in the
304 LINGUATRONIC

Media player
player voice
voice commands

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Play <track/albums/artists/ Play "Yellow Submarine" The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers or genres are
composers/music genres> accepted during the search. In the case of a clear search result the track
found is played back immediately.
Play track <track> Play song "So What" The available tracks are played back.
Play album <album> Play album "A Night at the Opera" The available albums are played back.
Play artist <artist> I want to listen to the artist The available artists are played back.
"Madonna"
Play composer <composer> I'd like to hear the composer "Lud- The available composers are played back.
wig van Beethoven"
Play music genre <music genre> I'd like to hear the music genre The available music genres are played back.
"Bebop"
Search for track <track> I would like to search for the song The names of all available tracks are accepted during the search. A selec-
"Sailing" tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to
play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Search for album <album> Search for album "A Night at the The names of all available albums are accepted during the search. A selec-
Opera" tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to
play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
 LINGUATRONIC 305

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Search for artist <artist> I would like to search for the artist The names of all available artists are accepted during the search. A selec-
"Elton John" tion list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to
play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Search for composer <composer> Search for composer "Beethoven" The names of all available composers are accepted during the search. A
selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you
wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Search for music genre <music Search for music genre "Classical" The names of all available music genres are accepted during the search. A
genre> selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you
wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks".
Next track I would like to listen to the next Plays back the next track.
track
Previous track I'd like to hear the last track Plays back the previous track.
Repeat this track I'd like to listen to this track again The current track is played back from the beginning.
Play similar music I'd like to hear similar music Plays back similar tracks.
Play random music Play me a random track Plays back random tracks.
Random playback on Turn random playback on Switches to random mode.
306 LINGUATRONIC

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Random track list off Switch off shuffle mode Switches o random mode.
What am I listening to? Which music is currently playing? The information about the track currently playing is read aloud.

Over
Overvie
view
w of message
message voice
voice commands ing list o ers just a small selection of the possible
message commands. You will receive additional
Messages can be created, edited and listened to suggestions if you say "Help for messaging".
using the message voice commands. The follow-

Messagee voice
Messag voice commands

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Text message to <Name> I would like to write a new text to Dra s a text message. All address book names are available.
"John Smith's mobile number".
Text message to <Name> <Text> I would like you to write a new text Dra s a text message to the person mentioned. The content of the text can
to "list entry John Smith". be spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated.
Read out new text messages I would like you to read out the Reads out new text messages.
new text messages
E-mail to <Name> I would like to write a new e-mail to Dra s an e-mail.
"John Smith, office"
 LINGUATRONIC 307

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
E-mail to <Name><Text> I would like to write an e-mail to Writes an email to the person mentioned. The content of the text can be
"John Smith, private" with the fol- spoken immediately if online voice control has been activated.
lowing text: "Running late".
Forward e-mail to I would like you to forward this e- Forwards the selected or open e-mail.
mail to "John Smith"
Read out new e-mails I would like you to read out the Reads out the new e-mails.
new email

Over
Overvie
view
w of vehicle
vehicle voice
voice commands the possible vehicle voice commands. You will actions are carried out automatically for the
receive additional suggestions if you say "Help driver's seat.
You can use the vehicle voice commands to
for vehicle settings" or "Help for vehicle func- % The functions that can be operated depend
directly call up the corresponding menus for the
tions". on the vehicle equipment.
vehicle settings and operate vehicle functions.
The following list o ers just a small selection of % If no seat or side is mentioned for commands
that relate to a seat or side of vehicle then all
308 LINGUATRONIC

Vehicle voice
voice commands

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Temperature colder I would like to reduce the tempera- Lowers the temperature of the air conditioning system.
ture
Air recirculation on I would like to activate the air cir- Switches on air recirculation mode for the air conditioning system.
culation
Automatic climate control driver I would like to switch on the auto- Switches on automatic climate control for the driver's or front passenger
on matic climate control for the driv- side.
er's seat
Ambient light blue I would like to change the interior Switches the ambiance light, e.g. to blue.
lighting to blue
Wave refreshment driver on I would like to switch on the wave Switches on the wave refreshment for the driver's or front passenger seat.
refreshment for the driver's seat
Refreshment driver's seat off Switch the driver's side refresh- Switches o the refreshment function for the driver's or front passenger
ment off seat.
Seat heating driver on I would like to switch on the seat Switches on the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat.
heating for the driver's seat
Seat heating front passenger level Seat heating front-passenger on Sets the seat heating for the driver's or front passenger seat to level 2.
2 level 2
 LINGUATRONIC 309

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Current speed limit I would like to hear the speed limit Calls up the current speed limit.
Outside temperature I would like to find out what the Calls up the outside temperature.
temperature outside is like
Average consumption What is the current average con- Calls up average consumption.
sumption?
Vehicle data Can you please display the vehicle Calls up the vehicle data.
data menu?
Range Tell me the current range Calls up the current range data.
Assistance menu Show me the driver assistance set- Displays the assistance settings.
tings
Climate control menu I would like to see the climate con- Displays the climate control settings.
trol menu
Light menu I would like to change the light set- Displays the light settings.
tings
Seats menu I would like to switch to seat menu Displays the seat adjustment settings.
310 LINGUATRONIC

Voice command Colloquial

Colloquial exam
example
ple Function
Function
Refreshment menu I would like to switch to the Displays the refreshment settings.
refreshment settings menu
Next service Tell me my next service appoint- Calls up the next service due date.
ment
 MBUX multimedia system 311

Overvie
Over view
w and operation
operation images in this Owner's Manual. For example, 2 Media display with touch functionality
route guidance with augmented reality is not avail- 3 Control panel for telephone, navigation,
Notes on the
the MBUX multimedia system
system able in all equipment variants. radio/media, vehicle functions/system set-
& WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor- tings and favourites/themes
mation systems and communications Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the MBUX multimedia syst
system
em 4 Touchpad
equipment 5 Controller
If you operate information systems and com- Turn: adjusts the volume
munications equipment integrated in the vehi- Press: switches sound on or o
cle when driving, you could be distracted from For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per-
the tra c situation. This could also cause you formance exhaust system:
to lose control of the vehicle. • Turn: adjusts the volume
# Only operate this equipment when the • Press brie y: switches the mute function
tra c situation permits. on/o
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the • Press and hold: switches the multimedia
vehicle in accordance with the tra c system on/o
conditions and operate the equipment 6 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
with the vehicle stationary. or media display on or o
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per-
You must observe the legal requirements for the formance exhaust system:
country in which you are currently driving when ö button
operating the multimedia system.
Depending on the equipment, the scope of func- Equipment with touchpad • Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG
tion and product designation of your MBUX multi- 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX Performance exhaust system
media system may di er from the description and multimedia system
312 MBUX multimedia system

Turn: adjusts the volume R Operating functions contact-free with the

Press: switches sound on or o MBUX Interior Assistant.
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per- % You can nd further information about opera-
formance exhaust system: tion as well as about applications and serv-
• Turn: adjusts the volume ices in the Digital Owner's Manual.
• Press brie y: switches the mute function Anti-the prot
Anti-the protection
ection
on/o This device is equipped with technical provisions
• Press and hold: switches the multimedia to protect it against the . More detailed informa-
system on/o tion about anti-the protection can be obtained at
6 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system a quali ed specialist workshop.
or media display on or o
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles with AMG Per-
formance exhaust system:
ö button
• Sets the sound characteristic of the AMG
Equipment with touchpad with controller Performance exhaust system
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX
multimedia system % The equipment with touchpad and controller
2 Media display with touch functionality is not available in all countries.
3 Control panel for telephone, navigation, Further operating options:
radio/media, vehicle functions/system set- R Conducting a voice dialogue with LINGUA-
tings and favourites/themes TRONIC.
4 Touchpad with controller
5 Controller
 MBUX multimedia system 313

Home screen
screen over
overview
view

1 Depending on the display, calls up the rst 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, D Calls up the air conditioning menu
three applications or the home screen network display, battery status of the mobile E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and
2 Calls up the pro le phone connected, time FAVOURITES
3 Calls up the global search 8 Calls up the Noti cations Centre
4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes- 9 Calls up an application using the symbol
Benz emergency call system is not available) A Application and current information
5 Mercedes me connect active B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address
6 Transmission of vehicle position active C Index points and selected display area
314 MBUX multimedia system

% If Mercedes me connect 5 is active , the Operating

Oper ating the
the MBUX multimedia system
system 8 Switch o the sound: press
vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. 6 £ Starts LINGUATRONIC
Vehicle data is then transmitted to the back- Using Touc
Touchh Control
Control
ß Calls up favourites (press brie y) or
end system. What data is transmitted
depends on which services are activated. Fur- adds favourites and themes (press and hold)
ther details can be found in the Mercedes me % To operate Touch Control 2 in the most
connect terms and conditions and data pro- e ective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos-
tection information. The function is country- sible.
dependent.
Navigation through the menus is carried out with
If transmission of vehicle position 6 is
Touch Control 2 with single- nger swipes.
active , Mercedes me connect services have
# To select a menu option:
option: swipe and press.
been activated for this vehicle which access
the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances # To move
move the
the digital
digital map: swipe in any direc-
the geoposition is transmitted depends on the tion.
particular services. Further details can be 1 © Shows the home screen
found in the Mercedes me connect terms and 2 Touch Control Using the
the touc
touchscr
hscreen
een
conditions and data protection information. =9Ì: swipe in the direction of # Select menu options, symbols or characters
The function is country-dependent. the arrow (navigate) by pressing brie y.
a Press (con rm) # To navig
navigat
atee in menus: swipe up, down, le or
3 G Returns to the previous display right.
4 6 Makes or accepts a call # To use handwriting
handwriting to
to enter
enter char
charact
acter
ers:
s: write
~ Rejects or ends a call the character with one nger on the
5 Increase volume: swipe upwards touchscreen.
Reduce volume: swipe down
 MBUX multimedia system 315

# To zoom in and out of the

the map: move two n- Using the
the touc
touchpad
hpad and controller
controller
gers together or apart.
# To call up the
the global menu: press and hold on
the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu
appears.
% For more information on operation, please
refer to the Digital Owner's Manual.

Equipment with touchpad with controller

1 G Returns to the previous display
Equipment with touchpad
1 2 Controller
G Returns to the previous display
2 3 © Calls up the home screen
~ Calls up the audio control menu
3 4 Touchpad
© Calls up the home screen
5 © Calls up the home screen
4 Touchpad
6 ~ Calls up the audio control menu
7 G Returns to the previous display
316 MBUX multimedia system

% The equipment with touchpad and controller Calling up applications using buttons
buttons Functions of LINGUA
LINGUATR
TRONIC
ONIC
is not available in all countries.
# Perform the operation according to the equip- & WARNING Risk of distraction due to infor-
ment. mation systems and communications
equipment
Operating the touchpad (examples):
R To select a menu option, swipe and press. If you operate information systems and com-
munications equipment integrated in the vehi-
R If handwriting recognition is active, write a
cle when driving, you could be distracted from
character on the touchpad. the tra c situation. This could also cause you
R Swipe down or up with two ngers. to lose control of the vehicle.
The Noti cations Centre is opened or closed. # Only operate this equipment when the

R Move two ngers apart or together on the 1 % button calls up the telephone tra c situation permits.
map. 2 z button calls up navigation # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

The map scale is increased or decreased. 3 | button calls up radio or media vehicle in accordance with the tra c
conditions and operate the equipment
Operating the controller 4 y button calls up vehicle functions with the vehicle stationary.
R Turn 3 anti-clockwise or clockwise. 5 ß button
Press brie y: calls up favourites For your own safety, always observe the following
R Slide 1 le or right.
Press and hold: adds a favourite or creates a points when operating mobile communications
R Slide 4 up or down. equipment and especially your voice control sys-
new theme
R Slide 2 diagonally. tem:
# Alternatively, tap © on the touchscreen. R Observe the legal requirements for the coun-
R Press 7 brie y or press and hold.
# Call up the application (/ page 313). try in which you are driving.
 MBUX multimedia system 317

R If you use the voice control system in an emer- Star

arting
ting LINGUA
LINGUATR
TRONIC
ONIC Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the MBUX Inter
Interior
ior Assistant
Assistant
gency your voice can change and your tele-
phone call, e.g. an emergency call, can & WARNING Risk of injury from the cam-
thereby be unnecessarily delayed. era's laser radiation
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control sys- This product uses a classi cation 1 laser sys-
tem functions before starting the journey. tem. If the housing is opened or damaged,
With LINGUATRONIC, various applications in the laser radiation may damage your retina.
MBUX multimedia system are operable using # Do not open the housing.
voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational approx-
# Always have maintenance work and
imately thirty seconds a er the ignition is
switched on and is available for the driver's seat repairs carried out by a quali ed special-
and front passenger seat. ist workshop.
The following multimedia system applications can
This device is a class 1 laser product in accord-
be operated:
ance with DIN EN 60825-1:2014
R Telephone
The camera is located in the overhead control
R Text message and e-mail panel.
R Navigation If the vehicle is tted with the MBUX Interior
# Press 1.
R Address book Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia
or
R Radio system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX
# Say "Hello Mercedes". Interior Assistant can di erentiate between driver
R Media and front passenger interactions and detects spe-
R TV ci c hand positions (poses).
R Vehicle functions
318 MBUX multimedia system

System
Syst em limits, display
display messages
messages and not
notes
es for
for R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be
recti cation scratched. limiting the detection area of the camera.
The system may be impaired or may not function Wait until the camera has cooled down before Keep the camera's eld of vision clear.
in the following situations: cleaning the camera lens. R The camera is not operational.
R The camera in the overhead control panel may Clean the outside of the camera lens with a Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
heat up due to operating conditions. As a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro -
result the camera may switch o temporarily, bre cloths. Do not
not remove the cover when
particularly during longer periods of operation cleaning.
and at high outside temperatures. R Recognition can be impaired by re ective
Do not touch or cover the camera and wait clothing, an adverse colour of clothing or by
until the camera has cooled down and is avail- accessories, for example.
able again.

The MBUX Inter

Interior
ior Assistant
Assistant supports
suppor ts the
the follo
following
wing inter
interactions:
actions:
Inter
Interaction
action area
area Inter
Interaction
action Descrip
Descr iption
tion
In front of the media display or Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognises the approach of the hand towards a control
above the touchpad element.
Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media
display. Some functions di erentiate between driver and front passenger.
No speci c hand position is required.
Above the centre console De ned pose A favourite is called up with a de ned pose.
 MBUX multimedia system 319

Inter
Interaction
action area
area Inter
Interaction
action Descrip
Descr iption
tion
Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mirror
the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and o .
Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is
passenger seat switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is
switched o again.

Switching the
Switching the reading
reading light and search
search light and Switching
Switching the
the reading
reading light on and o Switching
Switching the
the search
search light on and o
on or o
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R For the
the reading
reading light:
light: the function is available
when it is dark.
R The hand movement takes place in the inter-
action area below the inside rearview mirror.
R For the
the search
search light:
light: the function is available
when it is dark.
R The hand movement takes place in the inter-
action area above the front passenger seat. # Brie y move a hand up or down beneath the # To switch
switch on: reach across the front
R The seat belt on the front passenger seat must inside rearview mirror. passenger seat with a hand.
not be inserted in the seat belt buckle. The reading light is switched on or o for the The search light is switched on for the driver.
driver or the front passenger.
320 MBUX multimedia system

# To switch
switch o : take a hand back away from the Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat,
front passenger seat. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control
The search light is switched o again. ped, stop the adjustment process immedi- and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multi-
ately: media system, you can select, for example, radio
# a) Tap the warning message on the stations, previous destinations as well as themes,
Infor
Information
mation on pr
proo les, themes, sugges
suggestions
tions and media display. suggestions and favourites.
favourit
favour ites
es
or For recurring driving situations, such as long
For electrically adjustable seats observe the fol- # b) Press a memory function position but- drives on the motorway, you can save your prefer-
lowing notes. ton or a seat adjustment switch on the red settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme
driver's door. you can save the display of the digital map, your
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur- preferred radio station and preferred drive pro-
The adjustment process will be stopped.
ing adjustment of the driver's seat a er gram, for example.
calling up a driver pro le The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre- The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It
Selecting a user pro le may trigger an adjust- venter. then o ers suggestions for the most probable
ment of the driver's seat to the position saved If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will navigation destinations, media sources, radio sta-
under the user pro le. You or other vehicle not be set a er calling up the driver's pro le. tions or contacts. The pre-requirements for that
occupants could be injured in the process. are the selection of a pro le, your consent to the
Pro les store your vehicle settings and settings
# Make sure that when the position of the
for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used recording of data and su cient collected data.
driver's seat is being adjusted via the by several drivers, the driver can select their own Favourites provide quick access to applications
multimedia system, no people or body pro le without changing the stored pro le settings that are used o en. You can select favourites
parts are in the seat's range of move- of other drivers. from categories or add them directly to an appli-
ment. cation.
% Information on pro les from Mercedes me
connect can be found in the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual.
 MBUX multimedia system 321

Con guring
guring pr
proo les, themes and sugges
suggestions
tions R Con guring suggestions # Select W Set theme.
The settings which are saved in the theme are
Multimedia system: Con guring
guring sugg
sugges
estions
tions shown.
4 © 5 f Profiles # Select Ä for a pro le.
# Select Continue r.
# Select Suggestions settings.
Creating
Cr eating a new
new pr
proo le # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and
# Select W Create profile . # Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow store the active settings in the theme.
# Select an avatar.
music suggestions and Allow contact sugges- # Select Continue r.
tions on or o .
# Enter the name and con rm with a. # Select an entry screen.
# To deactivat
deactivatee the
the learning
learning function for
for one
# Select Continue r .
day:: activate Deact. learn. for 24h.
day # Select Continue r.
# Select Current settings. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained # Select an image.
# Select Save. and no data recorded for the active pro le. # Enter the names into the entry eld and con-
Suggestions will continue to be shown. rm with a.
# Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect
Example: if the option is switched on and a # Select Save.
phone, to connect a mobile phone with the route to a new destination has been calcula-
user pro le . ted, this destination would not be taken into
# Select Finished. account for the learning function. System
Syst em settings
settings
Selecting pr
proo le op
options
tions Creating
Cr eating new
new themes
themes Overvie
Over view
w of the
the syst
system
em settings
settings menu
# Select Ä for a pro le. # Select ©. In the system settings menu, you can make set-
The following functions are available: # Select THEMES. tings in the following menus and control ele-
R Editing, resetting or deleting a pro le ments:
R Display
R Resetting themes or favourites
- Styles
322 MBUX multimedia system

- Instrument lighting R So ware updates You have the following selection options:
- Display brightness R Data import/export R Accept and install
- Edge lighting R PIN protection The system update will be downloaded in the
- Day/night design R System Reset background.
R Information
R Control elements
- Keyboard language and handwriting recog- Infor
Information
mation on import
important
ant system
system updates
updates Information about the pending system update
nition is displayed.
Important system updates may be necessary for
R Later
- Sensitivity of the touchpad the security of your multimedia system's data.
- Sensitivity of the Touch Controls Install these updates, or else the security of your The system update can be downloaded man-
multimedia system cannot be ensured. ually at a later time.
R LINGUATRONIC
R Sound A system update consists of three steps: Deep system
system updates
updates
R Downloading or copying of the data required Deep system updates access vehicle or system
- Entertainment settings and can therefore only be carried out
for installation
- Navigation and tra c announcements R Installation of the downloaded system update when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is
- Telephone switched o .
R Activation of the downloaded system update
- Voice ampli cation to the rear by restarting the system If the download of a deep system update is com-
pleted and the downloaded system update is
R Connectivity
% If automatic so ware updates are activated, ready for installation, you will be informed of this
- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC the system updates will be downloaded auto- a er the next ignition cycle, for example.
R Time & date matically. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location
R Language The multimedia system provides a message when before starting the installation.
R Units for distance a system update is available.
 MBUX multimedia system 323

Requirements for the installation: R The device to be connected supports at least Connecting using a QR code
R The ignition is switched o . one of the types of connection described. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi

R Notes and warnings have been read and Multimedia system: network.
accepted. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System # Select Connect using a QR code.

R The electric parking brake is applied. 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth # Scan the displayed QR code with the device to
be connected.
If all requirements have been ful lled, the down- Activ
ctivating/deactiv
ating/deactivating
ating Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi The Wi-Fi connection is established.
loaded system update is installed. The multimedia # Select Wi-Fi.
system cannot be operated while the downloaded Connecting using a security
security key
system update is being installed and vehicle func- Connecting the
the multimedia system
system with
with an ext
exter-
er- # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
tions are restricted. nal hotspo
hotspott using Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi network.
If errors should occur during the installation, the The type of connection established must be selec-
# Select Connect using security key.
multimedia system automatically attempts to ted on the multimedia system and on the device
to be connected. # Have the security key displayed on the device
restore the previous version. If restoration of the
previous version is not possible, a symbol appears % The connection procedure may di er depend- to be connected (see the manufacturer's oper-
on the media display. Consult a quali ed special- ing on the device. Follow the instructions that ating instructions).
ist workshop to resolve the problem. are shown in the display. Further information # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys-
can be found in the manufacturer's operating tem.
Setting
Setting up a Wi-F
Wi-Fii hotspot
hotspot instructions. # Con rm the entry with ¡.
# Select Internet settings.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Connecting using a WPS PIN
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
R To set
set up the
the Wi-F
Wi-Fii connection of the
the multime- # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
dia system
system with
with ext
exter
ernal
nal hotspo
hotspots:
ts: there is no # Select Add hotspot.
network.
communication module installed.
324 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Connect using WPS PIN input. Connecting with

with a known
known Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
The multimedia system generates an eight- # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. device's display on the multimedia system.
digit PIN. # Select a Wi-Fi network. Connecting using a button
button
# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. The connection is established again. # Select Connect via WPS PBC.
# Con rm the entry.
Con guring
guring the multimedia system
system as a Wi-F
Wi-Fii hot-
hot- # Press the push button on the device to be
Connecting using a button
button spot for
spot for ext
exter
ernal
nal devices
devices connected (see the manufacturer's operating
# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi The type of connection established depends on instructions).
network. the device to be connected. The function must be # Select Continue.
supported by the multimedia system and by the
# Select Connect via WPS PBC.
device to be connected. The type of connection Connecting using a security
security key
# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options established must be selected on the multimedia # Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.
on the device to be connected (see the manu- system and on the device to be connected. A security key is displayed.
facturer's operating instructions). # Select Vehicle hotspot. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
# Press the WPS button on the device to be con-
# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot. nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
nected. DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.
# Select Continue in the multimedia system. Connecting using WPS PIN gener
generation
ation
# Enter the security key which is shown in the
# Select Connect using WPS PIN generation.
Activ
ctivating
ating automatic
automatic connection media display on the device to be connected.
# Enter the PIN shown in the media display on # Con rm the entry.
# Select Connect via Wi-Fi. the device to be connected and con rm.
# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi Connecting using NFC
network. Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via NFC.
# Select Connect using WPS PIN input.
# Activate Permanent Internet connection. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
 MBUX multimedia system 325

# Hold the device to be connected at the vehi- If a language is not available, the navigation # Only reset the multimedia system when
cle's NFC interface. announcements will be in English. the vehicle is stationary.
# Select Finished. Setting
Setting the
the system
system language
The mobile device is now connected to the Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
multimedia system hotspot via NFC. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset

Generating a new
Generating new security
security key 5 ® Language Personal data is deleted, for example:
# Select Vehicle hotspot. # Set the language. R Station presets
# Select Generate security key. % If you are using Arabic map data, the text R Connected mobile phones
A connection will be established with the information can also be shown in Arabic on R Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connec-
newly created security key. the navigation map. To do so, select as tion
# To save
save a security
security key:
key: select Save. the language from the language list. Naviga- R Individual user pro les
When a new security key is saved, all existing tion announcements are then also made in
Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If Arabic. % The guest pro le is reset when the settings
the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab- are restored to the factory settings.
lished, the new security key must be entered. Rese
esetting
tting the
the multimedia system
system (rese
(resett function) % Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset
must be in the cradle while the system is
System
System language & WARNING Risk of accidents due to failure reset.
of multimedia display functions A prompt appears again asking whether you really
Notes on the
the system
system language wish to reset.
This function allows you to determine the lan- While the multimedia system is being reset, its
functions such as the reversing camera are # Select Yes.
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language a ects not available. The multimedia system is reset to the factory
the characters available for entry. The navigation settings. If you have set a PIN for your system,
announcements are not available in all languages. this will also be reset.
326 MBUX multimedia system

Plug-in hybr
hybrid
id settings
settings # Set the desired departure times, e.g. every Calling up the
the energy
energy ow display
day at 8 a.m.
Con guring
guring se
settings
ttings for
for plug-in hybr
hybrid
id vehicles
vehicles Multimedia system:
# Select a. 4 © 5 EQ
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 EQ Setting
Setting the
the maximum charcharging
ging current
current # Select Energy flow.
# Select Maximum charge current. The visualisation of the energy ow in the vehi-
Setting
Setting the
the char
charging
ging process
process # Select Maximum, 8 amps or 6 amps. cle is displayed.
# Select Departure time.
When the battery is charged, the charging cur- In addition to the energy ow, information on the
The following charging times can be selected: rent is limited to the selected amperage. status of the hybrid system and the current state
R Once % For safety reasons, only use the charging of charge of the high-voltage battery is also dis-
cable supplied with the vehicle or an original played.
R Week profile
Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-
# Select a setting. Benz thoroughly tests these original charging
cables for their suitability for the high-voltage
Setting
Setting a single departur
depar turee time charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts
# Select Departure time. from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and
# Select Edit single time.
obtain advice there.
# Set a departure time. Activ
ctivating
ating or deactivating
deactivating rout
route-based
e-based operating
operating
mode str
strat
ategy
egy
Setting
Setting the
the week
week pr
proo le # Select Electric in city.
# Select Departure time.
Depending on the previous status, the func-
# Select Edit week profile. tion is activated or deactivated.
# Add new time
 MBUX multimedia system 327

Functions of the
the energy
energy ow display The energy ow is shown in di erent colours & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
depending on the operating status: to imprecise positioning of additional
R Whit
White:
e: constant energy ow information
R Red: high energy ow (boost e ect) The additional information from the augmen-
R Gr
Green:
een: low-emission energy ow in the case of ted reality display may be inaccurate and is
recuperation, electric mode and when charg- not a substitute for observing and assessing
ing the high-voltage battery the actual driving situation.
# Always keep an eye on the actual tra c
situation when carrying out all driving
Navig
vigation
ation manoeuvres.
Notes on navig
navigation
ation
1 State of charge of the high-voltage battery Rout
outee guidance with
with augmented
augmented reality
reality Switching
Switching navig
navigation
ation on
2 Combustion engine
3 Energy ow & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a Multimedia system:
4 High-voltage battery result of distraction, incorrect depiction or 4 © 5 Navigation (Navigation)
5 Status of the route-based operating-mode wrong interpretation of the display # Alternatively: press the z button.
strategy (/ page 182) The camera image of the augmented reality The map displays the current vehicle position.
The active components of the hybrid system are display is not suitable as a guide for driving. The navigation menu is shown.
highlighted in the energy ow display. The energy # Always keep an eye on the actual tra c The navigation menu is hidden if route guid-
ow between the individual components is shown situation. ance is active.
in colour. # Avoid extended observation of the cam- # To show:
show: tap on the touchscreen.
era image. The menu is hidden automatically.
328 MBUX multimedia system

Navig
vigation
ation over
overview
view

Example: digital map with navigation menu 4 ON ROUTE menu with Route overview, Alter- POSITION menu with Store position, Com-
1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti- native routes and Report traffic incident pass and Qibla
nation entry options (Car-to-X) 5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and Motor-
2 Cancels active route guidance TRAFFIC menu with Traffic announcements, way information as well as options for View,
3 Repeats a navigation announcement and Area announcements and Live Traffic Sub- Announcements and Route via Advanced
switch navigation announcements on or o scription Info
Displays Route list
 MBUX multimedia system 329

Enter
Entering
ing a destination
destination
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to?

1 Country in which the vehicle is located 6 Switches to handwriting recognition A Switches to digits, special characters and
2 Enters a POI or address 7 Enters a space symbols
3 List with additional destination entry options 8 Switches to voice input B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
4 Deletes an entry 9 Sets the written language # Enter the destination in 2. The entries can
5 a Con rms an entry be made in any order.
330 MBUX multimedia system

The following entries can be made, for example: Destination entry uses online map services. If the Multimedia system:
R Town, street, house number on-board search nds no suitable destinations or 4 © 5 Navigation
if you change countries, the online search is avail-
R Street, town
able.
R Postcode
For the destination you can enter an address, a
R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking POI or a three-word address.
R Contact name # Enter the destination in input line 2.

# Select a search result in list 3. The search results are displayed.

# Select the destination in the list.
# Calculate the route (/ page 330).
The detailed view for the route is displayed.
% You can nd further information about desti-
or
nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the
# Select country indicator 1.
Digital Owner's Manual.
# Select the provider for the online service from
1 ¥ No route yet.
Changing country ¦ A route has been mapped.
the countries list.
# Select the country indicator in 1.
# Enter the destination in input line 2. # Select ¥.
# Enter the country indicator.
# Select the destination in the list. The route to the destination is calculated.
# Select the country in 3. Route guidance begins.
Using online search Calculating a rout
routee and using settings
settings for
for route
route or
% Requirements: the media display shows an guidance # Select ¦.
Internet connection with a double-arrow sym- # Select Set as intermediate dest..
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: The destination address is set as the next
bol in the status line. R The destination has been entered.
intermediate destination.
R The destination address is shown.
 MBUX multimedia system 331

or Activ
ctivating
ating rout
routee guidance with
with augmented
augmented reality
reality Using map functions
# Select Start new route guidance. # During route guidance, tap on the camera
Multimedia system:
The destination address is set as the new des- symbol on the media display. 4 © 5 Navigation
tination. The previous destination and the The camera image will be shown instead of
intermediate destinations are deleted. Route the navigation map before a turning manoeu- Setting
Setting the
the map scale
guidance to the new destination begins. vre and will show additional information. # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one nger
# To retur
returnn to
to the
the navig
navigation
ation map: tap on the on the media display.
Selecting rout
routee settings
settings
camera symbol again. # To zoom out:
out: tap with two ngers on the
# Select Z.

# Select Advanced. Displaying additional infor

Displaying information
mation in the
the camera media display.
image Moving
Moving the
the map
# Select Route.
# Select Z.
# Select the route type. # Move one nger in any direction on the
# Select Advanced. touchscreen.
# Take tra c information into consideration with
# Select Augmented Reality. # To rese
resett the
the map to
to the
the current
current vehicle
vehicle posi-
Dynamic route guidance r.
# Activate Street names and House numbers. tion: press \ brie y.
# Select route options with Avoid options.
During route guidance, street names and Selecting map orient
orientation
ation
# Activate Suggest alternative route.
house numbers are shown in the camera
Alternative routes are calculated for every image. # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol
route. on the map.
# Activate Activate commuter route. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D
If the requirements are met, the multimedia heading up to 2D north up.
system automatically detects that the vehicle Switching motorwa
Switching motorwayy infor
information
mation on/o
is on a commuter route. Route guidance
# Select Z.
begins without voice output.
332 MBUX multimedia system

# Switch Motorway information on or o . Multimedia system: depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traf-
4 © 5 Navigation fic incidents options.
Using services
ser vices # Set the options.
Displaying the
Displaying the tr
traa c situation with
with Live
Live Tr
Traa c If Traffic is switched o and Traffic incidents
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Infor
Information
mation is switched on, the symbols are shown on the
R There is an Internet connection. # Select Z. prospective route.
R Mercedes me connect is available. # Activate Traffic.
Displaying
Displaying weat
weather
her infor
information
mation and other
other map
R You have set up a user account in the # Select Advanced. contents
contents
Mercedes me Portal. # Select View. # Select Z.
R The vehicle is connected to a user account
# Select Map elements. # Select Advanced.
and you have accepted the conditions of use
# Switch on Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traf- # Select View.
for the service.
fic and Delay. # Select Map elements.
Further information can be found at: https://
If tra c information has been received, then
www.mercedes.me # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-
tra c incidents such as roadworks, road
R The service is available and has been activa- blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn- TENTS category.
ted. ing messages are displayed. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.
R The following additional conditions apply to The tra c delay is displayed for the current Current weather information is displayed on
the Parking service: route. Tra c delays lasting one minute or lon- the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud
- The navigation services option is available, ger are taken into consideration. cover.
subscribed to and activated in the
Displaying hazard
Displaying hazard war
warnings
nings with
with Car-t
Car-to-X
o-X-Commu-
-Commu-
Mercedes me Portal.
nication
- The parking service is within the scope of If hazard warnings are available these can be
the navigation service. shown as symbols on the map. The display
 MBUX multimedia system 333

Par
arking
king service
ser vice # Always observe the local Information and the need for observation of the actual
conditions. circumstances.
* NOTE
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not R Available payment options (Mercedes pay,
observing the maximum permitted head- % This service is not available in all countries. coins, bank notes, cards)
room clearance # Select Z and activate Parking. R Details on parking tari s
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi- # Tap on j in the map. R Number of available parking spaces
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof
# Select a parking option. R Payment method (e.g. at the parking
and other parts of the vehicle may be dam-
aged. The map shows the parking options in the meter)
# Observe the signposted headroom clear-
vicinity. R Services/facilities at the parking option
ance. The following information is displayed (if avail- R Telephone number
able):
# If the vehicle height is greater than the # Calculate the route (/ page 330).
permitted headroom clearance, do not R Destination address, distance from current
enter. vehicle position and arrival time
R Information on the multi-storey car
Notes on the
the dashcam
# Observe the changed vehicle height with
add-on roof equipment. park/car park, for example:
* NOTE Before using the dashcam
- Opening times
You are legally responsible for operation and
* NOTE Before selecting the parking option - Parking charges use of the dashcam functions. The legal
The data is based on information provided by - Current occupancy requirements relating to operation and use of
the respective service provider. - Maximum parking time the dashcam can vary depending on the coun-
Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the - Maximum access height try in which the dashcam is operated. There-
accuracy of the information provided relating fore, observe the legal requirements, in partic-
The maximum access height shown by
to the multi-storey car park/parking area. the parking service does not replace
334 MBUX multimedia system

ular the data protection regulations, in your Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use deleted and recording is continued automati-
country. USB devices with one partition. cally.
# To start
start:: select Start recording.
For this reason, before using the dashcam
inform yourself about the regulation details for Star
arting
ting or stopping
stopping video recor
recording
ding with
with the
the The length of the recording is shown. The
the respective country. dashcam Please do not remove the storage medium.
message appears. The video le is stored on
This function is not permitted in all countries. Req
equir
uirements:
ements: the USB device.
# Observe the country-speci c regula- R A USB device is connected with the multime-
# To end: select End recording.
tions. dia system .
R The vehicle is switched on.
A report may appear in the following cases:
R For the Individual recording recording mode:
Selecting a USB device
device for
for a video recor
recording
ding with Multimedia system: the memory is full or there are only a few
the dashcam 4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps minutes recording time available. The video
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
5 Dashcam recording stops or will be stopped imminently.
R At least one USB device is connected with the # If several USB devices are connected with the Change the USB device or delete a video le.
multimedia system . multimedia system, select a USB device R If a video recording has started and a national
(/ page 334). border is detected, the National border
Multimedia system:
# Select the Individual recording or Loop crossed. Please observe the countryspecific
4 © 5 Mercedes me & Apps
recording recording mode. regulations regarding video recording. mes-
5 Dashcam
If Individual recording is selected and the sage appears.
# Select the USB device. memory is full the recording stops. This function is not available in all countries.
% When USB devices contain multiple partitions, If Loop recording has been selected, several R The camera is not functional, the Camera
recorded video les are not always displayed short video les are recorded. When the mem- unavailable message appears.
in the recording list. ory limit is reached, the oldest video le is
 MBUX multimedia system 335

Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz & WARNING Risk of an accident from oper- and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
service centre. ating mobile communication equipment holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
while the vehicle is in motion phone receptacles cannot always retain all
objects within.
Telephone Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the tra c situation. This could also There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
Telephony
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. event of sudden braking or a sudden change
Notes on telephony
telephony # As the driver, only operate mobile com-
in direction.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot
& WARNING Risk of distraction from operat- munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary. be thrown around in such situations.
ing integrated communication equipment
# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile # Always make sure that objects do not
while the vehicle is in motion
communications devices in the areas protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
If you operate communication equipment inte- intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear nets or stowage nets.
grated in the vehicle when driving, you could passenger compartment. # Close the lockable stowage spaces
be distracted from the tra c situation. This before starting a journey.
could also cause you to lose control of the You must observe the legal requirements for the # Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
vehicle. country in which you are currently driving when
# Only operate this equipment when the
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
operating mobile communication equipment in objects in the boot/load compartment.
tra c situation permits. the vehicle.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the Observe the additional information on stowing
vehicle whilst paying attention to road & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
mobile communications devices correctly:
and tra c conditions and operate the being stowed incorrectly
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 118)
equipment with the vehicle stationary. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed ooth® connection:
Bluetooth
Bluet
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
336 MBUX multimedia system

The menu view and the available functions in the The following cases can lead to the call being dis-
telephone menu are in part dependent on the connected while the vehicle is in motion:
Bluetooth® pro le of the connected mobile R You switch into a transmission/reception sta-
phone. Full functionality is only available if the tion, in which no communication channel is
mobile phone supports both of the following Blue- free.
tooth® pro les: R The SIM card used is not compatible with the
R PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro le) network available
- The contacts on the mobile phone are R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
shown automatically on the multimedia the network with the second SIM card at the
system. same time
R MAP (Message Access Pro le)
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
- The mobile phone message functions can Voice® for improved speech quality. A require-
be used on the multimedia system. ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality mobile phone network provider of the person you
can by used with any mobile radio unit. are calling support HD Voice® .
For information on the range of functions of the Depending on the quality of the connection, the
mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manu- voice quality may uctuate.
facturer's operating instructions. Further information can be obtained from a
Netw
twor
orkk connection: Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
 MBUX multimedia system 337

Telephone menu over

overview
view

1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con- 6 Device manager Telephon

elephonyy operating
operating modes over
overview
view
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 7 Messages Depending on your equipment, the following tel-
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently con- 8 Numerical pad ephony operating modes are available:
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 9 Contact search R A mobile phone is connected to the multime-
(two phone mode) dia system via Bluetooth®.
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
5 Options
338 MBUX multimedia system

R Two mobile phones are connected with the Multimedia system: R Managing contacts, e.g.:
multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone 4 © 5 Phone - Downloading mobile phone contacts
mode).
Searching for
Searching for a mobile phone - Managing the format of a contact's name
- You can use all the functions of the multi-
# Select í. - Saving a contact as a favourite
media system with the mobile phone in the
foreground. # Select Connect new device. R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:
- You can receive incoming calls and mes- - Using the read-aloud function
Connecting a mobile phone
sages with the mobile phone in the back- - Dictating a new message
Authorisation follows using secure simple pairing.
ground.
# Select a mobile phone.
You can interchange the mobile phone in
A code is displayed in the multimedia system Mercedes
Mer cedes me app
the foreground and background.
and on the mobile phone. Mercedes me calls
Mercedes
R A mobile phone is connected as the car # If both codes match, con rm the code on the
phone. Making a call via the
the over
overhead
head control
control panel
mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone % Mercedes me calls are not possible in every
Functions in the
the telephon
telephonyy menu country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: In the telephony menu you have the following centre if these functions are available in your
R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone functions, for example: country.
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc- R Making calls, e.g.:
tions).
- R Accept a call
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys-
tem. - k End call
- i Create conferen. call
- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call
 MBUX multimedia system 339

Making an emergency
emergency call R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
# To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it R Other products and services from Mercedes-
brie y. Benz
# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one
Data is transferred during the connection to the
second. Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 341).
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call Calling the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Customer Centre
can still be triggered. This has priority over all using the
the multimedia system
system
other active calls.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Information
Infor mation about the
the Mercedes
Mercedes me call using the
the R Access to a mobile phone network is available.
me button
button R The contract partner's mobile network cover-
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has
age is available in the respective region.
been initiated via the me button in the overhead
control panel or the multimedia system R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehi-
(/ page 338). cle data can be transferred automatically.
1 me button for service or information calls Using the voice dialogue system you access the Multimedia system:
2 SOS button cover desired service: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g
3 SOS button (emergency call system) R Accident and Breakdown Management # Call Mercedes me connect.
R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general A er con rmation, the multimedia system
Making a Mercedes
Mercedes me call
information about the vehicle sends the required vehicle data. The data
# Press me button 1.
You can nd information on the following topics: transfer is shown in the media display.
R Activation of Mercedes me connect
R Operating the vehicle
340 MBUX multimedia system

Then, you can select a service and be connected # Select Call. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me
to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer R A er your agreement, or if the Mercedes connect service "Telediagnostics", can either
Centre. me connect service "Accident and Break- be con rmed or declined. A er being
down Management" is active, the vehicle declined, this will not be shown again.
Calling the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Customer Centre
Centre a er data is transferred automatically
automatic accident or breakdo
automatic breakdown
wn detection
detection (/ page 343). Arranging a service
Arranging ser vice appointment via a Mercedes
Mercedes
me call
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre If you have activated the maintenance manage-
R The vehicle has detected an accident or break- takes your call and organises the break- ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
down situation. down and accident assistance. automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
R The vehicle is stationary. Centre. You will then receive individual recom-
You may be charged for these services.
R The hazard warning lights are switched on. mendations regarding the maintenance of your
% Depending on the severity of the accident, an vehicle.
% This function is not available in all countries. automatic emergency call can be initiated.
This has priority over all other active calls. Regardless of whether you have consented to the
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown sit- maintenance management service, the multime-
uations under certain circumstances. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect dia system reminds you a er a certain amount of
In the event an accident or breakdown is detec- service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar time that a service is due. A prompt appears ask-
ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in prompt can appear a er a delay in the event ing if you would like to make an appointment.
the multimedia system display. of a breakdown. If you are already in contact
# To arrang
arrangee a service
ser vice appointment:
appointment: select Call.
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or
A er quitting the emergency guide display on the have already received support, this prompt A er your agreement, the vehicle data is
multimedia system, a prompt appears asking can be ignored or declined. transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer
whether you would like to get support from the centre takes your preferred appointment date.
% If you answer the prompt for support from the The information is then sent to your desired
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Later, service outlet.
the message will be hidden and appear again
later.
 MBUX multimedia system 341

This will contact you to con rm the appoint- More information on Mercedes me: https:// % A prompt for consent to the data transmission
ment and if necessary consult about the www.mercedes.me only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes
details. me connect service is not activated.
Transf
ansferr
erred
ed data
data during
during a Mercedes
Mercedes me call
% If you select Later a er the service message When you make a service call via Mercedes me, Dataa transf
Dat transfer
er if Mercedes
Mercedes me connect services
ser vices
appears, the message is hidden and reap- data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice are not
are not activat
activated
ed
pears at a later time. and a smooth service. If no Mercedes me connect services are activated
Giving consent to
to data
data transf
transfer
er during
during a Mercedes
Mercedes The following requirements must be ful lled for and the data protection prompt has been con-
me call the transfer of the data: rmed the following data is transmitted:
R The vehicle is switched on. R Vehicle identi cation number
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R There is an active Mercedes me call via the R The required data transfer technology is sup- R Time of the call
multimedia system or the me button in the ported by the mobile phone network provider. R Reason for the initiation of the call
overhead control panel (/ page 338). R The quality of the mobile connection is su - R Con rmation of the data protection prompt
% The prompt to con rm data transfer does not cient.
R Country indicator of the vehicle
appear in all countries. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following fac- R Set language for the multimedia system
If the Accident and Breakdown Management serv- tors:
R Telephone number of the communication plat-
ices are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do R Reason for the initiation of the call
you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehi- form installed in the vehicle
R The available mobile phone transmission tech-
cle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer If a call is made for a service appointment via the
Centre in order to improve the processing of nology.
service reminder, the following data is also trans-
your request? message is shown. R The activated Mercedes me connect services.
mitted:
# Select Yes. R The service selected in the voice control sys- R Current mileage and maintenance data
Relevant identi cation data is transmitted tem.
automatically.
342 MBUX multimedia system

If a call is made a er automatic accident or break- Data transf

Data transfer
er if Mercedes
Mercedes me connect services
ser vices recorded message immediately a er calling the
down detection using the multimedia system, the aree activat
ar activated
ed Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
following data is also transmitted: Only if the respective service is activated will % The recorded message is not available in
R Current mileage and maintenance data additional incident-speci c data be transmitted in every country.
the second stage to enable an optimal service.
R Current vehicle location
An overview of the data transmitted can be found
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called Mercedes
Mer cedes me connect
in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me
via the voice control system and no service has connect services. These can be obtained in the Information
Infor mation on Mercedes
Mercedes me connect
been activated, but the data protection query has Mercedes me portal: https:// % Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes
been con rmed, the following data can also be me.secure.mercedes-benz.com me connect services are not available in every
called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service
Customer Centre: Data processing
Data processing
The data transmitted within the scope of the call centre if these functions are available in your
R Current vehicle location country.
is deleted from the processing system a er the
If the data protection prompt has been rejected, call is nished, in so far as this data is not being Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv-
the following data is transmitted to enable targe- used for other activated Mercedes me connect ices.
ted advice and an e cient service: services. You can use the following services via the multi-
R Reason for the initiation of the call The incident-speci c data is processed and stored media system and the overhead control panel, for
R Rejection of the data protection prompt
in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if example:
required to process the incident, forwarded to the R Accident and Breakdown Management (me
R Country indicator of the vehicle service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz button or situation-dependent display in the
R Set language for the multimedia system Customer Centre. Please take note of the data multimedia system)
R Telephone number of the communication plat- protection information on the Mercedes me Inter-
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto-
form installed in the vehicle net page https://www.mercedes.me or in the
matic emergency call and SOS button)
 MBUX multimedia system 343

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break- baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/ support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emer- Startseite.html Centre and the authorised service partner or
gency call centre are available to you around the breakdown assistance.
clock. Information
Infor mation on Mercedes
Mercedes me connect Accident
Accident
and Breakdo
Breakdownwn Management
Management R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service
The me button and the SOS button can be found Telediagnostics
on the vehicle's overhead control panel The Accident and Breakdown Management can
include the following functions: With the Telediagnostics function, speci c
(/ page 338). wear and failure reports are recorded by the
R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer service provider, in so far as these can be
Centre using the multimedia system call system (/ page 347) clearly interpreted and are available through
(/ page 339). If necessary, the contact person at the the monitoring of components that are subject
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for- to diagnostics.
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci- If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat
the national emergency services using the stand- dent and Breakdown Management. Forward- of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the
ard national emergency service telephone num- ing the call is however not possible in all coun- multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-
bers. In emergencies, you can also use the tries. Benz Customer Centre for further help. This
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R Breakdown assistance by a technician on prompt in the multimedia system only appears
(/ page 347). location and/or the towing away of the vehicle when the vehicle is stationary.
Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
% These services are subject to technical
connect and other services. These can be You may be charged for these services. restrictions such as the mobile phone cover-
obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// R Addition to the emergency guide a er auto- age, mobile network quality and the ability of
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com matic accident or breakdown detection the processing systems to interpret the trans-
Further information about Mercedes me connect, (/ page 340) ferred data. In some circumstances, this can
the provided service scope and operation: In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur- result in delays or the failure of the informa-
https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/ ther vehicle data is sent which enables optimal tion to appear in the multimedia system.
344 MBUX multimedia system

More information about Mercedes me connect For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz Requirements for In-Car O ce:
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por- service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: R Your mobile phone is connected with the mul-
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com timedia system (/ page 338).
Data transf
Data transferr
erred
ed during
during Mercedes
Mercedes me connect % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me R You have a user account for the Mercedes me
call services
ser vices apps updated. Portal.
The data transferred during a Mercedes me con- You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & R The In-Car O ce service is activated in the
nect call depends on: Apps in the multimedia system. Mercedes me Portal.
R The reason for initiation of the call In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following R You have a user account with an online
R The service that is selected in the voice con-
options can be available: service, e.g. with O ce 365 or Gmail, and
trol system R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me have connected the user account with In-Car
user account O ce.
R The activated Mercedes me connect services
R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes In-Car O ce functions
You can nd out which data is transferred when me user account and the vehicle
using the services in the currently valid Mercedes R Display pending appointments in the calendar
R Calling up the Mercedes me services
me connect terms of use and the data protection - Reading out calendar entries
information for Mercedes me connect. You can R Calling up apps such as, In-Car O ce or the
- Calling stored telephone numbers
nd these in your Mercedes me user account. web browser depending on availability
- Navigating to appointments with navigable
destinations
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the Mercedes
Mercedes me & Apps menu Over
Overvie
view
w of In-Car O ce
- Deleting a calendar entry
When you log in with a user account to the Using In-Car O ce, you can connect your online R Display and selection of tasks and calls to
Mercedes me Portal, then services and o ers services with the multimedia system. complete
from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. - Reading aloud
 MBUX multimedia system 345

- Calling stored telephone numbers R Managing e-mails Web browser

browser over
overview
view
- Deleting - Showing/reading e-mails The web browser is started using the Mercedes
R Noting calls - Writing and forwarding e-mails me & Apps menu.
- Declining incoming calls and saving as a % You can start the In-Car O ce function using
task in the Tasks & calls menu the Mercedes me & Apps menu. Please note
R Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed that certain functions are only available when
O the vehicle is stationary.

1 URL entry 3 Web page, back 5 To refresh/stop

2 Bookmarks 4 Web page, forwards 6 Options
346 MBUX multimedia system

% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is R Android Auto To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
in motion. mobile phone, a vehicle identi er is randomly gen-
% For safety reasons, the rst activation of erated.
Smartphone Integration on the multimedia
Over
Overvie
view
w of smartphone
smar tphone integr
integration
ation system must be carried out when the vehicle This has no connection to the vehicle identi ca-
is stationary and the parking brake is applied. tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi-
With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain media system is reset (/ page 325).
functions on your mobile phone via the multime- You can start Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto
dia system display. from the device manager. The following driving status data is transmitted:
R Transmission position engaged
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
ted via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia the connecting cable only when the vehicle is R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
system. Also for use with two phone mode with stationary. and driving
smartphone integration, only one additional R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster
Overvie
Over view
w of transf
transferr
erred
ed vehicle
vehicle data
mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® R Drive type
When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehi-
with the multimedia system.
cle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This
The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte- enables you to get the best out of selected mobile The transfer of this data is used to alter how con-
gration is only possible with an Internet connec- phone services. Vehicle data is not directly acces- tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit-
tion. The appropriate application must be down- sible. uation.
loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone The following position data is transmitted:
The following system information is transmitted:
Integration. The mobile phone must be switched R Coordinates
on and connected to a USB port with the ç R So ware release of the multimedia system
R Speed
symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable R System ID (anonymised)
cable. R Compass direction
The transfer of this data is used to optimise com- R Acceleration direction
Apps for Smartphone Integration munication between the vehicle and the mobile
R Apple CarPlay® phone.
 MBUX multimedia system 347

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve Over

Overvie
view
w of the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz emergency
emergency call The display only refers to the vehicle and does
the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continua- system
system not take account of the availability of mobile
tion in a tunnel). phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer-
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can gency call centre.
help to decisively reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services at The functional readiness of the emergency call
Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emergency
emergency call system
system
the site of the accident. It helps locate an acci- system on the vehicle can be seen when the
Information
Infor mation on the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz emergency
emergency dent site in places that are di cult to access. SOS NOT READY display disappears once the
call system
system vehicle is switched on.
The emergency call can be made automatically
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only (/ page 347) or manually (/ page 348). Only R G: The icon appears in the display during
functions in areas where mobile phone coverage make emergency calls if you or others are in need an active emergency call.
is available from the relevant contract partner. of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the
Insu cient network coverage from the relevant % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-Benz
event of a breakdown or a similar situation. emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the
contract partner may result in an emergency call
not being transmitted. You can nd more information on the regional speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a
availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes- corresponding message appears on the dis-
The vehicle must be switched on before an auto- benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ play in the instrument cluster.
matic emergency call can be made.
% The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is Messages
Messag es on the
the display
The following messages appear in the display: Trigg
igger
ering
ing an automatic
automatic Mercedes‑Benz
Mercedes‑Benz emer-
activated at the factory. Using the Mercedes-
gency call
Benz emergency call system is free of charge. R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched
on or the emergency call system is malfunc- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
tioning . This does not necessarily indicate R The vehicle is switched on.
complete failure of the emergency call system. R The starter battery is su ciently charged.
Emergency calls call still be transmitted.
348 MBUX multimedia system

The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system trig- It is not possible to immediately end an automatic Trigg
igger
ering
ing a manual Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz emergency
emergency
gers an emergency call automatically in the fol- emergency call. call
lowing cases: If the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system can- # To use the
the SOS button
button in the
the over
overhead
head con-
R A er activation of the restraint systems such not connect to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency trol panel: press and hold the SOS button for
trol
as airbags or seat belt tensioners a er an call centre, the emergency call is automatically at least one second (/ page 338).
accident sent to the public emergency services call centre. # To use voice
voice control:
control: use the LINGUATRONIC
The emergency call has been made: If no connection can be made to the public emer- voice commands .
gency services, a corresponding message
R A voice connection is made to the appears in the display. The emergency call has been made:
Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre. R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
# Dial the emergency number 112 on your
R A message with accident data is transmitted
mobile phone. Benz emergency call centre.
to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted
If an emergency call has been initiated:
The Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c
can transmit the vehicle position data to one The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre
of the public emergency services call centres. conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emergency can transmit the vehicle position data to one
R Under certain circumstances data is also
call centre operator. of the public emergency services call centres.
transmitted in the voice channel to the R Under certain circumstances data is also
R Based on the call, the operator decides
Mercedes‑Benz emergency call centre. transmitted in the voice channel to the
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams
This allows measures for rescue, recovery or and/or the police to the accident site. Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
towing to a Mercedes‑Benz Service Centre to This allows measures for rescue, recovery or
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance
be initiated quickly. towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to
is sent to the vehicle immediately.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel be initiated quickly.
ashes until the emergency call is nished. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and tra c
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
 MBUX multimedia system 349

connection is established with the emergency Dataa transf

Dat transfer
er of the
the Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz emergency
emergency For accident clari cation purposes, the following
call centre operator. call system
system measures can be taken up to an hour a er the
R Based on the call, the operator decides emergency call has been initiated:
In the event of an automatic or manual emergency
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams call the following data is transmitted, for example: R The current vehicle position can be deter-
and/or the police to the accident site. R Vehicle's GPS position data
mined.
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can- R GPS position data on the route (a few hundred
not connect to the Mercedes-Benz emergency can be established.
metres before the incident)
call centre, the emergency call is automatically R Direction of travel % For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving
sent to the public emergency services call centre. tra c information, cannot be performed for
R Vehicle identi cation number
If no connection can be made to the public emer- up to two hours a er sending an emergency
gency services, a corresponding message R Vehicle drive type call.
appears in the media display. R Number of people determined to be in the
# Dial the emergency number 112 on your vehicle Self diagnosis function of the
the emerg
emergency
ency call sys-
sys-
mobile phone. R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or tem
Ending an unintentionall
unintentionallyy trigg
trigger
ered
ed manual not
Your car veri es the operability of the emergency
Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emergency
emergency call R Whether the emergency call was initiated
call system each time the vehicle is ON. In case of
# Using the
the multifunction steer
steering
ing wheel: select manually or automatically system failure, you will be informed with text mes-
~. R Time of the accident sage on the instrument cluster and with red indi-
R Language setting on the multimedia system cator SOS NOT READY on the display.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds a er
switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT
READY in the upper right corner of display is
350 MBUX multimedia system

switched OFF, this means the emergency call sys- # To star

startt the
the tes
testt mode: press and hold the
tem passed diagnostics successfully. ~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel for at least ve seconds.
Star
arting/ending
ting/ending ERA-GL
ERA -GLON
ONASS
ASS tes
testt mode The test mode is started and automatically
ends a er the language test has been per-
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: formed.
R The starter battery is su ciently charged. # To stop
stop manual tes testt mode: switch o the vehi-
R The vehicle is switched on. cle.
R The vehicle has been stationary for at least The test mode is ended.
one minute.
% The test mode is currently available in the fol-
lowing countries, for example:
R Russia
R Belarus
R Kazakhstan
R Armenia
R Kyrgyzstan
 MBUX multimedia system 351

Radio, media & TV

Overvie
Over view
w of the
the symbols and functions in the
the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

Function
6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.
R Select once: the active playlist is repeated.
R Select twice: the current track is repeated.
R Select three times: the function is deactivated.

9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.

û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.

ß Options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums,
artists, etc.).
ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for
example.
352 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Function
Z Settings Select to make settings.

© Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available R Playing back audio or video les
in the media menu: R Streaming online music
R Connecting external data storage media with R Looking at TV programmes in the TV menu
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or
Bluetooth®)
 MBUX multimedia system 353

Additional functions in the

the TV
T V menu

Symbol Designation Function

Function
Z Settings Select to make settings in the TV menu. The following functions can be switched
on/o or con gured:
R Channel x
R Country-speci c character set
R Audio language
R Subtitles
R Teletext
R Picture format

Õ EPG Select to show current programme information for the channel.

4 Channel list Select to show a list of available channels with the current programme.

Aut
uthor
horising Bluetooth® audio device
ising a Bluetooth device for
for media R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® Multimedia system:
playback
playback audio pro les A2DP and AVRCP. 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devi- With Bluetooth® audio, you can play back music
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys- ces. les from an external data storage medium, e.g.
tem and audio equipment. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia
system.
354 MBUX multimedia system

# To play back audio les using the multimedia Receiving TV

T V channels
channels in HD quality
quality The CI+ module is connected in the CI+ box in the
system, authorise the external data storage glove compartment.
medium on the MBUX multimedia system. * NOTE Damage to the CI+ module and # To insert
inser t the
the smart
smar t card
card in the
the CI+ module: if
Smart Card required (country-dependent), insert the
Aut
uthor
horising
ising a new
newBluetooth®
Bluetooth audio device
device
The CI+ module is designed for use in the smart card into the CI+ module slot.
# Select Connect new device.
home. The CI+ module can overheat and be % The CI+ box is designed for operation at tem-
# Select an audio device.
damaged by continuous exposure to high out- peratures between 0 °C and 65 °C. At oper-
Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on side temperatures. ating temperatures that are higher or too low
the multimedia system and on the mobile # Make sure that the CI+ module is not a message appears in the multimedia system
phone. and the CI+ module is switched o automati-
subject to high temperatures for exten-
# If the codes are identical, con rm on the
ded periods of time. cally. If the CI+ module is switched o , no
audio equipment. If the CI+ module is damaged, no encrypted channels can be received.
# Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. encrypted channels can be received.
The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected
with the multimedia system. % The CI+ module is not available in all coun-
tries.
Connecting previousl
previouslyy author
authorisedBluetooth®
ised
Bluetooth A CI+ module (Common Interface Module), which
audio equipment
equipment is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to
# Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. decrypt HD programmes according to the CI+
The connection is being established. standard.
In some countries, an additional smart card is
required, which is inserted into the CI+ module
(see the manufacturer's operating manual).
 MBUX multimedia system 355

Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the symbols and functions in the
the radio
radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

Function
© Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

Z Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional
functions, for example:
R Navigation and tra c announcements
R Frequency x function
R Radio additional text
R Emergency warnings

The setting options are country-dependent.

2 Full screen Select to switch to the DAB slide show.
This function is not available in all countries.
8 Silent function Select to switch o the sound.

f Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets.

356 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Function
4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.

ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for
example.

Additional functions of TuneIn

TuneIn radio
radio
% A relatively large volume of data can be trans-
mitted when using TuneIn Radio.

Symbol Designation Function

Function
Z Settings The following additional settings are available in
the TuneIn Radio menu:
R Selecting stream
R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account

ß Favourites Select during playback to save the station cur-

rently set as a favourite.
 MBUX multimedia system 357

Symbol Designation Function

Function
6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.

5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio sta-

tion.

Depending on the frequency band selected, di er- R A fast Internet connection for data transmis- Sound settings
settings
ent functions are available to you. sion free of interference.
Over
Overvie
view
w of functions in the
the sound menu
Select the desired frequency band in the radio % Data volume can be purchased directl
directlyy from
from
menu head runner. The setting options and functions available
a mobile phone netw
networ
orkk provider
provider via the
depend on the sound system tted. You can nd
Mercedes me Portal.
out which sound system is tted in your vehicle in
Calling up TuneIn
TuneIn Radio
Radio % The functions and services are country- the Digital Owner's Manual.
dependent. For more information, consult a
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: Mercedes-Benz service centre. Standar
andardd sound system
system and Adv
Advanced
anced sound sys-
sys-
R A Mercedes me account is available. tem
Multimedia system:
R The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes The following functions are available:
4 © 5 Radio
me account. R Equaliser
R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the # Select TuneIn Radio.

Mercedes me Portal. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set - Treble, mid-range and bass
R The data volume is available.
starts playing. R Balance and fader
% The connection quality depends on the local R Volume
Depending on the country, data volume may mobile phone reception.
need to be purchased. - Automatic adjustment
358 MBUX multimedia system

Burmester
Burmest er® surr
surround
ound sound system
system and
Burmest
Bur er® high-end 3D surround
mester surround sound system
system
The following functions are available:
R Equaliser:
- Treble, mid-range and bass
R Balance and fader
R Sound focus
R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround
sound system only)
R Sound pro les
R Volume:
- Automatic adjustment
 Maintenance and care 359

ASSYST PLUS
ASSYST PLUS service
ser vice interv
interval
al display You can obtain information concerning the servic- # Adhere to the prescribed service inter-
ing of your vehicle from a quali ed specialist vals.
Function of the
the ASSYS
ASSYSTT PLUS
PLUS service
ser vice interv
interval
al dis- workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
play # Always have the prescribed maintenance
work carried out at a quali ed specialist
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Displaying
Displaying the
the service
ser vice due date workshop.
instrument display informs you of the time or dis-
tance remaining before the next service due date. On-board computer:
4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS
You can hide this service display using the back Notes on special service
ser vice req
requir
uirements
ements
button G on the le -hand side of the steering The next service due date is displayed. The prescribed service interval is based on nor-
wheel. # To exit
exit the
the display: press the back button mal operation of the vehicle. Have the mainte-
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the G on the le -hand side of the steering nance work carried out more o en than prescri-
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten wheel. bed if operating conditions are di cult or the
the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: vehicle is subject to increased stress.
Bear in mind the following related topic:
R Mainly short-distance driving The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
R Operating the on-board computer
R When the engine is o en le idling for long (/ page 283). an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibil-
periods ity as regards to whether maintenance work
R In the event of frequent cold start phases needs to be performed more o en than speci ed
Infor
Information
mation on regular
regular maintenance
maintenance work
work based on the actual operating conditions and/or
R Vehicles with
with a diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt
lter:
er: in the loads.
event of frequently interrupted regeneration of * NOTE Premature wear through failure to
the diesel particulate lter Examples of arduous operating conditions:
observe service due dates
R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such oper- Maintenance work which is not carried out at stops
ating conditions. the right time or incompletely can lead to R Mainly short-distance driving
increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
360 Maintenance and care

R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or Engine compar

compartment
tment Opening and closing the
the bonnet
on poor road surfaces
Activ
ctivee bonnet
bonnet (pedestr
(pedestrian
ian prot
protection)
ection) & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving
R When the engine is o en le idling for long
periods Operation of the
Operation the active
active bonnet
bonnet (pedestr
(pedestrian
ian prot
protec-
ec- with the bonnet unlocked
R Operation in particularly dusty conditions tion) The bonnet may open and block your view.
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently In certain accident situations, the actuation of the
# Never release the bonnet when driving.
used active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedes-
trians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by # Before every trip, ensure that the engine
In these or similar operating conditions, have the approximately 80 mm. bonnet is locked.
interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter, A er being triggered, the active bonnet remains in
for example, changed more frequently. The tyres the raised position. Limited visibility due to the & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is raised bonnet cannot be ruled out. when opening and closing the bonnet
operated under increased loads. Further informa-
tion can be obtained at a quali ed specialist work- A er the active bonnet has been actuated, pedes- The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end
shop. trian protection may be limited. position.
Have the full functionality of the active bonnet There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
restored immediately in a quali ed specialist engine bonnet's range of movement.
Batter
Batteryy disconnection periods
periods workshop. # Do not open or close the bonnet if there
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can cal- If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive is a person in the bonnet's range of
culate the service due date only when the battery carefully to a quali ed specialist workshop. If a movement.
is connected. safe continued journey is not possible, contact a
# Display and note down the service due date quali ed specialist workshop.
on the instrument display before disconnect-
ing the battery (/ page 359).
 Maintenance and care 361

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the # Switch o the vehicle. R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel
bonnet injectors
# Never touch the danger zones surround-
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation & WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
heated engine or re in the engine compart- area of the fan. nent parts in the engine compartment
ment, the following situations may occur: # Remove jewellery and watches.
Certain component parts in the engine com-
R You may come into contact with hot gases. # Keep items of clothing and hair away partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
R You may come into contact with other from moving parts. cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
escaping hot operating uids. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching touch component parts described in the
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down. components under voltage following.
# In the event of a re in the engine com- The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and tem operate at high voltage. You could receive & WARNING Risk of injury from using the
call the re service. an electric shock. windscreen wipers when the bonnet is
# Never touch ignition system or fuel injec- open
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving tion system components when the vehi- If the windscreen wipers start moving when
parts cle is switched on. the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by
the wiper linkage.
Components in the engine compartment may The live components include the following, for # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
continue to run or start unexpectedly even example:
when the drive system is switched o . and the vehicle rst if you need to open
R Ignition coils the bonnet.
Observe the following if you must open the R Fuel injectors
bonnet:
362 Maintenance and care

Opening the
the bonnet # If the bonnet can still be li ed slightly, open
the bonnet again and close it with a little more
force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil
Checking
Checking the
the engine oil level
level using the
the oil dipstick
dipstick
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
# Push handle 1 of the bonnet catch upwards following.
and li the bonnet until it opens automatically.
# To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Closing the
the bonnet R The engine has an oil dipstick. If not, the
# Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm engine oil level can be checked only with the
and then allow it to fall, applying a little force on-board computer (/ page 363) .
as you let it go. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
installed in the engine compartment in di erent
locations.
 Maintenance and care 363

The waiting time before checking the oil level # Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide tube 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even
when the engine is at normal operating tempera- to the stop, and pull it out again a er approx- longer with an active driving style.
ture is ve minutes. imately three seconds. On-board computer:
R Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2
4 Service 5 Engine oil level
and 3.
One of the following messages will appear on the
R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or below.
instrument display:
R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2.
R Engine oil level Measuring now: measurement
# If the oil level is too low, top up with 1 litre of of the oil level is not yet possible.
engine oil.
# Repeat the request a er a maximum of
# If the oil level is too high, drain o excess 30 minutes' driving.
engine oil. Consult a quali ed specialist work-
shop. R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for
indicating the oil level on the instrument dis-
Checking
Checking the
the engine oil level
level using the
the on-board play is green and is between "min" and "max":
computer
comput er the oil level is correct.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: R Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar display
R The engine has been warmed up. for indicating the oil level on the instrument
R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. display is orange and is below "min":
# Park the vehicle on a level surface.
R The engine is running at idle speed. # Add 1 l of engine oil.
# Pull oil dipstick 1 out and wipe o .
R The bonnet is closed. R Reduce engine oil level and the bar display for
The engine oil level is determined during driving. indicating the oil level on the instrument dis-
Determining the engine oil level can take up to play is orange and is above "max":
364 Maintenance and care

# Drain o any excess engine oil that has been & WARNING Risk of re and injury from * NOTE Damage caused by topping up too
added. To do so, consult a quali ed specialist engine oil much engine oil
workshop.
R For engine oil level turn on ignition If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it the catalytic converter.
# Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil may ignite. # Have excess engine oil removed at a
level. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled quali ed specialist workshop.
R Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil next to the ller opening.
level sensor is defective or not connected. # Allow the engine to cool o and thor- % Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
oughly clean the engine oil from compo- sumes up to 0.8 litre of oil per 1000 km. The
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop. oil consumption may be higher than this when
nent parts before starting the vehicle.
R Engine oil level System currently unavail. the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
# Close the bonnet. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor-
rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
Topping up engine oil
# Do not use engine oils or oil lters which
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo- do not correspond to the speci cations
nent parts in the engine compartment explicitly prescribed for the service inter-
Certain component parts in the engine com- vals.
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the # Follow the instructions on the service
cooler and parts of the exhaust system. interval display for changing the engine
# Allow the engine to cool down and only oil and observe the prescribed change
touch component parts described in the intervals.
following. # Do not use additives.
 Maintenance and care 365

Checking
Checking the
the coolant level
level

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-

nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool-

ant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded.
# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. # Let the motor cool down before opening # Park the vehicle on a level surface.
the cap. Check the coolant temperature display in the
# Top up the engine oil. #
# When opening the cap, wear protective instrument cluster.
# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
gloves and safety glasses. The coolant temperature must be below 70°C.
engages.
# Open the cap slowly to release pressure. # Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release
# Check the oil level again (/ page 362).
overpressure.
# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
366 Maintenance and care

The coolant level is correct in the following cases: & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to windscreen washer concentrate
marker bar 2.
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
1.5 cm over the marker bar 2. with hot engine component parts or the
# If necessary, top up with coolant that has exhaust system.
been approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Make sure that no windscreen washer

% Further information on coolant (/ page 425) concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.

Topping up the
the windscreen
windscreen washer
washer system
system

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-

nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- # Remove cap 1 by the tab.
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Top up the washer uid.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only % Further information about the windscreen
touch component parts described in the washer uid (/ page 426)
following.
 Maintenance and care 367

Keeping the
the air-w
air-wat
ater
er duct free
free * NOTE Damage from automatic braking # Ensure there is su cient ground clear-
# Keep the area between the bonnet and the ance between the underbody and the
If one of the following functions is switched guide rails of the car wash.
windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain
and leaves. situations: # Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
R Active Brake Assist
guide rails, is su cient.
Cleaning and care R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Infor
Information
mation on washing
washing the
the vehicle
vehicle in a car wash
wash R HOLD function To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car
R Active Parking Assist
wash, ensure the following beforehand:
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-
reduced braking power a er washing the To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate ted.
vehicle these systems in the following or similar situa- R The HOLD function is switched o .
Braking e ciency is reduced a er washing the tions:
R The 360° Camera or the reversing camera is
vehicle. # during towing
switched o .
# A er the vehicle has been washed, brake # in a car wash
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are com-
carefully while paying attention to the pletely closed.
tra c conditions until braking power has * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash R The blower for the ventilation and heating is
been fully restored.
# Before driving into a car wash make sure switched o .
that the car wash is suitable for the vehi- R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
cle dimensions. R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could
open unintentionally.
R For car washes with a conveyor system:
368 Maintenance and care

- Neutral i is engaged. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- Washing the
the vehicle
vehicle by
by hand
- If you would like to leave the vehicle while lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:
it is being washed, make sure the key is R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away * NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
located in the vehicle. The park position from the vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could # Take care not to point the water jet
j is otherwise automatically engaged. open unintentionally. directly towards the air inlet grille below
% If, a er the car wash, you remove the wax R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the the bonnet.
from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this vehicle.
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. R Vehicles with
with decorativ
decorativee foil:
foil: Parts of your observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in
Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between specially designated wash bays.
Infor
Information
mation on using a high-pressur
high-pressuree cleaner the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using
high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst so car sponge. When doing so, do not
high-pressure cleaners with round-spray cleaning. The water temperature of the high-
nozzles expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C. # Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and
The water jet can cause externally invisible R Observe the information on the correct dis- dry using a chamois.
damage. tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper-
% Observe the notes on the care of car parts
Components damaged in this way may unex- ating instructions.
(/ page 370).
pectedly fail. R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure
# Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with cleaner directly at sensitive parts, such as
round-spray nozzles. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, Notes on paintwor
paintwork/matt
k/matt nish paintw
paintwor
orkk care
# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts light sources and ventilation slits. To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering
replaced immediately. with the driving assistance systems, please
observe the following notes:
 Maintenance and care 369

Paint R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy Cleaning

R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and wheels. R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
rinse o the treated areas a erwards. R Only use car washes that correspond to the cleaning agent without additives or abrasive
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o latest engineering standards. substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for
a erwards. Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use car wash programmes with a nal
R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
hot wax treatment.
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro- whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is oth-
R Do not use paint cleaners, bu ng or polishing erwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil
leum ether or lighter uid. products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. irreparably.
R Coolant and brake uid: remove with a damp
cloth and clean water. In the event of paintwork damage: R If there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recommen-
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
quali ed specialist workshop. ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Wax: use silicone remover.
R Make sure the radar sensors function R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi- rinse o the treated areas a erwards.
(/ page 216).
als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse o
a quali ed specialist workshop. a erwards.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Notes on cleaning decorativ
decorativee foils
foils
R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped
Observe the notes on matt nish care in the chap- vehicle with a so , absorbent cloth a er every
Matt nish ter "Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork
R Only use care products approved for car wash.
care" (/ page 368). They also apply to matt dec-
Mercedes-Benz. orative foils. Avoiding
Avoiding damage
damage to
to the
the decorativ
decorativee foil
foil
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi- R The service life and colouring of decorative
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to
als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at avoid vehicle damage. foils are impaired by:
a quali ed specialist workshop. - sunlight
370 Maintenance and care

- temperature, e.g. hot air blower % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car- # Always be particularly careful around the
- weather conditions ried out at a quali ed specialist workshop, tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super-
e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. vise children especially closely in this
- stone chippings and dirt
area.
- chemical cleaning agents
Notes on care
care of car parts
par ts # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
- oily products touching them.
R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Pol- & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-
ishing will have the e ect of shining the foil- screen wipers are switched on while the To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes
wrapped surface. windscreen is being cleaned on cleaning and care of the following vehicle
R Do not treat matt or structured decorative If the windscreen wipers are set in motion parts:
foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. while you are cleaning the windscreen or Wheels and rims
rims
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas a ected by wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care arm. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to
cannot always be completely repaired. In such # Always switch o the windscreen wipers remove brake dust. This could damage wheel
cases, visit a quali ed specialist workshop. and the vehicle before cleaning the wind- bolts and brake components.
You can obtain more information on care and screen or wiper blades. R To avoid corrosion of the brake disks and
cleaning products from the manufacturer. brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes
In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical di er- & WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe a er cleaning before parking it. The brake
ences may occur between the surfaces that were and tailpipe trims disks and brakepads warm up and dry out.
not protected by a decorative foil a er removing a The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can Windows
decorative foil. become very hot. If you come into contact R Clean the windows inside and outside with a
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom-
yourself. mended for Mercedes-Benz.
 Maintenance and care 371

R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent- Exter

Exterior
ior lighting Tailpipes
based cleaning agents to clean the inside of R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for
windows. cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and
R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths a er washing the vehicle.
% A er changing the wiper blades or treating
the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen that are suitable for plastic lenses. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen- Vehicle socket
socket (high-volt
(high-voltag
agee batter
battery)
y) Trailer
Tr ailer hitch
ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch
application instructions may result in damage, vehicle socket. manufacturer's operator manual.
smear marks or dazzling spots.
R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pres-
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind- agents, such as soap. sure cleaner or solvent.
screen in front of the multifunction camera.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball, for example,
Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety Sensors
systems may be impaired or not available R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bump- with a wire brush.
(/ page 216). ers with a so cloth and car shampoo R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
(/ page 216). R A er cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
Wiper blades
R Move the wiper arms into the replacement
R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain head.
position (/ page 144). a minimum distance of 30 cm.
% Before using trailers with anti-torsional cou-
R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the Rever
Reversing
sing camera
camera and 360° Camera pling, observe the manufacturer's operator
wiper blades with a damp cloth. R To open the rear camera cover, switch on the manual.
vehicle.
% Make sure that the wiper blades are coated.
R Use clean water and a so cloth to clean the
The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do
not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean camera lens.
them too o en. R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
372 Maintenance and care

Notes on care
care of the
the inter
interior
ior Seat belts R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. sun cream to come in contact with the plastic
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. trim.
breaking o a er the use of solvent-based R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or
care products Real wood
wood and trim
trim elements
exposing them to direct sunlight. R Clean with a micro bre cloth.
Care and cleaning products containing sol- R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to Display
R Switch o the display and let it cool down. cloth and soapy water.
become porous. When the airbags are
R Clean the surface carefully with a micro bre R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
deployed, plastic parts may break away.
cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT- ded for Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not use any care or cleaning products
containing solvents to clean the cockpit. LCD). R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, pol-
R Do not use any other agents. ishes or waxes.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries Head-up display Roof lining
from bleached seat belts R Clean with a so , non-static, lint-free cloth. R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely R Do not use cleaning agents. Carpet
Car pet
weaken them. R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom-
Plastic trim
Plastic trim mended for Mercedes-Benz.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth.
or fail in an accident. Steer
Steering
ing wheel made of genuine
genuine leather
leather or DINA-
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
# Never bleach or dye seat belts. MICA
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol- * NO
NOTE
TE Damage caused by wrong cleaners
lowing notes on cleaning and care: als.
# Do not use solvent-based cleaning
agents such as tar remover or wheel
 Maintenance and care 373

cleaner; neither should you use polishes R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, petrol
or waxes. Otherwise you may damage has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. or abrasive cleaning agents.
the nish. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water
solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. % Regular cleaning and care of the leather
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen- reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing dam-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. age and thus signi cantly extends its life
span. Clothing that can leave stains, e.g.
R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that jeans, can leave discolouration on the leather.
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. DINAMICA
DINAMIC A seat covers
covers
R Clean with a damp cloth.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural
surface properties, such as di erences in Imitation leather
Imitation leather seat covers
covers
R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water.
structure, marks caused by growth and injury
or subtle colour di erences. These surface R Do not use a micro bre cloth.
properties are characteristics of leather and
Fabr
abric
ic seat covers
covers
not material faults. What's more, leather is R Clean with a damp micro bre cloth and 1%
subject to a natural ageing process during
soapy water and allow to dry.
which the surface properties change.
EASY-PACK
EASY-PAC K boot
boot box
Genuine leather
leather seat covers
covers
R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
R Clean with a damp cloth.
dry cloth.
374 Breakdown assistance

Emergency
Emergency 3 Do not bleach War
arning
ning triangle
triangle
Remo
emoving
ving the
the safety
safety vest
vest 4 Do not iron Remo
emoving
ving the
the war
warning
ning triangle
triangle
5 Do not tumble dry
The safety vests are located in the stowage com- 6 Do not dry clean
partments in the driver's and front passenger
door. 7 Class 2 safety vest
# Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop. The requirements de ned by the legal standard
# Open the safety vest bag and pull out the are only ful lled if the safety vest is the correct
safety vest. size and is fully closed.
% There are also safety vest compartments in Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
the rear door stowage compartments in which R the re ective strips are damaged or dirty
safety vests can be stored.
R the maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
R the uorescence has faded

# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1

in the direction of the arrow and open it.
# Remove warning triangle 2.

1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
 Breakdown assistance 375

Setting
Setting up the
the war
warning
ning triangle
triangle Firs
irst-aid
t-aid kit (so -sided) ov
over
erview
view Remo
emoving
ving the
the re extinguisher

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an

incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the
driver's footwell
A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or
block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
The re extinguisher can be ung around and
injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
# Fold side re ectors 1 upwards to form a tri- First-aid kit (so sided) 1 is on the le or right in # Always store and secure the re extin-
angle and attach at the top using upper press- the boot, depending on the vehicle version. guisher in the bracket.
stud 2. % In vehicles with a Burmester® surround sound # Do not remove the re extinguisher while
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. system, the rst-aid kit (so sided) is located driving.
in the boot when the vehicle is delivered.
376 Breakdown assistance

Tyr
yres
es without
without run- at char
haract
acter
eristics:
istics: R Vehicles with
with Mercedes
Mercedes me connect: you can
# Do not drive with a at tyre.
make a call for breakdown assistance via the
overhead control panel in the case of a break-
# Change the at tyre immediately with an down (/ page 338).
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. R All vehicles:
vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 405).
Alternatively, consult a quali ed special-
ist workshop.
Notes on MOExtended
MOExtended tyres
tyres (r
(run-
un- at tyr
tyres)
es)
Tyr
yres
es with
with run- at char
haract
acter
eris
istics:
tics:
# Observe the information and warning & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in
notes on MOExtended tyres (run- at limp-home mode
# Le -hand dr
driv
ivee vehicle:
vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.
tyres). Driving in emergency mode impairs the han-
# Right-hand driv
drivee vehicle:
vehicle: pull tab 1 down-
wards. dling characteristics of the vehicle.
In the event of a at tyre, the following options are # Do not exceed the permissible maximum
# Remove re extinguisher 2. available depending on your vehicle's equipment:
speed of the MOExtended tyres.
R Vehicles with
with MOExtended
MOExtended tyres:
tyres: it is possible # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
to continue the journey for a short period of
Flat tyre time. Make sure you observe the notes on manoeuvres as well as driving over
Notes on at tyr
tyres
es MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres) obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, o -road).
(/ page 376). This applies, in particular, to a loaded
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a at vehicle.
R Vehicles with
with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the
tyre # Stop driving in the emergency mode if
tyre so that it is possible to continue the jour-
A at tyre severely a ects the driving charac- ney for a short period of time. To do this, use you notice:
teristics as well as the steering and braking of the TIREFIT kit (/ page 378). R banging noise
the vehicle.
 Breakdown assistance 377

R vehicle vibration Vehicles with

with tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing syst
system:
em: TIREFIT kit stor
storag
agee location
MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunc-
R smoke which smells like rubber The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot oor.
tion with an activated tyre pressure monitoring
R continuous ESP® intervention system.
R cracks in the tyre sidewalls If a pressure loss warning message appears in the
driver's display, proceed as follows:
# A er driving in emergency mode, have
the rims checked by a quali ed specialist R Check the tyre for damage.
workshop with regard to their further R If driving on, observe the following notes.
use.
Driving distance
Driving distance possible in emergency
emergency mode
# The defective tyre must be replaced in a er the pressur
pressuree loss war
warning:
ning:
every case.
Load condition Driving
Dr iving distance
distance possi-
With MOExtended tyres (run- at tyres), you can ble in emergency
emergency mode
1 Tyre sealant bottle
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a Partially laden 80 km
total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How- 2 Tyre in ation compressor
ever, the tyre a ected must not show any clearly Fully laden 30 km Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also
visible damage. be located in other places under the boot oor.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the The driving distance possible in emergency mode
% You can nd information on the power cate-
MOExtended marking which appears on the side may vary depending on the driving style. Observe
the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h. gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back
wall of the tyre. of the tyre in ation compressor:
Vehicles with
with tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree loss war
warning
ning system:
system: If a tyre has gone at and cannot be replaced with R LK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg
MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunc- an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre
tion with an activated tyre pressure loss warning as a temporary measure.
system.
378 Breakdown assistance

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre & WARNING Risk of accident when using Observe the following if you come into contact
in ation compressor and approximately 1.6 m tyre sealant with the tyre sealant:
above the ground, the following sound pres- # Rinse o the tyre sealant from your skin
sure levels apply: The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the
tyre properly, especially in the following cases: using water immediately.
R Emissions sound pressure level
R there are large cuts or punctures in the # If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor-
LPA 83 dB (A)
tyre (larger than damage previously men- oughly rinse them using clean water
R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A) tioned) immediately.
R the wheel rims have been damaged # If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thor-
The tyre in ation compressor is maintenance-
free. If there is a malfunction, please contact R a er journeys with very low tyre pressure
oughly rinse out your mouth immediately
a quali ed specialist workshop. and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
or with at tyres vomiting and seek medical attention
# Do not continue driving. immediately.
Using the
the TIREFIT kit # Change out of clothing which has come
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: into contact with tyre sealant immedi-
R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre in ation compres- & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning ately.
sor (/ page 377) from tyre sealant # If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
R TIREFIT sticker cal attention immediately.
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes
R Gloves irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact
with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not * NOTE Overheating due to the tyre in ation
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora- compressor running too long
tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep
the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in the tyre sealant away from children. # Do not run the tyre in ation compressor
outside temperatures down to -20 °C. for longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption.
 Breakdown assistance 379

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on

the sticker on the tyre in ation compressor.
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali ed
specialist workshop every ve years.
# Do not remove any foreign objects which have
entered the tyre.

# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the

faulty tyre.
# Screw lling hose 8 onto valve 7.
# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehi-
cle.
# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out # Switch on the vehicle.
of the tyre in ation compressor housing.
# A x part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the # Switch on the tyre in ation compressor using
# Push the plug of hose 5 into ange 6 of On/O switch 3.
instrument cluster within the driver's eld of
vision. tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. The tyre is in ated. First, tyre sealant is pum-
# A x part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards ped into the tyre. The pressure may brie y rise
into recess 2 of the tyre in ation compres- to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).
valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
sor.
Do not
not switch
switch o the tyre
tyre in ation com
compr
pressor
essor
during
dur ing this
this phase!
380 Breakdown assistance

# Let the tyre in ation compressor run for a # Pump up the tyre again. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving
maximum of ten minutes. A er a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pres- with sealed tyres
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pres- sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
sure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). 29 psi). A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs the handling characteristics and is not
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the & WARNING Risk of accident due to the suitable for higher speeds.
a ected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera- speci ed tyre pressure not being attained # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
ble to use clean water.
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not attained drive carefully.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy- a er the speci ed time, the tyre is too badly # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit

lene. damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the with a tyre that has been repaired using
tyre in this instance. tyre sealant.
If, a er ten minutes,
minutes, a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree of 200 kPa The braking and driving characteristics may be
(2.0 bar/29 psi) has not
not been attained:
attained: greatly impaired. # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a
# Switch o the tyre in ation compressor. tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.
# Do not continue driving.
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
defective tyre. * NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
If, a er ten minutes,
minutes, a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree of 200 kPa A er use, excess tyre sealant may leak out
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:
attained: from the lling hose.
unscrewing the lling hose. # Therefore, place the lling hose in the
# Switch o the tyre in ation compressor.
# Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
# Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
approximately 10 m. kit.
defective tyre.
 Breakdown assistance 381

+ ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental The braking and driving characteristics may be # To reduce
reduce the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressure:
e: press pressure
pollution caused by environmentally irre- greatly impaired. release button 1 next to manometer 2.
sponsible disposal # Do not continue driving. # When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
the lling hose from the valve of the sealed
Tyre sealant contains pollutants. tyre.
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of
Countries
Countr ies that
that have
have Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Service24h:
Ser vice24h: # Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz sealed tyre.
Service Centre. you will nd a sticker with the telephone number,
e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. # Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre in a-
# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre in a- # Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least tion compressor.
tion compressor. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres- The lling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot-
sure table on the fuel ller ap for values. tle.
# Pull away immediately.
# To increase
increase the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressure:
e: switch on the # Drive to the nearest quali ed specialist work-
# Stop driving a er approximately ten minutes shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and
and check the tyre pressure using the tyre tyre in ation compressor.
lling hose replaced there.
in ation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). Batter
Batteryy (vehicle)
(vehicle)
Notes on the
the 12 V battery
battery
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
speci ed tyre pressure not being attained & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work
If the speci ed tyre pressure is not reached, carried out incorrectly on the battery
the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre seal- Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
ant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
382 Breakdown assistance

can restrict functions relevant for safety sys- All vehicles

vehicles excep
exceptt vehicles
vehicles with
with a lithium-ion
lithium-ion bat- # Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-
tems and impair the operating safety of your tery oughly with plenty of clean water and
vehicle. seek medical attention immediately.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec-
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol- trostatic charge
lowing situations in particular: All vehicles
vehicles
R when braking
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly
explosive gas mixture in the battery. + ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Environmental
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres damage due to improper disposal of bat-
# To discharge any electrostatic charge
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not teries
adapted to the road conditions that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the battery.
# In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a quali ed specialist The highly ammable gas mixture is created while
workshop immediately. the battery is charging and during starting assis- Batteries contain pollutants. It is
tance. illegal to dispose of them with the household
# Do not drive on.
rubbish.
# Always have work on the battery carried & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from #
out at a quali ed specialist workshop. the battery acid
R Further information on ABS (/ page 218) Battery acid is caustic.
Dispose of batteries in an
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
R Further information on ESP® (/ page 219) environmentally responsible manner.
clothing. Take discharged batteries to a quali ed
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends # Do not lean over the battery. specialist workshop or to a collection
that you only use batteries which have been tes- point for used batteries.
# Do not inhale battery gases.
ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz. # Keep children away from the battery.
 Breakdown assistance 383

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con- Keep children away. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over-
tact a quali ed specialist workshop. voltage
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries. When charging using a battery charger without
Observe this Owner's Manual. a restriction of the maximum charging voltage,
Risk of explosion. the battery or the on-board electronics can be
damaged.
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

Observe the following if you do not intend to use mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery. the vehicle over an extended period of time:
Avoid creating sparks. R Activate standby mode. & WARNING Risk of explosion due to hydro-
gen gas igniting
R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or con- If, when charging a battery, there is a short
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or sult a quali ed specialist workshop to discon- circuit or sparks start to form, there is a dan-
clothing. Wear suitable protective nect the battery. ger of hydrogen gas igniting.
clothing, in particular gloves, an apron # Take care that the positive clamp con-
and a face mask. Immediately rinse nected to a battery does not come into
electrolyte or acid splashes o with Notes on star
starting
ting assistance
assistance and char
charging
ging the
the 12
V battery
battery contact with vehicle parts.
clean water. Consult a doctor if neces-
# Never place metal objects or tools on a
sary. All vehicles
vehicles battery.
Wear safety glasses. When charging the battery and during starting # When connecting and disconnecting the
assistance, always use the jump-start connection
point in the engine compartment. battery, always observe the sequence of
battery clamps described.
384 Breakdown assistance

# Take care to only connect battery termi- & WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen Vehicles with
with plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id:
nals of identical polarity when receiving battery If your vehicle has been started with starting
starting assistance. assistance, it may not be possible to use the elec-
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera- tric drive for approximately 30 minutes.
# Observe the sequence described for tures slightly above or below freezing point.
connecting and disconnecting the jump Starting assistance is not considered to be a nor-
leads when receiving starting assistance. During starting assistance or battery charging, mal operating condition.
battery gas can be released.
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat- # Always allow a battery to thaw before
All vehicles
vehicles
tery terminals while the engine is run-
ning. charging it or performing starting assis- * NOTE
NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
tance. extended attempts to start the engine
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to explo- If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument Numerous or extended attempts to start the
sive mixture of gases cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is engine may damage the catalytic converter
An explosive mixture of gases can escape very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. due to non-combusted fuel.
from the battery during charging and starting In this case you may neither jump-start the vehi- # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
assistance. cle nor charge the battery. to start the engine.
# Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating The service life of a battery that has been thawed
sparks must be avoided. may be dramatically shortened. The starting char- Observe the following points during starting assis-
acteristics may be impaired, especially at low tance and when charging the battery:
# Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
temperatures. R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging
# Do not stand over the battery.
It is recommended that you have a thawed battery cables with a su cient cross-section and
checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. insulated terminal clamps.
R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
 Breakdown assistance 385

parts while the jump lead/charging cable is R Vehicles with

with a petr
petrol
ol engine: jump-start the
connected to the battery/jump-start connec- vehicle only when the engine and exhaust sys-
tion point. tem are cold.
R The jump lead/charging cable must not come
into contact with any parts which may move Star
arting
ting assistance
assistance and char
charging
ging the
the 12 V battery
battery
when the engine is running.
R Always make sure that neither you nor the bat- Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park-
tery is electrostatically charged.
ing brake.
R Keep away from re and naked ames.
R Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: the
R Do not lean over the battery. transmission is in position j.
Observe the additional following points when R The vehicle and all electrical consumers are
charging the battery: switched o .
R Only use battery chargers tested and R The bonnet is open.
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Read the battery charger's operating instruc- Example: engine compartment
tions before charging the battery. # Slide cover 1 of positive contact 2 on the
Observe the additional following points during jump-starting connection point in the direction
starting assistance: of the arrow.
R Starting assistance may only be provided
# Connect positive contact 2 on your vehicle
using vehicles, batteries or other jump start to the positive terminal of the donor battery
devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. using the jump lead/charging cable. Always
R The vehicles must not touch.
386 Breakdown assistance

begin with positive contact 2 on your own of the donor battery, then from positive con- Observe the following notes if you want to replace
vehicle rst. tact 2 and the positive terminal of the donor the battery yourself:
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: start the engine of battery. Begin each time with the contacts on R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
the donor vehicle and run at idle speed. your own vehicle rst. which meets the speci c vehicle require-
# Connect the negative terminal of the donor # A er removing the jump lead/charging cable, ments.
battery and earth point 3 of your own vehicle close cover 1 of positive contact 2. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol-
by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin If your vehicle has been started with starting ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith-
with the donor battery rst. assistance, it may not be possible to use the elec- ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: start the engine of tric drive for approximately 30 minutes. only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith-
your own vehicle. ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-
Further information can be obtained at a quali ed Benz recommends that you only use batteries
# During
Dur ing the
the char
charging
ging process:
process: start the charg- specialist workshop. which have been tested and approved for your
ing process. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: let the engines run Replacing the
the 12 V battery
battery R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent
for several minutes. hoses, elbow ttings or terminal covers from
# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
# During
Dur ing star
starting
ting assistance:
assistance: before disconnect- (/ page 381). the battery being replaced.
ing the jump lead, switch on an electrical con- R Make sure that the vent hose is always con-
sumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear win- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the nected to the original opening on the side of
dow heater or lighting. 12 V battery replaced at a quali ed specialist the battery.
workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service
When the starting assistance/charging process is Centre. Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.
complete, perform the following steps: Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
# First, remove the jump lead/charging cable escape.
from earth point 3 and the negative terminal R Make sure that detachable parts are recon-
nected in the same way.
 Breakdown assistance 387

Tow -st
-star
arting
ting or towing
towing away * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- 4MATIC
4MATIC vehicles
vehicles
Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods (non plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) ing away incorrectly Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods
# Observe the instructions and notes on Both axles on Yes, maximum 50 km at
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking towing away. the ground 50 km/h
If one of the following functions is switched
on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain Vehicles with
with rear
rear wheel drive
drive Front axle No
situations: raised
Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods
R Active Brake Assist Rear axle No
Both axles on Yes, maximum 50 km at
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC raised
the ground 50 km/h
R HOLD function Towing with
with a raised
raised axle: towing should be per-
Front axle No
R Active Parking Assist
raised formed by a towing company.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Rear axle Yes, if the steering wheel is
these systems in the following or similar situa- Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
raised xed in the centre position
tions: with a steering wheel lock Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
# during towing vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
# in a car wash towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.
388 Breakdown assistance

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- R the v Towing not permitted See Owner's R vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: the
ing away incorrectly Manual display message appears automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to
position i or j
# Observe the instructions and notes on Exception:
Excep tion: if the vehicle is located in a danger
towing away. zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone % Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: if the
despite the display message or the display not automatic transmission cannot be shi ed to
Observe the information on towing and transport- working. position i or if the display does not show
ing the vehicle in the vehicle Owner's Manual. It must not be towed further than 50 m with both anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 390).
axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h A towing vehicle with li ing equipment is
Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only required for vehicle transportation.
transporting is permitted.
Both axles on Yes, maximum 50 km at * NOTE
NOTE Damage due to towing away at
the ground 50 km/h excessively high speeds or over long dis-
Towing the
the vehicle
vehicle with
with both
both axles on the
the ground
ground tances
Front axle Yes, maximum 50 km at
raised 50 km/h # Observe the notes on the permitted towing The drivetrain could be damaged when towing
methods (/ page 387). at excessively high speeds or over long distan-
Rear axle Yes, if the steering wheel is # Make sure that the battery is connected and ces.
raised xed in the centre position charged. # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be
with a steering wheel lock.
Observe the following points when the battery is exceeded.
In the following situations, only transporting the discharged: # A towing distance of 50 km must not be
vehicle is permitted: R the engine cannot be started exceeded.
R the display is not working
R the electric parking brake cannot be released
or or applied
 Breakdown assistance 389

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a door; the automatic transmission otherwise & WARNING Risk of accident due to limited
vehicle which is too heavy automatically shi s to position j. safety-related functions during the towing
# Fit the towing eye (/ page 391). process
If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away # Fasten the towing device.
is heavier than the permissible gross mass of Safety-related functions are limited or no lon-
your vehicle, the following situations can ger available in the following situations:
occur: * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- R the vehicle is switched o .
R the towing eye may become detached.
tion of the tow bar
R the brake system or power steering system
R the vehicle/trailer combination may # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to is malfunctioning.
swerve or overturn. the towing eyes.
R the energy supply or the on-board electri-
# Before tow-starting or towing away, # Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism cal system is malfunctioning.
check if the vehicle to be tow-started or (/ page 84). When your vehicle is towed away, signi cantly
towed away exceeds the permissible # Do not activate the HOLD function. more e ort may be required to steer and
gross mass. brake than is normally required.
# Deactivate tow-away protection
(/ page 101). # Use a tow bar.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its
permissible gross mass must not exceed the per- # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 242). # Make sure that the steering wheel can
missible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: shi the move freely before towing the vehicle
# Information on the permissible gross mass of
automatic transmission to position i. away.
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identi-
cation plate (/ page 415). # Release the electric parking brake.
# Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: do not
open the driver's door or front passenger
390 Breakdown assistance

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive tion j in the event of damage to the electri- # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels
power cal system. To shi to i, provide the on- with suitable tensioning straps.
board electrical system with power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power (/ page 385).
# Do not exceed the maximum permissible
may be too high and the vehicles could be speed of 60 km/h when transporting.
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
damaged.
# Pull away slowly and smoothly.
# Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: shi the * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur-
automatic transmission to position j. ing it incorrectly
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the # A er loading, the vehicle must be
Loading the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for transport
transport vehicle against rolling away.
secured on all four wheels. Otherwise,
Hybrid
Hybr id vehicles:
vehicles: transportation of vehicles should # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. the vehicle could be damaged.
only be carried out by professional recovery com- Vehicles with
with ADS PLUS
PLUS (Adap
(Adaptiv
tivee Damping
Damping Sys-
Sys- # A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards
panies. tem PLUS)
PLUS) and 10 cm downwards must be kept to
# Observe the notes on towing away the transport platform.
(/ page 388). & WARNING Risk of an accident when trans-
# Connect the towing device to the towing eye porting vehicles with Adaptive Damping # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels a er
in order to load the vehicle. System PLUS loading.

% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer When transporting vehicles with Adaptive
Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer
hitch.
combination may begin to rock and start to
# Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: shi the skid.
automatic transmission to position i. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the
% Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: the transporter.
automatic transmission may be locked in posi-
 Breakdown assistance 391

4MATIC
4MA TIC vehicles/v
vehicles/vehicles
ehicles with
with automatic
automatic trans-
trans- Towing eye
eye stor
storag
agee location # Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
mission will go and tighten.
The towing eye is located in the stowage space
under the boot oor. Vehicles with
with a trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: vehicles with a trailer
hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing
Fitting and remo
removing
ving the
the towing
towing eye eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
# Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-

rect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged
to rest on the same transportation vehicle. in the process.
# Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to
* NOTE Damage to the drive train due to tow away or tow start the vehicle.
incorrect positioning of the vehicle # Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch
# Do not position the vehicle above the to tow the vehicle during recovery.
connection point of the transport vehi-
cle.

# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and

remove.
392 Breakdown assistance

Tow -st
-star
arting
ting the
the vehicle
vehicle This could result in a re. * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by
Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission
transmission # Always replace faulty fuses with speci- moisture
ed new fuses containing the correct Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
* NOTE
NOTE Damage to the automatic transmis- amperage. system or cause it to malfunction.
sion due to tow-starting # When the fuse box is open, make sure
The automatic transmission may be damaged * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
in the process of tow-starting vehicles with Electrical components or systems may be # When closing the fuse box, make sure
automatic transmission. damaged by incorrect fuses, or their function- that the seal of the lid is positioned cor-
# Vehicles with automatic transmission ality may be signi cantly impaired. rectly on the fuse box.
must not be tow-started. # Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
# Vehicles with an automatic transmission must correct fuse rating. cause traced and recti ed at a quali ed specialist
not be tow-started. workshop.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
same rating, which you can recognise by the col- R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
Electrical
Electr ical fuses
our and the label. The fuse ratings and further
Notes on electrical
electrical fuses R All electrical consumers are switched o .
information to be observed can be found in the
fuse assignment diagram. R the vehicle is switched o .
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
Fuse assignment diagram:
diagram: on the fuse box in the The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
to overloaded lines boot (/ page 394). boxes:
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
driver's side (/ page 393)
age, the electric line could be overloaded.
 Breakdown assistance 393

R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit # Always switch o the windscreen wipers
(/ page 394) and the vehicle rst if you need to open
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell the bonnet.
(/ page 394)
R Fuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of
the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of
travel (/ page 394)

Opening and closing the

the fuse box
box in the
the engine
compartment
compar tment
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 392).
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
Opening box using a dry cloth.
# Loosen screws 4 and remove fuse box lid 3
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the from the top.
windscreen wipers when the bonnet is # Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to
open anti-clockwise. Closing
If the windscreen wipers start moving when # Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the
# Check whether the seal is positioned correctly
the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by arrow. in cap 3.
the wiper linkage.
394 Breakdown assistance

# Insert lid 3 into the bracket at the rear of the

fuse box.
# Fold down lid 3 of the fuse box and tighten
screws 4.
# Insert cover 1 on both sides.
# Turn clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn
clockwise.
# Close the bonnet.
# Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the
Opening and closing the
the fuse box
box in the
the cockpit
cockpit
arrow.
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 392). The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the
side of the fuse box.
The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of
the cockpit under a cover. # To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the
# To open and close it, consult a Mercedes-Benz arrow and remove it.
Service Centre. # To close: reinsert cover 1.

Opening and closing the

the fuse box
box in the
the front
front Opening and closing the
the fuse box
box in the
the boot
passenger foo
passenger footw
twell
ell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 392).
(/ page 392).
 Wheels and tyres 395

Notes on noise or unusual handling char

charact
acter
eris-
is- & WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
tics insu cient tyre tread R Check the valve caps.
Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or Insu cient tyre tread will result in reduced R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the
unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle tyre grip. tyre contact surface across the entire width.
is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is
tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet
roads, especially when the speed of the vehi- 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
also be causing the unusual handling characteris-
tics. cle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Thus, you should regularly check the
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your Notes on snow
snow chains
chains
speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels tread depth and the condition of the
checked at a quali ed specialist workshop. tread across the entire width of all tyres. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
Minimum tread depth for: rectly tted snow chains
R Summer tyres: 3 mm If you have tted snow chains to the front
Notes on regularl
regularlyy inspecting wheels and tyres
tyres wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
& WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged body or chassis components.
tyres
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres # Never t snow chains to the front
before the legally-prescribed limit for the wheels.
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. minimum tread depth is reached. # Only t snow chains on the rear wheels
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of
in pairs.
damage and replace any damaged tyres Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu-
immediately. larly, at least once a month or as required, for
example, prior to a long journey or driving o -
road:
R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 396).
396 Wheels and tyres

* NOTE Damage to components of the vehi- R Vehicles with

with Activ
Activee Par
Parking
king Assist:
Assist: do not use R The tyres can wear excessively and/or
cle body or chassis due to tted snow Active Parking Assist when snow chains are unevenly.
chains tted.
R The driving characteristics as well as the
R Vehicles with
with level
level control:
control: if snow chains are steering and braking characteristics may
If you t snow chains to the front wheels of tted, only drive at raised vehicle level
4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo- be greatly impaired.
(/ page 251).
nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Comply with the recommended tyre
# Only t snow chains to the rear wheels % You can permanently limit the maximum pressure and check the tyre pressure of
of 4MATIC vehicles. speed for driving with winter tyres all tyres, including the spare wheel, regu-
(/ page 228). larly:
Observe the following notes when using snow % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away R monthly
chains: (/ page 220). This allows the wheels to spin, R when the load changes
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain achieving an increased driving force.
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain R before embarking on a longer journey
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz R if operating conditions change, e.g. o -
Service Centre. Tyr
yree pressure
pressure road driving
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that Notes on tyre
tyre pressure
pressure # Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
have been speci cally approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with & WARNING Risk of accident due to insu -
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:
the same quality standard. cient or excessive tyre pressure
R Shorten the service life of the tyres.
R If snow chains are tted, the maximum per- Underin ated or overin ated tyres pose in par-
R Cause increased tyre damage.
missible speed is 50 km/h. ticular the following risks:
R Adversely a ect driving characteristics and
R The tyres can burst.
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
 Wheels and tyres 397

& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea- R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
ted pressure drop in the tyres The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the
The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged. temperature of the tyres increases, so too does
the tyre pressure.
Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres
bursting. Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system:
system:
# Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
you can also check the tyre pressure using the
on-board computer.
# Check whether the tyre has a puncture
or the valve has a leak. Notes on trailer
Notes trailer operation
operation
# If you are unable to rectify the damage,
Always in ate the rear axle tyres to the recom-
mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table
contact a quali ed specialist workshop. for increased load.
Information on the recommended tyre pressure
for the vehicle's factory- tted tyres can be found Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree table
table
on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel
The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
ller ap (/ page 397). If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure,
ller ap.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre the following tyre pressure information is only
pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load
permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pres- condition.
sure. If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are the + symbol, the tyre pressure information
cold. Conditions for cold tyres: following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out
consumption may then increase slightly.
of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
398 Wheels and tyres

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully values a er you have changed the tyre pressure.
laden" are de ned in the table for di erent num- You can, however, also update the reference val-
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
actual number of seats may di er from this. system manually (/ page 399).
System limits
System
Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system The system may be impaired or may not function
Function of the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system particularly in the following situations:
The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre R incorrect reference values were taught in
temperature of the tyres tted to the vehicle by R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
means of a tyre pressure sensor. object penetrating the tyre, for example R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature R there is a malfunction caused by another radio
minutes of driving
appear in the on-board computer (/ page 398). signal source R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre process of the system is not yet complete. The
Checking the
Checking the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree with
with the
the tyre
tyre pressure
pressure tyre pressures are already being monitored.
temperature is excessive, you will be warned with monitor
monitoring
ing system
system
display messages (/ page 489) or the h # Compare the tyre pressure with the recom-
warning lamp in the instrument cluster Req
equir
uirements:
ements: mended tyre pressure for the current operat-
(/ page 514). R The vehicle is switched on. ing condition (/ page 397). Additionally,
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an On-board computer: observe the notes on cold tyres
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre 4 Service 5 Tyres
(/ page 396).
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
suitable for the operating situation. One of the following displays appears:
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys- R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of
tem will automatically update the new reference the individual wheels:
 Wheels and tyres 399

% The values displayed in the on-board com- On-board computer: Tyr

yree pressur
pressuree loss war
warning
ning system
system
puter may deviate from those of the tyre pres- 4 Service 5 Tyres
sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high Function of the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree loss war
warning
ning system
system
elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated
# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the
by a pressure gauge are higher than those le -hand side of the steering wheel. driver by means of display messages when there
shown by the on-board computer. In this case, The Use current pressures as new reference is a severe tyre pressure loss.
do not reduce the tyre pressure. values? message is shown in the Instrument
System limits
System
Display.
Rest
estar
arting
ting the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing system
system # To restart, press Touch Control on the le -
The system may be impaired or may not function
particularly in the following situations:
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: hand side of the steering wheel.
The Tyre press. monitor restarted message is R incorrect reference values were taught in
R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all of shown in the Instrument Display. R sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
the wheels (/ page 396). Current warning messages are deleted and object penetrating the tyre, for example
the yellow h warning lamp goes out. R an even pressure loss on more than one tyre
Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the
A er you have been driving for a few minutes, occurs
following situations:
R The tyre pressure has changed.
the system checks whether the current tyre The system has a restricted or delayed function
pressures are within the speci ed range. The particularly in the following situations:
R The wheels or tyres have been changed or current tyre pressures are then accepted as
newly tted. R poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel
reference values and monitored.
R driving with snow chains
Be sure to also pay attention to the following rela-
ted topic: R when adopting a very sporty driving style with
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 396) high cornering speeds or sudden acceleration
R driving with a very heavy or large trailer
R driving with a high load
400 Wheels and tyres

The tyre pressure loss warning system is only an On-board computer: Wheel change
change
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre 4 Service 5 Tyres
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure Notes on selecting, tting and replacing
replacing tyres
tyres
# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
suitable for the operating situation and to check
it. le -hand side of the steering wheel. * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
The Run Flat Indicator active Restart mes-
Be sure to also observe the following further rela- sage is shown in the display.
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
ted subjects: You could otherwise fail to recognise
# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 396) dangers.
le -hand side of the steering wheel.
R Display messages about the tyres The Tyre pressure now OK? message is
(/ page 489) & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
shown in the display.
rect wheel and tyre dimensions
# Select Yes.
Rest
estar
arting
ting the
the tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree loss war
warning
ning system
system If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are tted,
# To con rm restart, press Touch Control on the
Req
equir
uirements:
ements: the service brakes or components in the brake
le -hand side of the steering wheel. system and in the wheel suspension may be
R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly
The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is damaged.
set for the respective operating status on all shown in the display.
wheels. # Always replace wheels and tyres with
A er you have driven for a few minutes, the those that ful l the speci cations of the
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in tyre pressure loss warning system monitors
the following situations: original part.
the set tyre pressures of all the tyres.
R The tyre pressure has changed.
For wheels, pay attention to the following:
Be sure to also pay attention to the following rela-
R Designation
R The wheels or tyres have been changed or ted topic:
newly tted. R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 396) R Type
 Wheels and tyres 401

For tyres, pay attention to the following: * NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that
R Designation tyre types and sizes that have not been have been checked and recommended by
approved Mercedes-Benz.
R Manufacturer
R Type For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and
accessories which have been specially * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea-
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. ded tyres
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- These tyres are specially adapted to the active Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recom-
ing the speci ed tyre load-bearing capa- safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
city or the permissible speed rating 4MATIC, and marked as follows: damage cannot always be detected on retrea-
Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original ded tyres.
tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause For this reason driving safety cannot be guar-
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
the tyres to explode. anteed.
(run- at tyres only for certain wheels)
# Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes # Do not use used tyres if you have no
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
approved for your vehicle model. information about their previous usage.
tain AMG tyres)
# Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
rating and speed rating required for your Otherwise, certain properties, such as han- * NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage
vehicle. dling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, when driving over obstacles
consumption, etc. could be adversely a ec-
ted. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result Large wheels have a smaller section width. As
in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle the section width decreases, the risk of
components when loaded. This could result in wheels and tyres being damaged when driving
damage to the tyre or the vehicle. over obstacles increases.
402 Wheels and tyres

# Avoid obstacles or drive especially care- # Have the tyres changed at a quali ed & WARNING Risk of accident with high per-
fully. specialist workshop only. formance tyres
# Reduce your speed when driving over The special tyre tread in combination with the
kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers * NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low optimised tyre compound means that the risk
and potholes. ambient temperatures of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is
# Avoid particularly high kerbs. At low ambient temperatures, tears could form increased.
when driving with summer tyres, causing per- In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at
* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage manent damage to the tyre. a low outside temperature and tyre running
when parking on kerbs or in potholes # At temperatures below 7 °C use i temperature.
M+S tyres. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driv-
Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage
the wheels and tyres. ing style accordingly.
# If possible, park only on at surfaces.
Accessory parts which are not approved for your # Use i M+S tyres at outside tempera-
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used tures of less than 10 °C.
# Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking. correctly, can impair the operating safety.
# Only use the tyres for their intended pur-
Before purchasing and using non-approved acces- pose.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component sories, visit a quali ed specialist workshop and
parts from the use of tyre- tting tools enquire about: Observe the following when selecting, tting and
Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys- R Suitability replacing tyres:
tem: electronic component parts are located R Legal stipulations R Country-speci c requirements for tyre
in the wheel. Tyre- tting tools should not be R Factory recommendations approval that de ne a speci c tyre type for
applied in the area of the valve. your vehicle.
The tools could damage the electronic compo-
nent parts.
 Wheels and tyres 403

R Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in For more information on wheels and tyres, con-
certain regions and areas of operation can be wintry road conditions. tact a quali ed specialist workshop.
highly bene cial. R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type tread. ted subjects:
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended R Observe the maximum permissible speed for R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 396)
tyres) and the same make. the M+S tyres tted. R Tyre pressure table (/ page 397)
R Only t wheels of the same size on one axle If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(le and right). the vehicle, this must be indicated by an (/ page 410)
It is only permissible to t a di erent wheel appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision.
size in the event of a at tyre in order to drive R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
to the specialist workshop. rst 100 km. Notes on interc
interchanging
hanging wheels
R Do not make any modi cations to the brake R Replace the tyres a er six years at the latest,
system, the wheels or the tyres. & WARNING Risk of injury through di erent
regardless of wear. wheel sizes
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not R When replacing
replacing with
with tyres
tyres that
that do not
not featur
featuree
permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's Interchanging the front and rear wheels can
run- at char
haract
acter
eris
istics:
tics: vehicles with severely impair the driving characteristics.
general operating permit. MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a
R Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys- TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo-
tem: all tted wheels must be equipped with with a TIREFIT kit a er replacing with tyres nents may also be damaged.
functioning sensors for the tyre pressure mon- that do not feature run- at characteristics, # Only interchange the front and rear
itoring system. e.g. winter tyres. wheels if the wheels and tyres have the
R At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres same dimensions.
% You can permanently limit the maximum
or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all speed for driving with winter tyres
wheels. (/ page 228).
404 Wheels and tyres

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the Notes on stor

storing
ing wheels R Chock
wheels or tyres have di erent dimensions can R Wheel wrench
render the general operating permit invalid. When storing wheels, observe the following notes:
R A er removing wheels, store them in a cool, R Centring pin
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
di er: dry and preferably dark place. % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease The maximum load capacity of the jack can
R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
or fuel. be found on the sticker a xed to the jack.
R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the
The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a
tyre malfunction, please contact a quali ed spe-
Over
Overvie
view
w of the
the tyre-c
tyre-chang
hangee tool
tool kit
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread cialist workshop.
depth. This signi cantly reduces traction on wet * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles The tyre-change tool kit is located under the boot
roads (aquaplaning). oor.
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel You could otherwise fail to recognise % Depending on the model, the tyre change tool
size, you can interchange the wheels every dangers. kit may be located at other positions under
5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. the boot oor.
Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for Apart from some country-speci c variants, vehi-
the wheels. cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on For more information on which tyre-changing
"Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 405). tools are required and approved for performing a
wheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali ed
specialist workshop.
You require the following tools, for example, to
change a wheel:
R Jack
 Wheels and tyres 405

# Shi the transmission to position j.

# Vehicles with
with level
level control
control system:
system: set the nor-
mal vehicle level (/ page 251).
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
# Place chocks or other suitable items under the
front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally
opposite the wheel you wish to change.
# If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps
1 Jack (/ page 405).
2 Wheel wrench Prepar
Pr eparing
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle for
for a wheel change
change
# Raise the vehicle (/ page 406).
3 Centring pin Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
4 Folding chock R The vehicle is not on a slope.
Remo
emoving
ving and tting the wheel trim/hub
trim/hub caps
5 Ratchet for jack R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Plug-in hybr
hybrid
id R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
(/ page 405).
on the boot oor. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-
change tool kit, consult a quali ed specialist Plastic hub cap
Plastic
workshop to nd out about suitable tools. # To remov
remove:
e: turn the centre cover of the hub
# Apply the electric parking brake manually.
cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.
# To t: make sure that the centre cover of the
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position. hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.
406 Wheels and tyres

# Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover Raising the
the vehicle
vehicle when changing
changing a wheel
clockwise until the hub cap engages physically
and audibly. Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
Aluminium hub cap R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 405).
R The wheel trims and hub caps have been
removed (/ page 405).
Important notes on using the jack:
R Use only a vehicle-speci c jack that has been
approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehi-
cle.
R The jack is only designed for raising and hold-
ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
# To remov
remove:e: position socket 2 from the tyre- is being changed and not for maintenance
change tool kit on hub cap 1. work under the vehicle.
# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2. R The jack must be placed on a rm, at and
# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1 non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at,
anti-clockwise and remove it. load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti- Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
# To t: follow the instructions above in reverse
cally under the jack support point. R Never place your hands or feet under the vehi-
order.
cle.
% Speci ed tight
tightening
ening torq
torque:
ue: 25 Nm.
R Never lie under the vehicle.
 Wheels and tyres 407

R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the the jack must be positioned vertically
electric parking brake. under the jacking point of the vehicle.
R Do not open or close any doors or the boot
lid. * NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jack support point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
# The jack is designed exclusively for jack-
ing up the vehicle at the jack support
Position of jack support points points.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles # Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so
You could otherwise fail to recognise that the letters "AUF" are visible.
# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel dangers.
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
screws completely. positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
# Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of
408 Wheels and tyres

Remo
emoving
ving a wheel
Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
R The vehicle is raised (/ page 406).

* NO
NOTE
TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
# Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force # Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead
to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of of the wheel bolt.
comfort when braking. # Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com-
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on pletely.
wheel bolts # Remove the wheel.
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup-
port point 1.
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. Fitting a new
new wheel
# Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2
sits completely on jack support point 1 and # Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- * NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. pletely. # Observe the notes in the Supplement.
# Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maxi- You could otherwise fail to recognise
mum of 3 cm from the ground. dangers.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 408).
 Wheels and tyres 409

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening Lower
Lowering
ing the
the vehicle
vehicle a er a wheel change
change
wheel wheel bolts and nuts Req
equir
uirements:
ements:
Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts R The new wheel has been tted (/ page 408).
wheel bolts to come loose, as too can dam- when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # To lower
lower the
the vehicle:
vehicle: place the ratchet onto
aged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
# Never oil or grease the threads. when the vehicle is on the ground. "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.
# In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a quali ed specialist workshop # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety
immediately. notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 400).
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- # For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which
aged hub threads replaced. have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and
# Do not continue driving.
for the wheel in question.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
# Observe the information on the choice of tyres pattern in the order indicated until they are
(/ page 400). nger-tight.
# Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
For tyres with a speci ed direction of rotation, an # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is nger-
arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
tight. pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc-
tion of rotation when tting. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 409). an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen- # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
tring pin and push it on. pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
the speci ed tightening torque of 150 Nm.
410 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- Emergency

Emerg ency spare
spare wheel shop. The new wheel must have the cor-
rect tightening torque Notes on the
the emergency
emergency spare
spare wheel rect dimensions.
The wheels could come loose if the wheel % The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the & WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.
prescribed torque.
Observe the following notes on tting an emer-
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the gency spare wheel:
nuts are tightened to the prescribed emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and
tightening torque. the wheel to be replaced may di er. The emer- R The maximum permissible speed with an

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehi- gency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi - emergency spare wheel tted is 80 km/h.
cle. Contact a quali ed specialist work- cantly impair driving characteristics of the R Do not t the emergency spare wheel with
shop and have the tightening torque vehicle. snow chains.
checked immediately. To prevent hazardous situations: R Replace the emergency spare wheel a er six
# Drive carefully. years at the latest, regardless of wear.
# Check the tyre pressure of the newly tted # Never t more than one emergency R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency
wheel and adjust it if necessary. spare wheel tted. Correct the pressure as
spare wheel or spare wheel that di ers
% The following does not apply if the new wheel in size. necessary.
is an emergency spare wheel. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or % The speci ed tyre pressure is stated on the
# Vehicles with
with tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree loss war
warning
ning sys-
sys- spare wheel brie y. label of the emergency spare wheel.
tem: restart the tyre pressure loss warning # Do not deactivate ESP®.
system (/ page 400).
# Have the emergency spare wheel or
# Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys- spare wheel of a di erent size replaced
tem: restart the tyre pressure monitoring sys- at the nearest quali ed specialist work-
tem (/ page 399).
 Wheels and tyres 411

% Vehicles with with a tyre

tyre pressur
pressuree loss war
warning
ning
system:
syst em: if an emergency spare wheel is tted,
the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot
function reliably. Only restart the system
again when the emergency spare wheel has
been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with
with a tyre
tyre pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring
ing sys-
sys-
tem: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the
tyre pressure monitoring system cannot func-
tion reliably. For a few minutes a er an emer-
gency spare wheel is tted, the system may
still display the tyre pressure of the removed
wheel. Only restart the system again when the
emergency spare wheel has been replaced
with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 396)
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 397)
R Notes on tting tyres (/ page 400)
R Fitting an emergency spare wheel
(/ page 405)
412 Technical data

Notes on tec
technical
hnical data On-boardd electronics
On-boar electronics # You should have all work on electrical
Notes on tam
tamper
pering
ing with
with the
the engine electronics
electronics and electronic components carried out
* NO
NOTE
TE Mercedes-AMG vehicles at a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. * NOTE Premature wear through improper
You could otherwise fail to recognise maintenance & WARNING Risk of accident due to
dangers. improper operation of two-way radios
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle
components to wear more quickly and the If you use two-way radios in the vehicle
The technical data was determined in accordance vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. improperly, their electromagnetic radiation
with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is
# Always have work on the engine elec-
vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain the case in the following situations, in particu-
further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service tronics and related components carried
out at a quali ed specialist workshop. lar:
Centre.
R The two-way radio is not connected to an
Onlyy for
Onl for certain
certain countries:
countries: you can nd vehicle- exterior aerial.
speci c vehicle data in the COC documents (CER- Two-wa
o-wayy radios
radios R The exterior aerial is tted incorrectly or is
TIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents
are delivered with your vehicle. Notes on tting tw
two-wa
o-wayy radios
radios not a low-re ection aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
the vehicle.
improper work on two-way radios
# Have the low-re ection exterior aerial t-
If two-way radios are manipulated or retro t- ted at a quali ed specialist workshop.
ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation # When operating two-way radios in the
from the two-way radios can interfere with the
vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operat- vehicle, always connect them to the low-
ing safety of the vehicle. re ection exterior aerial.
 Technical data 413

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit On the rear wings, it is recommended that you t
due to failure to comply with the instruc- the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the
tions for installation and use centre of the road.
Use Technical Speci cation ISO/TS 21609 (Road
The operating permit may be invalidated if the Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of a ermarket
instructions for installation and use of two-way radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
radios are not observed. retro tting two-way radios. Comply with the legal
# Only use approved frequency bands. requirements for detachable parts.
# Observe the maximum permissible out- If your vehicle has ttings for two-way radio equip-
put power in these frequency bands. ment, use the power supply and aerial connectors
# Only use approved aerial positions. provided in the pre-installation. Observe the man-
ufacturer's supplements when tting.
Two-wa
o-wayy radio
radio transmission
transmission output
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the aerial must not exceed the values in
1 Front roof area the following table.
2 Rear roof area
3 Rear wings
4 Boot lid
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, t-
ting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not
permitted.
414 Technical data

Freq
equency
uency band and maximum transmission
transmission out- The following can be used in the vehicle without ital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the inter-
put restrictions: net and in the app.
Freq
equency
uency band Maximum transmis-
transmis- R two-way radios with a maximum transmission
sion output output of up to 100 mW Regulat
egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation – Indonesia
R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in
Short wave 100 W Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi-
the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a cle components can be found using the key
3 - 54 MHz maximum transmission output of up to 2 W phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation – Indone-
(TETRA) sia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehi-
4 m frequency band 30 W
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) cle, on the internet and in the app.
74 - 88 MHz
There are no restrictions when positioning the % These are not small components. Information
2 m frequency band 50 W aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow- about small components can be found using
144 - 174 MHz ing frequency bands: the key phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation
R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
of small components".
Terrestrial Trunked 10 W
Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band
Furt
urther
her com
component-speci
ponent-speci c inf
infor
ormation
mation
380 - 460 MHz R 2G/3G/4G
Further component-speci c information can be
70 cm frequency band 35 W found using the key phrase "further component-
420 - 450 MHz Regulat
egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation and notes
notes speci c information" in the Digital Owner's Man-
Regulat
egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation of small compo-
compo- ual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
Two-way radio 10 W nents
(2G/3G/4G)
Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi-
cle components can be found using the key
phrase "Regulatory radio identi cation" in the Dig-
 Technical data 415

Vehicle identi cation plat

plate,
e, VIN and engine num-
ber over
overview
view
Vehicle identi cation plate

Vehicle identi cation plate (example: Kuwait) Vehicle identi cation plate (example: all other
1 Vehicle manufacturer countries)
2 Place of manufacture 1 Vehicle manufacturer
3 Manufacturing date 2 EU general operating permit number (only for
4 Vehicle model certain countries)
5 VIN 3 VIN (vehicle identi cation number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
(kg)
416 Technical data

5 Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle VIN below

below the
the front
front right-hand
right-hand seat VIN at the
the lower
lower edge
edge of the
the windscreen
windscreen
combination (kg) (only for speci c countries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
8 Paint code
% The data shown in the illustration is example
data.

1 VIN (vehicle identi cation number) as label

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind-
screen is only available in some countries.
Engine number
1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identi cation number) The engine number is stamped into the crank-
case. Further information can be obtained at a
2 Floor covering quali ed specialist workshop.
 Technical data 417

Operating uids
Operating + ENVIRONMENTAL
ENVIRONMENT AL NOTE
NOTE Pollution of the The operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz
environment due to irresponsible disposal can be identi ed by the following inscriptions on
Notes on operating
operating uids the container:
of operating uids
R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles Incorrect disposal of operating uids can
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. cause considerable damage to the environ-
You could otherwise fail to recognise ment. Further information on approved operating uids:
dangers. # Dispose of operating uids in an environ-
R in the Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper-
mentally responsible manner. ating Fluids by entering the designation
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
uids harmful to your health Operating uids include the following:
R fuels - in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App
Operating uids may be poisonous and harm- R At a quali ed specialist workshop
ful to your health. R DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas a er-
# Observe the text on the original contain- treatment & WARNING Risk of re or explosion from
ers when using, storing or disposing of R lubricants fuel
operating uids. R coolant
Fuels are highly ammable.
# Always store operating uids sealed in R brake uid # Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
their original containers. R windscreen washer uid sparks must be avoided.
# Always keep children away from operat-
R climate control system refrigerant # Before and during refuelling, switch o
ing uids.
the vehicle and, if tted, the stationary
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. heater.
Damage caused by the use of products that have
not been approved is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
418 Technical data

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels # Change immediately out of clothing that * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
has come into contact with fuel.
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
health. Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the fol- result in damage to the fuel system, the
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into lowing fuel types: engine and the emission control system.
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. R unleaded petrol
# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
# Do not inhale fuel vapour. spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms
R E85 fuel
# Keep children away from fuel.
to European EN 228, or an equivalent
R a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol speci cation.
# Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process. Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identi ed by the Fuel of this speci cation may contain up to
Ethanol
Et hanol up to
to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suita-
If you or other people come into contact with ller ap. ble for use with E10 fuel.
fuel, observe the following: Depending on the country, the fuels you can use # See the information label in fuel ller ap
# Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with in your vehicle may di er from the information in for other compatible fuels .
soap and water. the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been
# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
approved for your vehicle can be found on the Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
immediately rinse them thoroughly with instruction label on the inside of the fuel ller ap. R Diesel
clean water. Seek medical attention R Regular petrol with an octane number
immediately. Fuel lower than 91 RON
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by vol-
Information
Infor mation on fuel quality
quality for
for vehicles
vehicles with
with a pet-
pet-
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- rol engine ume, e.g. M15, M30
ing. Observe the notes on operating uids R Petrol with additives containing metal
(/ page 417).
 Technical data 419

If you have accidentally refuelled with the can be found on the information label in the fuel Information
Infor mation on additives
additives in petr
petrol
ol
wrong fuel: ller ap or on the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle Observe the notes on operating uids
# Do not switch on the vehicle.
suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe. (/ page 417).
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not su ciently low in sul-
phur, this can produce unpleasant odours. * NOTE
NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
The following compatibility indications for fuel The recommended octane number for your vehi-
apply to your vehicle: cle can be found on the information label in the Even small amounts of the wrong additive may
fuel ller ap. lead to malfunctions occurring.
E350 : Only refuel using super unleaded petrol # Only add cleaning additives recommen-
with at least 98 RON if you wish to achieve maxi- ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
mum engine output. Alternatively, you can also
refuel using premium-grade unleaded petrol with Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-
at least 95 RON. name fuels with additives.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel In some countries, the fuel available may not have
is not available, you may also refuel with regular su cient additives. Residue could build up in the
unleaded petrol with at least 91 RON. fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in
This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consultation with a Mercedes-Benz service
consumption. centre, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive rec-
1 For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by vol- ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes
ume Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON. and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.
2 For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by vol- Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
ume lling station or a quali ed specialist workshop.
The compatibility indications for fuel on the vehi-
cle according to the European standard EN 16942
420 Technical data

Infor
Information
mation on fuel quality
quality for
for vehicles
vehicles with
with a die- that conforms to European standard The following compatibility indication for fuel
sel engine EN 590, or an equivalent speci cation. applies to your vehicle:
General notes
General notes In countries without sulphur-free diesel
Observe the notes on operating uids fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
(/ page 417). fuel with a sulphur content less than
50 ppm.
& WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture # Vehicles without
without diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt
lter:
er:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sul-
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of phur content less than 500 ppm.
pure diesel fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
# Never refuel using petrol in diesel R Petrol
engines. R Marine diesel 1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by vol-
# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
R Heating oil ume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester)
R Pure fatty acid methyl ester (bio-diesel) or
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel According to European standard EN 16942 you
vegetable oil can nd the compatibility indications at the fol-
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could R Para n or kerosene lowing locations:
result in damage to the fuel system, the R On the vehicle on the information label on the
engine and the emission control system. If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel: fuel ller ap (/ page 190)
# Vehicles with
with a diesel particulat
par ticulatee lt
lter:
er:
# Do not switch on the vehicle. R On the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable
Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
for your vehicle throughout Europe
 Technical data 421

Information
Infor mation on low
low outside tem
temper
peratur
atures
es Total capacity and reserv
reservee fuel tank
tank Total capacity and reserv
reservee fuel tank
tank
Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel Model Total capacity
Total Model Total capacity
Total
as possible at the beginning of winter.
Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel E 300 e 50.0 litres E 300 66.0 litres
tank should be empty, if possible. When rst refu- E 350
All other models 50.0 litres
elling with winter diesel fuel, keep the fuel level
low, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be l- or E 450 4MATIC 66.0 litres
led as usual when next refuelling. 60.0 litres or
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a 80.0 litres
Model of which
which reserv
reservee fuel
lling station or a quali ed specialist workshop.
All models 7.0 litres All other models 50.0 litres
Tank content
content and fuel reserv
reservee (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
or
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, Tank content
content and fuel reserv
reservee (not
(not for
for plug-in
depending on the vehicle equipment. 66.0 litres
hybr
ybrid)
id)
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, Model of which
which reserv
reservee fuel
depending on the vehicle equipment.
E 450 4MATIC 7.0 litres
or
12.0 litres
All other models 7.0 litres
422 Technical data

AdBlue® (v
(vehicles
ehicles with
with a diesel engine only)
only) * NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to AdBlue® lling capacity and consumption
consumption
AdBlue®
Notes on AdBlue impurities in AdBlue® Nott for
No for plug-in hybr
hybrid
id
Observe the notes on operating uids Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®: Model Total
Total capacity
(/ page 417).
R increased emission values
AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx All models 23.5 litres
R damage to the catalytic converter
exhaust gas a ertreatment of diesel engines.
R NOx exhaust gas a ertreatment malfunc- Plug-in hybr
hybrid
id
It may be improper or punishable in some coun-
tions Model Total
Total capacity
tries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue® or
one that does not comply with the speci cations # Avoid impurities in AdBlue®. All models 23.5 litres
of these operating instructions.
AdBlue® residues crystallise a er a period of AdBlue® consump
consumption
tion
* NOTE
NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1%
AdBlue® or the use of additive-enhanced they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consump-
AdBlue® with water as soon as possible. tion, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent
The function of the NOx exhaust gas a er- When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts upon driving style and operating conditions. For
treatment can be impaired by the use of of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption g-
unsuitable denoxi cation agents. any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only ures under day-to-day operating conditions may
# Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ll the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas. di er from the consumption gures calculated.
The frequency at which you will have to top up
ISO 22241. AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply
# Do not dilute AdBlue® with water. checked at a quali ed specialist workshop before
# Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®. making journeys outside of Europe. Before a lon-
ger stay outside of Europe, consult a quali ed
specialist workshop.
 Technical data 423

AdBlue® rang
angee and ll lev
level
el Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil
The AdBlue® ll level and range can be displayed changed at a quali ed specialist workshop.
via the on-board computer. The AdBlue® range Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by
shown depends strongly on the driving style and Mercedes-Benz.
operating conditions. The actual range can there- Petr
trol
ol engines: for certain countries, di erent
fore deviate from the range currently displayed in engine oils can be used in conjunction with
the on-board computer. The information supplied reduced maintenance intervals. Further informa-
in the operator's manual regarding the reserve tion on di erent engine oils can be obtained at a
quantity at the rst display warning and on the quali ed specialist workshop.
minimum top-up quantity when the fuel tank is
empty is also to be understood as guide values. Quality and capacity of engine oil (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor-
rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives Engine oil speci cation
Engine oil # Do not use engine oils or oil lters other Petr
trol
ol engines MB-Freigabe
MB-Freigabe or MB-
Notes on engine oil than those which meet the speci cations Approval
Approv al
Observe the notes on operating uids necessary for the prescribed service
(/ page 417). intervals. All models 229.5*
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in Petr
trol
ol engines: Only use SAE 0W-40 or SAE
order to achieve longer change intervals 5W-40 viscosity class engine oils.
than prescribed.
Engine oil speci cation
# Do not use additives.
# Have the engine oil changed a er the Diesel engines MB-Freigabe
MB-Freigabe or MB-
prescribed intervals. Approval
Approv al
All models 229.52*
424 Technical data

* recommended for the lowest possible fuel con- The speci ed lling capacity refers to an oil Engine oil speci cations
sumption change with the oil lter. Diesel engines MB-Freigabe
MB-Freigabe or MB-
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, Quality and capacity of engine oil (not
(not for
for plug-in Approval
Approv al
it is recommended to use the engine oil speci ca- hybr
ybrid)
id)
tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE vis- E 400 d 4MATIC 229.52, 229.61*
cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of Engine oil speci cations
All other models 229.52, 229.61,
the approved SAE viscosity classes. Petr
trol
ol engines MB-Freigabe
MB-Freigabe or MB- 229.71*, 229.72
% If the engine oils listed in the table are not Approval
Approv al
available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre * recommended for the lowest possible fuel con-
of the following engine oils once only. E 180 229.51, 229.52, sumption
E 200 229.61
Engine oils for one-time lling only in exceptional To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption,
cases: E 350 229.71* it is recommended to use the engine oil speci ca-
R Vehicles withwith a petr
petrol
ol engine: MB-Freigabe or E 200 4MATIC tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE vis-
MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3 cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of
All other models 229.51, 229.52, the approved SAE viscosity classes.
R Vehicles withwith a diesel engine: ACEA C3 229.61, 229.71*, % If the engine oils listed in the table are not
Engine oil lling capacity 229.72 available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre
Model Capacity of the following engine oils once only.
Engine oils for one-time lling only in exceptional
E 300 e 6.8 litres cases:
E 300 e 4MATIC 6.6 litres R Vehicles withwith a petr
petrol
ol engine: MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3
All other models 6.3 litres
R Vehicles withwith a diesel engine:
 Technical data 425

- E 400 d 4MATIC:
4MATIC: MB-Freigabe or MB- Notes on brak
brakee uid Coolant
Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3
Observe the notes on operating uids Notes on coolant
- All other
other models: ACEA C3 (/ page 417). Observe the notes on operating uids
Engine oil lling capacity (/ page 417).
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to
Model Capacity vapour pockets forming in the brake sys- & WARNING Risk of re‑ and injury from
tem antifreeze
E 200 d 6.3 litres
E 220 d The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
E 220 d 4MATIC the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low, may ignite.
E 200 4MATIC 6.0 litres vapour pockets may form in the brake system # Allow the engine to cool down before
when the brakes are applied hard. you top up the antifreeze.
E 300 d 4MATIC 6.5 litres This impairs the braking e ect. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
E 400 d 4MATIC 7.5 litres # Have the brake uid renewed at the next to the ller opening.
speci ed intervals. # Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
E 450 4MATIC 8.5 litres
component parts before starting the
Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a quali- vehicle.
All other models 6.6 litres
ed specialist workshop.
The speci ed lling capacity refers to an oil Only use a brake uid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool-
change with the oil lter. ant
331.0.
# Only use coolant that has been premixed
with the required antifreeze protection.
426 Technical data

Information on coolant is available at the fol- Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due
lowing locations: cooling system: to unsuitable windscreen washer uid
R In the Mercedes-Benz Speci cation for R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down
to about -37°C) Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may
Operating Fluids 320.1 damage the plastic surface of the exterior
R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
- At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com lighting.
down to -45°C)
- In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App # Only use windscreen washer uids which

R At a quali ed specialist workshop are also suitable for use on plastic surfa-
Notes on windscreen
windscreen washer
washer uid ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
Observe the notes on operating uids
* NOTE Overheating at high outside temper- * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
(/ page 417).
atures mixing windscreen washer uids
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine & WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win-
cooling system is not su ciently protected windscreen washer concentrate terFit with other windscreen washer u-
against overheating and corrosion at high out- Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am- ids.
side temperatures. mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
# Only use coolant approved by Mercedes- with hot engine component parts or the Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other-
Benz. exhaust system. wise, the ll level sensor may be triggered errone-
# Observe the instructions in the # Make sure that no windscreen washer ously.
Mercedes-Benz Speci cations for Oper- concentrate spills out next to the ller Recommended windscreen washer uid:
ating Fluids 320.1. opening. R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a quali ed
specialist workshop.
 Technical data 427

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- Height when opened Height when opened
tion on the antifreeze container. Model Height when opened
Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all
year round. All models
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle data All models
Infor
Information
mation reg
regar
arding
ding the
the vehicle
vehicle data
Vehicle length 4935 mm
The vehicle data speci ed may vary as a result of
the following factors: Vehicle width including 2065 mm
Factors: outside mirrors
R tyres Vehicle width exclud- 1852 mm
R load ing outside mirrors
R condition of the suspension Wheelbase 2939 mm
R optional equipment
Model Vehicle height
Vehicle
In addition, the following applies to the speci ed 1 Height when opened
vehicle data: E 300 e 1475 mm
R Items of optional equipment increase the unla- Vehicle dimensions (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) E 300 de
den weight and reduce the payload. All other models 1481 mm
Missing values were not available at the time of
R Vehicle-speci c weight information can be going to press.
found on the vehicle identi cation plate
(/ page 415).
428 Technical data

Vehicle dimensions (not

(not for
for plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) Vehicle height Weights and loads (not
(not for
for plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
Missing values were not available at the time of Model Vehicle height
Vehicle Roof load
going to press.
E 200 4MATIC 1466 mm Model Maximum roof
roof load
Height when opened E 220 d 4MATIC All models 100 kg
Models Height when opened E 300 d 4MATIC
All models E 400 d 4MATIC 1467 mm High-volt
High-voltag
agee batter
batteryy (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
Vehicle dimensions E 450 4MATIC
Notes on the
the power
power supply
supply for
for vehicles
vehicles with
with a
All models All other models 1460 mm high-voltag
high-volt agee battery
battery
In accordance with European standard EN
Vehicle length 4935 mm 17186:2019, vehicle identi ers are located on the
Weights and loads (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) vehicle in the following places:
Vehicle width includ- 2065 mm
R On the inside of the socket ap
ing outside mirrors Roof load
R On the charging cable connector
Vehicle width exclud- 1852 mm Model Maximum roof
roof load
ing outside mirrors All models 100 kg
Wheelbase 2939 mm
 Technical data 429

Maximum batter
batteryy capacity and char
charging
ging times perature and the charging capacity of the battery.
All models The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the
supply voltage, the current intensity and the type
Type Lithium-ion of power supply.
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be
Maximum energy content 13.5 kWh
found on the information label in the socket cover
Range in electric-only mode (/ page 196).
Charge time – mode 3 Approx. 1 h
with 7.4 kW charging capacity 30 min Trailer hitch
1 Supply type: AC General notes
General notes on the
the trailer
trailer hitch
Charge time – mode 2 Approx. 2 h
Standard: EN 62196-2 Modi cations to the engine cooling system may
with 3.7 kW charging capacity 45 min
Style: type 2 be necessary, depending on the vehicle model.
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle Charge time – mode 2 Approx. 5 h The retro tting of a trailer hitch is only permissi-
plug ble if a towing capacity is speci ed in your vehicle
with 2.3 kW charging capacity
documents.
For further information on charging the high-volt-
age battery, refer to the "Charging the high-volt- Charge time – mode 2 Approx. 6 h Further information can be obtained at a quali ed
age battery" section (/ page 196). with 1.8 kW charging capacity 30 min specialist workshop.
Missing values were not available at the time of Also observe the notes on towing a trailer
Charge times – modes 2 and 3 apply to alternat- (/ page 272).
going to press. ing current charging from 10% to 100% of the usa-
ble energy content.
The time taken to charge the battery depends on
the charge status of the battery, the ambient tem-
430 Technical data

Mounting dimensions of the

the trailer
trailer hitch The overhang dimension and fastening points are When using a bicycle rack, observe the informa-
valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory. tion on the function of the bicycle rack and the
additional notes on the maximum load capacity
Notes on the
the maximum tongue
tongue weight
weight and load (/ page 278).
capacity
Technical data on the tongue weight and load
* NOTE
NOTE Damage caused by the trailer com- capacity (/ page 431).
ing loose
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer Over
Overhang
hang dimension for
for the
the trailer
trailer hitch
hitch (plug-in
may come loose. hybr
ybrid)
id)
# The tongue weight must not be below The overhang dimension is valid for a trailer hitch
50 kg. installed at the factory.
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as
Over
Overhang
hang dimension length
possible to the maximum permissible
tongue weight. Model Over
Overhang
hang dimension
All models 1243 mm
* NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack
coming loose
Over
Ov erhang
hang dimension for
for the
the trailer
trailer hitch
hitch (not
(not for
for
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
tongue weight and the maximal load capacity
should be observed. The overhang dimension is valid for a trailer hitch
1 Fastening points # Do not exceed the permissible load
installed at the factory.
2 Overhang dimension capacity.
3 Rear axle centre line
 Technical data 431

Over
Overhang
hang dimension length Towing capacity,
capacity, brak
braked
ed (at a minimum st
star
art-o
t-o Missing values were not available at the time of
Model Over
Overhang
hang dimension gradeability
gr adeability of 12%) going to press.
Model Towing
Towing capacity, Load capacity
All models 1243 mm brak
br aked
ed
Model Maximum load
E 200 1900 kg
Trailer load (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) All models
All other models 2100 kg
The tongue weight is not included in the towing
capacity. Towing capacity,
capacity, unbrak
unbraked
ed Maximum tongue
tongue weight
weight and load capacity (not
for plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
Towing capacity,
capacity, brak
braked
ed (at a minimum st
star
art-o
t-o Model Towing
Towing capacity,
gradeability
gr adeability of 12%) unbrak
unbr aked
ed Observe the additional notes on load capacity
Model Towing
Towing capacity (/ page 278).
All models 750 kg
Tongue weight
weight
All models 2100 kg
Maximum tongue
tongue weight
weight and load capacity (plug- Model Maximum tongue
tongue
Towing capacity,
capacity, unbrak
unbraked
ed weight
in hybr
hybrid)
id)
Model Towing
Towing capacity All models 84 kg
Observe the additional notes on load capacity
All models 750 kg (/ page 278).
Missing values were not available at the time of
Tongue weight
weight going to press.
Trailer load (not
(not for
for plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) Model Maximum tongue
tongue
The tongue weight is not included in the towing weight
capacity. All models 84 kg
432 Technical data

Load capacity Model Axle load

Model Maximum load
E 300 1425 kg
All models
E 300 d 4MATIC 1455 kg

Per
ermissible
missible rear
rear axle load (plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id) E 400 d 4MATIC 1440 kg

Trailer operation
operation axle load E 450 4MATIC 1460 kg
Model Axle load
All models 1620 kg

Per
ermissible
missible rear
rear axle load (not
(not for
for plug-in hybr
hybrid)
id)
Trailer operation
operation axle load
Model Axle load
E 200 1400 kg
E 200 4MATIC 1410 kg
E 200 d 1415 kg
E 220 d
E 220 d 4MATIC 1420 kg
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433

Display messages
Display messages the media display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide
the display message.
Introduction
Intr oduction
You can hide low-priority display messages by
Infor
Information
mation about display
display messages
messages pressing the back button G or the le -hand
Display messages appear on the instrument dis- Touch Control. The display messages will then be
play. stored in the message memory.
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim- Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly
pli ed in the Owner's Manual and may di er from as possible.
the symbols on the instrument display. The instru-
ment display shows high-priority display messages High-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
in red. Certain display messages are accompa- The instrument display will show these display
nied by a warning tone. messages permanently until the cause of the dis-
play message has been recti ed.
Please act in accordance with the display mes-
sages and follow the additional notes in the Own- Calling up saved
saved display
display messages
messages
er's Manual. On-board computer:
4 Service 5 1 message
For some display messages, symbols will also be
shown: If there are no display messages, No messages
R Õ Further information will appear on the instrument display.
R ¨ Hide display message # Scroll through the display messages by swip-
ing upwards or downwards on the le -hand
With the le -hand Touch Control, you can select Touch Control.
the respective symbol by swiping to the le or # To exit
exit the
the message
message memory:
memory: press the back
right. Pressing Õ displays further information on
button G.
434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety
safety
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Restraint sys. malfunction Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
Consult workshop # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Front left malfunction Con- Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
sult workshop (example) # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
Left windowbag malfunc- The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
tion Consult work- # Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
shop (example)
Front-passenger airbag dis- * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger
abled See Owner's Manual seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 54).
# If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front-passenger airbag * The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:
enabled See Owner's Man- R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front
ual passenger seat
R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 54).
# If necessary, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PRE-SAFE inoperative See * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE impulse side * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered.
inoperative See Owner's # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Manual

Key
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Á
* Have the key replaced.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Replace key

Á
* The key battery is discharged.
# Replace the battery (/ page 80).

Change key batteries

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Á
* The key is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 168).
Key not detected (white dis-
play message)

Á
* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle:
R You can no longer start the vehicle.
Key not detected (red dis- R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
play message)
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 168).

Á
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.
# Wait until processing is complete.

Key being initialised Please

wait
440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Place the key in the * Key detection is malfunctioning.
marked space See Owner's # Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
Manual
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 168).

Lights
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The corresponding light source is defective.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Left dipped beam (example) % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the light are faulty.

:
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with
with a trailer
trailer hitch:
hitch: a fuse may have blown.
Malfunction See Owner's # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
Manual
# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 392).
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Automatic driving lights

inoperative

:
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Light System inoper-

ative

:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

Switch on headlamps

:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to the à position.

Switch off lights

442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions
of the Intelligent Light System.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Intelligent Light System

inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The system limits have been reached (/ page 139).
Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist available again display message will appear.
# Drive on

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Until then, operate the high beam manually.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
Plus currently unavailable The system limits have been reached (/ page 140).
See Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus available again display message will appear.
# Drive on

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.

Plus inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Until then, operate the high beam manually.

Hazard warning lamps mal- * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
functioning # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Climatee control
Climat control
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
# When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to
switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.
inoperative See Owner's # If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Man.

&
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
The stationary heater has switched itself o .
# Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a su cient charge level again.
inoperative Battery low

&
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.
# Refuel the vehicle.

inoperative Refuel vehicle

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
# Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum charge.

inoperative High-voltage
battery charging incom-
plete

&
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
# Charge the high-voltage battery.

inoperative Charge HV bat-

tery

&
* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the engine switched o .
# Start the vehicle for ten seconds.
Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
Pre-entry climate control
(via key) available again
after engine start
446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

&
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
# Charge the high-voltage battery.
When the high-voltage battery is su ciently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.
Pre-entry climate control
(via key) inoperative HV-
battery low

Hybrid
Hybr id system
system
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

u
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (/ page 387).

Towing not permitted See

Owner's Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ò
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No driving noises are being produced. The
vehicle may not be heard by other road users.
# Drive with particular care.

Acoustic presence indica- # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

tor inoperative

è
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.
# Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

Charger cable connected

Not possible to unlock * The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket.
charging cable See Own- # Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.
er's Manual
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed a er that:
# Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button attached to the
charging station or the emergency call numbers.
Vehicle not currently being * A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
charged Charging station # Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.
fault
or
# Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Charging method currently * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
unavailable Please try # Wait until the malfunction has passed.
again or change charging
method or
# Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.

Charging fault Please * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
change charging method # Wait until the malfunction has passed.
See Owner's Manual
or
# Start the charging process at a di erent charging station.

Only electric drive availa- * The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched o . The output of your vehicle is limited because you
ble Power limited are driving in electric mode.
# Refuel immediately.

If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

"Electric" drive program * The charge level of the high-voltage battery is not su cient for the Electric drive program.
currently unavailable Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 196).
Reduced drive system per- * The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction.
formance See Owner's # Drive on carefully.
Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Û
* The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of re.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if % Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. the air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
possible # Do not continue driving.

# If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.

Û
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* There is a serious malfunction if the display message and warning tone are repeated at short intervals. You must stop
Malfunction the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions because the drive system is automatically deactiva-
ted.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Switch o the vehicle and consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Û
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction Visit workshop

Without changing gear, * The drive system cannot be restarted due to a malfunction.
consult workshop If the transmission position is changed using the DIRECT SELECT lever, the drive system will be switched o in park
position j or neutral i.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.

Without starting engine * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.
again, consult workshop # Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.

d
* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Malfunction

d
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not con-
tinue driving.
Stop Switch engine off # Do not tow the vehicle, stop towing if necessary.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

d
* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temper-
atures.
The output is severely restricted.
Performance severely limi- Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The dis-
ted play message will disappear.
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

6
* Vehicles with
with petr
petrol
ol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel ller ap is opened. The pressure
reduction can take up to 15 minutes.

Please wait Depressurising

tank

6
* Vehicles with
with petr
petrol
ol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel ller ap opens.

Tank is depressurised
Ready for refuelling
452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* Vehicles with
with petr
petrol
ol engines: There is a malfunction in the fuel system.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Tank ventilation Malfunc-

tion Consult workshop

Vehicle
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d
* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.
# Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V bat-
Vehicle is operational tery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Switch off ignition before
exiting
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ï
* The ball neck will not swivel because transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
# Depress the brake pedal.

# Engage park position j.

Operation only possible in
transmission position P

ï
* The ball neck is retracting/extending.
Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivel movement using your hand, foot or other aids. During the
swivel movement, do not couple a trailer.
Trailer coupling extending… When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message will disappear.

ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
Check trailer hitch The trailer may become detached.
lock (white display message) # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.

# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 273).

# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# If the
the ball neck
neck has been retr
retract
acted:
ed: initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 273).
The ball neck will engage vertically in the locked position and then engage beneath the bumper.
# If the
the ball neck
neck has been ext
extended:
ended: initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 273).
The ball neck will engage beneath the bumper.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Head-up display currently * The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes:
unavailable See Owner's R malfunctions in the power supply
Manual
R signal interference

# Stop in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Ù
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
Steering malfunction If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
Increased physical effort # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
See Owner's Manual # Visit or consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

Ù
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signi cantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
Steering malfunction Stop If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
immediately See Owner's # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do
Manual not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active bonnet malfunction * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative a er having already been triggered.
See Owner's Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

C
* At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.

M
* The bonnet is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
# Never release the bonnet when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Close the bonnet.

N
* The boot lid is open.
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the boot lid is open when the vehicle is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch o the vehicle before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Close the boot lid.

_
* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
# Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Rear left seat backrest not

locked (Example)

¥
* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
# Top up the washer uid (/ page 366).

Top up washer fluid

Wiper malfunctioning * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.
# Restart the vehicle.

If the display message still appears:

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
To switch off the engine, * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
press the Start/Stop but- # Information about switching o the vehicle while driving (/ page 168).
ton for at least 3 seconds
or 3 times.
Cannot start engine See * The vehicle cannot be started.
Owner's Manual # Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

+
* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insu cient coolant

Top up coolant See Own- # Avoid long journeys with insu cient coolant.
er’s Manual
# Add coolant (/ page 365).
# Have the engine cooling system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÿ
* The coolant is too hot.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle.

Coolant Stop vehicle & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
Switch engine off
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situa-
tions may occur:
R You may come into contact with hot gases.
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down.
# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.

ÿ
* There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

8
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.

Reserve fuel level

!
* Vehicles with
with diesel engines: the fuel lter is dirty or the water in the fuel lter needs to be drained.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Clean the fuel filter

¸
* Vehicles with
with diesel engines: the engine air lter is dirty and must be replaced.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Replace air cleaner

Transmission
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only select Park (P) when * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle is stationary # Depress the brake pedal to stop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
Park (P) position # Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.

To shift out of P or N, * You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission posi-
depress brake and start tion.
engine # Depress the brake pedal.

# Start the vehicle.

# Change the transmission position.

Apply brake to select D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h or k.

Apply brake to select R * You have attempted to select transmission position k.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position k.

Risk of vehicle rolling * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
Driver door open and trans- The vehicle may roll away.
mission not in P
462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.
N permanently active Risk * Neutral i has been selected while the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving.
of vehicle rolling # Depress the brake pedal to stop.

# Shi the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.

# To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.

Without changing gear, * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
consult workshop # If transmission position h is selected, consult a quali ed specialist workshop and do not change the transmission
position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Reversing not poss. Con- * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k.
sult workshop # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shi s to neutral i automatically.
Stop # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Engage park position j.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Stop vehicle Leave engine * The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.
running Wait Transmission # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
cooling
# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary battery malfunc- * Vehicles with

with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
tion (white display message) # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle.
# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Auxiliary battery malfunc- * Vehicles with

with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
tion (red display message) # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Vehicles with
with automatic
automatic transmission:
transmission: until then, always select park position j before you switch o the vehicle.
# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brak
Br akes
es
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
apply:
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
Parking brake See Owner's # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 214).
Manual
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
release:
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 214).

or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 213).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunc-
tioning.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

To apply:
apply:
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 214).

To release:
release:
# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to ash:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds a er the
electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is mal-
functioning.
If the
the stat
statee of charg
chargee is too
too low:
low:
# Charge the 12 V battery.

To apply:
apply:
# Switch o the vehicle.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being
towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 214).

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:
release:
# If the conditions for automatic release are ful lled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 214).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

!
* The red ! indicator lamp is ashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been ful lled (/ page 213).
Release parking brake R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 214).
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
# Release the electric parking brake manually.

!
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o .
# Switch on the vehicle.
Turn on the ignition to
release the parking brake

J
* There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
Check brake fluid level If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake uid.

Check brake pads See * The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
Owner's Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving
Dr iving systems
systems
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ë
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not ful lled.
# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 221).

Off

é
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-

ative

é
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 223).
# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

break!
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 226).

- - - km/h
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Cruise control and Limiter * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
inoperative # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.

If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 224).

È
* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be
available again.

- - - km/h
Limiter passive * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode
(/ page 226).
Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are ful lled.
# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 230).

- - - km/h

ç
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to
passive mode (/ page 228).

suspended

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
has deactivated automatically (/ page 230).

Off
Active Distance Assist cur- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
rently unavailable See Own- The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 228).
er's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

or
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist inop- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
erative Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
# Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.

available again # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 230).

ð
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).
# Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded

Speed limit (winter tyres) * You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
XXX km/h
472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Steering Assist cur- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
rently unavailable See Own- The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 235).
er's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

# Check the tyre pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist inop- * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
erative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Active Steering Assist cur- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
rently unavailable due to # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the tra c conditions.
multiple emergency stops
# Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Beginning emergency stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 238).
# Put your hands back on the steering wheel.

You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:
R Steering
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
R Braking or accelerating
R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Ø
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 235).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the tra c conditions.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are
currently unavailable see still available.
Owner's Manual The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 235).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative See Owner's Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still
Manual available.
# Drive on.

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Traffic Sign Assist currently * Tra c Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Manual
# Drive on

Traffic Sign Assist inopera- * Tra c Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

tive # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist currently * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.

unavailable See Owner's The system limits have been reached (/ page 245).
Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
# Drive on

or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist inopera- * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Drive on

or
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist not availa- * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
ble when towing a trailer # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
See Owner's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The system limits have been reached (/ page 245).
Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
# Drive on

or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Blind Spot Assist * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
not available when towing # Press the le -hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
a trailer See Owner's Man-
ual
Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 247).
Owner's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

inoperative # Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¸
* Front and corner radar sensors (herea er "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:
R The sensors are dirty
R Heavy rain or snow

à R Extended country driving without other tra c, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-

ç ing and drive system will continue to function normally.

# Drive on

Ä
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o .
If the display message does not disappear:
temporarily unavailable # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
Sensors dirty # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 216).

# Restart the vehicle.

478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

á
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:
R Dirt on the windscreen in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera
R Heavy rain, snow or fog

à R Mist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen
during cold times of year in particular.

Ä
% This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restric-
tion is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-

Ø ing and drive system will continue to function normally.

# Drive on

Ô Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o .
If the display message does not disappear:
temporarily unavailable # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
Camera view restricted # Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 216).

# Restart the vehicle.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ä
* AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Fault Drive at max. 80 * DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be a ected.
km/h
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

É
* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
Stop vehicle Vehicle too # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
low
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning:
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h and consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions, and set a
higher vehicle level if possible.
480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 251).
Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.

¢
* The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons:
R You have selected a di erent drive program.
R You have exceeded the speed limit.
Lowering R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.

É
* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Vehicle rising

É
* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Vehicle rising Please wait

É
* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
# To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 60 km/h.

# To adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 30 km/h.
Please reduce speed
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Parking Assist and * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
PARKTRONIC inoperative Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
See Owner's Manual
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.

# If the display message still appears, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Driving
Dr iving safety
safety systems
systems
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

÷ & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o .
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.

!
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

÷ & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

÷
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

currently unavailable See

Owner's Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o .
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.

÷
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
inoperative See Owner's
Manual & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

!
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

÷
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

inoperative See Owner's # Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.
Manual
Active Brake Assist Func- * Vehicles with
with the
the Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function, Evasive Steering Assist or
tions currently limited See PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Owner's Manual Vehicles without
without the
the Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart
the vehicle.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Brake Assist Func- * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti-
tions limited See Owner's ally available:
Manual R Active Brake Assist with cross-tra c function
R Evasive Steering Assist
R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS

Vehicles without
without the
the Driving
Driving Assistance
Assistance Pack
Packag
age:
e: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially availa-
ble.
# Drive on

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emergency
emergency call system
system
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

G
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction-
ing.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Inoperative
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Device detected at diagnos- * The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted.
tics connection See Own- At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
er's Manual
# Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 35).

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Battery
Battery
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The vehicle is o and the charge level is too low.
# Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.

12 V battery See Owner's To charge the 12 V battery:

Manual # Leave the vehicle running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

# Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id: charge the 12 V battery while stationary, or drive an extended distance.
* If the message appears while the vehicle is switched on, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The 12 V battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

See Owner's Manual # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

#
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Stop vehicle See Owner's # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Manual # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The 12 V battery charge level is too low.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Leave the engine running.

Stop vehicle Leave engine # If the display message disappears: drive on.
running
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Û
* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.
Comfort functions may be restricted.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
48 V battery See Owner's
Manual

Ý
* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a
suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.
The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. A er a few minutes, the Motor can be
Please wait 48 V battery started again display message will be shown on the instrument display.
charging # Start the vehicle.

# Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery a er disconnecting the charger from
the vehicle.

If the Motor can be started again display message does not appear a er a few minutes:
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Try to start the vehicle.
# If the vehicle does not start, consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
Cannot start engine See * The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.
Owner's Manual # Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.

# Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with su cient charge output to the jump-start connection
point of the 12 V battery (/ page 385).
The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Motor can be started again * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.
# Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre press. monitor cur- * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are
rently unavailable being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been recti ed.
# Drive on.

Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
ative
490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Tyre press. monitor inoper- * The wheels tted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
ative No wheel sensors # Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

h
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the a ected
tyre.
# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Wheel sensor(s) missing

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signi cantly.
The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds.

Check tyre(s) & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 396) and the tyres.

h
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the di erence in tyre pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

Rectify tyre pressure # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 399).

h
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tyre
Warning tyre defect R The tyres can overheat and be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Do not drive with a at tyre.
492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible
speed with a at MOExtended tyre.
# Observe the notes on at tyres.

Notes in the event of a at tyre (/ page 376).

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Check the tyres.

Tyre(s) overheated * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Reduce speed * At least one tyre is overheating. The a ected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493

Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree loss war
warning
ning system
system
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre pressure Check tyres * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a signi cant loss of pressure.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 396) and the tyres.
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 399).
Check tyre pressures then * The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
restart Run Flat Indicator # When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 399).

Run Flat Indicator inopera- * The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
tive # Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Exhaustt gas
Exhaus gas a ertr
er treatment
eatment
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ø
* The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range.
# Top up AdBlue® immediately (/ page 194).

Refill AdBlue See Owner’s

Manual

Ø
* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance a er the remaining distance displayed has been covered.
# Top up AdBlue® immediately (/ page 194).

Top up AdBlue Emergency

op. in XXX miles See Own-
er's Manual

Ø
* The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed.
A er the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.
# Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 194).
XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emer.
op.: max. XXX km/h Start
not poss. in XXX km
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ø
* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.
# Add at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 194).

# Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.

XX,X l Top up AdBlue
# Start the vehicle.
Switch on ignition, wait 60
sec. or eng. start not poss.

¯
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system fault See

Owner's Manual

¯
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been
covered.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
AdBlue system fault Emer-
gency op. in XXX miles See
Owner's Manual
496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¯
* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. A er the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be
possible to start the vehicle.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
AdBlue system fault Emer.
op.: max. XXX km/h Start
not poss. in XXX km

¯
* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system fault Engine

start not possible
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497

Engine oil
Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil
Check eng. oil lev. when # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.
next refuelling
# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling.
Top up the engine oil (/ page 364).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 423).

5
* Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Add 1 litre engine oil when * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil
next refuelling # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.
# When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 364).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 423).
498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5
* Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too high.

Engine oil level Reduce oil * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
level # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

5
* Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too low.

Engine oil level Stop vehi- * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient engine oil
cle Switch engine off # Avoid long journeys with insu cient engine oil.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 364).
# Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 423).
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499

Displayy messages
Displa messages Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5
* Display message only for certain engines:
The oil pressure is too low.

Engine oil pressure Stop * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insu cient oil pressure
Switch off engine # Avoid driving with insu cient oil pressure.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Switch o the vehicle.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

5
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

Engine oil level cannot be

measured

War
arning
ning and indicator
indicator lamps
lamps ing lamps may brie y light up or ash. This behav-
iour is non-critical. These indicator and warning
Over
Overvie
view
w of indicator
indicator and war
warning
ning lamps
lamps lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up
Some systems will perform a self-test when the or ash a er the vehicle has been started or dur-
vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn- ing a journey.
500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Instr
Ins trument
ument display ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 505) å ESP® OFF (/ page 511)
; Engine diagnostics (/ page 505) h Tyre pressure monitoring system
% Vehicles with
with a diesel engine: preglow (/ page 514)
# Electrical fault (/ page 505) T Standing lights (/ page 134)
8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap loca- L Low beam (/ page 134)
tion indicator (/ page 505) K High beam (/ page 136)
! Electric parking brake (red) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 136)
(/ page 508) R Rear fog light (/ page 134)
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 508)
Depending on the display setting, the positions of J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 508)
the indicator lamps on the instrument display may
di er from the example shown. J Brakes (red) (/ page 508)
L Distance warning (/ page 510)
Indicator
Indicator and war
warning
ning lamps:
lamps:
6 Restraint system (/ page 501) Ó Active Brake Assist (/ page 510)
ü Seat belt (/ page 501) ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 510)
_ Reduced power (/ page 502) ä AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 510)
Ú System error (/ page 502) ä DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL
(/ page 510)
# Electrical fault (/ page 502)
! ABS (/ page 511)
ï Trailer hitch (/ page 503)
÷ ESP® (/ page 511)
Ù Power steering (/ page 503)
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501

Occupant safety
safety
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 44).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Restraint system warning
lamp Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybr
hybrid:
id:
& DAN
ANGER
GER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may su er an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# A er an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.

# Drive on carefully.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop immediately.
502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü
* The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48).

Seat belt warning lamp There are objects on the front passenger seat.
ashes # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

ü
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.
In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.
The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 48).
lights up
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Hybrid
Hybr id system
system
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_
* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

Reduced warning lamp

power
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ú
*The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ.
There is a malfunction in the drive system.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

System error warning lamp

#
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault with the electrics.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

Electrical fault warning lamp

Vehicle
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
Power steering warning
lamp (red) If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

ï
* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational or is swivelling.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
Trailer tow hitch warning
lamp The trailer may become detached.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.

# Note the messages on the instrument display.

If the trailer hitch is swivelling:

# Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505

Engine
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÿ
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
Coolant warning lamp (red) R The coolant level is too low
R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R The radiator fan is faulty
R The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situa-
tions may occur:
R You may come into contact with hot gases.
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the tra c conditions and switch o the vehicle. Do not continue driving.
506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

If the
the coolant tem
temper
peratur
aturee display
display is at the
the lower
lower end of the
the tem
temper
peratur
aturee scale:
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

If the
the coolant tem
temper
peratur
aturee display
display is at the
the upper end of the
the tem
temper
peratur
aturee scale:
# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
# Check the coolant level (/ page 365).

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.

ÿ
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
Coolant warning lamp (yel- R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty
low)
R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest quali ed specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;
* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
Engine diagnosis warning # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a quali ed specialist workshop.
lamp Vehicles with
with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.
# Start the engine three to four times a er refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not
be checked.

#
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

Electrical fault warning lamp

8
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.

Fuel reserve warning lamp

lights up
508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brak
Br akes
es
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp P
Possible
ossible causes/consequences
causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit.
The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

Electric parking brake indi-

cator lamp (red)

!
The electric parking brake
(yellow) indicator lamp

J
* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
Brake system warning lamp If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
(yellow) # Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
# If the instrument display shows a display message, observe it.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

J
* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
Possible causes:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be a ected.
Brake system warning lamp R There is insu cient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
(red)
# Note the messages on the instrument display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level

If the brake uid level is too low, the braking e ect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and tra c conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake uid.

510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving
Dr iving systems
systems
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

L
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Warning lamp for distance # Be prepared to brake immediately.
warning function # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 238).

Ó
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

Active Brake Assist warning

lamp

ê
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.
This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated.
Active Brake Assist warning # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 238).
lamp
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ä
* The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.
The yellow DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.
A fault has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL.
Suspension warning lamp A fault has occurred in the DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.
(yellow) # Note the messages on the instrument display.

Driving
Dr iving safety
safety systems
systems
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.
ABS warning lamp Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the instrument display.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched o .
512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive on carefully.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

÷
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion.
One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 219).
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

ESP® warning lamp ashes

÷
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
ESP® warning lamp lights up # Note the messages on the instrument display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o .
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

å
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
ESP® OFF warning lamp
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Drive on carefully.

# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a quali ed specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 219).

514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitor
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and
then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
Tyre pressure monitoring & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
system warning lamp ashes
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insu cient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a quali ed specialist workshop.

h
* The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insu cient tyre pressure
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights R The tyres can burst.
up R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515

War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator
or lamp Possible causes/consequences
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the tra c conditions.
# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
516 Index

1, 2, 3 ... ABS (Anti-lock

(Anti-lock Braking
Braking System)
System).................... 218 Activ
ctivee Distance
Distance Assist
Assist DISTR
DISTRONIC ONIC
Acceler
cceleration
ation Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 238
4MATIC
4MA TIC Calling up a speed................................. 230
Function................................................ 190 see Kickdown
Function................................................ 228
12 V battery
battery Accident and Breakdo
Breakdown wn Management
Management Increasing/decreasing speed................. 230
see On-board electrical system battery (12 V) Mercedes me connect........................... 343 Maximum design speed.......................... 183
12 V socket Acous
coustic
tic locking
locking vererii cation signal Route-based speed adaptation............... 233
see Socket (12 V) Activating/deactivating............................ 79 Selecting............................................... 230
Acous
coustic
tic presence
presence indicator
indicator (sound gener- gener- Storing a speed...................................... 230
48 V on-board
on-board electrical
electrical system
system
ator)
ator) Switching o /deactivating..................... 230
Operating safety...................................... 25
Notes..................................................... 164 Switching on/activating......................... 230
230 V socket System limitations.................................. 228
see Socket (230 V) Acous
coustic
tic Vehicle
Vehicle Indication
Sound generator.................................... 164 Activ
ctivee Emergency
Emergency Stop
Stop Assist......................
Assist 238
360° Camera
Activ
ctivee Blind Spot
Spot Assist Activ
ctivee headlamps
headlamps......................................... 137
Care...................................................... 370
Function................................................ 256 Brake application................................... 246 Activ
ctivee Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
Selecting a view..................................... 259 Function................................................ 245 Activating/deactivating.......................... 250
Switching automatic operation on/o System limitations.................................. 245 Activating/deactivating the warning....... 250
(reversing camera)................................. 260 Trailer operation..................................... 246 Function................................................ 247
Activ
ctivee bonnet
bonnet (pedestr
(pedestrian ian protection)
protection) Setting the sensitivity............................. 250
A Operation.............................................. 360 System limits......................................... 247
Trailer operation..................................... 247
A/C function Activ
ctivee Brak
Brakee Assist
Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 151 Function/notes...................................... 238 Activ
ctivee Par
Parking
king Assist
Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- Setting................................................... 242 Automatic braking function.................... 268
media system)....................................... 152 Exiting a parking space.......................... 267
 Index 517

Function................................................ 264 Adap

daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist
Assist Plus A er
er-sales
-sales ser
service
vice
Manoeuvring brake function................... 269 Function................................................ 140 see ASSYST PLUS
Parking.................................................. 266 Switching on/o .................................... 141 AIR BODY
BODY CONTR
CONTROL OL
Pausing.................................................. 268 AdBlue® Setting................................................... 251
System limitations.................................. 264 Additives................................................ 422 Suspension............................................ 250
Activ
ctivee Service
Ser vice Syst
System
em PLUS
PLUS Capacity................................................ 422 Air conditioning menu
see ASSYST PLUS Notes..................................................... 194 Calling up.............................................. 151
Activ
ctivee Speed Limit Assist Purity..................................................... 422
Air distr
distribution
ibution
Display................................................... 233 Topping up............................................. 194
Setting................................................... 150
Function................................................ 233 Additional door lock.......................................
lock 81 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 152
Activ
ctivee Steer
Steering
ing Assist Additiv
dditives
es Air freshener
freshener system
system
Activating/deactivating.......................... 237 AdBlue®................................................. 422 see Fragrance system
Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 238 Engine oil............................................... 423
Function................................................ 235 Air inlet
Fuel....................................................... 419 see Air-water duct
System limits......................................... 235
Additiv
dditives (AdBlue®)
es (AdBlue Air pressure
pressure
Activ
ctivee Tr
Traa c Jam Assist see AdBlue®
Activating/deactivating.......................... 235 see Tyre pressure
Function................................................ 235 Additiv
dditives
es (engine oil) Air suspension
see Additives see AIR BODY CONTROL
Adap
daptiv
tivee brak
brakee lights....................................
lights 223
Additiv
dditives
es (fuel) Air vents
vents
Adap
daptiv
tivee cruise
cruise control
control see Fuel
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adjusting (front)..................................... 162
ADS PLUS
PLUS damping
damping system
system Adjusting (rear)...................................... 163
Adap
daptiv
tivee Highbeam Assist see AIR BODY CONTROL Glove box............................................... 163
Activating/deactivating.......................... 140
Function................................................ 139
518 Index

Air vents
vents All-wheel drive
drive Apple CarPlay®
see Air vents see 4MATIC see Smartphone integration
Air-conditioning
Air-conditioning system
system Ambient lighting Assistance
Assist ance systems
systems
see Climate control Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 143 see Driving safety system
Air-r
Air-recir
ecirculation
culation mode..................................
mode 153 Android
Andr oid Auto
Auto ASSYSTT PLUS
ASSYS PLUS
Air-w
Air-watater
er duct see Smartphone integration Battery disconnection periods................ 360
Keeping free.......................................... 367 Animals Displaying the service due date.............. 359
Pets in the vehicle.................................... 77 Function/notes...................................... 359
Airbag
Regular maintenance work..................... 359
Activation................................................ 44 Anti-lockk braking
Anti-loc braking system
system
Special service requirements................. 359
Automatic co-driver airbag shuto ............ 53 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Front airbag (driver, front passenger)........ 50 ATA
ATA (anti-t
(anti-the
he alaralarmm system)
system)
Anti-skid chains
chains
Installation locations................................ 50 Deactivating the alarm........................... 100
see Snow chains
Knee airbag............................................. 50 Function................................................ 100
Overview.................................................. 50 Anti-the
Anti-t he prot
protection
ection Interior protection function..................... 101
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 54 Additional door lock................................. 81 Priming/deactivating interior protec-
Protection................................................ 51 Immobiliser.............................................. 99 tion........................................................ 102
Reduced protection.................................. 52 Anti-the
Anti-t he prot
protection
ection Priming/deactivating tow-away pro-
Side airbag.............................................. 50 see ATA (anti-the alarm system) tection................................................... 101
Window airbag......................................... 50 Anticipator
Anticipat oryy occupant protection
protection Tow-away protection function................. 100
Air ow see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting................................................... 150 pant protection) Function................................................ 223
see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Setting................................................... 224
Alarm
Alar m system
system
occupant protection plus) System limitations.................................. 223
see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
 Index 519

Att
ttention
ention assistant
assistant DYNAMIC SELECT switch....................... 183 Batteryy (high-volt
Batter (high-voltag agee on-board
on-board electrical
electrical
see ATTENTION ASSIST Engaging drive position.......................... 188 system)
syst em)
Aut
uthor
horised
ised work
workshop
shop Engaging reverse gear............................ 187 see High-voltage battery
see Quali ed specialist workshop Kickdown............................................... 189 Batter
Batt eryy (key)
(key)
Manual gear changing............................ 188 Replacing................................................. 80
Aut
utomatic
omatic co-driv
co-driver er airbag shutshutoo Selecting park position........................... 187
Function of co-driver airbag shuto .......... 53 Steering wheel gearshi paddles............ 188 Batter
Batt eryy (vehicle)
(vehicle)
Aut
utomatic
omatic distance
distance control
control Transmission position display................. 186 Charging (Remote Online)...................... 169
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Transmission positions........................... 186 Notes..................................................... 381
Notes (starting assistance and charg-
Aut
utomatic
omatic driving
driving lights................................
lights 135 Axle load ing)........................................................ 383
Aut
utomatic
omatic engine startstart Permissible............................................ 415
Trailer operation..................................... 432 Batter
Batt eryy operation
operation......................................... 164
see ECO start/stop function
Belt
Aut
utomatic
omatic engine stop stop see Seat belt
B
see ECO start/stop function
Bad weat
weather
her light.........................................
light 138 Bicycle
Bicy cle rack
rack
Aut
utomatic
omatic front
front passenger
passenger airbag shut shutoo Load capacity........................................ 431
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 54 Ball neck
Extending/retracting.............................. 273 Trailer operation..................................... 278
Aut
utomatic
omatic mirror
mirror folding
folding function Blind Spot
Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 149 Extending/retracting (MBUX multime-
dia system)............................................ 275 Activating/deactivating.......................... 247
Aut
utomatic
omatic seat adjustment
adjustment Function................................................ 245
Setting................................................... 110 BAS (Brak
(Brakee Assist
Assist System)
System)........................... 218
System limitations.................................. 245
Aut
utomatic
omatic transmission
transmission Battery
Batt ery
Remote control (stationary heater)......... 161 Blower
Blow er
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 186 see Climate control
Drive program display............................ 184 Battery
Batt ery
Drive programs...................................... 183 see High-voltage battery
520 Index

BlueTEC BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 218 C

see AdBlue® Driving tips............................................ 172
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- Calls
Bonnet Mercedes me......................................... 338
Function (active bonnet)......................... 360 tion)....................................................... 221
Opening/closing.................................... 360 HOLD function....................................... 221 Camera
Limited braking e ect (salt-treated Information............................................ 216
Boott box
Boo roads).................................................... 172
see EASY-PACK boot box Camera
New/replaced brake linings/brake see 360° Camera
Boott lid
Boo discs...................................................... 170 see Dashcam
Closing.................................................... 87 Running-in notes.................................... 170 see Reversing camera
HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 89 Brak
Br akes
es
Locking separately................................... 91 Car key
see Recuperation see Key
Opening................................................... 86
Braking
Br aking assistance
assistance Car wash
wash
Brak
Br akee Assist
Assist System
System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
see BAS (Brake Assist System) see Care
Breakdo
Br eakdownwn Car wash
wash (care)
(care)............................................ 367
Brak
Br akee uid Overview of the help functions................. 18
Notes..................................................... 425 Car-t
Car-to-X
o-X-Communication
-Communication
Tow-starting........................................... 392
Brak
Br akee for
force
ce dis
distrtribution
ibution Displaying hazard warnings.................... 332
Towing away.......................................... 388
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- Transporting the vehicle......................... 390 Care
tion)....................................................... 221 Wheel change........................................ 405 360° camera......................................... 370
Brak
Br akes
es Air-water duct........................................ 367
Breakdo
Br eakdownwn
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 218 Automatic car wash............................... 367
see Flat tyre
Active Brake Assist................................. 238 Carpet................................................... 372
Buttons
Butt ons Decorative foil........................................ 369
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 223 Steering wheel....................................... 283 Display................................................... 372
 Index 521

EASY-PACK boot box.............................. 372 Charging

Charging Chassis
Exterior lighting...................................... 370 Charge level display............................... 208 Damping characteristics......................... 250
Head-up display..................................... 372 Charging cable control panel.................. 201 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 250
High-pressure cleaner............................ 368 Ending the charging process (alternat- Chassis level
level (AIR BODY
BODY CONTRCONTROL) OL)
Paint...................................................... 368 ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 207 Setting................................................... 251
Plastic trim............................................ 372 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 202
Real wood/trim elements...................... 372 Notes - charging station (mode 3).......... 199 Child safety
safety lock
Reversing camera.................................. 370 Notes - mains socket (Mode 2)............... 198 Rear door................................................. 75
Roof lining............................................. 372 Notes - wallbox (mode 3)........................ 199 Rear side windows................................... 77
Seat belt................................................ 372 Notes on charging the high-voltage Child seat
Seat cover............................................. 372 battery................................................... 196 Approval categories................................. 63
Sensors................................................. 370 Notes on wireless charging.................... 130 Attaching (notes)...................................... 62
Steering wheel....................................... 372 On-board electrical system battery Basic instructions.................................... 58
Tailpipes................................................ 370 (12 V).................................................... 385 Front passenger seat (notes).................... 73
Trailer hitch............................................ 370 Setting the maximum possible charg- Front passenger seat (without auto-
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage ing current (mains socket)...................... 200 matic airbag shuto )................................ 73
battery................................................... 370 Starting the charging process................. 204 ISOFIX/i-Size ( tting)............................... 66
Washing by hand.................................... 368 Stowing the charging cable.................... 196 Notes on risks and dangers...................... 59
Wheels/rims.......................................... 370 USB port................................................ 130 Recommendations for child restraint
Windows................................................ 370 Vehicle socket........................................ 202 systems................................................... 61
Wiper blades.......................................... 370 Charging
Char ging cable Seats suitable for belt-secured child
Carpe
Car pett (Care)
(Care)............................................... 372 Control panel......................................... 201 restraint systems..................................... 70
Stowing................................................. 196 Seats suitable for i‑Size child restraint
Changing gears
gears systems................................................... 66
Manually................................................ 188 Charging
Char ging the
the high-volt
high-voltag agee battery
battery Seats suitable for ISOFIX child
Changing hub caps.......................................
caps 405 Starting the charging process................. 204 restraint systems..................................... 65
522 Index

Securing on the co-driver seat.................. 74 Air-recirculation mode............................ 153 Stationary heater/ventilation................. 158
Securing on the rear seat......................... 71 Automatic control.................................. 152 Switching the rear window heater
Top Tether................................................ 69 Calling up the air conditioning menu....... 151 on/o ................................................... 150
Children
Childr en Climate style function............................ 152 THERMATIC control panel...................... 150
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 59 Demisting the windscreen...................... 150 THERMOTRONIC control panel............... 150
Basic instructions.................................... 58 Demisting windows................................ 153 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience
Front air vents........................................ 162 opening).................................................. 93
Chock Glove box air vent.................................. 163
Storage location..................................... 404 Climatee sty
Climat style
le
Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 157 Function................................................ 152
Chock Information on the windscreen heater.... 155 Setting................................................... 152
see Chock Inserting/removing the acon (fra-
grance system)...................................... 154 Co-driv
Co-dr iver
er airbag shut
shutoo
City lighting..................................................
lighting 138 see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto
Ionisation............................................... 153
Cleaning Cockpit
Coc kpit
Note...................................................... 150
see Care Overview.............................................. 6, 10
Pre-entry climate control at departure
Climatee control
Climat control time....................................................... 156 Co ee cup symbol
Activating/deactivating.......................... 151 Pre-entry climate control using the key... 155 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating the A/C func- Rear air vents......................................... 163
tion (control panel)................................. 151 Collision detection
detection (parked
(parked vehicle)
vehicle)
Residual heat......................................... 153
Activating/deactivating the A/C func- Setting................................................... 214
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 151
tion (MBUX multimedia system).............. 152 Setting the air distribution...................... 150 Combination switch.....................................
switch 136
Activating/deactivating the synchro- Setting the air ow.................................. 150 Component-speci
Com ponent-speci c inf infor
ormation
mation................... 414
nisation function (control panel)............. 152 Setting the climate style......................... 152
Activating/deactivating the synchro- Comput
Com puter
er
Setting the fragrance system.................. 153 see On-board computer
nisation function (MBUX multimedia Setting the vehicle interior tempera-
system).................................................. 153 ture....................................................... 150 Convenience
Conv enience closing......................................
closing 93
 Index 523

Convenience opening.....................................
Convenience opening 93 Storing a speed...................................... 226 Speci c absorption rate........................... 28
Coolant (engine) System limitations.................................. 224 TIREFIT kit................................................ 35
Level check............................................ 365 Wireless vehicle components................... 28
Notes..................................................... 425 D Decorativ
Decor ativee foil
foil (cleaning instr
instructions)
uctions)........... 369
Cooling Dashcam DeNOx
DeN Ox agent
agent
see Climate control Notes..................................................... 333 see AdBlue®
Selecting a USB device.......................... 334
Copyr
Cop yright
ight....................................................... 42 Starting/stopping a video recording....... 334 Destination
Des tination entry
Corner
Cor nering
ing light.............................................
light 137 Entering a POI or address....................... 329
Dataa acquisition
Dat acquisition
Cross
Cr oss tr
traa c (w
(war
arning)
ning) Vehicle..................................................... 39 Detecting
Detecting inattentiv
inattentiveness
eness
see Manoeuvring assistance see ATTENTION ASSIST
Dataa protection
Dat protection rights
rights
Cross
Cr oss Tr
Traa c Alert
Alert........................................ 269 Data storage............................................ 42 Diagnostics
Diagnos tics connection..................................
connection 35
Crosswind
Cr osswind Assist Dataa stor
Dat storage
age Diesel
Function/notes...................................... 220 Data protection rights.............................. 42 Low outside temperatures...................... 420
Electronic control units............................ 39 Notes..................................................... 420
Cruise
Cr uise control
control
Activating............................................... 226 Online services........................................ 41 Digital
Digit al Owner's Manual............................
Manual 20, 21
Buttons.................................................. 226 Vehicle..................................................... 39 Digital
Digit al TV
Calling up a speed................................. 226 Deactivating
Deactiv ating the
the alarm
alarm (ATA)
(ATA)......................... 100 see TV
Deactivating........................................... 226 Dealership
Dealer ship Dinghyy towing
Dingh towing
Function................................................ 224 see Quali ed specialist workshop see Tow-bar system
Maximum design speed.......................... 183
Requirements:....................................... 226 Declaration
Declar ation of confor
conformitymity DIRECT SELECT lever lever
Selecting............................................... 226 Electromagnetic compatibility.................. 28 Engageing reverse gear.......................... 187
Setting a speed...................................... 226 Jack......................................................... 34 Engaging drive position.......................... 188
Engaging neutral.................................... 187
524 Index

Engaging park position automatically...... 187 ò Acoustic presence indicator Û Battery overheated Stop, every-
Function................................................ 186 inoperative............................................. 447 body out! Outdoors if possible................ 449
Selecting park position........................... 187
: Active Light System inoperative..... 441 Á Change key batteries.................... 438
Displayy (care)
Displa (care)............................................... 372
¯ AdBlue system fault Emer. op.: è Charger cable connected.............. 447
Displayy (MBUX multimedia system)
Displa system)
Home screen......................................... 313 max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in J Check brake uid level.................. 467
Operating.............................................. 314 XXX km.................................................. 496 5 Check eng. oil lev. when next
Displayy (on-board
Displa (on-board comput
computer) er) ¯ AdBlue system fault Emergency refuelling............................................... 497
Displays on the instrument display......... 286 op. in XXX miles See Owner's Manual.... 495 ï Check trailer hitch lock (white
Displayy in the
Displa the windscreen
windscreen ¯ AdBlue system fault Engine display message).................................... 453
see Head-up display
start not possible................................... 496 h Check tyre(s)................................ 490
Displayy message
Displa ¯ AdBlue system fault See Own- ! Clean the fuel lter....................... 460
Calling up (on-board computer).............. 433
Notes..................................................... 433 er's Manual............................................ 495 ÿ Coolant Stop vehicle Switch
Displayy messages
Displa messages 5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next engine o .............................................. 459
ç - - - km/h..................................... 470 refuelling............................................... 497 ! currently unavailable See Own-
È - - - km/h..................................... 469 é ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative..... 468 er's Manual............................................ 481
h - - - km/h..................................... 469 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a ÷ currently unavailable See Own-
# 12 V battery See Owner's Man- break!.................................................... 468 er's Manual............................................ 482
ual......................................................... 486 : Automatic driving lights inoper- 5 Engine oil level cannot be meas-
Û 48 V battery See Owner's Man- ative...................................................... 441 ured....................................................... 499
ual......................................................... 488 5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level..... 498
 Index 525

5 Engine oil level Stop vehicle Á Key not detected (red display ! Parking brake See Owner's
Switch engine o ................................... 498 message)............................................... 439 Manual.................................................. 464
5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch Á Key not detected (white display d Performance severely limited........ 451
o engine.............................................. 499 message)............................................... 439 É Please reduce speed..................... 480
ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h......... 479 : Le dipped beam (example).......... 440 Ý Please wait 48 V battery charg-
6 Front le malfunction Consult 6 Le windowbag malfunction ing......................................................... 488
workshop (example)............................... 435 Consult workshop (example).................. 436 6 Please wait Depressurising tank.... 451
& inoperative Battery low................. 444 ¢ Lowering....................................... 480 & Pre-entry climate control (via
& inoperative Charge HV battery...... 445 : Malfunction See Owner's Man- key) available again a er engine start..... 445
& inoperative High-voltage battery ual......................................................... 440 & Pre-entry climate control (via
charging incomplete............................... 445 Û Malfunction Visit workshop........... 450 key) inoperative HV-battery low.............. 446
& inoperative Refuel vehicle.............. 444 d Malfunction.................................. 450 _ Rear le seat backrest not
& inoperative See Owner's Man........ 444 Û Malfunction.................................. 449 locked (Example).................................... 457
! inoperative See Owner's Manual... 482 ð Maximum speed exceeded............ 471 h Rectify tyre pressure..................... 491
÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual... 483 Ø .................................................... 494 Ø Re ll AdBlue See Owner’s Man-
T inoperative See Owner's Manual... 484 ç O ................................................ 470 ual......................................................... 494
G Inoperative................................... 485 ë O ................................................ 468 ! Release parking brake................... 466
: Intelligent Light System inopera- ï Operation only possible in ¸ Replace air cleaner....................... 460
tive........................................................ 442 transmission position P.......................... 453 Á Replace key.................................. 438
Á Key being initialised Please wait.... 439 8 Reserve fuel level.......................... 460
526 Index

6 Restraint sys. malfunction Con- á temporarily unavailable Camera Ø XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on
sult workshop........................................ 434 view restricted....................................... 478 ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not
# See Owner's Manual..................... 487 ¸ temporarily unavailable Sensors poss...................................................... 495
Ù Steering malfunction Increased dirty....................................................... 477 "Electric" drive program currently
physical e ort See Owner's Manual....... 455 Ø Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in unavailable............................................. 448
Ù Steering malfunction Stop XXX miles See Owner's Manual.............. 494 Active Blind Spot Assist currently
immediately See Owner's Manual........... 455 + Top up coolant See Owner’s unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 475
d Stop Switch engine o .................. 450 Manual.................................................. 458 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative........ 475
# Stop vehicle Leave engine run- ¥ Top up washer uid....................... 457 Active Blind Spot Assist not available
ning....................................................... 488 u Towing not permitted See Own- when towing a trailer See Owner's
# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man- er's Manual............................................ 446 Manual.................................................. 476
ual......................................................... 487 ï Trailer coupling extending…........... 453 Active bonnet malfunction See Own-
É Stop vehicle Vehicle too low.......... 479 ! Turn on the ignition to release er's Manual............................................ 455
ç suspended.................................... 470 the parking brake................................... 467 Active Brake Assist Functions cur-
: Switch o lights............................ 441 d Vehicle is operational Switch o rently limited See Owner's Manual......... 484
: Switch on headlamps.................... 441 ignition before exiting............................. 452 Active Brake Assist Functions limited
6 Tank is depressurised Ready for É Vehicle rising Please wait.............. 480 See Owner's Manual.............................. 485
refuelling............................................... 451 É Vehicle rising................................ 480 Active Distance Assist available again..... 471
6 Tank ventilation Malfunction h Warning tyre defect....................... 491 Active Distance Assist currently
Consult workshop.................................. 452 h Wheel sensor(s) missing................ 490 unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 470
 Index 527

Active Distance Assist inoperative.......... 471 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop- Charging method currently unavaila-
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently erative................................................... 443 ble Please try again or change charg-
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 476 Apply brake to deselect Park (P) posi- ing method............................................ 448
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 476 tion........................................................ 461 Check brake pads See Owner's Man-
Active Steering Assist currently Apply brake to select D or R................... 461 ual......................................................... 467
unavailable due to multiple emer- Apply brake to select R.......................... 461 Check tyre pressures then restart Run
gency stops........................................... 472 Auxiliary battery malfunction (red dis- Flat Indicator......................................... 493
Active Steering Assist currently play message)........................................ 463 Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 469
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 472 Auxiliary battery malfunction (white Cruise control inoperative...................... 469
Active Steering Assist inoperative........... 472 display message).................................... 463 Cruise control o ................................... 469
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently Beginning emergency stop..................... 472 Device detected at diagnostics con-
unavailable see Owner's Manual............. 473 Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable nection See Owner's Manual.................. 486
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual.............................. 474 Front-passenger airbag disabled See
See Owner's Manual.............................. 473 Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 474 Owner's Manual..................................... 436
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently Blind Spot Assist not available when Front-passenger airbag enabled See
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 442 towing a trailer See Owner's Manual...... 475 Owner's Manual..................................... 437
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... 442 Cannot start engine See Owner's Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning.... 443
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur- Manual.......................................... 458, 489 Head-up display currently unavailable
rently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 443 Charging fault Please change charging See Owner's Manual.............................. 454
method See Owner's Manual................. 448 Head-up display inoperative................... 455
528 Index

Limiter inoperative................................. 469 Reduced drive system performance Tyre press. monitor inoperative.............. 489
Limiter passive....................................... 469 See Owner's Manual.............................. 448 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No
Motor can be started again.................... 489 Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 462 wheel sensors........................................ 490
N permanently active Risk of vehicle Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door Tyre pressure Check tyres...................... 493
rolling.................................................... 462 open and transmission not in P.............. 461 Tyre(s) overheated.................................. 492
Not possible to unlock charging cable Run Flat Indicator inoperative................. 493 Vehicle not currently being charged
See Owner's Manual.............................. 447 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h....... 471 Charging station fault............................. 447
Only electric drive available Power Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wiper malfunctioning............................. 457
limited................................................... 448 Wait Transmission cooling...................... 463 Without changing gear, consult work-
Only select Park (P) when vehicle is To shi out of P or N, depress brake shop.............................................. 450, 462
stationary.............................................. 460 and start engine..................................... 461 Without starting engine again, consult
Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inop- To switch o the engine, press the workshop............................................... 450
erative See Owner's Manual................... 481 Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec- Distance
Dist ance control
control
Place the key in the marked space onds or 3 times...................................... 458 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
See Owner's Manual.............................. 440 Tra c Sign Assist currently unavaila- DISTR
DISTRONIC
ONIC
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative ble See Owner's Manual........................ 474 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
See Owner's Manual.............................. 438 Tra c Sign Assist inoperative................. 474 Door
Additional door lock................................. 81
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 462 Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 75
Manual.................................................. 438 Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila- Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 85
Reduce speed........................................ 492 ble......................................................... 489 Opening (from inside)............................... 82
Power closing function............................. 85
 Index 529

Unlocking (from inside)............................ 82 ESP® trailer stabilisation........................ 220 see Tra c Sign Assist
Door control
control panel.........................................
panel 16 Overview................................................ 217 Driving
Dr iving tips
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 216 Driving abroad (low beam light adjust-
Drawbar
Dra wbar
Responsibility......................................... 216 ment)..................................................... 134
see Tow-bar system
STEER CONTROL................................... 221 General driving tips................................ 172
Driv
Dr ivee Away
Away Assist.........................................
Assist 268 optimised acceleration........................... 171
Driving
Dr iving system
system
Driv
Dr ivee position DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 250 Running-in notes.................................... 170
Engaging................................................ 188 Driving
Dr iving tips
Driving
Dr iving system
system
Driv
Dr ivee progr
programam display..................................
display 184 see 360° Camera see Recuperation
Driv
Dr ivee progr
programs
ams see Active Blind Spot Assist Drowsiness
Drow siness detection
detection
see DYNAMIC SELECT see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see ATTENTION ASSIST
Driv
Dr iver's
er's seat see Active Emergency Stop Assist
DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC BODY
BODY CONTRCONTROL OL
see Seat see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Chassis.................................................. 250
see Active Parking Assist
Driving
Dr iving abroad
abroad see Active Speed Limit Assist Dynamic handling controlcontrol system
system
Light adjustment (low beam).................. 134 see Active Steering Assist see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Driving
Dr iving safety
safety system
system see AIR BODY CONTROL DYN
YNAMIC
AMIC SELECT
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 218 see ATTENTION ASSIST Calling up the fuel consumption indi-
Active Brake Assist................................. 238 see Blind Spot Assist cator...................................................... 186
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 223 see Cruise control Con guring drive program I.................... 185
BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 218 see Driving safety system Displaying engine data........................... 185
Cameras................................................ 216 see HOLD function Displaying vehicle data........................... 185
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu- see Limiter Drive program display............................ 184
tion)....................................................... 221 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Drive programs...................................... 183
ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... 220 see Reversing camera Function................................................ 183
530 Index

Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)..... 184 Electric drive

Electric drive................................................ 164 Emergency call
Emergency
Selecting the drive program................... 184 Electric
Electr ic parking
parking brake
brake see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Applying automatically........................... 213 Emergency
Emerg ency key
E Applying/releasing manually.................. 214 Inserting/removing.................................. 80
E10
E10.............................................................. 418 Emergency braking................................ 214 Locking/unlocking the doors................... 85
Easy entry
entr y feature
feature Releasing automatically.......................... 213 Emergency
Emerg ency operation
operation mode
Function/notes...................................... 115 Electrical
Electr ical fuses Starting the vehicle................................ 168
Setting................................................... 116 see Fuses Emergency
Emerg ency shut
shutoo
Easy exit
exit feature
feature Electromagne
Electr omagnetictic compatibility
compatibility see Hybrid system
Function/notes...................................... 115 Declaration of conformity......................... 28 Emergency
Emerg ency spare
spare wheel
Setting................................................... 116 Electronic
Electr onic Stability
Stability Progr
Program am Notes..................................................... 410
EASY-PAC
EASY -PACK K boot
boot box see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Energy
Ener gy ow display
Adjusting the height to any position........ 125 Emergency
Emerg ency Displaying.............................................. 326
Care...................................................... 372 Fire extinguisher.................................... 375 Function/notes...................................... 327
Installing/removing................................ 126 First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 375 Engine
EBD (Electronic
(Electronic Brak Brakee for
force
ce Distr
Distribution)
ibution) Overview of the help functions................. 18 Engine number....................................... 415
Function/notes...................................... 221 Removing the warning triangle............... 374 Starting (emergency operation mode).... 168
ECO
EC O Assist Safety vest............................................. 374 Starting (Remote Online)........................ 169
Function/notes.............................. 177, 180 Setting up the warning triangle............... 375
Engine data
ECO
EC O display Emergency
Emerg ency braking
braking...................................... 214 Displaying.............................................. 185
Function................................................ 176 Emergency
Emerg ency braking
braking Engine electronics
electronics
ECO
EC O star
start/st
t/stopop function see BAS (Brake Assist System) Notes..................................................... 412
Switching o /on.................................... 176 Engine number.............................................
number 415
 Index 531

Engine oil Exter

Exterior
ior lighting Fragr
agrance
ance
Additives................................................ 423 Care...................................................... 370 see Fragrance system
Capacity........................................ 423, 424 Exter
Exterior
ior lighting Fragr
Fr agrance
ance system
system
Checking the oil level using the oil see Lights Inserting/removing the acon................ 154
dipstick.................................................. 362 Setting................................................... 153
Checking the oil level using the on- F
board computer..................................... 363 Free
Fr ee so ware
ware................................................. 42
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.......... 423, 424 Fatigue detection
detection Freq
Fr equencies
uencies
Quality........................................... 423, 424 see ATTENTION ASSIST Mobile phone......................................... 413
Topping up............................................. 364 Fir
iree extinguisher
extinguisher.......................................... 375 Two-way radio........................................ 413
ERA-GL
ERA -GLON
ONASS
ASS tes
testt mode Firs
irst-aid
t-aid kit (so sided)
sided)................................. 375 Front
Fr ont airbag (driv
(driverer,, front
front passenger)
passenger).............. 50
Starting/ending..................................... 350 Flacon Front
Fr ont passenger
passenger seat
Error
Err or message Inserting/removing................................ 154 see Seat
see Display message Flat towing
towing Fuel
ESC (Electronic
(Electronic Stability
Stability Control)
Control) see Tow-bar system Additives................................................ 419
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Flat tyre Diesel.................................................... 420
MOExtended tyres................................. 376 E10........................................................ 418
ESP® Fuel reserve........................................... 421
Crosswind Assist.................................... 220 Notes..................................................... 376
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 378 Low outside temperatures...................... 420
Trailer stabilisation................................. 220 Petrol..................................................... 418
® Wheel change........................................ 405
ESP (Electr
(Electronic
onic Stability
Stability Progr
Program)am) Quality (diesel)....................................... 420
Activating/deactivating.......................... 220 Floor mats
mats................................................... 132 Quality (petrol)....................................... 418
Function/notes...................................... 219 Fog light (enhanced).....................................
(enhanced) 138 Refuelling............................................... 190
EU type approval
approval number.............................
number 415 Foil cover
covering
ing Sulphur content..................................... 418
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 216 Tank content.......................................... 421
532 Index

Fuel consumption
consumption indicator
indicator Glide mode..................................................
mode 189 Operating the memory function.............. 117
Calling up.............................................. 186 Glovee box
Glov Setting the position (on-board com-
Function seat Air vent.................................................. 163 puter).................................................... 287
see Door control panel Switching on/o .................................... 289
Gross
Gr oss mass..................................................
mass 415
Fuses Headlampp ashing
Headlam ashing........................................ 136
Before replacing a fuse.......................... 392 H Headlamps
Headlam ps
Fuse assignment diagram....................... 392 Handbrake
Handbrake see Automatic driving lights
Fuse box in the boot............................... 394 see Electric parking brake Heating
Fuse box in the engine compartment...... 393 see Climate control
Fuse box in the front passenger foot- Handling char
charact
acter
eris
istics
tics (unusual)
(unusual)................ 395
well........................................................ 394 HANDS-FREE ACCESS
ACCESS................................... 89 Help call
Fuse box on the dashboard.................... 394 see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Hazardd war
Hazar warning
ning lights...................................
lights 136
Notes..................................................... 392 High beam
Head res
restr
traint
aint Activating/deactivating.......................... 136
G Front (adjusting mechanically)................ 108
Rear (adjusting)...................................... 109 High beam
Garag
Gar agee door opener Rear (removing/ tting)........................... 109 see Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Clearing the memory.............................. 212 see Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Head-up display
Garag
Gar agee door openers Adjusting brightness (on-board com- High-pressur
High-pr essuree cleaner (care)
(care)........................ 368
Opening/closing the door...................... 212 puter).................................................... 287 High-volt
High-voltag
agee battery
battery
Programming buttons............................. 210 Adjusting display elements (on-board Charge level display............................... 208
Resolving problems................................ 212 computer).............................................. 287 Charging cable control panel.................. 201
Synchronising the rolling code................ 211 Care...................................................... 372 Charging duration.................................. 428
Gearshi
Gear shi recommendation
ecommendation........................... 189 Function................................................ 287 Connection types................................... 428
Genuine parts
par ts................................................ 24 Menu (on-board computer)..................... 287
 Index 533

Ending the charging process (alternat- Hybrid system

Hybrid system Indicator lamp
Indicator
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 207 Con guring settings via the multime- see Warning/indicator lamp
Energy ow display................................. 326 dia system............................................. 326 Individual driv
drivee progr
programam
General notes on charging..................... 196 Manual switch-o ................................... 165 Con guring............................................ 185
Notes on charging (charging station, Hybrid
Hybr id system
system Selecting............................................... 184
mode 3)................................................. 199 see Battery operation
Notes on charging (mains socket, Inspection
see Electric drive see ASSYST PLUS
mode 2)................................................. 198
Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... 199 I Instr
Ins trument
ument cluster
cluster
Range.................................................... 428 Function/notes.............................. 281, 282
Setting the maximum possible charg- i-Size child
child seat securing
securing system
system
Fitting...................................................... 66 Instr
Ins trument
ument display
ing current (mains socket)...................... 200 Function/notes...................................... 282
Stowing the charging cable.................... 196 Seats suitable for attaching...................... 66
Instrument cluster.................................... 12
Type....................................................... 428 Identi cation plate Overview of displays............................... 286
Voltage types......................................... 428 Engine................................................... 415 Warning/indicator lamps........................ 499
Hill Star
Startt Assist............................................
Assist 222 Vehicle.................................................. 415
Instr
Ins trument
ument display
display and on-board
on-board com-
HOLD function Ignition key puter
put er
Function/notes...................................... 221 see Key Function/notes...................................... 281
Switching on/o .................................... 222 Immediatee pre-entr
Immediat pre-entryy climate
climate control
control............. 157 Intellig
Intelligent
ent Light System
System
Home screen
screen (media display)
display) Immobiliser.................................................... 99
Immobiliser Activating/deactivating.......................... 138
Overview................................................ 313 Implied
Im plied warr
warranty
anty Active headlamps................................... 137
Hooking thethe luggag
luggagee net...............................
net 124 Vehicle..................................................... 39 Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 139
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 140
In-Car O ce Bad weather light................................... 138
Features................................................ 344 City lighting............................................ 138
534 Index

Cornering light....................................... 137 ISOFIX child

child seat securing
securing system
system KEYLESS-GO
Fog light (enhanced).............................. 138 Fitting...................................................... 66 Deactivating a function............................ 79
Motorway mode..................................... 138 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 83
Overview................................................ 137 J Problem................................................... 84
Intellig
Intelligent
ent operating-mode
operating-mode str strat
ategy
egy Jack Unlocking setting..................................... 79
see Route-based operating-mode strategy Declaration of conformity......................... 34 Kickdo
Kickdown
wn
Inter
Interior
ior lighting Storage location..................................... 404 Using..................................................... 189
Adjusting............................................... 142 Jump-st
Jum p-star
artt connection Knee airbag....................................................
airbag 50
Ambient lighting..................................... 143 General notes........................................ 383
Reading lamp......................................... 142 L
Switch-o delay time.............................. 143 K Lamp
Inter
Interior
ior prot
protection
ection Key see Interior lighting
Function................................................ 101 Acoustic locking veri cation signal........... 79 Lampp (instr
Lam (instrument
ument display)
display)
Priming/deactivating............................. 102 Activating/deactivating pre-entry cli- see Warning/indicator lamp
Inter
Interne
nett radio
radio mate control.......................................... 155
Battery..................................................... 80 Lane detection
detection (automatic)
(automatic)
see TuneIn see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Ionisation Deactivating a function............................ 79
Emergency key......................................... 80 Lane Keeping
Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi- see Active Lane Keeping Assist
media system)....................................... 153 Energy consumption................................ 79
Function overview.................................... 78 Language
iPhone® Key ring attachment................................. 80 Notes..................................................... 325
see Smartphone integration Problem................................................... 81 Setting................................................... 325
ISOFIX child
child seat anchor
anchor Unlocking setting..................................... 79 Level
Level control
control system
system
Seats suitable for attaching...................... 65 see AIR BODY CONTROL
 Index 535

Light adjustment
adjustment Motorway mode..................................... 138 Switching o /deactivating..................... 230
Low beam (driving abroad)..................... 134 Parking lights......................................... 134 Switching on/activating......................... 230
Light switch Rear fog light......................................... 134 System limits......................................... 225
Overview................................................ 134 Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 134 Limiting speed
Setting low beam................................... 142 see Limiter
Lighting Setting the exterior lighting switch-o
see Interior lighting delay time.............................................. 142 LINGUA
LIN GUATR
TRONIC
ONIC
see Lights Standing lights....................................... 134 Acoustic aids......................................... 292
Lights Switching the Intelligent Light System Function................................................ 316
Active headlamps................................... 137 on/o ................................................... 138 Improving voice quality........................... 293
Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 139 Switching the surround lighting on/o ... 142 Language setting.................................... 291
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 140 Turn signal indicator............................... 136 Media player voice commands............... 303
Automatic driving lights.......................... 135 Message voice commands..................... 306
Limiter
Limiter Multifunction steering wheel (opera-
Bad weather light................................... 138 Activating............................................... 226
City lighting............................................ 138 tion)....................................................... 290
Buttons.................................................. 226 Navigation voice commands................... 295
Combination switch............................... 136 Calling up a speed................................. 226
Cornering light....................................... 137 Notes on the voice commands............... 293
Deactivating........................................... 226 Online voice control............................... 293
Driving abroad (low beam light adjust- Function................................................ 225
ment)..................................................... 134 Operable functions................................. 291
Maximum design speed.......................... 183 Operating safety.................................... 290
Fog light (enhanced).............................. 138 Passive mode......................................... 225
Hazard warning lights............................. 136 Radio voice commands.......................... 302
Permanent setting.................................. 228 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 292
Headlamp ashing................................. 136 Requirements........................................ 226
High beam............................................. 136 Starting................................................. 317
Selecting............................................... 226 Switch voice commands......................... 294
Intelligent Light System.......................... 137 Setting a speed...................................... 226
Light switch........................................... 134 Telephone voice controls........................ 300
Storing a speed.............................. 226, 230 Text message voice commands.............. 306
Low beam.............................................. 134
536 Index

TV voice commands............................... 302 Setting................................................... 142 Manoeuvring assistant

Manoeuvring assistant
Vehicle voice commands........................ 307 Lubr
ubricant
icant additives
additives Activating/deactivating.......................... 270
Voice prompting..................................... 290 see Additives Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing brak
brakee function.........................
function 269
Livee Tr
Liv Traa c Inf
Infor
ormation
mation Lugg
uggage
age Map
Switching the tra c information dis- Luggage net........................................... 124 Displaying online map contents.............. 332
play on................................................... 332 Securing................................................ 118 Displaying weather information.............. 332
Loading Lumbar support Moving................................................... 331
Notes..................................................... 118 see Lumbar support (4-way) Selecting the map orientation................ 331
Roof luggage rack.................................. 127 Setting the map scale............................ 331
Tie-down eyes........................................ 124 Lumbar support
suppor t (4-way)
(4-way)............................... 107 Switching motorway information
Loading guidelines.......................................
guidelines 118 on/o ................................................... 331
M
Loads Massagee progr
Massag programmes
ammes
Maintenance
Maintenance Overview................................................ 111
Fixing..................................................... 118 see ASSYST PLUS Resetting the settings............................ 111
Locking/unloc
Loc king/unlocking
king Malfunction Selecting the front seats........................ 111
Additional door lock................................. 81 Restraint system...................................... 44
Emergency key......................................... 85 Maximum design speed................................
speed 183
KEYLESS-GO............................................ 83 Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing aid Maximum design speed
Switching the automatic locking fea- see Manoeuvring assistance see Limiter
ture on/o .............................................. 84 Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing Assist Maximum permissible
permissible gross
gross vehicle
vehicle weight
weight... 415
Unlocking/opening the doors from see Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
the inside................................................. 82 MBUX Inter
Interior
ior Assistant
Assistant
Manoeuvring
Manoeuvr ing assistance
assistance Overview................................................ 317
Low
Lo w beam Cross Tra c Alert.................................. 269 Switching the reading light on/o
Activating/deactivating.......................... 134 Drive Away Assist................................... 268 (contactless).......................................... 319
Light adjustment (driving abroad)........... 134 Manoeuvring brake function................... 269
 Index 537

Switching the search light on/o Media mode Information............................................ 339

(contactless).......................................... 319 Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip- Making a call via the overhead control
MBUX multimedia system system ment...................................................... 353 panel..................................................... 338
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 216 Medical aids...................................................
aids 38 Transferred data..................................... 341
Con guring drive program I.................... 185 Memoryy function
Memor Mercedes
Mer cedes me connect
Home screen......................................... 313 Function................................................ 116 Accident and Breakdown Management... 343
Notes..................................................... 311 Head-up display..................................... 117 Information............................................ 342
Operating the touchscreen..................... 314 Operating.............................................. 117 Transferred data..................................... 344
Overview................................................ 311 Outside mirrors...................................... 117 Mercedes-
Mer cedes-AMG
AMG vehicles
vehicles
Restoring (factory settings).................... 325 Seat....................................................... 117 Notes..................................................... 164
Setting collision detection (parked Steering wheel....................................... 117
vehicle).................................................. 214 Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz emerg
emergency ency call systsystemem
Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 235 Menu (on-board
(on-board comput
computer) er) Automatic emergency call...................... 347
Setting the air distribution...................... 152 Head-up display..................................... 287 Information............................................ 347
Setting the fragrance system.................. 153 Overview................................................ 283 Information about data transfer.............. 349
Setting the stationary heater/ventila- Mercedes
Mer cedes me app Manual emergency call.......................... 348
tion........................................................ 159 Information............................................ 344 Overview................................................ 347
Standby mode function.......................... 215 Self-diagnosis........................................ 349
Mercedes
Mer cedes me calls Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test
Switching ionisation on/o .................... 153 Arranging a service appointment............ 340 mode..................................................... 350
MBUX multimedia system system Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer
see Display (MBUX multimedia system) centre.................................................... 339 Mercedes-Benz
Mer cedes-Benz ser service
vice centre
see MBUX Interior Assistant Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer see Quali ed specialist workshop
Media Centre a er automatic accident or Messagee (instr
Messag (instrument
ument display)
display)
Overview of the functions and symbols... 351 breakdown detection............................. 340 see Display message
Consenting to data transfer.................... 341 Messagee memory.........................................
Messag memory 433
538 Index

Messages
Messages Multimedia system
system see Child seat
Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 306 see MBUX multimedia system see Pets in the vehicle
Mirrors
Mirr ors see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
see Outside mirrors N pant protection)
Mobile phone Navig
vigation
ation see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
Frequencies........................................... 413 Notes..................................................... 327 see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Notes on wireless charging.................... 130 Overview................................................ 328 occupant protection plus)
Transmission output (maximum)............. 413 Showing/hiding the menu...................... 327 see Restraint system
Switching on.......................................... 327 see Seat belt
Mobile phone Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 295
see Smartphone integration Oil
see Telephone Navig
Na vigation
ation see Engine oil
see Destination entry On-board comput
On-board computerer
Model type see Map
see Vehicle identi cation plate Displaying the service due date.............. 359
see Route Head-up display menu............................ 287
MOExtended
MOExt ended tyres
tyres........................................ 376 Neutr
eutral
al Instrument display................................. 286
Motorwa
Mot orwayy mode...........................................
mode 138 Engaging................................................ 187 Menu overview....................................... 283
Moving
Mo ving away Noise Operating.............................................. 283
see Driving tips Wheels and tyres................................... 395 On-boardd diagnostics
On-boar diagnostics interf
interface
ace
MULTIBEAM
MUL TIBEAM LED..........................................
LED 137 Wheels/tyres......................................... 395 see Diagnostics connection
Multifunction steer
steering
ing wheel On-boardd electrical
On-boar electrical system
system batter
batteryy (12 V)
Operation.............................................. 290 O Charging................................................ 385
Overview of buttons............................... 283 Occupant safety
safety Replacing............................................... 386
see Airbag Starting assistance................................ 385
Multifunction steer
steering
ing wheel
see Steering wheel see Automatic co-driver airbag shuto
 Index 539

On-board electronics
On-board electronics Declaration of conformity (electro- Owner's Manual (digital)
(digital)........................... 20, 21
Engine electronics................................. 412 magnetic compatibility)............................ 28
Notes..................................................... 412 Declaration of conformity (jack)............... 34 P
Two-way radios...................................... 412 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit)...... 35 Paint (cleaning instr
instructions)
uctions)......................... 368
Online services
ser vices Declaration of conformity (wireless
vehicle components)................................ 28 Paint code...................................................
code 415
Data storage............................................ 41
Information.............................................. 25 Panel heating
Online services
ser vices Setting................................................... 113
see In-Car O ce Operating
Oper ating system
system
see On-board computer Panor
anorama
ama sliding sunroof
sunroof
Open-source
Open-sour ce so ware
ware.................................... 42 see Sliding sunroof
Optimised
Op timised acceleration
acceleration
Opening the
the boot
boot lid using your your ffoot
oot Activating............................................... 171 Par
arkk position
HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 89 Engaging................................................ 187
Output
Operating
Oper ating uids see Power meter Selecting automatically.......................... 187
AdBlue®................................................. 422 Par
arking
king
Additives (fuel)....................................... 419 Outside mirrors
mirrors
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 147 see Electric parking brake
Brake uid............................................. 425
Coolant (engine).................................... 425 Automatic mirror folding function........... 149 Par
arking
king aid
Engine oil............................................... 423 Folding in/out........................................ 146 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Fuel (diesel)........................................... 420 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Par
arking
king Assist
Assist PPARK
ARKTR TRONIC
ONIC
Fuel (petrol)........................................... 418 Parking position..................................... 148 Activating............................................... 263
Notes..................................................... 417 Setting................................................... 146 Adjusting warning tones......................... 264
Windscreen washer uid........................ 426 Over
Overhead
head control
control panel Deactivating........................................... 263
Operating
Oper ating safety
safety Overview.................................................. 14 Function................................................ 260
48 V on-board electrical system............... 25 Owner's Manual System limitations.................................. 260
Vehicle equipment................................... 25
540 Index

Par
arking
king assistance
assistance systems
systems Per
eriod
iod out of use Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 202
see Active Parking Assist Activating/deactivating standby mode... 216 Manual switch-o of the hybrid system... 165
Par
arking
king brake
brake Standby mode function.......................... 215 Notes on charging the high-voltage
see Electric parking brake Per
ermissible
missible axle load....................................
load 415 battery................................................... 196
Notes on plug-in hybrid operation........... 164
Par
arking
king lights...............................................
lights 134 Per
ermissible
missible towing
towing methods
methods......................... 387 Power availability display........................ 285
Par
arking
king option
option Per
ermitt
mitted
ed towing
towing methods
methods............................ 387 Power meter.......................................... 285
Selecting............................................... 332 Petr
Pe trol
ol........................................................... 418 Route-based operating-mode strategy.... 182
Par
arking
king position Setting the maximum possible charg-
Pets
Pe ts in the
the vehicle
vehicle.......................................... 77
Outside mirrors...................................... 148 ing current............................................. 200
Storing the position of the passenger Plastic
Plas tic trim
trim (Care)
(Care)........................................ 372 Starting the charging process................. 204
outside mirror using reverse gear........... 148 Plug-in hybr
hybrid id operation
operation Stowing the charging cable.................... 196
Par
arking
king service
ser vice Charging cable control panel.................. 201 Power availability
availability display
Selecting parking options....................... 332 Charging the high-voltage battery at a Function/notes...................................... 285
charging station (mode 3)...................... 199
Par
arking
king up...................................................
up 215 Power
Pow er closing function
Charging the high-voltage battery at a
Door........................................................ 85
PASSEN
ASSENGER GER AIR BAGBAG status
status display mains socket (mode 2)........................... 198
see Automatic front passenger airbag shuto Charging the high-voltage battery at a Power
Pow er display
wallbox (mode 3).................................... 199 see Power availability display
Pedes
edestrtrian
ian protection
protection
see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Con guring settings via the multime- Power
Pow er meter
meter
dia system............................................. 326 Function/notes...................................... 285
Per
erfume
fume Displaying the power meter.................... 286
see Fragrance system Power
Pow er supply
Ending the charging process (alternat- Switching on (start/stop button)............ 167
Per
erfume
fume vial ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 207
see Fragrance system Energy ow display................................. 327 Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control (immediate)
(immediate)........... 157
Haptic accelerator pedal........................ 182
 Index 541

Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control at departure
depar ture Preventativ
Prevent ativee occupant protection
protection system
system R
time see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-
Function................................................ 156 pant protection) Radar and ultrasonic
ultrasonic sensors
Setting................................................... 156 Damage................................................. 216
see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control for for departure
depar ture occupant protection plus) Radio
time Overview of the functions and symbols... 355
Proo le
Pr Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 302
Activating/deactivating.......................... 157 Creating a new pro le............................ 321
Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control using the the key Notes..................................................... 320 Rain closing function
Function................................................ 155 Selecting pro le options......................... 321 Side windows........................................... 92
Setting................................................... 155 Progr
Pr ogramme
amme Rain-closing feature
feature
Pre-entr
Pr e-entryy climate
climate control
control via the the key see DYNAMIC SELECT Sliding sunroof......................................... 97
Activating/deactivating.......................... 155 Protection
Protection agains
againstt collision REACH
REAC H regulation
regulation........................................... 38
PRE-S AFE® (anticipat
PRE-SAFE (anticipator oryy occupant protection)
protection) see Manoeuvring brake function Reading lamp
Function.................................................. 56 Protection
Prot ection of the
the envir
environment
onment see Interior lighting
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 56 Notes....................................................... 23 Reading light
Reversing measures................................. 57 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles............... 23 Switching on/o (contactless)............... 319
AFE® Im
PRE-SAFE
PRE-S Impulse
pulse Side Real wood
wood (Care)
(Care).......................................... 372
Activation................................................ 44 Q
Rear door (child
(child safety
safety lock)
lock)........................... 75
Function.................................................. 57 QR code
Rescue card............................................. 39 Rear fog
fog light
AFE® PL
PRE-SAFE
PRE-S PLUS
US (anticipator
(anticipatoryy occupant Switching on/o .................................... 135
protection
prot ection plus) Quali ed specialist work
workshop
shop......................... 37
Rear seat
Function.................................................. 57 see Seat
Reversing measures................................. 57
542 Index

Rear seat belt Regulat

egulator
oryy radio
radio identi cation Functionality............................................ 43
Status display.......................................... 49 Indonesia............................................... 414 Malfunction............................................. 44
Rear seat belt status
status display...........................
display 49 Small components................................. 414 Protection................................................ 43
Remot
emotee control
control (stationar
(stationaryy heater/v
heater/venti- enti- Reduced protection.................................. 43
Rear window Self-test................................................... 43
Roller sunblind......................................... 99 lation)
Displays................................................. 160 Warning lamp........................................... 43
Rear window
window heater
heater...................................... 150 Problems............................................... 162 Rever
erse
se gear
gear
Rear
ear-vie
-vieww mirror
mirror Replacing the battery............................. 161 Engaging................................................ 187
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)................. 147 Setting................................................... 159 Rever
Rev ersing
sing camera
Rear
ear-vie
-vieww mirror
mirror Remot
emotee Online Care...................................................... 370
see Outside mirrors Charging the starter battery................... 169 Function................................................ 253
Recuper
ecuperation
ation Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 169 Switching automatic operation on/o
Function................................................ 179 Starting the vehicle................................ 169 (360° Camera)...................................... 260
Setting................................................... 179 Rescue card...................................................
card 39 Rims (care)
(care).................................................. 370
Recy
ecycling
cling Reserve Roll away
away protection
protection
see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Fuel....................................................... 421 see HOLD function
Reducing agent
agent Rese
esett function (MBUX multimedia system) system).... 325 Roller sunblind
see AdBlue® Residual heat...............................................
heat 153 Rear window............................................ 99
Refuelling Side windows........................................... 98
Rest
estor
oring
ing (fact
(factororyy settings)
settings) Sliding sunroof......................................... 94
Refuelling the vehicle............................. 190 see Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)
Registr
egistration
ation Roof lining (care)
(care).......................................... 372
Restr
estraint
aint system
system
Vehicle..................................................... 37 Basic instructions for children.................. 58 Roof load.....................................................
load 428
Function in an accident............................ 44
 Index 543

Roof luggag
luggagee rack
rack Search light
Search Protection................................................ 45
Loading.................................................. 127 Switching on/o (contactless)............... 319 Rear seat belt status display..................... 49
Securing................................................ 127 Seat Reduced protection.................................. 46
Route 4-way lumbar support............................ 107 Releasing................................................. 49
Calculating............................................. 330 adjusting (electrically)............................ 107 Seat belt adjustment (function)................ 49
Selecting options................................... 330 Adjusting (manually and electrically)....... 104 Warning lamp........................................... 49
Rout
outee guidance with
with augmented
augmented reality reality Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 106 Seat belt adjustment
adjustment
Activating............................................... 330 Automatic adjustment............................ 110 Activating/deactivating............................ 49
Displaying street names and house Con guring settings............................... 109 Function.................................................. 49
numbers................................................ 330 Correct driver's seat position................. 103 Seat belt tensioners
tensioners
Folding back the backrest (rear)............. 123 Activation................................................ 44
Rout
oute-based
e-based operating-mode
operating-mode str strat
ategy
egy Folding the backrest forwards (rear)....... 121
Function/notes...................................... 182 Locking the backrest (rear).................... 123 Seat belt war
warning
ning
Rout
oute-based
e-based speed adaptation
adaptation Massage programme overview............... 111 see Seat belt
Function................................................ 233 Operating the memory function.............. 117 Seat cover
cover (Care)
(Care)......................................... 372
Setting................................................... 235 Panel heating......................................... 113 Seat heating
Run- at char
haract
acter
eristics
istics Resetting the settings............................ 111 Activating/deactivating.......................... 112
MOExtended tyres................................. 376 Setting options......................................... 16
Seat ventilation
ventilation
Workout programme overview................ 111
Running-in notes
notes.......................................... 170 Switching on/o .................................... 113
Seat belt
Selecting a gear
gear
S Activating/deactivating seat belt
see Changing gears
adjustment.............................................. 49
Safety systems
Safety systems Adjusting the height................................. 48 Selector
Selector lever
lever
see Driving safety system Care...................................................... 372 see DIRECT SELECT lever
Safety
Safety vest
vest................................................... 374 Fastening................................................. 48
544 Index

Self-test
Self-test Child safety lock in the rear...................... 77 Socket (12 V)
Socket
Automatic front passenger airbag shut Closing using the key............................... 93 Front centre console.............................. 129
o ............................................................ 54 Convenience closing................................ 93 Sockett (230 V)
Socke
Sensorss (care)
Sensor (care)............................................. 370 Convenience opening............................... 93 Rear....................................................... 129
Opening with the key................................ 93
Service
Ser vice Opening/closing...................................... 91 So ware
ware update
see ASSYST PLUS Problem................................................... 94 System updates..................................... 322
Service
Ser vice centre Rain closing function................................ 92 Sound
see Quali ed specialist workshop Roller sunblind......................................... 98 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 56
Service
Ser vice interv
intervalal display Sliding sunroof
sunroof Sound menu
see ASSYST PLUS Automatic functions................................. 97 Functions overview................................ 357
Setting
Se tting a speed............................................
speed 183 Closing.................................................... 94 Sparee wheel
Spar
Closing using the key............................... 93 see Emergency spare wheel
Setting
Se tting a speed
Opening................................................... 94
see Cruise control Specialistt work
Specialis workshop
shop
Opening with the key................................ 93
Setting
Se tting the
the map scale Problem................................................... 98 see Quali ed specialist workshop
see Map Rain-closing feature................................. 97 Speci c absorp
absorptiontion rate
rate................................. 28
Shi paddles Smartphone
Smar tphone Speed limit for
for winter
winter tyres
tyres
see Steering wheel gearshi paddles see Smartphone integration Setting................................................... 228
Shi ing gears see Telephone Standb
St andbyy mode
Gearshi recommendation..................... 189 Smartphone
Smar tphone integr
integration
ation Activating/deactivating.......................... 216
Side airbag.....................................................
airbag 50 Overview................................................ 346 Function................................................ 215
Side windows Snow
Sno w chains
chains................................................ 395 Standing
St anding lights.............................................
lights 134
Automatic function................................... 92
 Index 545

Star
art-o
t-o assist STEER CONTR
CONTROL OL Glove compartment............................... 121
see Optimised acceleration Function/notes...................................... 221 Str
tree
eett names and house numbers
Star
St art/st
t/stop
op button
button Steer
Steering
ing wheel Displaying.............................................. 330
Parking the vehicle................................. 208 Adjusting (electrically)............................ 114 Sugges
Sugg estions
tions
Starting the vehicle................................ 168 Adjusting (manually)............................... 113 Con guring............................................ 321
Switching on the power supply/vehicle.. 167 Buttons.................................................. 283
Care...................................................... 372 Sulphur content
content........................................... 418
Star
St art/st
t/stop
op function
see ECO start/stop function Operating the memory function.............. 117 Surround
Surr ound lighting
Steering wheel heater............................ 115 Switching on/o .................................... 142
Start
St arter
er battery
battery
Charging (Remote Online)...................... 169 Steer
Steering
ing wheel gearearshi
shi paddles
paddles.................. 188 Surround
Surr ound View
View
Steer
Steering
ing wheel heater
heater see 360° Camera
Star
St arting
ting
see Vehicle Switching on/o .................................... 115 Suspension
Steer
Steering-wheel
ing-wheel buttons
buttons Adjusting the chassis level (AIR BODY
Star
St arting
ting assistance
assistance CONTROL)............................................. 251
see Jump-start connection Overview................................................ 290
Stow
Stowag
agee areas
areas Suspension
Star
St arting-o
ting-o aid see AIR BODY CONTROL
see Hill Start Assist see Loading
see Stowage space SVHC (substances
(substances of ver veryy high concern)
concern)........ 38
Stationar
St ationaryy heater/v
heater/ventilation
entilation
Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 158 Stow
Stowag
agee compar
compartments
tments Switch-o
Switc h-o dela
delayy time
Displays (remote control)....................... 160 see Loading Exterior.................................................. 142
Problems (remote control)...................... 162 see Stowage space Interior................................................... 143
Replacing the battery (remote control)... 161 Stow
Stowag
agee space Synchr
Sync hronisation
onisation function
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)......... 159 Armrest................................................. 121 Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 152
Setting (remote control)......................... 159 Centre console...................................... 121 Activating/deactivating (MBUX multi-
Door...................................................... 121 media system)....................................... 153
546 Index

System settings
System settings Regulatory radio identi cation (Indo- Tem
emper
perature
ature
Overview of the system settings menu.... 321 nesia).................................................... 414 Setting the vehicle interior tempera-
Reset function (MBUX multimedia sys- Regulatory radio identi cation of ture....................................................... 150
tem)....................................................... 325 small components.................................. 414 Text
Text messages
messages
System
System settings
settings Tongue weight........................................ 431 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 306
see Language Towing capacity (trailer operation).......... 431
Themes
Telephone Fastening............................................... 321
T Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey).... 338
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Through-loading
Thr ough-loading feature
feature
Tailpipes (care)
(care)............................................. 370 see Seat
Simple Pairing)....................................... 338
Tak
ake-bac
e-backk of end-of-life
end-of-life vehicles
vehicles Functions in the telephone menu............ 338 Tie-do
ie-down
wn eyes
eyes.............................................. 124
Protection of the environment.................. 23 Notes..................................................... 335 TIREFIT kit
Tank content
content Notes on wireless charging (mobile Declaration of conformity......................... 35
AdBlue®................................................. 422 phone)................................................... 130 Storage location..................................... 377
Fuel....................................................... 421 Operating modes................................... 337 Using..................................................... 378
Reserve (fuel)......................................... 421 Telephone menu overview...................... 337
To switch
switch on the the ignition
Tec
echnical
hnical data Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 300
see Vehicle
Axle load (trailer operation).................... 432 Wireless charging (mobile phone)........... 132
Toll system
system
Component-speci c information............ 414 Telephon
elephonyy operating
operating modes
Windscreen............................................ 149
Fastening points (trailer hitch)................ 429 Bluetooth® Telephony............................. 337
Information............................................ 412 Making calls in the vehicle..................... 337 Tongue weight
weight.............................................. 431
Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch)........ 429 Tele
elevision
vision Tool
Notes (trailer hitch)................................ 429 see TV see Vehicle tool kit
Overhang dimension (trailer hitch).......... 430 Top Tether
Tether...................................................... 69
 Index 547

Topping up Tra c Sign Assist Trailer operation

operation
Topping up AdBlue®............................... 194 Function/notes...................................... 243 Active Blind Spot Assist.......................... 246
Touc
ouchh Control
Control Setting................................................... 244 Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 247
On-board computer................................ 283 System limits......................................... 243 Bicycle rack........................................... 278
Operating.............................................. 314 Trailer
Tr ailer hitch Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 275
Axle load................................................ 432 Extending/retracting the ball neck......... 273
Touc
ouchpad
hpad Extending/retracting the ball neck
Operating.............................................. 314 Bicycle rack........................................... 278
Care...................................................... 370 (MBUX multimedia system).................... 275
Touc
ouchscr
hscreen
een Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 275 Notes..................................................... 272
Operating.............................................. 314 Extending/retracting the ball neck......... 273 Socket................................................... 275
Tow-awa
Tow -awayy protection
protection Extending/retracting the ball neck Trailer
Tr ailer stabilisation
stabilisation
Function................................................ 100 (MBUX multimedia system).................... 275 Function/notes...................................... 220
Priming/deactivating............................. 101 Fastening points.................................... 429 Transmission
Tr ansmission
Tow-bar
Tow -bar system
system............................................ 280 General notes........................................ 429 Engaging neutral.................................... 187
Mounting dimensions............................. 429
Tow-st
Tow -star
arting
ting................................................. 392 Notes..................................................... 272 Transmission
Tr ansmission position display.......................
display 186
Towing
To wing away.................................................
away 388 Overhang dimension.............................. 430 Transpor
Tr ansporting
ting
Towing
To wing eye Socket................................................... 275 Vehicle.................................................. 390
Fitting.................................................... 391 Tongue weight........................................ 431 Trim
Tr im element (Care)
(Care)...................................... 372
Storage location..................................... 391 Towing capacity..................................... 431
TuneIn
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist...................... 270
Towing
To wing methods
methods........................................... 387 Calling up.............................................. 357
Trailer
Tr ailer Manoeuvring
Manoeuvring Assist
Traa c inf
Tr infor
ormation
mation Tur
urnn signal indicator
indicator
Function................................................ 270
Switching on the display......................... 332 Activating/deactivating.......................... 136
Using..................................................... 271
548 Index

TV Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree loss war warning
ning system
system MOExtended tyres................................. 376
Information............................................ 354 Function................................................ 399 Noise..................................................... 395
Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 302 Restarting.............................................. 400 Notes on tting...................................... 400
Two-wa
o-wayy radios
radios Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree monitor
monitoring ing syst
systemem Removing............................................... 408
Frequencies........................................... 413 Checking the tyre pressures................... 398 Replacing....................................... 400, 405
Notes on installation.............................. 412 Checking the tyre temperature............... 398 Replacing the wheel trim........................ 405
Transmission output (maximum)............. 413 Function................................................ 398 Restarting the tyre pressure loss
Restarting.............................................. 399 warning system...................................... 400
Type approv
approval
al number (EU)...........................
(EU) 415 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor-
Tyr
yree in ation com
compr pressor
essor Tyr
yree pressur
pressuree table
table....................................... 397 ing system............................................. 399
see TIREFIT kit Tyr
yree tem
temper
perature
ature Selection............................................... 400
Tyr
yree pressure
pressure Checking (tyre pressure monitoring Snow chains.......................................... 395
Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system).................................................. 398 Storing................................................... 404
system).................................................. 398 Tyre pressure monitoring system TIREFIT kit.............................................. 378
Notes..................................................... 396 (function)............................................... 398 Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 396
Restarting the tyre pressure loss Tyr
yree tread
tread.................................................... 395 Tyre pressure loss warning system
warning system...................................... 400 (function)............................................... 399
Tyr
yre-c
e-chang
hangee tool
tool kit
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor- Tyre pressure monitoring system
Overview................................................ 404
ing system............................................. 399 (function)............................................... 398
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 378 Tyr
yres
es Tyre pressure table................................. 397
Tyre pressure loss warning system Checking............................................... 395 Unusual handling characteristics............ 395
(function)............................................... 399 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pres-
Tyre pressure monitoring system sure monitoring system)......................... 398 U
(function)............................................... 398 Fitting.................................................... 408
Flat tyre................................................. 376 Unloc
nlocking
king
Tyre pressure table................................. 397 see Locking/unlocking
Interchanging......................................... 403
 Index 549

Updat
pdates
es Quali ed specialist workshop................... 37 Wheelbase..................................... 427, 428
Important system updates...................... 322 Raising................................................... 406 Vehicle dimensions..............................
dimensions 427, 428
USB port REACH regulation.................................... 38
Registration............................................. 37 Vehicle emergency
emergency start start............................... 392
Front stowage compartment.................. 121
Rear....................................................... 130 Standby mode function.......................... 215 Vehicle identi cation number
Starting (emergency operation mode).... 168 see VIN
V Starting (Remote Online)........................ 169 Vehicle identi cation plate
Starting (start/stop button)................... 168 EU type approval number....................... 415
Vehicle SVHC (substances of very high concern).. 38
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 216 Maximum gross vehicle weight............... 415
Switching o (start/stop button)............ 208 Paint code............................................. 415
Additional door lock................................. 81 Switching on (start/stop button)............ 167
Collision detection (parked vehicle)........ 214 Permissible axle load.............................. 415
Towing................................................... 280 VIN........................................................ 415
Correct use.............................................. 37 Ventilating (convenience opening)............ 93
Data acquisition....................................... 39 Vehicle inter
interior
ior
Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC)........ 307
Data storage............................................ 39 Cooling or heating (Remote Online)........ 169
Diagnostics connection............................ 35 Vehicle battery
battery
Vehicle key
Equipment............................................... 25 see On-board electrical system battery (12 V)
see Key
Implied warranty...................................... 39 Vehicle camera
Vehicle maintenance
maintenance
Locking (automatically)............................ 84 Information............................................ 216
see ASSYST PLUS
Locking/unlocking (emergency key)......... 85 Vehicle data
Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 82 Vehicle sensors
Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 185
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)............ 83 Information............................................ 216
Notes..................................................... 427
Lowering................................................ 409 Roof load............................................... 428 Vehicle socket
Medical aids............................................ 38 Vehicle height................................ 427, 428 Care...................................................... 370
Parking up............................................. 215 Vehicle length................................ 427, 428 Indicator lamps...................................... 202
QR code rescue card............................... 39 Vehicle width................................. 427, 428
550 Index

Vehicle tool
tool kit W å ESP® OFF warning lamp................ 513
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 377
Towing eye............................................. 391 War
arning
ning lamp ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes........... 512
see Warning/indicator lamp ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up......... 512
Ventilating
Convenience opening............................... 93 War
arning
ning system
system 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights
see ATA (anti-the alarm system)
Ventilation up.......................................................... 507
see Climate control War
arning
ning triangle
triangle
Removing............................................... 374 Ù Power steering warning lamp
Vents Setting up.............................................. 375 (red)...................................................... 503
see Air vents
War
arning/indicat
ning/indicator or lamp _ Reduced warning lamp power....... 502
VIN ! ABS warning lamp......................... 511 6 Restraint system warning lamp...... 501
Identi cation plate................................. 415
Seat....................................................... 415 Ó Active Brake Assist warning lamp.. 510 ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes...... 502
Windscreen............................................ 415 J Brake system warning lamp (red)... 509 ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.... 502
Vision J Brake system warning lamp (yel- ä Suspension warning lamp (yel-
Demisting windows................................ 153 low)....................................................... 508 low)....................................................... 511
Windscreen heater................................. 155
ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red)........... 505 Ú System error warning lamp........... 503
Voice control
control system
system
see LINGUATRONIC ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)....... 506 ! The electric parking brake (yel-
Voice dialogue system
system ! Electric parking brake indicator low) indicator lamp................................. 508
see LINGUATRONIC lamp (red).............................................. 508 ï Trailer tow hitch warning lamp....... 504
# Electrical fault warning lamp h Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
...................................................... 503, 507 tem warning lamp ashes....................... 514
; Engine diagnosis warning lamp...... 507
 Index 551

h Tyre pressure monitoring sys- Wheel change

change Tyre pressure (Notes)............................. 396
tem warning lamp lights up.................... 514 see Emergency spare wheel Tyre pressure loss warning system
Wheel rotation
rotation............................................. 403 (function)............................................... 399
L Warning lamp for distance Tyre pressure monitoring system
warning function.................................... 510 Wheels (function)............................................... 398
Care...................................................... 370 Tyre pressure table................................. 397
Overview................................................ 499 Checking............................................... 395 Unusual handling characteristics............ 395
PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 54 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pres-
sure monitoring system)......................... 398 Wi-Fi
Warr
arranty
anty........................................................ 39 Setting................................................... 323
Fitting.................................................... 408
Washer uid Flat tyre................................................. 376 Windo
indow w airbag...............................................
airbag 50
see Windscreen washer uid Interchanging......................................... 403 Windo
indow w li er
Washing byby hand (care)
(care)................................ 368 MOExtended tyres................................. 376 see Side windows
Wat
ater
er tank
tank Noise..................................................... 395
Notes on tting...................................... 400 Windows
see Air-water duct Care...................................................... 370
Removing............................................... 408
Weat
eather
her infor
information
mation..................................... 332 Replacing....................................... 400, 405 Windows
Web browsers
browsers Replacing the hub cap............................ 405 see Side windows
Overview................................................ 345 Restarting the tyre pressure loss Windscr
indscreen
een
Wheel change
change warning system...................................... 400 Demisting.............................................. 150
Fitting a new wheel................................ 408 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor- Infrared re ective................................... 149
Lowering the vehicle.............................. 409 ing system............................................. 399 Radio waves........................................... 149
Preparation............................................ 405 Selection............................................... 400 Replacing the wiper blades..................... 144
Raising the vehicle................................. 406 Snow chains.......................................... 395
Windscr
indscreen
een
Removing a wheel.................................. 408 Storing................................................... 404
see Windscreen
Removing/ tting hub caps..................... 405 TIREFIT kit.............................................. 378
552 Index

Windscr
indscreen
een heater
heater....................................... 155 Work
orkout
out progr
program
am
Windscr
indscreen
een heater
heater Overview................................................ 111
see Windscreen heater Work
orkshop
shop
Windscr
indscreen
een washer
washer uid see Quali ed specialist workshop
Notes..................................................... 426
Windscr
indscreen
een washer
washer system
system
Topping up............................................. 366
Windscr
indscreen
een wipers
Activating/deactivating.......................... 144
Replacing the wiper blades..................... 144
Wint
inter
er operation
operation
Snow chains.......................................... 395
Wint
inter
er tyres
tyres
Setting the permanent speed limit.......... 228
Wiper blades
Care...................................................... 370
Replacing (windscreen).......................... 144
Wir
ireless
eless char
charging
ging
Function/notes...................................... 130
Mobile phone......................................... 132
Wir
ireless
eless vehicle
vehicle components
components
Declaration of conformity......................... 28
Speci c absorption rate........................... 28